INTERNATIONAL EDITION BASIC OI GRAMMAR Third Edition ER SUMAN ecli) wt V sly fm Stacy A. HagenFPaeosm cara Dear ESL/EFL colleagues, Tonce met a teacher who had recently used one of my texts in her students said to her, “Thank you for teaching me the secrets of English.” iss. At the end of the term, one of her 1 still smile when I think of that comment. Of course, we know there are no “secrets,” but I think I understand what the student meant—that it’s sometimes helpful to understand what's going on underneath the surface of a language. A second language can seem so dizzying and random. little information about its patterns can help students make sense of it and give them a foundation for language growth. ‘The first book in the Azar series was published in 1981. Tt was the blue book, Understanding and Using English Grammar, which grew out of many years of creating my own materials for my own classes. I then wrote two other texts, the red and the black, creating The Azar Grammar Series Allof the texts have undergone revisions over the years with many evolutionary changes, especially in the use of more interactive and communicative activities. But throughout this time, the original vision remains as stated in the very first book: the goal is the development of all usage skills from a grammar base by giving clear grammar information and employing a variety of practice modes, from controlled response to open communicative interaction, ‘When I published the first book, I hoped maybe a few other teachers might find the textbook useful, too. In all honesty, I never imagined there were so many teachers like myself who found a grammar-based skills approach to be effective and appropriate for their students. It turns out we are legion, During the naturalist approach heyday in the 80s and into the 90s, when advocates of zero grammar held sway, grammar instruction largely disappeared from school curricula for native speakers of English, But because of teacher support for grammar-based materials like mine, grammar teaching did not disappear from curricula for second language learners. Because of you, grammar is today a viable and vigorous component in the ESL/EFL classroom—much to our students’ benefit. A great deal of current research shows that many if not most of our students benefit greatly from a grammar component blended with other approaches in a well-balanced program of second language instruction, Together we have served our students well, My hat is off to you. Betty Azar Whidbey Island, Washington 2006BASIC Eneuisi GRAMMAR Third Edition ee = Betty Schrampfer Azar mam 4©Stacy A. HagenBasic English Grammar, Third Edition with Answer Key Copyright © 2006, 1996, 1984 by Betty Schrampfer Azar All rights reserved, ‘No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior permission of the publisher. Azar Associates Shelley Hartle, Editor Susan Van Eten, Manager Pearson Education, 10 Bank Street, White Plains, NY 10606 Editorial manager: Pam Fishman Project manager: Margo Grant Development editor: Janet Johnston Production supervisor: Melissa Leyva Senior production editor: Robert Ruvo Director of manufacturing: Patrice Fraccio ‘Senior manufacturing buyer: Nancy Flaggman Cover design: Pat Woscayk ‘Text composition: Carlisle Communications, Led. Text font: 11/13 Plantin Illustrations: Don Martinerti Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Azar, Betty Schrampfer, 1941- Basic English grammar / Betty Schrampfer Azar. 3rd ed. p.m ISBN 0-13-184937-9 (pbk.) — ISBN 0-13-184412-1 (pbk) ~ ISBN 0-13-195734-1 (pbk) ~ ISBN 0-13-195733-3 (pbk.) -- ISBN 0-13-195436-9 (pbk.) ~ ISBN 0-13-195350-8 (pbk.) ~ ISBN 0-13-184939-5 (pbk) ~ ISBN 0-13-184940-9 (pbk) 1. English language-~Textbooks for foreign speakers, 2. English language--Grammar~Problems, exercises, ete, I. Title. PEI128.496 2005 428.24--de22 2005014671 ISBN: 0-13-184937-9 7.89 10-CRK-09 08 ISBN: 0-13-195734-1 (International Edition with audio CDs) 789 10-CRK-09 08 ISBN: 0-13-195436-9 (International Edition) 3.456789 10-CRK-09 08 07 06Preface to the Third Edition . Acknowledgment . CONTENTS Chapter 1 USING BE 1 12 13 14 15 1-6 17 18 Noun + és + noun: singular Noun + are + noun: plural Pronoun + be + noun Contractions with be Negative with be Be + adjective Be + aplace Summary: basic sentence patterns with be Chapter 2 USING BE AND HAVE 21 Yesino questions with be .. +24 2-2 Short answers to yes/no questions . 25) 2-3 Questions with be: using where -28 2-4 Using have andhas......... = 30 2-5 Using my, your, his, her, our, their 33 2-6 Using this and that . ‘ x -38 2-7 Using these and those . : -40 2-8 Asking questions with what and who + be . 42 Chapter 3 USING THE SIMPLE PRESENT 3-1 Form and basic meaning of the simple present tense F 53 3-2 Using frequency adverbs: ake usually, often, sometimes, seldom, rarely, never . 3-3 Other frequency expressions . .. 3-4 Using frequency adverbs with be 3-5 Spelling and pronunciation of final -es : 3-6 Adding final -s/~es to words that end in -y . 3-7 _ Irregular singular verbs: has, does, goes 3-8 Spelling and pronunciation of final -s/-es 3-9 The simple present: negative . ..3-10 The simple present: yes/no questions i 3-11 The simple present: asking information questions with where -78 3-12. The simple present: asking information questions with when and what time ers sees 80 3-13. Summary: information questions with be and do wees 82 Chapter 4 USING THE PRESENT PROGRESSIVE 4:1 Be + -ing: the present progressive tense . 92 4-2 Spelling of-ing .......... 00.0 .97 4-3 The present progressive: negatives. 99 4-4 The present progressive: questions .. : = 102 4.5 The simple present vs. the present progressive ..... - 106 4-6 Nonaction verbs not used in the present progressive . aii 47 See, look at, watch, hear, and listen to . . 114 48 Think about and think that . 7 Chapter5 TALKING ABOUT THE PRESENT 5-1 Using it to talk about time ... ee =. 121 5-2 Prepositions of time ...... -123 5-3 Using it to talk about the weather . 125 5-4 There + be ... : = 128 5-5 There + be: yes/no questions - 130 5-6 There + be: asking questions with how many 133 5-7 Prepositions of place . 134 5-8 Some prepositions of place: : 2 135 5-9 Need and want + a noun or an infinitive . . . 1B 5-10 Would like ........... - 146 5-11 Would like vs. like .. - 148 Chapter 6 NOUNS AND PRONOUNS 6-1 Nouns: subjects and objects . . sete teers . 158 6-2 Adjective + noun ...... -161 6-3 Subject pronouns and object pronouns . 164 6-4 Nouns: singular and plural . «168 6-5 Nouns: irregular plural forms 2173 Chapter 7 COUNT AND NONCOUNT NOUNS 7-1 Nouns: count and noncount . = 181 7-2 Usinganvs.a .. 183 7-3 Using alan vs. some - 185 7-4 Measurements with noncount nouns . - 191 7-5 Using many, much, a few, a little = 195 6 Unga = 199 Ta Using @ (no arti) to make generations. cece eee 203 7-8 Using some and any ........ = 205 vi CONTENTSChapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 EXPRESSING PAST TIME, PART 1 81 Using be: past time 213 82 Past of be: negative = 214 8-3 Past of be: questions . . . 216 84 The simple past tense: using -ed . : -221 8-5 Past time words: yesterday, last, and ago .. : 2-225 8-6 regular verbs (Group 1) ..... aon, 8-7 egative .. 231 88 sino questions . 234 8-9 Irregular verbs (Group 2) . 238 8-10 Irregular verbs (Group 3) -241 8-11 Irregular verbs (Group 4) 244 EXPRESSING PAST TIME, PART 2 9-1 The simple past: using where, when, what time, and why . 252 9-2 Questions with what 257 9-3 Questions with who . - 260 9-4 Irregular verbs (Group 5) = 264 9-5 Irregular verbs (Group 6) ... = 266 9-6 Irregular verbs (Group 7) .... 269 9-7 Before and after in time clauses 273 9-8 When in time clauses oo 276 9-9 The present progressive and the past progressive 278 9-10 Using while with the past progressive ....... Foe 281 9-11 While vs. when in past time clauses ..... 282 9-12 Simple past vs. past progressive . 284 EXPRESSING FUTURE TIME, PART 1 10-1 Future time: using be going to : oe 10-2. Using the present progressive to express future time : 299 10-3 Words used for past time and future time .. 301 10-4. Using a couple of or a few with ago (past) and in (future) - = 305 10-5 Using today, tonight, and this + morning, a, afternoon, evening, week, month, year a sees +307 10-6 Future time: using will . -310 10-7. Asking questions with wall : -312 10-8. Verb summary: present, past, and future . 316 10-9 Verb summary: forms of be -318 EXPRESSING FUTURE TIME, PART 2 11-1 May/Might vs. will . 325 11-2 Maybe (one word) vs. may be (two words) =327 11-3. Future time clauses with before, after, and when . 334 11-4 Clauses with if 336 11-5. Expressing habitual present with time clauses and if-clauses 339 11-6 Using what + a form ofdo ...... 342 CONTENTS viiChapter 12 MODALS, PART 1: EXPRESSING ABILITY 12-1 Using can 354 12-2 Pronunciation of can and can’t. = 356 12-3. Using can: questions 397 12-4 Using know how to . 360 12-5 Using could: past of can - 362 12-6 Using beable to ........ 365 12-7 Using very and too + adjective. 368 12-8 Using two, too, and to . : 373 12-9 More about prepositions: at and in for place 374 Chapter 13 MODALS, PART 2: ADVICE, NECESSITY, REQUESTS, SUGGESTIONS 13-1 Using should . .379 13-2 Using have + infinitive (have tolhas to) . 383 13-3 Using must ...... . 387 13-4 Polite questions: may I, could I, and can I 391 13-5. Polite questions: could you and would you 393 13-6 Imperative sentences 395 13-7 Modal auxiliaries . . 308 13-8 Summary chart: modal axllaties and similar expressions. 399 13-9 Using let’s .. 402 Chapter 14 NOUNS AND MODIFIERS 14-1 Modifying nouns with adjectives and nouns = 405 14-2 Word order of adjectives -410 14-3. Expressions of quantity: all of, most of, some of, almost all of |... 415 14-4 Expressions of quantity: subject-verb agreement 417 14-5 Expressions of quantity: one of, none of . -419 14-6 Indefinite pronouns: nothing and no one . : 423 14-7. Indefinite pronouns: something, someone, anything, anyone . 424 14-8 Using every ae 426 14-9 Linking verbs + adjectives. = 428 14-10 Adjectives and adverbs . 431 Chapter 15 POSSESSIVES 15-1 Possessive nouns . : - 436 15-2 Possessive: irregular plural nouns... +439 15-3 Possessive pronouns: mine, yours, his, hers, ours, theirs +442 15-4 Questions with whose ....... 06.0... - 446 Chapter 16 MAKING COMPARISONS 16-1 Comparisons: using the same (as), similar (to), and (different from) 449 16-2 Comparisons: using like and alike = 452 16-3 The comparative: using -er and more ... 454 16-4 The superlative: using -est and most 461 CONTENTS16-5 Using one of + superlative + pluralnoun ...........5 16-6 Using but . ee 16-7. Using verbs after but. : 16-8 Making comparisons with adverbs... APPENDIX — IRREGULAR VERBS . LISTENING SCRIPT .......... CD TRACKING SCRIPT ANSWER KEY INDEX .... CONTENTS ixPreface to the Third Edition Basic English Grammar is a beginning level ESL/EFL developmental skills text in which grammar serves as the springboard for expanding learners’ abilities in speaking, writing, listening, and reading. It uses a grammar-based approach integrated with communicative methodologies. Starting from a foundation of understanding form and meaning, students engage in meaningful communication about real actions, real things, and their own real lives in the classroom context. Teaching grammar is the art of helping students look at how the language works and engaging them in activities that enhance language acquisition in all skill areas. ‘The direct teaching of grammar to academically oriented adults and young adults is ‘one component of a well-balanced program of second language instruction and can, much to students’ benefit, be integrated into curricula that are otherwise content /context-based or task-based. This third edition has the same basic approach as earlier editions, with new material throughout. It has + student-friendly grammar charts with clear information that is easily understood by beginning students. + numerous exercises to give students lots of practice. + more illustrations to help students learn vocabulary, understand contexts, and ‘engage in communicative language tasks. + reorganized chapters with expanded practice for high-frequency structures. + the option of a student text with or without an answer key in the back. In addition, the new edition has a greater variety of practice modes, including + greatly increased speaking practice through extensive use of interactive pair and group work. + the addition of numerous listening exercises, accompanied by audio CDs, with listening scripts included in the back of the book. + more activities that provide real communication opportunities. A new Workbook accompanies the student text to provide additional self-study practice. A Test Bank is also available.HOWTO USE THIS TEXT GRAMMAR CHARTS The grammar charts present the target structure by way of example and explanation. ‘Teachers can introduce this material in a variety of way: a. Present the examples in the chart, perhaps highlighting them on the board. Add additional examples, relating them to students’ experience as much as possible. For example, when presenting simple present tense, talk about what students do every day: come to school, study English, etc. . Elicit target structures from students by asking questions. (For example, for simple past tense, ask: What did you do last night?) Proceed to selected examples in the chart. c. Instead of beginning with a chart, begin with the first exercise after the chart, and as you work through it with students, present the information in the chart or refer to examples in the chart. . Assign a chart for homework; students bring questions to class. This works best with a more advanced class. e. Some charts have a preview exercise or pretest. Begin with these, and use them as a guide to decide what areas to focus on. When working through the chart, you can refer to the examples in these exercises. With all of the above, the explanations on the right side of the chart are most effective when recast by the teacher, not read word for word. Keep the discussion focus on the examples. Students by and large learn from examples and lots of practice, not from explanations. In the charts, the explanations focus attention on what students should be noticing in the examples and the exercises. FIRST EXERCISE AFTER A CHART In most cases, this exercise includes an example of each item shown in the chart. Students can do the exercise together as a class, and the teacher can refer to chart examples where necessary. More advanced classes can complete it as homework. The teacher can use this exercise as a guide to see how well students understand the basics of the target structure(s). SENTENCE PRACTICE ‘These exercises can be assigned as either oral or written practice, depending on the ability and needs of the class. Many of them can also be done as homework or seatwork. LET’S TALK Each “Let's Talk” activity is designated as one of the following: pairwork, small group, class activity, or interview. These exercises encourage students to talk about their ideas, their everyday lives, and the world around them. Examples for each are given so that students can casily transition into the activity, whether it be student- or teacher-led. xii PREFACELISTENING Listening exercises for both form and meaning give exposure to and practice with spoken English. Listening scripts for teacher use are in the back of the book. ‘Two audio CDs also accompany the text. Many of the exercises also introduce students to common features of reduced speech. ‘Teachers may want to play or read aloud some listening scripts one time in their entirety before asking students to write, so they have some familiarity with the overall context. Other exercises can be done sentence by sentence. WRITING ‘As students gain confidence in using the target structures, they are encouraged to express their ideas in paragraphs and other writing formats. To help students generate ideas, some of these tasks are combined with “Let’s Talk” activities. When correcting student writing, teachers may want to focus primarily on the structures taught in the chapter. REVIEW EXERCISES All chapters finish with review exercises; some are cumulative reviews that include material from previous chapters, so students can incorporate previous grammar with more recently taught structures. Each chapter review contains an error-correction exercise. Students can practice their editing skills by correcting errors commonly found in beginning students’ speaking and writing. ANSWER KEY The text is available with or without an answer key in the back. If the answer key is used, homework can be corrected as a class or, if appropriate, students can correct it at home and bring questions to class. In some cases, the teacher may want to collect the assignments written on a separate piece of paper, correct them, and then highlight common problems in class. For more teaching suggestions and supplementary material, please refer to the accompanying Teacher's Guide. PREFACE xiliAcknowledgment Janet Johnston was the finest editor an author could ever hope to work with. Wielding pencils of many colors (with purple seeming to be her personal favorite), she cheerfully held her authors to account for every single word they wrote. She saw the Azar Series through thousands of pages of manuscript and proof for more than fifteen years. Each published page bears the seal of her high standards and keen eye. Her delight in the process of shaping text was contagious and her technical expertise extraordinary, making all of us who worked with her enthusiastically reach for our highest level of professionalism. They simply don’t make editors like Janet anymore, Working with her has been a privilege and a joy. As we grieve her untimely death from breast cancer, we will deeply miss her good, sweet friendship as well as her editorial wizardry. Simply stated, Janet Johnston was, and will always remain, the best of the best. Betty Azar Stacy Hagen Shelley Hartle Sue Van EtenCHAPTER ] Using Be C1 EXERCISE 1. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Ask your classmates their names. Write their first names in the spaces below. You can also ask them what city or country they are from. FIRST NAME CITY OR COUNTRYCO EXERCISE 2. Preview: listening. O Directions: Listen to the sentences. Write the words you hear. Paulo isa student. from Brazil. Marie 7 student from France. 5 the classroom. Today 7 exciting day. the first day of school, but they nervous, ________ to be here. Mrs. Brown the teacher. She ______ in the classroom right now. late today. 70 NOUN + 1S + NOUN (a) Canada is acountry. | In (a): Canada = a singular noun is = a singular verb country = a singular noun. (b) Mexico is a country. A frequently comes in front of singular nouns. In (b): a comes in front of the singular noun country. Ais called an “article.” (Oe oe cna A and an have the same meaning. They are both articles. A is used in front of words that begin with consonants: b, ¢ df, get. Examples: a bed, a cat, a dog, a friend, a girl An is used in front of words that begin with a, i, and o.* Examples: an animal, an ear, an island, an office “mis someximes wed infront of words that begin with w. See Chart 7-2, p. 183. ‘Consonants = Bye df 85 hs ss ms Ms Pe 51,8585 5985 595 Cl EXERCISE 3. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use an article (a or an). 1, __A__ horse is __an___ animal. 2. English is language. 3. Tokyo is ___ city. 4, Australia is ____ country. 2° CHAPTER T5. 10. Red is color. dictionary is book. hotel is ____ building. bear is _____ animal. bee is insect. ant is insect. Co EXERCISE 4. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use @ or an and the words in the list. 10. 11. 12. . A fly is animal country language city insect sport . Arabic is a language : Rome is a city : imal A cat is . Tennis is . Chicago is . Spanish is Mexico is A cow is Baseball is China is Russian is Using Be 3Co EXERCISE 5. Let's talk: small groups. Directions: Work in small groups. Choose a leader. Only the leader’s book is open. Example: a language LEADER: Name a language. SPEAKER A: English is a language. SPEAKER B: French is a language. SPEAKER C: Arabic is a language. LEADER: Japanese is a language. SPEAKER A: Spanish is a language. SPEAKER B: Etc. (Continue until no one can name another language.) 4. a color 5. a country 6. acity 1. an animal 2. a sport 3. an insect NOUN + ARE +N PLURAL NOUN + ARE + NOUN Plural means “two, three, or more.” (@) Cats are animals. Cats = a plural noun are = a plural verb animals = a plural noun (b) SINGULAR: a cat, an animal Plural nouns end in -s. PLURAL: cats, animals A and an are used only with singular nouns. (© SINGULAR: a city, a country Some singular nouns that end in ~y have a special PLURAL: — citfes, countries plural form: They omit the -y and add ~ies.* NOUN and NOUN + 4RE + NOUN | Two nouns connected by and are followed by are. (@) Canada and China are countries. | In (d): Canada is @ singular noun. China is a (©) Dogs and cats are animals. | singular noun. They are connected by and. ‘Together they are plural, i.c., “more than one.” *See Chart 3-6, p. 63, for more information about adding -s!zes to words that end in C EXERCISE 6. Sentence practice. Directions: Change the singular sentences to plural sentences. SINGULAR 1, An ant is an insect. > 2. A computer is a machine. > 4 CHAPTER 1 PLURAL, Ants are insects.SINGULAR PLURAL 3. A dictionary is a book. > 4. A chicken is a bird. > 5. A rose is a flower. > 6. A carrot is a vegetable. > 7. Arabbit is an animal. = > 8. Egypt is a country. Indonesia is a country. > 9. Winter is a season. Summer is a season. -~ Cl EXERCISE 7. Game. Directions: Work in small groups. Close your books for this activity. Your teacher will say the beginning of a sentence. As a group, write the complete sentence. In the end, the group who completes the most sentences correctly wins the game. Example: ‘TEACHER (ook open): Spanish .... GROUP (books closed): Spanish is a language. 1. Abear.... 6. September and 10. China 2. Anant. October 11, Winter and summer .. . - 3. London 7. Mexico and Canada.... 12. Arabic... 4. Spring . 8. A dictionary .... 13. A computer... . 5. Acarrot.... 9. Chickens .... 14. Afly.... Using Be 5CO EXERCISE 8. Listening. Qe Directions: Listen to the sentences. Example: Cows are animals. Horses are insects. yes l. yes no 4. yes 2. yes no 5. yes 3. yes no 6. yes Cl EXERCISE 9. Let's talk: pairwork. Circle yes or no. no no 7. yes no 8. yes no 9. yes no no no Directions: Your partner will ask you to name something. Answer in a complete sentence, You can look at your book before you speak. When you speak, look at your partner. Example: Partner A Partner B 1. a country 1. two countries 2. an insect 2. a season PARTNER A: Name a country. PARTNER B: Brazil is a country. PARTNER A: Yes, Brazil is a country. PARTNER B: Name two countries. Your turn now. PARTNER A: Italy and China are countries, PARTNER B: Yes, Italy and China are countries. Your turn now. PARTNER A: Name an insect. PARTNER B: A bee is an insect. PARTNER A: Yes, a bee is an insect. Your turn now. PARTNER B: Name a season. PARTNER A: Ete. Remember: You can look at your book before you speak. When you speak, look at your partner. Partner A Partner B 1. a language 1. two cities 2. two languages 2. an island 3. acity 3. two countries in Asia 4, an animal 4, a vegetable 5. two seasons 5. a street in this city 6 CHAPTER 1+ BE + NOUN SINGULAR PLURAL I : oa PRONOUN + BE + NOUN PRONOUN + RE + NOUN he @r am astudent. —(f) We are students. | she } = pronouns (©) You are astudent. —(g) You are students. | # (© She isa student. (h) They are students. |“ @ He is astudent. thes) © is acounny. "| is forms of be are @_ Rita is in my class. She is a student. Pronouns refer to nouns. @) ‘Tom is in my class. He is a student. In @: she (feminine) (®) Rita and Tom are in my class. They are students. | In Gj): he (masculine) = Tom. In (W): they = Rita and Tom. Cl EXERCISE 10. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use a verb (am, is, or are). Use a noun (a student or students). 1. We __are students ' 4, Rita and Tom 2.1 5. You (one person) 3. Rita 6. You (two persons) © EXERCISE 11. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Close your books. Complete the sentences with a form of be + a studentistudents. Point to the student or students as you name them. Example: TEACHER: (name of a student in the class) Yoko... . STUDENT: (The student points to Yoko.) Yoko is a student. 1. (name of a student) 2. (name of a student) and (name of a student) 7 . (name of a student) and . We (name of a student) - (name of a student) and (name of a student) ‘They You (name of a student) and (name of a student) and (name of a student) Sewmr sue Using Be 7CONTRACTIO! as bs 2) 28 When people speak, they | + BE HKONOUN + BE > coNTHACTION : nasa oo es oe aM 1 +am > 2P'm (@ Pma student. togediion A conerantion two words that are pushed she + is > she’s (b) She’s astudent. | together. Is he + is > he’s (© He’s a student. Contractions of a subject ie + is > its @) It’s a city. pronoun + be are used in - both speaking and writing. you + are > you're (©) You're a student. | puNcustion: The mark ARE we = + are > we're (£) We're students. in the middle of a ey ae ire (@) They're students. | contraction is called an “apostrophe” (’).* “*Nore: Write an apostrophe above the line, Do not write an apostrophe on the line correct: ___I’m a student aNcorscr: ___1,m a student Co EXERCISE 12. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use contractions (pronoun + be). 1. Sara is a student. ___She’s ___ in my class. 2. Jim is a student. in my class. 3. Ihave one brother. twenty years old. 4. Lhave two sisters. students, 5. [have a dictionary. on my desk, 6. Tike my classmates. friendly. 7. Uhave three books. on my desk. 8. My brother is twenty-six years old. married. 9. My sister is twenty-one years old. single. 10. Yoko and Ali are students. in my class. 11. Tike my books, ______ interesting. 12. [like grammar. easy. 13. Kate and Hive in an apartment. roommates. 8 CHAPTER 114. We live in an apartment, __________ on Pine Street. 15. Igo to school. ______ a student. 16. I know you. ______ in my English class. Cl EXERCISE 13. Listening. o Directions: Listen to the sentences. Write the contractions you hear. Use the words in the list. Example: ‘You will hear: You are in class. You're a student. You will write: You're __a student. Pm She’s Were You're He’s They're ies a ery nice 6 in thesamesclass in the classroom. 7, _______young. a very bie ec Oe very iricndly: her friend. a CO EXERCISE 14. Listening. Directions: Complete the sentences with the words you hear. Some of them will be contractions. SPEAKER A: Hello, My name ____ Mrs. Brown, -— the new teacher. spEaKeR 8: Hi, Myname _____ Paulo, and this, Marie. in your class. SPEAKER A: nice to meet you. ‘SPEAKER B: happy to meet you too. 7 SPEAKER A: time for class. Please take a seat. 3sCONTRACTIONS. Not makes a sentence negative. (@) Lam not a teacher. V'm not (©) You are not a teacher. you're not / you aren’t. | CONTRACTIONS: (©) She is not a teacher. she’s not / she isn’t ‘Be und wot can be contracted, ; 5 oe Note that “I am” has only one (@) He is not a teacher. he’s not / he isn’t contraction with be, as in (a), but () Ieis mot a city. its mot (it tare there are two contractions with be (f) We are not teachers. we're not /we aren't | for (b) through (e). (@) You are not teachers. you're not / you aren't (h) They are not teachers. they're not / they aren’t Cl EXERCISE 15. Sentence practice. Directions: Write sentences using és, isn’t, are, and aren’t and the given information. Examples: Africa \ city .. . 1t\ continent -+__Africa isn’t a city. It’s a continent, Baghdad and Chicago \ city . . . They \ continent > lad and Chicago are citie ‘t continents. 1, Canada \ country . . . It\ city 2. Jakarta \ country .. . It\ city 3. Beijing and London \ city . . . They \ country 4. Asia \ country . . . It \ continent 5. Asia and South America \ continent . . . They \ country 10 CHAPTER 1CU EXERCISE 16. Sentence practice. PART I. Directions: Write the name of the person next to his or her job. artist in arden bus driver doctor police officer photographer PART Il. Directions: Complete the sentences with the correct information. 1, Ann isn't a gardener. She _‘s a photographer 2. Mike is a gardener. He —__ an artist. 2 4, Sue____________ a photographer. She SMe Rice a policcitieer He 6. Ms. Black isn'ta ____. She 7. Vonote ee ae : Using Be 11NOUN round (@) A ball is E intelligent (b) Balls hungry} = adjectives (© Mary is young (@) Mary and Tom happy PRONOUN Adjectives often follow a form of be © (am, is, are), Adjectives describe or give (f) She information about a noun or pronoun © They that comes at the beginning of a ‘sentence.* “The noun or pronoun that comes at the beginning of a sentence is called a “subject.” See Chart 6-1, p. 158. CI EXERCISE 17. Sentence practice. Directions: Find the adjective in the first sentence. Then complete the second sentence with be + an adjective that has an opposite meaning. Use the adjectives in the list. Use each adjective only once. 1, Pm not sad. I_‘mhappy 2. Mr. Thomas isn’t rich, He 3. My hair isn’t long. It 4, My clothes aren’t dirty. They 5. Flowers aren’t ugly. They (6: Garsiaren'ticheap! (hey) sete cui eens 7. Airplanes aren’ slow. They 8. Grammar isn’t difficult. It 9, My sister isn’t short. She 10. My grandparents aren’t young. They 11, The classroom isn’t quiet. It 12 CHAPTER 1CO EXERCISE 18. Sentence practice. Directions: Write sentences using is or are and an adjective from the list. Use each adjective only once. cold funny round sweet dangerous hot smallllitle wet dry important sour flat largelbig square 1. Fire __is hot a 2. Ice and snow 3. A box 4. Balls and oranges 5. Sugar 6 An clephant bur mouse 7. Arain forest. but desert 8. A joke 9. Good health 10. Guns aren't safe. They 11. Acoin ______ small, round, and 12. A lemon @+Q+ ‘lemon sugar Using Be 13C1 EXERCISE 19. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Complete the drawings by making the faces happy, angry, sad, or nervous. ‘Then show your drawings to your partner. Your partner will identify the emotions in your drawings. Ci EXERCISE 20. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use és, isn’t, are, or aren’t. 1. A ball square. 2. Balls are round. 3, Lemons yellow. 4, Ripe bananas yellow too. Be A lemon ee pweet (sour, 6. My pen heavy. It light. 7. This room dark. It light. 8, My classmates friendly. 9. A turtle slow. 10; Atrplanes eo glow, They fast 11. The floor in the classroom clean. It dirty. 12. The weather cold today. 13. The sun bright today. 14. My shoes _____ comfortable. 14 CHAPTER 1CO EXERCISE 21. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Take turns making two sentences for each picture. Use the given adjectives. You can look at your book before you speak. When you speak, look at your partner. Example: The gitl . .. happy/sad PARTNER A: The girl isn’t happy. She’s sad. Your turn now. Example: The flower . . . beautiful/ugly PARTNER B: The flower is beautiful. It isn’t ugly. Your turn now. Partner A 1. The table . . . clean/dirty. 1. The man . . . friendly/unfriendly. 2. The little boy . .. sick/well. 2. The coffee . . . cold/hot. X°4+544=(x+4)(x +1) 3. The algebra problem ... . casy/difficult. 3. 4, The cars... oldinew. 4, Ken’s sister... old/young. Using Be 15C EXERCISE 22. Let's talk: game. Directions: Practice using adjectives. Part 1. Look at the words, Check (7) all the words you know. Your teacher will explain the words you don’t know. 1, __ hungry 2. ___ thirsty sleepy 4, __ tired Se old 6. ___ young 7. __ happy homesick 9, __ married 10. ___ single . 12, 13, 14, 15. 16. 17. 20. angry nervous quiet lazy hardworking famous sick healthy friendly shy Parr it, Sit in a circle, Speaker 1 makes a sentence using “I” and the first word. Speaker 2 repeats the information about Speaker 1 and makes a new sentence using the second word. Continue around the circle until everyone in class has spoken. The teacher is the last person to speak and must repeat the information about everyone in the class. Example: SPEAKER A: I’m not hungry. SPEAKER B: He’s not hungry. ['m thirsty. SPEAKER C: He’s not hungry. She's thirsty. V'm sleepy. 16 CHAPTER 1CO EXERCISE 23. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Check (7) each adjective that describes this city/town (the city or town. where you are studying now). When you finish, compare your work with a partner. Do you and your partner have checks beside the same adjectives? Report to the class on things you disagree about. 1, = big 11, __ noisy 2, —_. small 12, __ quiet 3. —_ clean 13. __ crowded 4, __. dirty 14. ___ not crowded 5. ___ friendly 15, __ hot 6. ___ unfriendly 16. __. cold 7. cole 17, warm 8. ___ dangerous 18, __ cool 9, __ beautiful 19, ____ expensive 10. ___ ugly 20. ___ inexpensive/cheap © EXERCISE 24. Let's talk: game. Directions: Sit in small groups. Close your books for this activity. Your teacher will ask you to name things. As a group, make a list. The teacher will give you only a short time to make the list. Share the list with the rest of your class. The group that makes the longest list gets a point. The group with the most points at the end of the game is the winner. Example: round ‘TEACHER: Name something that is round. GROUP A’s LIST: a ball, an orange, the world GROUP B’s List: a baseball, a basketball, a soccer ball GROUP C’s LisT: a ball, a head, an orange, the world, the sun, a planet Result: Group 3 wins a point. 1. hot 6. flat 11. beautiful 2. square 7. little 12. expensive 3. sweet 8. important 13. cheap 4, sour 9. cold 14, free 5. large 10. funny 15. delicious Using Be 17(@) Maria is here. (b) Bob is at the library. In (a): here = a place. In (b): at the library = a place. Be is often followed by a place. A place may be one word, as in the examples in (c). here. there. downstairs. (© Maria is | upstairs. inside. outside. downtown. PREPOSITION + NOUN at the library. on the bus. (@) Bob is | in his room. at work, next to Maria. ‘A place may be a prepositional phrase (preposition + noun), as in (d). So NEXT TO © ABOVE © ieee b BEHIND. @Q UNDER SOME COMMON PREPOSITIONS above between next 10 at from on behind in under 18 CHAPTER 1CO EXERCISE 25. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with prepositions that describe the pictures. Use each preposition only once. above between next 10 under behind vin on the desk. 1. The cat is the desk, 2. The cat is 3. The cat is the desk. 4, The cat is the desk. the desk. 5. The catis_____ the desk. 7. The cat is the desks. Using Bo 19Cl EXERCISE 26. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Close your books. Practice using prepositions of place. Example: under ‘TEACHER: Put your hand under your chair. Where is your hand? STUDENT: My hand is under my chair. or: It’s under my chair. 1. on Put your pen on your book. Where is your pen? 2. in Put your pen in your book. Where’s your pen? 3. under Put your pen under your book, Where’s your pen? 4. nextto Put your pen next to your book. Where’s your pen? 5. on Put your hand on your ear. Where’s your hand? 6. nextto Put your hand next to your ear. Where’s your hand? 7. above Put your hand above your head, Where’s your hand? 8. next to ‘Stand next to (...). Where are you? 9. between Stand between (...) and (....). Where are you? 10. between Put your pen between two books. Where’s your pen? 11, behind Put your hand behind your head. Where’s your hand? 12. Follow these directions: Put your pen . . . in your hand. -on your arm, . .. between your hands. + + under your book, + + Mext to your book. . above your book. Cl EXERCISE 27. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Give and follow directions. Partner A: Give directions. Your book is open. You can look at your book before you speak. When you speak, look at your partner. Partner B: Draw the pictures Partner A describes. Your book is closed. Example: Draw a ball on a box. PARTNER A (book open): Draw a ball on a box. PARTNER B (book closed): (Draw the picture Partner A described.) 1, Draw a ball on a box. 2. Draw a ball above a box. 3. Draw a ball next to a box. 4, Draw a ball under a box. 5. Draw a ball in a box. 6. Draw a banana between two apples. 7. Draw a house. Draw a bird above the house. Draw a car next to the house. Draw a cat between the car and the house. 20 CHAPTER8. Draw a flower. Draw a tree next to the flower. Draw a bird above the tree. Draw a turtle under the flower. Switch roles. Partner A: Close your book. Partner B: Open your book. Your turn to talk now. 9. Draw a circle next to a triangle. 10. Draw a circle in a triangle. 11. Draw a circle above a triangle. 12. Draw a triangle between two circles. 13. Draw a circle under a triangle. 14. Draw an apple on a banana. Draw an apple above a banana. 15. Draw a tree, Draw bananas in the trees. Draw a person next to the tree. Draw a dog between the person and the tree. 16. Draw a cloud. Draw a bird under the cloud. Draw a bird above the cloud. Draw a bird in the cloud. SUBJECT + BE + NOUN ‘The noun or pronoun that comes at the beginning @. am a student. of a sentence is called the “subject.” supect + pe + —apjecrive | Be isa “verb.” Almost all English sentences have a | (&) He is imellgent. | subject and a verb. suBECT + BE + — APLACE Notice in the examples: There are three basic © We are in class. completions for sentences that begin with a subject (@) She is upstairs. + the verb be: +a noun, as in (a) + an adjective, as in (b) + an expression of place,* as in (c) and (4) ‘An expression of place can be a preposition + noun, or it ean be one word. Cl EXERCISE 28. Sentence practice. Directions: Write the form of be (am, is, or are) that is used in each sentence. Then write the grammar structure that follows be. BE + COMPLETION 1. We're students. ore + noun 2. Anna is in Rome. is + _aplace 3. Pm hungry. am__ + _an adjective Using Be 214. Dogs are animals. + 5. Jack is at home. + 6. He's sick, — 7. They're artists. + 8. P'm in class. + 9. Gina is upstairs. + 10. Joe’s pockets are empry. + Cl EXERCISE 29. Listening. COMPLETION Gq Directions: Is and are are often contracted with nouns in spoken English. Listen to the sentences. Practice saying them yourself. 1, Grammar is easy. > “Grammar’s easy.” 2. My name is John, 3. My books are on the table. 4. My brother is 21 years old. 5. The weather is cold today. 6. The windows are open. Cl EXERCISE 30. Listening. 7. My money is in my wallet. 8. Mr. Smith is a teacher. 9. Mrs. Lee is at home now. 10. ‘The sun is bright today. 11. ‘Tom is at home right now. 12. My roommates are from Chicago. 13. My sister is a student in high school. Ge Directions: Listen to the sentences. Circle the completions you hear. Example: My friend from Korea. A. is c. o 1. The test A is c. 2. My notebook on the table, A. is B.’s c 3. My notebooks on the table, A. are B. 're G 22° CHAPTER o o10. A. teacher's . Sue __ a student. Ais B.’s ‘The weather warm today. Ais B.’s . The windows open. A. are B. ’re . My parents from Cuba. A. are B. ’re My cousins from Cuba, too. A. are B. ’re . My on my desk. ‘A. book's B. books're The ____ in class. B. teachers’re Co EXERCISE 31. Sentence review. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use #s or are. Then exchange papers and correct each other’s sentences. 1. 2. 10. ae c. an animal. here. languages. not cheap. friendly. not expensive. an insect. countries. not from Canada. noisy. Using Be 23OLN oA Using Be and Have CO EXERCISE 1. Preview: listening. Ge Directions: Listen to the questions. Circle yes or no. Example: Is Africa a continent? 3) no lyes no Ayes no 7. yes no 2.yes no 5. yes no 8. yes no 3. yes no 6. yes no 9. yes no /NO QUESTIONS WITH BE QUESTION ‘STATEMENT In a question, be comes in front = of the subject. be + sumpecr SUBJECT + BE (a) Is | Anna astudent? = Anna_—iis-_—_astudent. binegianiin A Cae ends a question mark (2). (©) Are they athome? They are st home, | with a question mark (@) period (.). Cl EXERCISE 2. Question practice. Directions: Make questions for the given answers. : Is Mrs, Lee a teacher? ‘Yes, Mrs. Lee is a teacher. 1, ‘Yes, the sun is a ball of fire. ‘Yes, carrots are vegetables. ‘Yes, chickens are birds. 24‘Yes, Mr. Wu is here today. ‘Yes, Sue and Mike are here today. TA: : Yes, English grammar is fun. 8. A: : Yes, I am ready for the next grammar chart. SHORT ANSWERS TO YES/NO QUE: QUESTION, SHORT ANSWER Spoken contractions are not used in short answers that begin with yes. (@) Is Anna a student? > Yes, she is. In (a): rvcorrecr: Yes, she’s, > No, she’s not. >No, she isn’t, (b) Are they at home? > Yes, they are. In (b): INcoRRECT: Yes, they're. > No, they aren’t, (© Are you ready? > Yes, Lam, In ©: correct: Yes, Pm. > No, Pm not.* Am and not are not contracted. Co EXERCISE 3. Question practice. Directions: Make questions and give short answers. 1A: Are you tired? B: No, I’m not. (Pm not tired.) Is Anna in your class? B: ___Yes, she is. _______ (Anna is in my class.) 3. A: ee (Pinot bomeack) (Bob is homesick.) Using Be and Have 25(Sue isn’t here today.) (The students in this class are intelligent.) (The chairs in this room aren’t comfortable.) (P'm not married.) 10. (Tom and I are roommates.) oe oe ee (A butterfly is not a bird.) C EXERCISE 4. Let's talk: find someone who .... Directions: Walk around the room. Ask your classmates questions. Find someone who can answer yes to each question. Write down his/her name. Use Are you ...? Example: SPEAKER A: Are you hungry? SPEAKER B: No, I’m not. SPEAKER A: (Ask another student.) Are you hungry? SPEAKER C: Yes, I am. (Write down hislher name.) (Now ask another student a different question.) First name First name 1. hungry 8. tired 2. sleepy 9. nervous 3. thirsty 10. friendly 4, married 11. lazy 5. a parent 12. cold 6. single 13. comfortable 7. happy 14, from (name of country) 26 CHAPTER 2CO EXERCISE 5. Let’s talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Ask and answer questions. You can look at your book before you speak. When you speak, look at your partner. Example: turtles: fast/slow PARTNER A: Are turtles fast? PARTNER B: No, they aren’t. PARTNER A: Your turn now. oR PARTNER A: Are turtles slow? PARTNER B: Yes, they are. PARTNER A: Your turn now. Parmer A Partner B 1. a mouse: big/little 1. diamonds: expensive/cheap 2. lemons: sweev/sour 2. your grammar book: lightheavy 3. the world: flavround 3. butterflies: beautiful/ugly 4. the weather: cool todayhwarm today 4, English grammar: easy/difficult 5. your dictionary: with yow/at home 5. dolphins: intelligenvdumb 6. your shoes: comfortable/uncomfortable | 6. the floor in this room: clean/dirty Cl EXERCISE 6. Question practice. Directions: Complete the conversations with your own words. 1, A: ___Are ___ you a student at this school? a you from B: No, from : 2. A: Are you a/an No, not. I’m a/an 3. A: Are __ expensive? B: Yes, : A: Is expensive? No, Using Be.and Have 274A; countries in Asia? B: Yes, are. A: a country in South America? B: Yes, ___ is. ee country in Arica? B: No, not. It’s a country in Where asks about place. Where comes at the beginning of the question, in front of be. QUESTION, SHORT ANSWER + (LONG ANSWER) BE + SUBJECT | @ Is the book onthe table? > Yes, it is. (The book is on the table.) ) Are the books on the table? > Yes, they are. (The books are on the table.) WHERE + BE + SUBIECT (©) Where is the book? + On the table. (The book is on the table.) (@) Where are the books? “+ On the table. (The books are on the table.) (EXERCISE 7. Question practice. Directions: Make questions. 1A: Is Kate at home? B: Yes, she is. (Kate is at home.) . ie oe : Athome. (Kate is at home.) B: Yes, it is. (Cairo is in Egypt.) 4A: B: In Egypt. (Cairo is in Egypt.) 28 CHAPTER 2: Yes, they are. (The students are in class today.) : In class. (The students are in class today.) 2 > DP DP B: On Main Street. (The post office is on Main Street.) 8. A: B: Yes, it is. (The train station is on Grand Avenue.) : Over there. (The bus stop is over there.) 10. A B A B: : At the zoo, (Sue and Ken are at the z00 today.) Cl EXERCISE 8. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Ask questions. Use where. You can look at your book before you speak. When you speak, look at your partner. Example: PARTNER A: Where is your pen? PARTNER B: It’s in my hand. (or any other true answer) PARTNER A: Your turn now. Partner A Partner B 1. your dictionary 1. your notebooks 2. your money 2. your wallet 3. your books 3. your glasses or sunglasses 4. your coat 4. your family 5. your pencil 5. your apartment 6. (name of a classmate) 6. (names of vo classmates) 7. your hometown 7. your hometown 8. (name of a city in the world) | 8. (name of a country in the world) Using Be and Have 29(a) I have apen. (f) We have pens. a (b) You have a pen, (@) You have pens. they (© She has apen. (h) They have pens. (@) He has apen. she (© It has blue ink. 2 OC EXERCISE 9. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use have and has. 1. We ___have grammar books. 1 ___ a dictionary. . Kate ____ablue pen. She ___ a blue notebook too. . You ____ a pen in your pocket. Bob a notebook on his desk. . Anna and Bob ____ notebooks. They ______ pens too. . Samir is a student in our class. He ____ a red grammar book. [ a grammar book. It ____a red cover. SePranepuwn . You and I are students. We ____ books on our desks. 10. Mike _____ a wallet in his pocket. Sara ___a wallet in her purse. 11. Nadia isn’t in class today because she ______ the flu. 12. Mr. and Mrs. Johnson _____ two daughters. 13. Ducks feathers. 14. A duck a beak. 30 CHAPTER 2Cl EXERCISE 10. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with have or has and words from the list. a stomachache toothaches a headache a sore throat backaches acold 2. The patients 6. The workers . | 7, Olga C EXERCISE 11. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Complete this conversation with a partner. You can look at your book before you speak. When you speak, look at your partner. Partner A: How > Partner B: Not so good. Partner A: That's too bad. Your turn now. Example: 1. Jim? . . .a toothache 2. Susan? . . . a stomachache PARTNER A: How’s Jim? PARTNER B: Not so good. He has a toothache. PARTNER A: That’s too bad. Your turn now. Using Be and Have 31PARTNER B: How’s Susan? PARTNER A: Not so good. She has a stomachache. PARTNER B: That’s too bad. Your turn now. 1. you? ...a headache 2, you? . . .a sore tooth 3. your mother? . . . a sore back 4. Mr. Lee? ... a backache CO EXERCISE 12. Listening. Gy. Directions: Listen to the sentences. 5. 6. iL 8. Mrs. Wood? .. . a fever Example: Anna ___ boots. have 1. has have 2. has have 3. has have 4. has have 5. has have 6. has have 7. has have 8. has have your parents? . .. colds . the patients? . . . stomachaches your little brother? . . . a sore throat . Circle the verbs you hear. Cl EXERCISE 13. Let's talk: find someone who ... Directions: Walk around the room. Ask your classmates questions. Try to find people who can answer yes to the questions. Write down their names. Use Do you have ...2 Example: ... car? SPEAKER A: Do you have a car? SPEAKER B: Yes, I have a car. OR No, I don’t have a car. (You can also give additional information: I have a sports car.) First name First name 1. brothers and sisters? 5. a job? 2. children? 6. a favorite sport? 3. pets? 7. a favorite movie star? 4, hobbies? 8. a favorite movie? 32 CHAPTER 22-5 USING MY, YOUR, HIS, HER, OUR, THEIR SINGULAR PLURAL SUBJECT FORM POSSESSIVE FORM (a) Thave a book. (© We have books. | ee My book is red. Our books are red. os Te (b) You have a book. (f) You have books. he > his | Your book is red. Your books are red. we > our (c) She has a book. (g) They have books. they their Her book is red. Their books are re. [To a book = Thaw a book ok (@) He has a book, aap: His book is red. } My, our, her, his, our, and their are called “possessive adjectives.” They come in front of nouns. C1 EXERCISE 14. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with the correct possessive adjectives. 1. You're next. Ita tum, 2. Sue’s next. It’s turn, 3. John and Jane are next. It's ______ turn. 4. My aunt is next. It’s turn, 5. Pm next. It’s turn. 6. The children are next. It’s turn, 7. You and Sam are next. It’s turn, 8. Marcos and I are next. It’s turn, eo 10. Mrs. Brown is next. It's ____ turn. Cl EXERCISE 15. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with the information on the is Dees a i cud ‘What information do you know about this person from his ID card? 1. last name is a —___ i many 3. —________ middle initial is ____. Using Be and Have 33‘What information do the ID cards give you about Don and Kathy Johnson? 4. zip code is 5. —___ area code is WS A Dr. Diane Ellen Nelson What do you know about Dr. Nelson? Co bittidate ee f birthday is : 8. middle name is Write about yourself. 9 first name is . 10. last name is Whe middieiname ig 12. middle initial is 13. area code is 14 phone number is : 15. zip code is 34 CHAPTER 2Ci EXERCISE 16. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Look at the vocabulary. Put a check (V) beside the words you know. Ask your partner about the ones you don’t know. Your teacher can help you. The pictures below and on the next page illustrate clothing and jewelry. VOCABULARY CHECKLIST Colors Clothes Jewelry _ black _ belt __ bracelet — blue, dark blue, light blue blouse — earrings __ blue green _ boots — necklace — brown, dark brown, light brown | __ coat _ ring — gold — dress — watch/wristwatch gray, dark gray, light gray — gloves __ green, dark green, light green — hat __ orange __ jacket — pink — jeans — purple — pants red — sandals — silver — shirt __ tan, beige __ shoes — white — skirt — yellow — socks — suit _ sweater — tie, necktie — Tshirt ahard hat an earring sandals, Using Be and Have 35CO EXERCISE 17. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with my, your, her, his, our, or their. 1. Rita is wearing a blouse. Her blouse is light blue. 2. ‘Tom is wearing a shirt. 3. Lam wearing jeans. 4, Bob and Tom are wearing boots. 5. Sue and you are wearing dresses. 6. Ann and I are wearing sweaters. 7. You are wearing shoes. 8. Sue is wearing a skirt 9. John is wearing a belt. 10. Sue and Ann are wearing socks. 11. Tom is wearing pants. 12. I am wearing earrings. 36 CHAPTER 2 shirt is yellow and brown. jeans are blue. boots are brown. dresses are red. __. sweaters are green. shoes are dark brown. skirt is black. belt is white. socks are dark gray. pants are dark blue. earrings are gold.CO EXERCISE 18. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Your teacher will ask you questions about people and their clothing. Then describe an article of clothing/jewelry and its color. Use this pattern: possessive adjective + noun + islare + color. Close your book for this activity. Examples: ‘TEACHER: Look at Ali. ‘Tell me about his shirt. What color is his shirt? STUDENT: His shirt is blue. TEACHER: Look at Rosa. What is this? STUDENT: A sweater. TEACHER: Tell me about her sweater. What color is it? STUDENT: Her sweater is red. TEACHER: Look at me. What am I touching? STUDENT: Your shoes. TEACHER: Tell me about the color. STUDENT: Your shoes are brown. Cl EXERCISE 19. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use have or has. Use my, your, her, his, our, or their. 1, I ___have a book. ___My ___ book is interesting. 2. Bob __ a backpack. backpack is green. 3. You a raincoat. raincoat is brown. 4. Kate a raincoat. raincoat is red 5. Ann and Jim are married. They _____ a baby. ___baby is six months old. 6. Ken and Sue __a daughter. daughter is ten years old. 7, John and I _____ason. _____ son is seven years old. 8. I_________ a brother. ____ brother is sixteen. 9. We __________ grammar books. ______ grammar books are red. 10. ‘Tom and you _______ backpacks. _____ backpacks are brown. 11, Ann ____adictionary.. _____ dictionary is red. 12, Mike ____acar. ____car is blue. Using Be and Have 37(@) Ihave a book in my hand. This book is red. (©) This is my book. (@) That is your book. (b) I see a book on your desk. That book is blue. this book that book the book is near me. the book is not near me. (©) That’s her book. CONTRACTION: that is = that’s (f) This is (“This’s”) her book. In spoken English, shis is is usually pronounced as “chis’s.” It is not used in writing. Co EXERCISE 20. Sentence completion. Directions: Complete the sentences with this or that. ce 1. __This _ is my book. 2. _That _ is your book. S 3. isa pen. is a pencil, a = <> —_ is his notebook. 6. is her notebook. c= —__ is my dictionary. 8 is your a 9. is his umbrella. 10. is our umbrella. 38 CHAPTER 2CO EXERCISE 21. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Use this and that. Touch and point to things in the classroom. Example: red \ yellow PARTNER A (book open): red \ yellow PARTNER B (book closed): This (book) is red. ‘That (shirt) is yellow. (Partner B touches a red book and points to a yellow shirt.) red \ blue . red \ green . red \ yellow . blue \ black |. white \ black . orange \ green ayeene Switch roles. PARTNER A: Close your book. PARTNER B: Open your book. Your turn to talk now. 7. red \ pink 8. dark blue \ light blue 9. black \ gray 10. gold \ silver 11. dark brown \ tan 12. purple \ red Cl EXERCISE 22. Listening. Gq Directions: Listen to the sentences. Circle the words you hear. Example: ___is my pen. (This) That 1. This That 2. This That 3. This That 4. This That 5. this that 6. This That 7. this that 8. this thar 9. This That 10. This That Using Be and Have 39(a) My books are on my desk. These are my books. SINGULAR PLURAL, (b) Your books are on your desk. Those are your books. | this » these that > those Co EXERCISE 23. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with these or those. ES SS = 1 are my books. 2. are your pencils. 5. are your hats. 6. are their jackets. CO EXERCISE 24. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use the words in parentheses. 1. (This, These) ___These books belong to me. (That, Those) ___That ___ book belongs to Kate. 2. (This, These) coat is black. (That, Those) coats are tan. 40. CHAPTER 23. (This, These) _____________ earrings are gold. (That, Those) earrings are silver. 4. (This, These) _______ pencil belongs to Alex. (That, Those) __________ pencil belongs to Olga. 5. (This, These) _____________ sunglasses belong to me. (That, Those) _______ sunglasses belong to you. 6. (This, These) _________ exercise is easy. (That, Those) exercises are hard, 7. Students are sitting at (this, these) _________ desks, but (that, those) ______ desks are empty. 8. (This, These) book is on my desk. (That, Those) books are on your desk. C0 EXERCISE 25. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Use this, that, these, or those. Touch and point to things in the classroom. Example: PARTNER A (book open): book PARTNER B (book closed): This is my book. That is your book. PARTNER A (book open): books PARTNER B (book closed): These are my books. Those are your books. 1. notebook 4. dictionary 2. coat 5. purse 3. coats 6. glasses Swoitch roles. Partner A: Close your book. Partner B: Open your book. Your turn to talk now. 7. notebooks 10. pens 8. shoes 11. pen 9. wallet 12. desk Using Be and Have 412-8 ASKING QUESTIONS WITH WHAT AND WHO + BE (a) What is this (thing)? It’s a pen. What asks about things. (b) Who is that (man)? ‘That’s Mr. Lee. Who asks about people. (©) What are those (things)? They're pens. (@) Who are they? ‘They're Mr. and Mrs. Lee. | Note: In questions with what and who, + is is followed by a singular word. + are is followed by a plural word. (© What's this? CONTRACTIONS (f) Who’s that man? ‘what is = what's who is = coho’s CO EXERCISE 26. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the questions with what or who and is or are. 1. A: ___Who is _ that woman? B: She’s my sister. Her name is Sonya. ee hose things B: They're ballpoint pens. 3. A that? B: That's Ms. Walenski. 4A: this? B: That’s my new notebook. 5. A: Look at those people over there. they? B: I'm not sure, but I think they're new students from Thailand. 6A: your name? B: Anita, 7A your grammar teacher? B: Mr. Cook. 8A: ___________your favorite teachers? B: Mr. Cook and Ms. Rosenberg. 42. CHAPTER 29 AD a rabbit? B: It’s a small furry animal with big ears. 10 Aes bats? B: They’re animals that can fly. They're not birds. Cl EXERCISE 27. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Talk about things and people in the classroom. You can look at your book before you speak. When you speak, look at your partner. Example: What's this? PARTNER A (book open): What's this? (indicating a book) PARTNER B (book closed): This is your grammar book. PARTNER A (book open): Who's that? (indicating a classmate) PARTNER B (book closed): That’s Ivan. 1, What’s this? 2. Who’s that? 3. What's that? 4, What are these? 5. Who's this? 6. What are those? Switch roles. PARTNER A: Close your book. PARTNER B: Open your book. Your turn to ask questions. Use new people and things in your questions 7. Who's this? 8. What's this? 9. What are those? 10. What’s that? 11, Who's that? 12. What are these? Using Be and Have 43Co EXERCISE 28. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Parr 1. Write the names of the parts of the body on the illustration. Use the words in the list ankle ear foot leg shoulder arm elbow hand mouth side back oe head neck teeth chest fingers knee nose toes Parr 1. With your partner, take turns asking questions with this, that, these, and those. Note: Both partners can ask about both pictures. Example: PARTNER A: What is this? PARTNER B: This is his leg. PARTNER B: What are those? PARTNER A: Those are his fingers. 44 CHAPTER 2Cl EXERCISE 29. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Close your books for this activity. Your teacher will ask questions. Answer with this, that, these, and those. Example: hand ‘TEACHER: What is this? (The teacher indicates her or his hand.) STUDENT: That is your hand. oR TEACHER: What is that? (The teacher indicates a student’s hand.) STUDENT: This is my hand. 1. nose 6. knee 2. eyes 7. foot 3. arm 8. shoulder 4. elbow 9. fingers 5. legs 10. ears CO EXERCISE 30. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Ask your partner questions about the picture on p. 46. Use What's this? What's that? What are these? What are those? Partner A: Use the list below to point out items on the picture. Partner B: Look at the picture on p. 46 and name the items your partner points to. Example: apples PARTNER A: What are these? (pointing to apples in the picture) PARTNER B: These are apples. Example: wee PARTNER A: What's this? (touching a tree in the picture) PARTNER B: This is a tree. 1. apples 4. cars 7. clouds 10. bat 2. fence 5. apple tree 8. dog 11. trees 3. log 6. cow 9. egg 12. turtle Switch roles. Partner B: Use the list to point out items on the picture. Partner A: Look at the picture on p. 46 and name the items your partner points to. 13. animals 16. bee 19. beehive 22. wings 14. grass 17. fences 20. bird 23, tree 15. birds 18. bees 21. chicken 24. hill Using Be and Have 4546 CHAPTER 2CO EXERCISE 31. Chapter review: error analysis. Directions: Correct the errors. are 1. We 4s students. 2. Ino hungry. 3. Lam student. He is teacher. 4. Yoko not here. She at school. 5. I'm from Mexico, Where you are from? 6. Roberto he is a student in your class? 7. Those pictures are beautifuls. 8. This is you dictionary. It not my dictionary. 9. Mr. Lee have a brown coat. 10. They are n’t here today. 11. This books are expensive. 12. Cuba is a island. Cl EXERCISE 32. Chapter review. Directions: Circle the correct completion. Example: Those expensive, A. book is (B.) books are CC. books is 1. Ann a grammar book. A. have B. is C. has 2. This floor A. dirty is B. dirty C. is dirty 3. yellow. ‘A. A banana are B. A banana is C. Bananas is Using Be and Have 47BO! is your apartment? ANN: It’s on Forest Street. A. What B. Where C. 5. Mike is engineer. Aa B. an c. 6. Give this to Ann, Itis dictionary. A. she B. an c. 7. YOKo: these? Gina: My art books. I’m taking an art history course. A. What is B. Who are a 8. TOM: Are you hungry? suE: Yes, Arm B. I'm not c 9. books are really expensive. A. Those B. They c 10. TINA: _____ that? yim: That’s Paul Carter. A. Who's B. What's c. 11. That is A. a mistakes B. mistakes c 12. PAUL: in your class? ERIC: No. A. Mr. Kim B. Is Mr. Kim c. CO EXERCISE 33. Chapter review. Who . on her What are Tam This Where’s a mistake . Mr. Kim is he Directions: Complete the sentences with am, is, or are. Use not if necessary. 1. Lemons vegetables. 2. Alemon a kind of fruit. 3,1_____ from the United States. 4, We human beings. 5. Eggs oval. 6. Chickens birds, but bats 48 CHAPTER 2 birds.7. Salt 8. Soccer a sport. 9. Soccer and basketball 10. Africa acountry, It CO EXERCISE 34. Chapter review. Directions: Complete the conversations. 1. A: Where your book? B: Yoko it, A: Where your notebooks? B: Ali and Roberto — eet Boer sweet. sports. a continent. my notebooks. 2. A: this? B: It picture of my family. ee ae Bi Thats ee father, A: they? B: My brother and sister. 3. A: What’s B: I don’t know. Ask someone else. A: What’s ? B: It’s 4A: an animal? B: Yes A animals? B: Yes. SS an insect? B: No, it’s not. It’s an animal too. Using Be and Have 49SA Wee B: He’s A: Where B: They're 6. A: turtle? B: Just a minute. Let me look in my dictionary. Okay. A turtle is a reptile. A: reptile? B: animal that has cold blood. snake a reptile too? Bs en ee repules too! Cl EXERCISE 35, Review: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Give directions using the given prepositions. You can look at your book. When you speak, look at your partner. Example: in PARTNER A: Put your pen in your pocket. PARTNER B: (Partner B puts herihis pen in herlhis pocket.) PARTNER A: Your turn now, Partner A Partner B Lin 1. in 2. on 2. between 3. above 3. behind 4. under 4. above 5. between 5. on 6. next to 6. next to 7. behind 7. under 50 CHAPTER 2C1 EXERCISE 36. Activity: let's talk. Directions: Do one or more of these activities. In each activity, ask What’s this? What's that? What are these? What are those? and any other questions you want to ask. acriviry 1. Pairwork. Use a blank sheet of paper. Draw a simple picture of an outdoor scene: for example, things you can see in a park, on a city street, in the country, at a marketplace. Show your picture to a partner and answer questions about it. Sample drawing: activiry 2, Group work. Volunteers can draw pictures of outdoor scenes on the chalkboard, and the class will ask questions about the pictures. ACTIVITY 3. Pairwork or group work. Bring to class pictures without people in them: postcards, photographs, magazine ads, etc. Show them to a partner or the class and answer questions about them. Your teacher will help answer questions about vocabulary. activity 4. Pairwork or group work. Draw the floor plan of your dream house. Show where the kitchen is, the bedrooms, etc. Show the drawing to a partner or the class and answer questions about it. Cl EXERCISE 37. Chapter review. Directions: Complete the sentences in this composition by Carlos. My name ___is__ Carlos. ___/. amor I’m _ from Mexico. 7 2 a student. owenty years old. 7 ‘My family lives in Mexico City. : father a @ businessman. ______ fifty-one years old. _____ mother 7 3S ahousewife. ____ forty-nine years old. 3 0 Using Be and Have 51I _______ two sisters and one brother. The names of my sisters Rosa and Patricia. Rosa ______a teacher. 2 3 twenty-eight years old. Patricia ______a student. 1% 5 eighteen years old. The name of ______ brother 76 7 Pedro, _______ an engineer. He is married. He 78 8 two children, 2 live in a dormitory. _____a tall building on Pine Street. My address. 2 3225 Pine St. I live with my roommate. ____ name is Bob. B a from Chicago, _______ nineteen years old. a % Ilike my classes. ________ interesting. I like 2 classmates. friendly. 2 Cl EXERCISE 38. Review. Directions: Write a composition by completing the sentences, (Use your own paper.) Note: A sentence begins with a capital letter (a big letter), and a sentence ends with a period (.)* (My nie a cnident years old. My family lives in ___. ____ father ____ years old. mother ____years old. Thave _____sister(s) and _____brother(s). The name(s) of my sister(s) is a/an : years old. (Write about each sister.) The name(s) of my brother(s) isa + —_____ years old. (Write about each brother.) I live in (a dormitory, a house, an apartment) . My address AT live with ee Se ame) like classes. are and . Hike classmates. They “In British English, a period is called “full stop.” 52. CHAPTER 2CHAPTER 3 Using the Simple Present SINGULAR PLURAL, Ist PERSON T talk we talk 2nd PERSON you talk: you talk 3rd PERSON she talks they talle he talks it rains Notice: The verb after she, he, it (3rd person singular) has a final -s: zalks. (@) Leat breakfast every morning. (b) Olga speaks English every day. (©) We sleep every night. (@) They go to the beach every weekend. ‘The simple present tense expresses habits. In (a): Eating breakfast is a habit, a usual activity. Every morning = Monday morning, ‘Tuesday morning, Wednesday morning, ‘Thursday morning, Friday morning, Saturday ‘morning, and Sunday morning. ‘She wakes up every morning at 7:00. He shaves every morning.Cl EXERCISE 1. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. PART I, What do you do every morning? On the left is a list of habits. Check (V) your habits every morning. Put them in order. What do you do first, second, third, etc.? Write them on the lines. HABITS MY HABITS EVERY MORNING eat breakfast 1. The alarm clock rings. go to class 2, __1 turn off the alarm clock. _ ——__ put on my clothes 3 drink a cup of coffee/tea 4 shave 5 put on my make-up 6. take a shower/bath 7 nee pct up 8 —— pick up my books 9 walk to the bathroom 10. —__ watch TV 1. ook in the mirror 12. —_ tum off the alarm clock fe goto the kitchen/the cafeteria 14. _——__ brush/comb my hair 15. say good-bye to my roommate/ 16. wife/husband/parents/partner/ete. —__ brush my teeth do exercises wash my face PART 1, Tell a partner about your habits every morning. Close your book. 54 CHAPTER 3Cl EXERCISE 2. Listening. Gq Directions: Listen to the sentences and circle the verbs you hear. wakes 2. wake wakes 3. get gets 4. g0 goes 5. do does 6. watch watches 7. take takes 8. take takes 9. take takes 10. talk talks Co EXERCISE 3. Sentence practice. Directions: Choose the correct completions. 1. My mother and father ___eat ________ breakfast at 7:00 every day. cat eats 2. My mother tea with her breakfast. drink drinks 3.1 a bath every morning. take takes 4. My sister a shower. take takes 5.1 English with my friends. study studies 6. We to school together every morning. walk walks 7. Class at 9:00 every day. begin begins 8. It at 12:00 for lunch. stop stops 9. We in the cafeteria. eat eats 10. My friends and I home at 3:00 every afternoon. 20 goes Using the simple Present 553-2 USING FREQUENCY ADVERBS: ALWAYS, USUALLY, OFTEN, SOMETII , SELDOM, RARELY, NEVER (@) Bob always eats breakfast. always (©) Mary usually eats breakfast. usually (©) They often watch TV at night. often (a) Tom sometimes watches TV, | SUSECT +} someximes) + vERD ae : seldom © I seldom watch TV. rarely © I rarely drink milk. never (g) I never eat paper. The words in this list are called “frequency adverbs.” They come between the subject and the simple present verb.* *Some frequency adverbs can also come at the beginning or at the end of sentence. For example: Sometimes I get up at seven. I sometimes get up at seven. 1 getup at seven sometimes. Also: See Chart 3-4, p. 59, for the use of frequency adverbs with be. C1 EXERCISE 4. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences in the chart. Use each frequency adverb once. “always often never rarely —_— seldom sometimes usually Sun, ‘Wed. |Thurs. Sat Mon. 1, Ann _always drinks tea with lunch, SB |e & alalal Fri, See 2, Bob _____ drinks tea with lunch. S\e|e 3. Maria _____ inks tea with lunch. S\F|\e 4, Gary ____. drinks tea with lunch. viele 5. Ali ____ drinks tea with lunch. Ble 6. Sonya ______ rinks tea with lunch. & 7. Joe ______ drinks tea with lunch. 56 CHAPTER 3(I EXERCISE 5. Sentence practice. Directions: Write $ over the subject and V over the verb in each sentence. Then rewrite the sentences, adding the italicized frequency adverbs. a akeays never - seldom sometimes . usually rarely often always sv I cat breakfast in the morning. J always eat breakfast in the morning. I eat carrots for breakfast. for breakfast. I watch TV in the morning. in the morning. Ihave tea with dinner. with dinner. Sonya eats lunch at the cafeteria. at the cafeteria, Joe drinks tea. ‘We listen to music after dinner. after dinner. The students speak English in the classroom. in the classroom, Cl EXERCISE 6. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Your teacher will ask you to talk about your morning, afternoon, and evening activities. Close your books for this activity. ‘TEACHER: Tell me something you Yeene always do in the morning. 6. never do in the afternoon. never do in the morning. 7. often do in the evening. sometimes do in the morning. 8. sometimes do in the evening. usually do in the afternoon. 9. rarely do in the evening. seldom do in the afternoon. 10. sometimes do on weekends. Using the Simple Present 57once a day. twice a day. three times a day. four times a day. ete. (b) Isee my grandparents three times a week. (© see my aunt once a month. (@) see my cousin Sam twice a year. (@) [drink tea ‘We can express frequency by saying how many times something happens a day. a week. a month. @ year. (© Isee my roommate every morning. I pay my bills every month. Isee my doctor every year. Every is singular. The noun that follows (e-g-5 morning) must be singular. INCORRECT: every mornings Cl EXERCISE 7. Sentence practice. Directions: How often do the people in the chart take the bus? Use the chart to complete the sentences. Sun. | Mon. | Tues. | Wed. [Thurs] Fri. | Sat. Hamid 28 | S| 2G) S| a8) a | aa Anna aa Yoko 2) aa Marco 2) 28 | ae) ae a Iee af| a0 |e en|am Mr. Wu Mrs. Cook 22/8) 5 1, Hamid takes the bus ____seven times _ a week. That means he always __ takes the bus. 2. Anna takes the bus a week, That means she takes the bus. 3. Yoko takes the bus aweek. That means she takes the bus. 5B CHAPTER 34. Marco takes the bus __a week. That means he takes the bus. 5. Joe takes the bus _________ a week. That means he takes the bus. 6. Mr.Wu takes the bus. 7. Mrs. Cook takes the bus ____a week. That means she takes the bus. Cl EXERCISE 8. Listening. @ Directions: Listen to the sentences and circle the words you hear. a} mornings 5. day days 2. year years 6. time times 3. year years 7. night nights 4, day days 8. month months iCY ADVERBS WITH B. SUBJECT + BE + FREQUENCY Frequency adverbs follow am, is, are ‘ADVERB (the simple forms of be). always usually often Tom + is + | sometimes) + late for class. seldom rarely never SUBJECT + FREQUENCY + OTHER SIMPLE Frequency adverbs come before all ADVERB ‘PRESENT VERBS simple present verbs except be. always usually often Tom + | sometimes} + comes late. seldom rarely never Using the Simple Present 59CO EXERCISE 9. Sentence practice. Directions: Add the frequency adverbs to the sentences. 1. always Ann is on time for class. >» Ann is always on time for class. 2. akways Ann comes to class on time. > Ann always comes to class on time, 3. often Maria is late for class. 4. often Maria comes to class late. 5. never It snows in my hometown. 6. never Itis very cold in my hometown. 7. usually Bob is at home in the evening. 8. usually Bob stays at home in the evening 9. seldom ‘Tom studies at the library in the evening. 10. seldom His classmates are at the library in the evening. 11. sometimes I skip breakfast. 12. rarely Thave time for a big breakfast. 13. usually Tam very hungry by lunchtime. 14. never Sue drinks coffee. Co EXERCISE 10. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Talk about what your classmates do in the evening. PART I. Check (/) the boxes to describe your activities after 5:00 P.M. always | usually | often | sometimes | seldom rarely never eat dinner go to a movie go shopping 0 swimming spend time with my friends be at home listen to music watch videos or DVDs speak English send e-mails F[S]e|eisfolelelels[- - surf the Internet drink coffee after 9:00 13. be in bed at ten o'clock i. go to bed late 60 CHAPTER 3Parr wt. Exchange books with a partner. Your partner will tell the class two things about your evening. Example: (Carlos) is usually at home. He sometimes sends e-mails. (Olga) sometimes drinks coffee after 9:00. She usually goes to bed late. (© EXERCISE 11. Paragraph practice. Directions: Write about a typical day in your life, from the time you get up in the morning until you go to bed. Use the following words to show the order of your activities: then, next, at . . . o’clock, after that, later. Example:* | usually get up at seven-thirty. | shave, brush my teeth, and take a shower. Then | put on my clothes and go to the student cafeteria for breakfast. After that | go back to my room. | sometimes watch the news on TV. At 8:15, Heave the dormitory. | go to class. My class begins at 8:30. I'm in class from 8:30 to 11:30. After that | eat lunch. | usually have a sandwich and a cup of tea for lunch, (Continue until you complete your day.) SPELLING AND PRONUNCIATION OF FINAL -ES SPELLING | PRONUNCIATION -sh (a) push > pushes ——_pushiaa! Ending of verb: -sh, -ch, -s8, -x. -ch (b) teach > teaches teachiaz! Spelling: add -es. -ss () kiss > hisses issfaz! Pronunciation: /az/. -x @) fix > fixes Jfixioa! CO EXERCISE 12. Sentence practice. Directions: Use the verbs in italics to complete the sentences. 1. brush Alice ___brushes ___ her hair every morning. 2a each Alem eee ee Engi 3, fe Jason _____________his breakfast every morning. He makes eggs and toast. 4. drink Sonya______ tea every afternoon. 5. watch Joon Kee often _________ television at night. 6. hiss Peter always ______hiis children goodnight. Using the Simple Present 617. wear ‘Tina usually jeans to class. 8. wash Eric seldom dishes. 9. walk Jenny - her dog twice each day. 10. stretch, When Jack gets up in the morning, he and yawn Ci EXERCISE 13. Listening. Gy) Directions: Listen to the sentences and circle the verbs you hear. 1, teach 6. watch watches 2. teach teaches 7. brush brushes 3. fix fixes 8, brush brushes 4. fix fixes 9. wash washes 5. watch watches 10. wash washes Cl EXERCISE 14. Verb form practice. Directions: Complete the sentences, Use the words in the list and add -s or -es. ‘Then practice reading the story aloud (with a partner or in small groups). Laura ___leaves __ her office every night at 5:00 and ______ on. a bus to go home. She has a regular schedule every evening. She dinner and then _____ down to eat at 6:00. After she the dishes, she 2 cnithe Ty: She umally ine news and then a movie, At 9:00, she ____a shower. She always her teeth after her shower. Then she picks up a book and in bed for a while. She usually asleep before 10:00. 62 CHAPTER 3> cries consonant + ~y. ty => tries change y to 4, add -es. (b)pay > pays End of verb: vowel + -y. enjoy > — enjoys Spelling: add -s. CO EXERCISE 15. Spelling practice. Directions: Complete the chart with the correct form of each verb. 1. Lery. He 2. We study. She 3. They say. It 4. You worry. ‘My mother 5. We fly. A bird 6. I stay awake. Pea 7. Lenjoy games. oo, 8. Students buy books. My brother books. 9. We pay bills. Gina bills. 10. Iplay music. 74 My friend music. Cl EXERCISE 16. Sentence practice. Directions: Use the words in italics to complete the sentences. 1. pay, always Boris ___always pays __ his bills on time. 2. ery, seldom Our baby at night. 3. study Paul _______at the library every day. 4. stay, usually Laura home at night. Using the Simple Present 635. fy Kunio is a pilot. He a plane. 6. carry, akeays Carol _______ her books to class. 7. buy, seldom ([ Lica 4 8. worry Tina is a good student, but she —___ about her grades. 9 enjoy Ron _____ good food. IRREGULAR SINGULAR VERBS HAS, DOES, GOES (@) Thave a book. “| Have, do, and go have irregular forms for he } + has (haz! third person singular: (b) He has a book. it have -> has et renee do = does (©) Ido my work. she go > goes he | + does /doz! (d) She does her work. it | (e) They go to school. she he } + goes /gowz/ (f) She goes to school. it C EXERCISE 17. Sentence practice. Directions: Use the given verbs to complete the sentences. 1. do Pierre always ___does __ his homework. 2. do ‘We always ___do___ our homework. 3. have Yoko and Hamid _____ their books. 4, have Mrs, Chang acar. 5. go Andy to school every day. 64 CHAPTER 36. have Jessica _______a snack every night around ten. 7. do Sara seldom ____ her homework. 8.do We ___ exercises in class every day. 9. go,go Roberto ___ downtown every weekend. He and his wife shopping. 10. go My friends often to the beach. Cl EXERCISE 18. Listening. . Gq Directions: Listen to the story. Complete the sentences with is, has, does, or goes. Marco, —s__ a student. He —bas_ an unusual schedule. All of his classes are at night. His first class _____ at 6:00 ram. every day. He : a break from 7:30 to 8:00. Then he ___ classes from 8:00 to 10:00. He leaves school and __ home at 10:00. After he inner, he watches TV. Then he ____ his homework from midnight to 3:00 or 4:00 in the morning. Marco his own computer at home. When he finishes his homework, he usually goes on the Internet. He usually stays at his computer until the sun comes up. Then he _____a few exercises, _______ breakfast, and 10 1 to bed. He sleeps all day. Marco thinks his schedule 5 r great, but his friends think it _______ strange. % Using the Simple Present 653-8 SPELLING AND PRONUNCIATION OF FINAL -S/-ES SPELLING PRONUNCIATION (@) rub > rubs rublal To form a simple present verb in 3rd person ride + rides ridefal singular, you usually add only -s, as in (a) and (b). smile —> smiles smile'2! dream —> dreams dream!al In (@): -8 is pronounced /z/. The final sounds in (a) run ~ rune runtzi are “voiced.”* Voiced sounds make your vocal wear -* wears tweartz! cords vibrate. The sound /b/ is a voiced sound. drive + drives drivelal see > sees seelz/ snow > snows snovostz! (b) drink > drinks drinkls! In (b): «s is pronounced /s/. The final sounds in (b) sleep -> sleepe sleepis! are “voiceless.”* Your vocal cords do NoT vibrate write — writes wrivels! with voiceless sounds. You push air through your laugh -> laughs laugh's! teeth and lips. The sound /p/ is a voiceless sound, (© push + pushes pushloz! End of verb: -sh, -ch, -88, -x teach > teaches teachler! Spelling: add -es kiss -> kisses kist92! Pronunciation: /az/ fix > fixes fixioal @) cry > cries erylal End of verb: consonant + -y study > studies study/a! Spelling: change y to i, add -es © pay > pays ayia! End of verb: vowel + -y buy > buys buplal Spelling: change y to i, add -es () have > has Inez! ‘The 3rd person singular forms of have, go, and do 0 goes /gow7! are irregular. do > does ida! *Voiced sounds = b, d, g;1,m,, 5, Voiceless sounds = fb ky py th and all the vowels: a, ei, 0, in think, C1 EXERCISE 19. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Talk about everyday activities using the given verbs. Close your book. eat T eat breakfast every morning. What does (Speaker A) do every morning? : She/He eats breakfast. 4, brush 7. get up 10. do 13. puton 5. have 8. watch 11. listen to 14. carry 6. study 9. speak 12. wash 15. kiss 66 CHAPTER 3CO EXERCISE 20. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use the words in parentheses. Use the simple present tense. Pay special attention to singular and plural and to the spelling of final -s/-es. 1. The students (ask, often) often ask questions in class. 2, Pablo (study, usually) ____________ a the library every evening. 3. Olga (bite) ____ her fingernails when she is nervous. 4, Donna (cash) a check at the bank once a week. 5, Sometimes I (worry) about my grades at school. Sonya (worry, never) _____ about her grades. She (study) —— hard 6. Ms, Jones and Mr. Anderson (seach) at the local high school. Ms. Jones (teach) _______ math. 7. Birds (fy) ____. They (have) wings 8. A bird (fly) . Tt (have) wings. 9. Jason (do, akzoays) his homework. He (go, never) to bed until his homework is finished. 10. Mr. Cook (say; always)* hello to his neighbor in the morning. 11. Ms. Chu (pay, akevays)* attention in class, She (answer) questions. She (listen) to the teacher. She (ask) ______ questions. Using the Simple Present 6712. Sam (enjoy) cooking. He (try, often) _____ new recipes. He (like) _______ to have company for dinner. He (invite) ________ me to dinner once a month. When I arrive, I (go) _ to the kitchen and (watch) ____ him cook. He usually (have) three or four pots on the stove. He (watch) the pots carefully. He (make) abig mess in the kitchen when he cooks. After dinner, he (wash) all the dishes and (clean) __________ the kitchen. I (cook, never) . It (be) _____ too much trouble. But my friend Sam (love) _______ to cook. Cl EXERCISE 21. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Use frequency words like sometimes, rarely, ctc. Part 1. Billy, Jenny, and Peter do many things in their evenings. How often do they do the things in the list? Pay attention to final -s. Example: Billy rarely/seldom does homework. BILLY JENNY PETER do homework once a week 6 days a week every day surf the Internet every day once a week once a month watch TV 3-4 days aweek| 3-4 daysaweek | 3-4 days a week read for pleasure Sdaysaweek | 5 days a week 5 days a week try to go to bed early| once a week 5 nights aweek | 6 nights a week PART I, For homework, write ten sentences about the activities of Billy, Jenny, and Peter. 68 CHAPTER 30 EXERCISE 22. Let's talk and write: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Partner A: ‘Tell Partner B five to ten things you do every morning. You can look at the list you made for Exercise 1. Partner B: Take notes while Parmer A is talking. (You will use these notes later to write a paragraph about Partner A’s usual morning habits.) Switch roles. Partner B: Tell Partner A five to ten things you do every morning. Partner A: Take notes while Partner B is talking. When you finish talking, write a paragraph about your partner’s daily morning activities. Pay special attention to the use of final -s/-es, Show your paragraph to your partner, who will look at your use of final -s/-es. @I do not drink coffee. We do not drink coffee. 4 donot + mance You do not drink coffee. They — donot drink coffee. (b) She does not drink coffee. She He does not drink coffee. He } + does not + main verb It does not drink coffee. i Do and does are called “helping verbs.” Notice in (b): In 3rd person singular, there is no «son the main verbs the final -s is part of does. mncorrecr: She does not drinks coffe. (©) I don’t drink tea. conTRactions: do not = don’t ‘They don’t have a car. does not = doesn’t (@) He doesn’t drink tea, People usually use contractions when they speak. ‘Mary doesn’t have a car. People often use contractions when they write. C EXERCISE 23. Sentence practice. Directions: Use the words in italics to make negative sentences. Use contractions. 1. like, not Ingrid ___doesn’t like tea. 2. like,not 1 ___don’t like _ tea. 3. know, mot Mary and Jim are strangers. Mary Jim. Using the Simple Present 694. need, not 5. snow, not 6. speak, not 7. be, not 8. live, not 9. have, not 10. be, not 11. be, not 12. have, nor 13. have, not 14. be, not 15. rain, not It’s a nice day today. You — your umbrella. It in Bangkok in the winter. an umbrella ee rea I hungry. Butterflies long. A utterthy oes eee EEE 9 ong lites A butterfly __ large. Butterflies large. a We class every day. This city _______ nice weather in the summer. ee cold ody It every day. (1 EXERCISE 24. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Make two sentences about each picture. Example: PARTNER A: Ann takes showers. She doesn’t take baths. Your turn now. PARTNER B: Omar has a dog. He doesn’t have a cat. Your turn now. 70 CHAPTER 3 1, (Ann \ take) showers bathso ~ © 10. . (Omar \ have) acat a dog . 1\ drink) tea coffee |. (Rob and Ed \ live) an apartment a house . (Becky \ drive) a new car an old car . \ play) soccer tennis . (Mr. Davis \ teach) English French . (we \ use) typewriters computers . (Alex \ watch) news reports old movies (Marco \ study) history physics Using the Simple Present 71Cl EXERCISE 25. Let's talk: game. Directions: Sit in a circle. Choose any of the verbs in the list. Make sentences with not. have like need play read speak Example: like SPEAKER A: I don’t like bananas. SPEAKER B: (Speaker A) doesn’t like bananas. I don’t have a dog. SPEAKER C: (Speaker A) doesn’t like bananas. (Speaker B) doesn’t have a dog. I don’t play baseball. Continue around the circle, each time repeating the information of your classmates before saying your sentence. If you have trouble, your classmates can help you. Your teacher will be the last one to speak. Co EXERCISE 26. Sentence practice. Directions: Use verbs from the list to complete the sentences. Make all of the sentences negative by using does not or do not. You can use contractions (doesn’t /don’t). Some verbs may be used more than one time. 1. Bob ____doesn’t go to school every day. 2. My roommates are from Japan. They Spanish. 3. Roberto has a beard. He in the morning. eo classion Sunday, 5. Sally is healthy. She cigarettes. 6. Jane and Alex always have lunch at home. They at the cafeteria. 7. Sometimes 1 my homework in the evening. I watch TV instead. 8. My sister likes tea, but she —____ coffee. 72 CHAPTER 39, Hamid is a careful writer. He when he writes. 10. I'm lazy. I 11. Sometimes Ann her shoes when she goes outside. OC EXERCISE 27. Let's talk: class activity. mistakes in spelling exercises in the morning. Directions: Use the given words to make truthful sentences. Example: Grass \ blue. SPEAKER A: Grass isn’t blue. SPEAKER B: Grass is green. Example: Dogs \ tails. SPEAKER C: Dogs have tails. SPEAKER D: People* don’t have tails, 1. A restaurant \ sell shoes. 2. A restaurant \ serve food. 3. People \ wear clothes. 4. Animals \ wear clothes. 5. A child \ need love, food, care, and toys. 6. A child \ need a driver’s license. 7. Refrigerators \ hot inside. 8. Refrigerators \ cold inside. 9. A cat \ have whiskers. "People isa plural noun, It takes a plural verb. 10. lL. 12. 13, 14, 15. 16. 17. A bird \ have whiskers. Doctors \ take care of sick people. Doctors in my country \ be expensive. A bus \ carry people from one place to another. It\ be cold today. English \ be an easy language to learn. People in this city \ be friendly. It\ rain a lot in this city. whiskers Using the Simple Present 73E SIMPLE PRESEN’ S/INO QUESTIONS DO/DOES + SUBJECT + MAIN VERB QUESTION FORMS, SIMPLE PRESENT @) ik 2 a ; = = ce pees Dol you e coffee? | py . | © Do a like coffee? | Dore | + main verb (simple form) (d) Do they like coffee? | Do they Does she Does he } + main verb (simple form) Does it (©) Does she like coffee? | Notice in (¢): The main verb in the question does not (f) Does he like coffee? | have a final -s. The final -s is part of does. (g) Does it taste good? | INCORRECT: Does she likes coffee? (h) Are you a student? ‘When the main verb is a form of be, do is NOT used. INCORRECT: Do you be a student? See Chart 2-1, p. 24, for question forms with be. QUESTION, SHORT ANSWER Do, don’t, does, and doesn’t are used in the short answers to yes/no questions in the simple present. (Do you like tea? Yes, I do. No, I don’t. G@) Does Bob like tea? > Yes, he does. No, he doesn’t. C1 EXERCISE 28. Question practice. Directions: Make questions. Give short answers. 1. a Do like tea? Be Yes do ike ten) 2. A: ___Do you like coffee? _ B; __No,/don't’ ___ (1 don’t like coffee.) 3. A Bo don’t speak Chinese.) 4A: (Ann speaks Italian.) 74 CHAPTER 3B: —_______ (Ann and Tom don’t speak Arabic.) 6A: (I do exercises every morning.) TA: (Sue has a cold.) 8. A: (im doesn’t do his homework every day.) 9A: ee 0 ann alot in Anal) 10. A: (Frogs don’t have tails.) CO EXERCISE 29. Interview and question practice: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Ask and answer questions. You can look at your book before you speak. When you speak, look at your partner. Example: drive a car PARTNER A: Do you drive a car? PARTNER B: No, I don’t. Do you drive a car? PARTNER A: Yes, I do. yes no yes no 1. live in an apartment | Bl 6. dream in English O 0 2. go to movie theaters Ele Gl 7. haveacell phone OQ O 3. play tennis Gl 8. like vegetables bo 4. enjoy sports on TV oo 9. eat red meat Bo 5. read newspapers every day O 0 10. like chocolate ee PART I. Write five sentences about your partner. Write five sentences about yourself. Using the Simple Present 75O EXERCISE 30. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Ask and answer questions. Parr I. ‘Take turns making questions and giving short answers. Use the names of your classmates in the questions. Note: This is speaking practice. Do not write the answers yet. Example: PARTNER A: PARTNER B: PARTNER A: Is Ali in class today? PARTNER B: Yes, he is. Example: PARTNER B: (He is in class today.) PARTNER A: PARTNER B: Does Yoko speak Spanish? PARTNER A: No, she doesn’t. 1. Partner A: Partner B: 2. Partner B: Partner A: 3. Partner A: Partner B: 4. Partner B: Partner A: 5. Partner A: Partner B: 6. Partner B: Partner A: 76 CHAPTER 3 (She doesn’t speak Spanish.) —______ (He speaks English in class every day.) (She comes to class every day.) (They're in class today.) _—___ She sits in the same seat every day.) (He wears jeans every day.) (They aren’t from Australia.)7. Partner A: Partner B: (They don’t have dictionaries on their desks.) 8. Partner B: Pane Ag E Uey speak Baglieh) PART 1. Now write the questions and answers in your book. Cl EXERCISE 31. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner to make conversations. Begin your answers with no. Example: children \ walk to school every day PARTNER A: Do the children walk to school every day? oS SPEAKER B: No, they don’t. They take the bus. PARTNER A: Your turn now. 1. the students \ come to class at 10:00 2. Amy \ watch TV in the mornings 3. Luis \ write letters 4, Beth \ drive a car 5. the workers \ wear shoes 6. Joe \ have a cat a worker Joe Using the Simple Present 773-11 THE SIMPLE PRESENT: ASKING INFORMATION QUESTIONS WITH WHERE (WHERE) + Do! + suBJECT + MAIN SHORT ANSWER a yes/no question DOES ‘VERB an information question @) Do they live in Miami? > Yes, they do. Where asks for information No, they don't. | about a place (©) Where do they ‘ive? > In Miami. ‘The form of yes/no questions and information © Does Gina _live in Rome? > Yes, she does. | questions is the same: No, she doesn’t, | DolDoes + subject + main (@ Where does Gina live? > In Rome. verb Cl EXERCISE 32. Question practice. Directions: Make questions. 1A: Does Jean eat lunch at the cafeteria every day? ‘Yes, she does. (Jean eats lunch at the cafeteria every day.) Where does Jean eat lunch every day? : At the cafeteria. (Jean eats lunch at the cafeteria every day.) B: At the post office. (Peter works at the post office.) B: Yes, he does. (Peter works at the post office.) ‘Yes, I do. (I live in an apartment.) in an apartment. (I live in an apartment.) B: Ata restaurant, (Bill eats dinner at a restaurant every day.) B: In the front row. (I sit in the front row during class.) 78 CHAPTER 3B: At the University of Toronto. (Jessica goes to school at the University of Toronto.) 10. A: B: On my desk. (My book is on my desk.) 1. A: B: To class. (I go to class every morning.) 12. A: B: In class. (The students are in class right now.) 13. A: B: In Australia. (Kangaroos live in Australia.) (1 EXERCISE 33. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Partner A: Ask your partner questions using where. Your book is open. Partner B: Answer the questions. Your book is closed. Example: live PARTNER A (book open): Where do you live? PARTNER B (book closed): (free response) live eat lunch every day g0 after class study at night g0 to school buy school supplies oe os Switch roles. Partner A: Close your book. Partner B: Open your book. Your turn to ask questions now. 7. buy your clothes 8. go on weekends 9. sit during class 10. eat dinner 11. do your homework 12. go on vacation Using the Simple Present 79iT: ASKING INFORMATI: QUESTIONS WITH WHEN AND WHAT TIME Q-woRD* + Dol + SUBJECT + MAIN’ SHORT ANSWER When and what time Dogs VERB ask for information about time. (@) When = do -you 20 to class? > At nine o’clock. (b) What time do you go to class? > At nine o'clock. (© When does Anna — eat dinner? > At six (@) What time does Anna eat dinner? > At six RM. (©) What time do you usually go to class?_| ‘The frequency adverb usually comes immediately after the subject in a question: Q-word + doesido + subject + usually + main verb *A“QWord” is “a question word.” Wher, tem, shat, zhat rime, tho, and why are examples of question words. EXERCISE 34, Question practice. Directions: Make questions. 1A: When/What time do you eat breakfast? : At 7:30. (I eat breakfast at 7:30 in the morning.) B: 2. Ba When/What time do you usual weakfast? B: At 7:00. (1 usually eat breakfast at 7:00.) 3. Ar B: At 6:45. (I get up at 6:45.) : At 6:30, (Maria usually gets up at 6:30.) 5. A: B: At 8:15. (The movie starts at 8:15.) : Around 11:00. (I usually go to bed around 11:00.) Ta ede B: At half-past twelve. (I usually eat lunch at half-past twelve.) At 5:30. (The restaurant opens at 5:30.) 80 CHAPTER 39. A: B: At 9:05. (The train leaves at 9:05.) : Between 6:30 and 8:00. (I usually eat dinner between 6:30 and 8:00.) LL. A: B: At eight fifteen. (My classes begin at eight fifteen.) 12. A: B: Atl :00 P.M. (The library closes at 10:00 P.M. on Saturday.) (CO EXERCISE 35. Let's talk: class interview. Directions: Ask and answer questions. Parr 1, Walk around the room. Ask a question using when or what time. Write the answer and your classmate’s name. Then ask another classmate a different question. Example: eat breakfast SPEAKER A: When/What time do you eat breakfast? SPEAKER B: I usually eat breakfast around seven o'clock. Name Answer SPEAKER A: (rite) Yoko ZAM, Name Answer 1. wake up 2. usually get up 3. eat breakfast 4, leave home in the morning 5. usually get to class 6. eat lunch 7. get home from school 8. have dinner 9. usually study in the evening 10. go to bed PART Ht, ‘Tell the class about a few of the answers you got. Using the simple Present 81Ci EXERCISE 36. Interview and paragraph practice. Directions: Interview someone (a friend, a roommate, a classmate, etc.) about her/his daily schedule. Use the information from the interview to write a paragraph. Some questions you might want to ask during the interview: What do you do every morning? What time do you What do you do every afternoon? When do you . What do you do every evening? Where do you . 3-13, SUMMARY: INFORMATION QUESTIONS W} AND DO QworD + BE + SUBJECT LONG ANSWER (@ Where is ‘Thailand? > Thailand és in Southeast Asia. () Where are your books? + My books ave on my desk. (© When is the concert? “+ The concert és on April 3rd. (@) What is your name? > My name is Yoko. (©) Whattime is iv > Ités ten-thirty @woRD + DO + SUBJECT + MAINVERB | LONG ANSWER (f) Where do you Five? + [live in Los Angeles. (@) What time does the plane arrive? ~The plane arrives at six-fifteen. (a) What do monkeys eat? + Monkeys eat fruit, plants, and insects. @) When does Bob study? > Bob studies in the evenings. | NOTICE: In questions with be as the main and only verb, the subject follows be. In simple present questions with verbs other than be, the subject comes between do/does and the main verb. C EXERCISE 37. Question practice. Directions: Complete the questions in the written conversations. Use is, are, does, or do. CONVERSATION ONE A: What time ___does _ the movie start? 1 B: Seven-fifteen, ____ you want to go with us? A: Yes, What time ___it now? 3 B: Almost seven o'clock, ______you ready to leave? A: Yes, let’s go. 82 CHAPTER 3CONVERSATION TWO A: Where my keys to the car? 3 B: I don’t know. Where you usually keep them? é In my purse. But they're not there. : Are you sure? ? : Yes, _______ you see ther No, ______ they in one of your pockets? z I don’t think so. your husband have them? 2 No. He has his own set of car keys. Well, I hope you find them. ‘Thanks. PoP DP w CONVERSATION THREE you go to school? 0 Yes. your brother go to school too? 7 No. He quit school last semester. He has a job now. it a good job? 2 Not really. Where he work? 3 Ata restaurant, He washes dishes. he live with you? 74 No, he lives with my parents. oP PP BP we DP & your parents unhappy that he quit school? 5 B: They're very unhappy about it. A: they want him to return to school? 6 B: Ofcourse. They have many dreams for him and his future. Using the Simple Present 83Cl EXERCISE 38. Let's tall Directions: Work in small groups. Complete the sentences with is, are, do, or does. Circle if the answer is yes or no. Discuss your answers with your classmates. If you don’t know the answer, guess. Noptune ‘Uranus 1, ___Does the moon go around the earth? Ges) no 2, ______ the sun go around the earth? yes no the planets go around the sun? yes no 4, _______ the sun a planer? yes no 5. stars planets? yes no Ce Veous howe yes no 7, _____ Neptune easy to see? yes no 8. _____ Jupiter windy? yes no 9, _______ Venus and Mars go around the sun? —_yes no 10. Saturn and Uranus have moons? yes no 84 CHAPTER 3CO EXERCISE 39. Question practice. Directions: Complete the questions and answers with your own words. 1. A: Do > B: No, I don't. 2. A: Where are ? B: I don’t know. 3. A: What time does > B: 4A: When do B: 5. A: Is ? B: 6. A: What is B: 7. A: Are 2 B: a B: ————————————— B: 10. A: What does OO? B: Cl EXERCISE 40. Chapter review. Directions: Add -s or es where necessary. ABDUL AND PABLO $ (lives = live + /2/) (1) My friend Abdul live, in an apartment near school. (2) He walk to school almost every day. (3) Sometimes he catch a bus, especially if it’s cold and rainy outside. (4) Abdul share the apartment with Pablo. (5) Pablo come from Venezuela. Using the Simple Present 85(6) Abdul and Pablo go to the same school. (7) They take English classes. (8) Abdul speak Arabic as his first language, and Pablo speak Spanish. (9) They communicate in English. (10) Sometimes Abdul try to teach Pablo to speak a little Arabic, and Pablo give Abdul Spanish lessons. (11) They laugh a lot during the Arabic and Spanish lessons. (12) Abdul enjoy having Pablo as his roommate, but he miss his family back in Saudi Arabia. CO EXERCISE 41. Chapter review: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. PART 1. Partner A: Ask Partner B five questions about things s/he has and doesn’t have (for example, a car, a computer, a pet, children, a TV set, a briefcase, etc.). ‘Take notes. Partner B: Answer the questions. Example: PARTNER A: Do you have a car? PARTNER B: No. PARTNER A: Do you have a computer? PARTNER B: Yes, but it’s not here. It’s in my country. Ete. Switch roles. (Partner B now asks five questions.) PART I. Partner B: Ask Partner A five questions about things s/he likes and doesn’t like (for example, kinds of food and drink, music, movies, books, etc.) Partner A: Answer the questions. Example: PARTNER B: Do you like pizza? PARTNER A: Yes. PARTNER B: Do you like the music of (name of a group or singer)? PARTNER A: No, I don’t. Ete. arr mm, Write about your partner. The vocabulary on the next page can help you. + Give a physical description. + Write about things this person has and doesn’t have. + Write about things this person likes and doesn’t like. 86 CHAPTERSHere’s some vocabulary to help you describe your partner. eye color: hair wes: hair colo: brown straight brown blond blue curly black dark green wavy red light gray bald straight Cl EXERCISE 42. Chapter review: question practice. Directions: Complete the questions and answers with the words in parentheses. Use the simple present of the verbs. At Gow study) —_________ alo? B: I (smdy) _______at least three hours every night. My roommate (study) —______ at least five hours. She’s very serious about her education. How about you? (you, spend) _____alotof time studying? A: No, Idon’t. I (spend) ___as little time as possible. I 5 ieee) EE to anidy, B: Then why (jou, be) _________ a student? A: My parents (wan) ________ me to go to school. I (want, not) 8 to be here. 3 B: In that case, I (think) __________ that you should drop out of 70 school and find a job until you decide what you want to do with your life. Using the Simple Present 87Cl EXERCISE 43. Chapter review. Directions: Complete each sentence with the correct form of the verb in parentheses. I (have) ____ two roommates. One of them, Sam, is always neat 7 and clean. He (wash) _________ his clothes once a week. (jou, know) 2 Matt, my other roommate? He (be) 3 the opposite of Sam. For example, Matt (change, not) = the sheets on his bed. He (keep) the same sheets week after week. He (wash, never) 7 his clothes. He (wear) _______ the same 3 dirty jeans every day. Sam’s side of the room (be, akways) o neat, and Matt’s side (be, aleays) ______a mess. As my mother always (say) » it (take) all kinds of people to 2 make a world. @ Sam's side Matt's side Cl EXERCISE 44. Chapter review: let’s talk. Directions: Work with a partner. parr 1. Complete the conversations. 1, PARTNER A: Do you___? PARTNER B: Yes, I do. How about you? Do you__? PARTNER A: ___. 2. PARTNER B: Are you? PARTNER A: Yes, am. How about you? Are you __? PARTNER B: 3. PARTNER A: ___ you usually ___ in the morning? PARTNER B: PARTNER A: When ___ PARTNER B: 88 CHAPTER 34. PARTNER B: bd PARTNER A: Yes, I do. > No, he doesn’t. > ‘Yes, I am. PARTNER B: > PARTNER A: No, he isn’t. PART I. Share one or two of your dialogues with the class, Cl EXERCISE 45. Chapter review. Directions: Make questions. Use your own words. LA: > B: No, I don’t. 2. At ° B: Yes, Iam. 3. As ? B: In an apartment. : Six-thirty. At home. A: B A: B: Monday. A B: A: B: : No, he doesn’t. 8. A: 2 B: No, she isn’t. 9. A: ? B: South of the United States. 10. A: ? B: Yes, it is. 11. A: ? B: Yes, they do. Using the Simple Present 8912. A: B: In Southeast Asia. 13. A: B: Hot in the summer. 14. A: B: September. 15. A: B: Yes, I do. Cl EXERCISE 46. Chapter review: let's talk. Directions: Which lifestyle do you like the most? Ask your teacher questions to get more information about them. Then decide which you like best and explain why. Example: SPEAKER A: ‘TEACHER: SPEAKER B: ‘TEACHER: SPEAKER ‘TEACHER: SPEAKER D: ‘TEACHER: Where does Peter live? On a boat. ‘What does Kathy do? She teaches skiing. Where does Ron work? Ata jewelry store. ‘What pets does Lisa have? She has a snake. Continue asking questions until your chart is complete. Name ‘Where does ‘What does Where does What pets does she/he live? he/she do? she/he work? he/she have? PETER on a boat KaTHy teaches skiing RON at a jewelry store LISA a snake JACK 90 CHAPTERSCl EXERCISE 47. Chapter review: error analysis. Directions: Correct the errors. lives 1. Yoko Jive in Japan. 2. Ann comes usually to class on time. 3. Peter use his cell phone often. 4, Amy carry a notebook computer to work every day. 5. She enjoy her job. 6. Ino know Joe. 7. Mike don’t like milk, He never drink it. 8, Tina doesn’t speaks Chinese. She speakes Spanish. 9. You a student? 10. Does your roommate sleeps with the window open? 11. A: Do you like strong coffee? B: Yes, I like. 12, Where your parents live? 13. What time is your English class begins? 14, Olga isn’t need a car. She have a bicycle. 15. Do Pablo does his homework every day? Using the Simple Present 91CHAPTER 4 Using the Present Progressive coo [HE PRESENT PROGRESSIVE TENSE am + ~ing (a) Lam sitting in class right now. is + -ing (b) Rita és sitting in class right now. are + -ing (©) You are sitting in class right now. In (@): When I say this sentence, I am in class. Iam sitting. I am not standing. The action (sitting) is happening right now, and I am saying the sentence at the same time. ‘am, is, are = helping verbs sitting = the main verb am, is, ave + -ing = the present progressive tense* “The present progressive is also called the “present continuous” or the “continuous present.” (Cl EXERCISE 1. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Your teacher will perform and describe some actions. Listen for the form of the verb. Answer questions about these actions. Example: read TEACHER: (pantomimes reading) 1am reading. What am I doing? STUDENT: You are reading. 1. write 4. count 2. sit 5. wave 3. stand 6. look at the ceiling Cl EXERCISE 2. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. What are the animals in the following pictures doing? Partner A: Choose any picture and describe the activity. Use the present progressive (is + -ing). Partner B: Point to the picture described by your partner.Example: horse PARTNER A: The horse is sleeping. PARTNER B: (points to the horse in the picture) PARTNER a: Your turn now. Animals Actions bird mouse | drink a cup of ea _play the piano cat horse drive a car read a newspaper dog monkey | eat a carrot sleep elephant rabbit | sing take a bath giraffe tiger paint a picture talk on the phone Using the Present Progressive 93CD EXERCISE 3. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Answer questions about what you are wearing today and what your classmates are wearing. Use the present progressive (amlislare + wearing). Example: “TEACHER: SPEAKER A: ‘TEACHER: SPEAKER A: TEACHER: SPEAKER A ‘TEACHER: SPEAKER B: Ete. Rosa, what are you wearing today? I'm wearing a white blouse and a blue skirt. What is Jin Won wearing? He’s wearing jeans and a sweatshirt. What color is his sweatshirt? Iv’s gray with red letters. What else is Jin Won wearing? He’s wearing sneakers, white socks, and a wristwatch. Cl EXERCISE 4. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Identify who is wearing particular articles of clothing. If no one is wearing that piece of clothing, say “no one.” Example: PARINER A: brown shoes PARTNER B: Marco is wearing brown shoes. OR Marco and Abdul are wearing brown shoes. OR No one is wearing brown shoes. PARTNER A: Your turn now. Partner A\ Partner B 1. a Eshirt 1, a white shirt 2. blue jeans 2. a skirt (or dress) 3. earrings 3. anecklace 4. boots 4. running shoes 5. pants 5. abelt Cl EXERCISE 5. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Act out the directions the teacher gives you. Describe the actions using the present progressive. Continue the action during the description. Close your books for this activity. Example: Smile TEACHER: SPEAKER A: 94 CHAPTER 4 (Student A), please smile. What are you doing? P'm smiling.TEACHER: (Speaker A) and (Speaker B), please smile. (Speaker A), what are you and (Speaker B) doing? SPEAKER A: We're smiling. TEACHER: (Speaker C), what are (Speaker A and Speaker B) doing? SPEAKER C: They're smiling. TEACHER: (Speaker A), please smile. (Speaker B), what is (Speaker A) doing? SPEAKER B: He/She is smiling. 1. Stand up. 10. Open/Close the door/window. 2. Sit down, 11. Speak in your native language. 3. Stand in the middle of the room, 12. Shake hands with (... ). 4. Sit in the middle of the room. 13. Stand up and turn around in a circle. 5. Stand in the back of the room, 14. Hold your book above your head. 6. Stand between (...) and(...). 15. Hold up your right hand. 7. Touch the floor. 16. Hold up your left hand. 8. Touch the ceiling, 17. Touch your right ear with your left hand, 9. Touch your toes. 18. Clap your hands. Cl EXERCISE 6. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Look around your classroom. Make sentences about people in the room. Use their names. You can use the verbs in the list to help you. Example: the name of a student near you PARTNER A: Maria is sitting near me. PARTNER B: Yes. And she is talking to Po. PARTNER A: Your turn now. daydream read stand watch help sit talk ‘wear listen speak English think in English write Partner A Partner B 1, the name of the teacher 1, the name of a student near the door 2. the names of two classmates near 2. the names of two classmates on the you other side of the room 3. the name of a classmate 3. the names of three classmates 4. yourself (Use “I.”) 4. yourself and your partner Using the Present Progressive 95O EXERCISE 7. Listening. Directions: Read the story. Then listen to each sentence and look at the picture of ‘Tony. Circle the correct answers. Compare your answers with your classmates’ answers. Example: Tony is talking on his cell phone. (>) no 6. Bt 8. * 10. 1 Co EXERCISE 8. Pretest. yess Tony is not a serious student. He is lazy. He doesn’t go to class much. He likes to sit in the cafeteria. Sometimes he sits alone, and sometimes he visits with friends from his country. He is in the cafeteria right now. What is he doing? yes yes yes yes yes no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes no no no no no Directions: Write the -ing form for the following words. 1 2. 10. as 12. smile smiling ride run - stop rain push count fx write grow —_ wait 96 CHAPTER 4 . sleep —— fixEND OF VERB ING FORM Rule 1 A CONSONANT* + -e smile write “+ DROP THE -e and ADD -ing » smiling > writing Rule 2 | ONE VOWEL* + ONE CONSONANT sit run DOUBLE THE CONSONANT and ADD -ing** sitting running Rule 3 | Two VOWELS + ONE CONSONANT. read tain ADD ~ing; DO NOT DOUBLE THE CONSONANT > reading > raining Rule 4 ‘TWO CONSONANTS stand push + ADD ~ing; DO NOT DOUBLE THE CONSONANT. ~ standing > pushing “Vowels = 4,6 5,054 ‘“*Exception to Rule 2: Do not double es x, and 3: Cl EXERCISE 9. Spelling practice. Consonants = B56 df 8 si Rs ms, 95 47 56,5 & 952 snore > snowing fix fising say» saying Directions: Write the -ing forms for the following words. ke king 7. hurt 2. come 8. plan 3. dream, 9. dine 4. bite 10. snow 5. hit 11. study 6. join Using the Present Progressive 97Cl EXERCISE 10. Spelling practice. CO EXERCISE 11. Let's tal Directions: Your teacher will say a sentence. Write the word that ends in -ing. Close your book for this activity. Example: wave TEACHER: I’m waving. STUDENTS: waving 1. smile 9. eat 2. fly 10. run 3. laugh 11. sing 4. sit 12, read 5. stand 13. drink 6. sleep 14. sneeze 7. clap 15. cry 8. write 16. cut a piece of paper : class activity. Directions: Practice using the present progressive to describe actions. Your teacher will give directions. One student acts out the directions, and another describes it. Example: erase the board ‘TEACHER: (Student A), please erase the board. STUDENT A: (erases the board) ‘TEACHER: What is (Student A) doing? STUDENT B: He/She is erasing the board. 1. draw a picture on the board 11. tear a piece of paper 2. clap your hands 12. sing, hum, or whistle 3. walk around the room 13. sleep 4, wave at (name of a student) 14. snore 5. sign your name on the board 15, stand up and stretch 6. count your fingers out loud 16. sneeze 7. hit your desk with your hand 17. cough 8. carry your book on the top of your ‘18. chew gum. head to the front of the room 19. hold your grammar book 9. bite your finger between your ankles 10. look at the ceiling 20. (two students) throw and catch Gomething in the room) 98 CHAPTER 44-3 THE PRES: iT PROGRESSIVE: NEGATIVES (@) Tam not sleeping. 1am awake. (b) Ben isn’t listening. He’s daydreaming. (© Mr. and Mrs. Brown aren’t warching TV. They're reading. Present progressive negative: Mr. and Mrs. Brown 0 EXERCISE 12. Sentence practice. Directions: Use the present progressive to make two sentences about each situation, ‘one negative and one affirmative. Example: Nancy: standing up /sitting down Written: Nancy isn’t standing up. She’s sitting down, Otto: watching the news / talking on the phone Otto isn’t He's Using the Present Progressive 99Anita: listening to music / playing the piano Anita She’s Sophia: reading a magazine / reading a book Sophia She's ‘The birds: flying / sitting on a telephone wire The birds They're 100. CHAPTER 4Cl EXERCISE 13. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Make sentences about your classmates’ activities right now. In the first sentence, describe what is not true. In the second sentence, describe what is true. Example: Partner A Partner B 1. not wearing a white shirt | 1. not sitting near us PARTNER A: Toshi is not wearing a white shirt, He’s wearing a blue shirt. Your turn now. PARTNER B: Olga is not sitting near us. She’s sitting near the teacher. Your turn now. Partner A Partner B 1, not standing up 2. not holding a piece of chalk 3. not talking to (name of a classmate) 4. not wearing T-shirts not writing not looking out the window not sitting on the floor not standing next to each other (names of classmates) Beye Cl EXERCISE 14. Sentence practice. Directions: Write the names of people you know. Write two sentences about each person. Write about (1) what they are doing right now and (2) what they are not doing right now. Use your own paper. Share a few of your sentences with the class. Example: your neighbor > Mrs. Martinez is working at her office right now. +> She is not working in her garden. someone in your family the leader of your country your favorite actor, writer, or sports star a friend from childhood eee Using the Present Progressive 101QUESTION + SHORT ANSWER (+ LONG ANSWER) BE + SUBJECT + -ING @ Is Mary _ sleeping? ©) Are you ‘watching TV? boggy Yes, she is. (She’s sleeping.) No, she’s not. (She’s not sleeping.) No, she isn’t. (She isn’t sleeping.) Yes, Lam. (I’m watching TV.) No, Pm not. (?'m not watching TV.) qworp + BE + SUBIECT + -ING (© Where is Mary _ sleeping? > @) What is Ted watching? > © Why are you watching TV? > In bed. (She’s sleeping in bed.) A movie. (Ted is watching a movie). Because I like this program. (I'm watching TV because I like this program.) ee cae 0 C1 EXERCISE 15. Question practice. Directions: Make questions. 1 Js the teacher helpin: students? Yes, she is. (The teacher is helping students.) 2. > Yes, he is. (John is riding a bicycle.) 3. ? No, ’'m not. (?'m not sleeping.) ee No, they aren’t. (The students aren’t watching TV.) 5 outside? No, it isn’t. (It isn’t raining outside.) 102 CHAPTER 4Cl EXERCISE 16. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. You and your partner have different pictures. Ask and answer questions about your partner’s picture. Partner A: Look at the pictures in Exercise 2, p. 93. Partner B: Look at the pictures below. Find the differences. Example: PARTNER A: Is the rabbit eating a carrot in your picture? PARTNER B: No, it isn’t, Is eating an ice-cream cone. PARTNER A: Your turn now. Partner A Partner B 1, Is the rabbit . 1, Is the elephant... ? 2, Isthe cat... 2. Is the tiger .. 3, Is the giraffe. ..? 3. Is the monkey . 4, Is the horse 4, Isthe bird . 5. Is the dog...? 5. Is the mouse . . 7 z a Using the Present Progressive 103Cl EXERCISE 17. Let's talk: small groups. Directions: Work in small groups. Ask yes/no questions using the present progressive. Use the verbs in the list. Ask two questions for each verb: Are you ...? and Is (name of a group member) ... ? Take turns asking questions. Example: write SPEAKER A: Are you writing? SPEAKER B: Yes, Iam. oR No, I’m not. SPEAKER A: Is (Speaker B) writing? SPEAKER C: Yes, she/he is. OR No, she’s/he’s not. SPEAKER A: Your turn now, (Speaker B). 1. sit 6. speak English 2, stand 7. look out the window 3. smile 8, write in your/her/his book 4. answer questions 9. talk to (name of a classmate) 5. sleep 10. ask me a question CO EXERCISE 18. Question practice. Directions: Create questions with where, why, and what. 1, A: ___What are you readin B: My grammar book. (I’m reading my grammar book.) 2. A: B: Because we're doing an exercise. (I’m reading my grammar book because we're doing an exercise.) 3. A: B: A sentence in my grammar book. (I’m writing a sentence in my grammar book.) 4A: B: In the back of the room. (Seung is sitting in the back of the room.) : In an apartment. (I’m living in an apartment.) B: Jeans and a sweatshirt. (Roberto is wearing jeans and a sweatshirt today.) Because I’m happy. (I’m smiling because I’m happy.) 104 CHAPTER 4Cl EXERCISE 19. Question practice. Directions: Make questions. Give short answers to yes/no questions. 1A: B: 2. A: : What are you writing? A letter. (I’m writing a letter.) Is Ali reading a book? B: No, ___he isn’t/he’s not. (Ali isn’t reading a book.) Wes, Rm cating lunch); : Where : At the Red Bird Cafe. (She’s eating lunch at the Red Bird Cafe.) B: No, —_______________ (Mike isn’t drinking a cup of coffee.) What : A cup of tea. (He’s drinking a cup of tea.) No, —______________ (The girls aren’t playing in the street.) Using the Present Progressive 1058. A: Where : In the park. (They're playing in the park.) 9. A: Why they don’t have school today.) STATEMENTS (a) I sit in class every day. (b) I am sitting in class right now. (c) The teacher writes on the board every day. (d) The teacher és writing on the board right now. : Because they don’t have school today. (They’re playing in the park because PROGRE + The SIMPLE PRESENT expresses habits or usual activities, as in (a), (c), and (e). ‘The PRESENT PROGRESSIVE expresses actions that are happening right now, while the speaker is speaking, as in (b), (@), and (f). Questions (© Do you sit in class every day? (f) Are you sitting in class right now? (@) Does the teacher write on the board every day? (h) Is the teacher writing on the board right now? ‘The SIMPLE PRESENT uses do and does as helping verbs in questions. ‘The PRESENT PROGRESSIVE uses am, is, and are in questions. NEGATIVES (don’t sit in class every day. @)_ V’m not sitting in class right now. (®) The teacher doesn’t write on the board every day. (The teacher isn’t writing on the board right now. ‘The SIMPLE PRESENT uses do and does as helping verbs in negatives. ‘The PRESENT PROGRESSIVE uses am, is, and are in negatives. 106 CHAPTER 4O EXERCISE 20. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with the words in parentheses. 1. Ahmed (talk) ___talks __ to his classmates every day in class. Right now he (tak) to Yoko. ‘He (talk, not) to his friend Omar right now. 2. It (rain) ___a lot in this city, but it (rain, not) right now. The sun (shine) (it, rain) __________ a lot in your hometown? 3. Hans and Anna (sit) next to each other in class every day, so they often (help) _________ each other with their grammar exercises. Right now Anna (help) _______________ Hans with an exercise on present verb tenses. 4, Roberto (cook) ________hais own dinner every evening. Right now he is in his kitchen. He (cook) _______________ rice and beans. (he, cook) meat for his dinner tonight too? No, he is a vegetarian. He (eat, not) _____________ meat. (you, eat) meat? (you, be) _______ a vegetarian? C EXERCISE 21. Listening. Gq. Directions: Listen to the sentences. Circle the correct completions. Examples: John sleeps late... now John is sleeping... . every day 1. now every day 5. now every day 2. now every day 6. now every day 3. now every day 7. now — every day 4. now every day 8. now every day Using the Present Progressive 107Ci EXERCISE 22. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Take turns asking and answering questions about Anna’s activities. Use the present progressive and the simple present. Example: read a newspaper PARTNER A: Is Anna reading a newspaper? PARTNER B: Yes, she is. PARTNER A: Does she read a newspaper every day? PARTNER B: Yes, she does. PARTNER A: Your turn now. drink tea ride her bicycle talk on the phone listen to music say “hello” to her neighbor watch TV play tennis seoim play the guitar take a walk Cl EXERCISE 23. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use words from the list. am is are do does 108 CHAPTER 4 you ready? The bus _____ leaving right now. you have enough money for the bus?9. 10. . Oh, no. It ________ raining again. _____it rain often in this city? . Excuse me, what time __________ you have? . No one is here. ____T early or late? . I_______ looking for the registration office. ________ you know where it is? . When _______ the registration office close? . Where _____ your school? Where ____ you live? your classmates live near you? Cl EXERCISE 24. Question practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with the words in parentheses. i A: Tom is on the phone. (he, talk) he talking _ to his wife? Yes. (he, talk) ___Does he talk to her often? Yes, he (talk) ___talks __to her every day during his lunch break. I (walk) ____ to school every day. I (take, not) the bus. (you, take) _____________ the bus? No, I don’t. 2 e Pee Anna is in the hallway. (he, talk) ___________ to her friends? No, she isn’t. She (run) to her next class. I (read) __________ the newspaper every day. BPP PEPr ew How about your grammar book? (ou, read) your grammar book every day? > No, I don’t. I (read, not) ____ my grammar book every day. . A: What (you, read) right now? B: I (read) _________ my grammar book. Using the Present Progressive 109Gi AS Gow, mam) gone cone B: A: (be, this) __________ your coat? B: No, my coat (hang) in the closet. ‘Yes. CO EXERCISE 25. Listening. Directions: Listen to each conversation. Complete the sentences with the words you hear. Example: You will hear: Is Ann here today? You will write: ‘You will heai ‘You will write: ——Is__ Ann here today? No. She’s working at her uncle’s bakery today. No. __She’s working at her uncle’s bakery today. 1A: Tee —.__sbhecdk ef B: Yes. A: it every day? B: No. A: it right now? B: I . Why do you care about Tom’s hat? A: T found a hat in my apartment. Someone left it there. I that it belongs to Tom. 2. As aumnae B: I don’t know. I suppose so. Animals ___very different from 110 CHAPTER 4 human beings in lots of ways. closed. her head and her front legs. I she right now. I’m sure that animals __ : Look at my dog. She ___. Her eyes At the same time, she sure thatCO EXERCISE 26. Listening. Gq Directions: Listen to the conversation. Complete the sentences with the words you hear. Example: ‘You will hear: Are you doing an exercise? ‘You will write: ____Are you doing _ an exercise? ‘You will hear: Yes, I am. ‘You will write: Yes, __lam__. SPEAKER A: What are you doing? English paper? SPEAKER B: No, sister. SPEAKER A: SPEAKER B: Yes, but I SPEAKER A: SPEAKER B: Yes. I How about you? SPEAKER A: Yes. I on your an e-mail to my to her often? a lot of e-mails to anyone else. to you often? an e-mail from her several times a week. a lot of e-mails? to send e-mails to friends all over the world. hearing it too? NONACTION VERBS dislike hate like love need ‘want ION VERBS NOT USED IN THE PRE: PROGRESSIVE (@) I'm hungry right now. I want an apple. incorrect: Tam wanting an apple. (b) [hear a siren. Do you hear it too? INCORRECT: I'm hearing a siren. Are you hear smell taste Some verbs are NoT used in the present progressive, They are called “nonaction verbs.” In (a): Want is a nonaction verb. Want expresses a physical or emotional need, not an action. In (b): Hear is a nonaction verb. Hear expresses a sensory experience, not an action, believe now think (meaning believe)* understand Sometimes chink is used in progressive tenses. See Chart 4-8, p. 117, for a discussion of shink about and think that Using the Present Progressive 111Cl EXERCISE 27. Sentence practice. Directions: Use the words in parentheses to complete the sentences. Use the simple present or the present progressive. 1. Alice is in her room right now. She (read) ___is reading _ a book. She (like) likes the book. 2. Tt (snow) _______ right now. It’s beautiful! I (like) this weather. 3. I (know) _________ Jessica Jones. She’s in my class. 4. The teacher (talk) —_________ to us right now. I (undersiand) ___ everything she’s saying. 5. Mike is at a restaurant right now. He (eat) dinner. He (like) ___ the food. It (taste) good, 6. Sniff-sniff. I (smell) ____ gas. (ou, smell) it too? 7. Jason (tell) ___________ usa story right now. I (believe) his story. I (think) ________ that his story is true. 8. Ugh! Someone (smoke) _________acigar. It (smell) terrible! I (hate) cigars. 9. Look at Mr. Allen. He (hold) ___a kitten in his hand. He (love) ______ the kitten. Mr. Allen (smile) 112 CHAPTER 4CO EXERCISE 28. Let's talk: interview. Directions: Ask two students each question. Write their answers in the chart. Share some of their answers with the class. Question Student A. ‘Student B . What \ you \ like? ‘What \ babies \ around the world \ like? . What \ you \ want? . What \ children around the world \ want? . What \ you \ love? . What \ teenagers around the world \ love? - What \ you \ dislike or hate? What \ people around the world \ dislike or hate? . What \ you \ need? 10. What \ elderly people around the world \ need? Using the Present Progressive 113WATCH, HEAR, SEE, LOOK At, and warcH In (a): see = a nonaction verb. Seeing (@) I see many things in this room. happens because my eyes are open. Seeing is a physical reaction, not a planned action. (b) Pm looking at the clock. I want to know In (b): look at = an action verb. Looking the time. is a planned or purposeful action. Looking happens for a reason. (©) Bob is watching TV. In (©): watch = an action verb. I watch something for a long time, but I look at something for a short time. HeaR and LISTEN TO In (d): hear = a nonaction verb. Hearing (@) Pm in my apartment. I'm trying to study. is an unplanned act. It expresses a T hear music from the next apartment. The physical reaction. music is loud. (©) Pm in my apartment. I'm studying. I have a In (@): listen (to) = an action verb. tape recorder. I’m listening to music. I like Listening happens for a purpose. to listen to music when I study. C1 EXERCISE 29. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Your teacher will ask you questions. Your book is closed. Example: TEACHER: Look at the floor. What do you see? SPEAKER: I see shoes/dirvete. 1, What do you see in this room? Now look at something. What are you looking at? 2. Turn to p. 103 of this book. What do you see? Now look at one thing on that page. What are you looking at? Look at the chalkboard. What do you see? What programs do you like to watch on TV? ‘What sports do you like to watch? What animals do you like to watch when you go to the 200? What do you hear at night in the place where you live? ‘What do you listen to when you go to a concert? Pera e ye What do you listen to when you are at home? 114 CHAPTER 4Ci EXERCISE 30. Verb review. Directions: Complete the sentences with the words in parentheses. Use the simple present or the present progressive. 1. I (si) ___am sitting in class right now. I (sit, always) always sit in the same seat every day. 2. Ali (speak) _____________ Arabic, but right now he (speak) English. 3. Right now we (do) ________ an exercise in class. We (do) exercises in class every day. 4. I'm in class now. I (look) ____________ at my classmates. Kim (write) _________imhis book. Francisco (ook) —__ out the window. Yoko (bite) — her pencil. Abdullah (smile) Maria (sleep) —________. Jung-Po (chew) gum. 5. The person on the bench in the picture on p. 116 is Barbara. She’s an accountant. She (work) _____________ for the government. She (have) _____ an hour for lunch every day. She (eat, often) tunch in the park. She (bring, usually) a sandwich and some fruit with her to the park. She (sit, uswally) __ on a bench, but sometimes she (sit) _______ on the grass. While she’s at the park, she (warch) _______________ people and animals. She (watch) joggers and squirrels. She (relax) when she eats at the park. Using the Present Progressive 115etl yg 6. Right now I (look) ata picture of Barbara. She (be, not) at home in the picture. She (be) ______ at the park. She (si) soma bench. She (eat) her lunch. A jogger (run) on a path through the park. A squirrel (siz) _____________ on the ground in front of Barbara. The squirrel (eat) aa mt Barbara (watch) the squirrel. She (watch, always) ‘squirrels when she eats hunch in the park. Some ducks (swim) ____________ in the pond in the picture, and some birds (fly) ________________ in the sky. A police officer (ride) ___._________ahhorse. He (ride) __________a horse through the park every day. Near Barbara, a family (have) a picnic. They (go) _____ on a picnic every 116 cHaPTER 4THINK + ABOUT + ANOUN In (@): Ideas about my family are in @I1 think about — my family every day. my mind every day. (0) lam thinking about grammar right now. In (b) My mind is busy now. Ideas about grammar are in my mind right now. THINK + THAT + A STATEMENT In (©): In my opinion, Sue is lazy. T © think that Sue is lazy. believe that Sue is lazy. People use (d) Sue thinks that Tam lazy. think that when they want to say (1 think that the weather is nice. (co som) their beliefs. The present progressive is often used with think about. The present progressive is almost never used with think that. INCORRECT: I am thinking that Sue is lazy. ©) I think that Mike is a nice person. (© and (g) have the same meaning. () I think Mike is a nice person. People often omit that after think, especially in speaking. Cl EXERCISE 31. Sentence practice. Directions: Use I think (that) to give your opinion. Share a few of your opinions with the class. 1. English grammar is easy / hard / fun / interesting. ___/ think (that) = English grammar is 2. People in this city are friendly / unfriendly / kind / cold. 3. The food at (name of a place) is delicious / terrible / good / excellent / awful. 4, Baseball / football / soccer / golf is interesting / boring / confusing / etc. Using the Present Progressive. 117Cl EXERCISE 32. Sentence practice. Directions: Make sentences. PART 1, Complete the sentences with your own words. idimk tithe wots 2. (think my classmaces cre ——————————— @: Right aow Tim dunking sour sce 4 inimy opinion, Bogieh gran ©. Inany opimon, socceris = 6 think that my pacts re EEE 7 [imok hiseciogl 8. I think about O tink 10) Tainy, opinion, seas ee PART 1, Share a few of your completions with the class. C1 EXERCISE 33. Let's talk: small groups. Directions: Work in small groups. Take turns stating an opinion about each of the following topics. Example: books Response: I think that War and Peace is an excellent novel. OR In my opinion, War and Peace is an excellent novel. this city your English classes music movies cars the food in this country the weather in this area er aya yne a current local, national, or international news story 118 CHAPTER 40 EXERCISE 34. Chapter review. Directions: Choose the correct completions. 1. Anita and Pablo TV right now. A. watch B. watching © are watching 2." you writing a letter to your parents?” “No. I’m studying.” A. Do B. Are Cc. Don’t 3. I ______like to write letters. A. no B. am not C. don’t 4. “Jack has six telephones in his apartment.” 1 you. No one needs six telephones in one apartment.” A. am believe B. am not believing C. don’t believe 5. When I want to know the time, I a clock. A. see B. look at C. watch 6. “Do you know Fatima?” “Yes, Ido. I she is a very nice person.” A. am thinking B. thinking C. think 7. Where John? Upstairs or downstairs? A. does B. is C. lives 8. Ohno. Ron ____. He is allergic to cats. A. is sneezing B. doesn’t sneeze C. sneezes 9, The teacher often on time. A. doesn’t start B. isn’t starting C. don’t start 10. “You look sad.” “Yes, I about my family back in my country. I miss them.” A. think B. am thinking C. thinking CO EXERCISE 35. Chapter review: error analysis. Directions: Correct the errors. 1. It’s rainning today. I no like the rain. 2. I like New York City. I am thinking that it is a wonderful city. 3. Does Abdul be sleepping right now? Using the Present Progressive 1194, Why you are going downtown today? 5. Pm listening you. 6. Are you hearing a noise outside the window? 7. Kunio at a restaurant right now. He usually eat at home, but today he eatting dinner at a restaurant. 8. Lam liking flowers. They are smelling good. 9. Alex is siting at his desk. He writting a letter. 10. Where do they are sitting today? 120. CHAPTER 4CHAPTER 5 Talking About the Present Cl EXERCISE 1. Preview: listening. Ge Directions: Write the answers to the questions. Example: You will hear: What time is it? You will write: Irs ___10:10 a.m, / around ten o'clock / etc. _. 1. It’s 2, It’s 3. It’s 4. I's 5. I's Bool USING IT Ti ALK ABOUT QUESTION (@) What day is it? It’s Monday. (b) What month is it? “> It’s September. In English, people use it to express (to talk about) time. (©) What year is it? . ie (@) What's the date today? + ‘It’s September 15th. > It’s the 15th of September. (© What time is it? > It’s 9:00.* > It’s nine. “+ Te’s nine o'clock. It’s nine (o'clock) A.M. “American English uses a colon (two dots) between the hour and the minutes: 9:00 a.at. British English uses one dot: 9.00 As. 121Co EXERCISE 2. Question practice. Directions: Make questions. Begin each question with What. What day is it? ia B: 2. As B: » ee > "I DP DP DP s BP ap wb 122 CHAPTERS : It’s Tuesday. : It’s March 14th. ‘Ten-thirty. March. Te’s six-fifteen. Wednesday. ‘The Ist of April, 2 It’s two thousand and It’s seven A.M. ‘Sun Mon Tues Wed Thurs Fri___Sat 7 2 aoeae|s 6 7 Is 9 10 Tice [ae eae ee lise lien ig (ie (me fan ae (as ae a (oe (ar ef a calendar pageat (@) We have class at one o'clock. at + a specific time on the clock. (b) have an appointment with the doctor at 3:00. (© We sleep at night. at + night in (@) My birthday is in October. in + a specific month (©) Iwas born in 1989. in + a specific year (f) We have class in the morning. in + the morning (g) Bob has class in the afternoon. | in + the afternoon (h) I study in the evening. in + the evening on (@_Thave class on Monday. on + a specific day of the week @ Iwas born on October 31, 1991. | on + a specific date (&) We have class from 1:00 to 2:00. | from (a specific time) to (a specific time) Cl EXERCISE 3. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with prepositions of time. 1, We have class __at __ ten o'clock. 2, We have class __ ten eleven. 3. [have class the morning, and I work the afternoon. 4. Istudy the evening. 5. Isleep ____ night. 6. Twas born ‘May. 7. Lwas born 1988. 8. I was born May 21. 9. Lwas born May 21, 1988. 10. The post office isn’t open Sundays, 11. The post office is open 8:00 A.M. 5:00 pM. Monday through Saturday. 12. The post office closes 5:00 P.M, Talking About the Present 123© EXERCISE 4. Listening and sentence practice. Directions: Identify the people in the pictures. G@ PART 1. Listen to each description. Write the name of the person who is described. Example: You will hear: I was born on June 2, 1986. I go to class in the morning. ‘My name is : You will write: __Lisa__ July 7, 1989 7:00 P.M, Fane 2, 1986 ‘Tune 24, 1980 7:00 AM, 1:00 P.M, PART 11. Use the information in the pictures to complete the sentences. 1, Twas born __ July. I was born July 7. My name is 2. Iwas born ____ 1980. I was born. June 24, 1980. My heme 3. 1go to class ______ the morning. I go to class ___ 7:00. My name is 4. Hi, my name is _____.. Iwas born ____July. I was born July 24. Igo to class ____ the morning. 124 CHAPTERS(@) It’s sunny today. (b) t's hot and humid today. (©) It’s a nice day today. In English, people usually use #¢ when they talk about the weather. (@) What's the weather like in Istanbul in January? (©) How’s the weather in Moscow in the summer? the weather? People commonly ask about the weather by saying What's the weather like? oR Hotw's CO EXERCISE 5. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: How's the weather today? Circle yes or no, Share your answers with a partner. Do your answers agree? Report to the class. hot warm cool chilly cold freezing below freezing says ener yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no no no no no Cl EXERCISE 6. Let's talk: small groups. Directions: Change the Fahrenheit (F) temperatures to Celsius (C) by choosing temperatures from the list. Then describe the temperature in words. 8. sunny 9. nice 10. clear 11. partly cloudy 12. humid* 13. windy 14. stormy yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no no no no no FAHRENHEIT CELSIUS 2. 32°F 3. 100° F 4. 75°F 5. O88 ‘humid = hot and wer 38°C 24°C 10°C Cc 18°C DESCRIPTION 0k L0G cool chile 888 o8 9988 ‘Thermometer gheggrae asa above Ireezing ‘reezing below freezing Talking About the Present. 125Co EXERCISE 7. Let's talk: small groups. Directions: Work in small groups. Read the chart and follow the instructions. “Approximate” means “close but not exact.” Here is a fast way to get an approximate number when you convert from one temperature system to another.* + To change Celsius to Fahrenheit: DOUBLE THE CELSIUS NUMBER AND ADD 30. Examples: 12°C X 2 = 24 + 30 = 54°F, (Exact numbers: 12°C = 53.6°F.) 20°C xX 2 = 40 + 30 = 70°F. (Exact numbers: 20°C = 68°F.) 35°C X 2 = 70 + 30 = 100°F. (Exact numbers: 35°C = 95°F.) + To change Fahrenheit to Celsius: SUBTRACT 30 FROM THE FAHRENHEIT NUMBER AND THEN DIVIDE BY 2. Examples: 60°F — 30 = 30 + 2 = 15°C. (Exact numbers: 60°F = 15.6°C.) 80°F — 30 = 50 + 2 = 25°C. (Exact numbers: 80°F = 26.7°C.) 90°F — 30 = 60 + 30°C. (Exact numbers: 90°F = 32.2°C.) *To ger exact numbers, use these formulas: C = 5/9 °F ~ 32) on F = 9/5 (°C) + 32. Change the following from Celsius to Fahrenheit and Fahrenheit to Celsius. Calculate the approximate numbers. 1, 22°C > 22°C = approximately 74°F (22°C x 2 = 44 + 30 = 74°F) 2) 2Gee 3. 30°C > 4. 10°C > 5. 16C > 6. 45°F > 7. 10°R > _ 8. 58°F > 9. 100°F > 10: 208 126 CHAPTERS1 EXERCISE 8. Interview and paragraph practice. Directions: Find out information about your classmates’ hometowns. Use the information to write a report. Ask questions about the name of the hometozn, its location, its population, its zweather and average temperature in a particular month (of your choosing). Example: SPEAKER A: What's your hometown? SPEAKER B: Athens. SPEAKER A: Where is it located? SPEAKER B: In southeastern Greece near the Aegean Sea. SPEAKER A: What's the population of Athens? SPEAKER B: Almost four million. SPEAKER A: What’s the weather like in Athens in May? SPEAKER B: It’s mild. Sometimes it’s a little rainy. SPEAKER A: What's the average temperature in May? SPEAKER B: The average temperature is around 21° Celsius. Chart for recording information about three of your classmates’ hometowns. Name Spyros Hometown | Athens Location SE Greece Population | almost 4 million 7 Weather mild in May, around 21°C, in the mid-seventies Fahrenheit Talking About the Present. 1274 THERE + BE THERE + BE + SUBJECT + PLACE (a) There is abird in the tree. (b) There are four birds in the tree. There + be is used to say that something exists in a particular place. Notice: The subject follows be: there + is + singular noun there + are + plural noun (© There's a bird in the tree. (@) There’re four birds in the tree. CONTRACTIONS: there + is = there's there + are = there're (C EXERCISE 9. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with is or are. Then circle yes or no, Compare your answers with your classmates’ answers. 1. There ___is__a butterfly in this picture. i) 2. There ___are ___ two trees in this picture. yes 3. There a bird in this picture. yes 4, There seven flowers in this picture. yes 5. There a grammar book on my desk. yes 6. There many grammar books in this room. yes 7. There comfortable chairs in this classroom. yes 8. There a nice view from the classroom window. yes 128 CHAPTERS no no no no no no no9. There 10. There 11, There __ 12. There interesting places to visit in this area. a good place to eat near school, fun activities to do on weekends in this area. difficult words in this exercise. Cl EXERCISE 10. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Complete the sentences with the words in the list or your own words. When you speak, look at your partner. a book some books tall buildings a bulletin board a calendar some chairs a chalkboard a clock a coffee shop some desks some light switches a map some papers a park a pen a pencil a pencil sharpener many people a picture some pictures a post office @ notebook some notebooks some restaurants a sink ‘many stores several studenis @ teacher a whiteboard a window some windows 1, PARTNER A: There is . PARTNER 2. PARTNER A: There are . PARTNER B: There is 3. PARTNER a: There are . PARTNER B: There is also .. . 4. PARTNER A: There is . PARTNER B: There are There are . -.on this desk. - - on that desk. - on that wall. - on this wall, - in this room. - Near our school. also . . . near our school. Cl EXERCISE 11. Let’s talk: small groups. Directions: Work in small groups. After everybody puts two or three objects (e. coin, some keys, a pen, a dictionary) on a table in the classroom, describe the items in this room. on the table. Use There is .... and There are.... Examples: SPEAKER A: There are three dictionaries on the table. SPEAKER B: There are some keys on the table. SPEAKER C: There is a pencil sharpener on the table. yes yes yes yes no no no no Talking About the Present 129CO EXERCISE 12. Listening. GQ Directions: Listen to each sentence. Circle the word you hear. Note: You will hear contractions for There is and There are. Example: several windows in this room. There’s 1. There’s There’re 5. There’s There’re 2. There’s ‘There’re 6. There’s There’re 3. There's There're 7. There's There're 4. There’s There’re 8. There’s ‘There’re CO EXERCISE 13. Let's talk: small groups. Directions: Work in small groups. Choose a leader. ‘Take turns making sentences. Begin your sentence with There. Example: LEADER: .. . in this building. SPEAKER A: ‘There are five floors in this building. SPEAKER B: There are many classrooms in this building. SPEAKER C: There are stairs in this building. LEADER: There is an elevator in this building. Etc. 1. ... in my home. 2... im this city. 3... in my country. 4. ... in the world, 5. ... in the universe. 00rd \) meee) YES/NO QUES’ QUESTION SHORT ANSWER BE + THERE + SUBJECT (@) Is there any juice inthe refrigerator? > ~—_-Yes, there is. + No, there isn’t. (b) Are there any eggs inthe refrigerator? = > ~—_Yes, there are. No, there aren't. 130 CHAPTERSC1 EXERCISE 14. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Ask questions about the contents of the refrigerator in the picture. Use the nouns in the list in your questions. Use Is there ...? or Are there...? Example: PARTNER A: Is there any cheese in the refrigerator? PARTNER B: Yes, there is, PARTNER A: Your turn now. PARTNER B: Are there any onions in the refrigerator? PARTNER A: No, there aren’t. PARTNER B: Your turn now. Partner A Partner B 1, cheese 1. onions 2. eggs 2, strawberries 3. bread 3. oranges 4, apples 4. orange juice 5. butter 5. fruit 6. potatoes 6. flour 7. vegetables 7. pickles CO EXERCISE 15. Let's talk: small groups. Directions: Work in small groups. Take turns asking and answering questions using there + be. Ask questions about this city. Use Is there ...? or Are there ...? If the answer is “I don’t know,” ask someone else. Example: a 200 SPEAKER A: Is there a 200 in (name of this city)? SPEAKER B: Yes, there is. / No, there isn’t. SPEAKER B: (to Speaker C) Is there an airport near (name of this city)? SPEAKER C: I don’t know. SPEAKER B: (to Speaker D) Is there an airport near (name of this city)? SPEAKER D: Yes, there is. / No, there isn’t. Etc. 1. az00 7. an aquarium 2. an airport 8. any interesting bookstores 3. any lakes 9. a subway system 4. any good restaurants 10. any public swimming pools 5. a good Chinese restaurant 11. a good public transportation system 6. an art museum 12. any movie theaters Talking About the Present 131C EXERCISE 16. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Solve the puzzle. Teacher’s Note: Use the grid on p. 509 of the Answer Key to answer your students’ questions. ‘The Johnson family needs to decide where to stay for their summer vacation. They want a hotel that has everything in the list below. Your teacher has information about several hotels. Ask her/him questions using the list. Then write yes or no in the correct column of the chart. Which hotel has everything that the Johnsons want? Example: SPEAKER A: Is there a swimming pool at Hotel 1? ‘TEACHER: Yes, there is. SPEAKER B: Are there tennis courts at Hotel 3? TEACHER: Yes, there are. SPEAKER C: Are there ocean-view rooms at Hotel 5? TEACHER: Yes, there are. List a beach a swimming pool horses 10 ride tennis courts ocean-view rooms CHART a swimming tennis ocean-view pool a beach courts horses rooms HOTEL 1 ° yes HOTEL 2 yes HOTEL 3 i HOTEL 4 7 HOTEL 5 7 132 CHAPTERS5-6 THERE + BE: ASKING QUESTIONS WITH HOW MANY QUESTION SHORT ANSWER HOW MANY + SUBJECT + ARE + THERE + PLACE (@) How many chapters are there in this book? + Sixteen. (There are 16 chapters in this book.) (b) How many provinces are there in Canada? > Ten. (There are ten provinces in Canada.) (©) How many words do you see? Notice: The noun that follows how many is INCORRECT: How many word do you see? plural. CO EXERCISE 17. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Ask and answer questions about this room. Use How many and the given words. Example: desks SPEAKER A: How many desks are there in this room? SPEAKER B: Thirty-two. OR There are thirty-two desks in this room. SPEAKER A: That's right. oR No, I count thirty-three desks. 1. windows 5. women 2. desks 6. men 3. students 7. grammar books 4, teachers 8. dictionaries CO EXERCISE 18. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Ask questions with How many. Example: days in a week PARTNER A: How many days are there in a week? PARTNER B: Seven. oR There are seven days in a week. PARTNER A: Right, There are seven days in a week. Your turn now. Partner A Partner B chapters in this book doors in this room floors in this building states in the United States (50) countries in North America (3) pages in this book people in this room letters in the English alphabet (26) provinces in Canada (10) continents in the world (7) yeype PerPr Talking About the Present 133(@)_My book is on my desk. In @): on = a preposition my desk = object of the preposition on my desk = a prepositional phrase (b) Tom lives in the United States. A person lives: im a country and in a city He lives in New York City. on a street, avenue, road, etc. (© He lives on Hill Street. at a street address @ He lives at 4472 Hill Street, (See Chart 12-9, p. 374, for more information about using in and at,) Note: Prepositions of place are also called “prepositions of location.” CO EXERCISE 19. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with in, on, or at. Write about Pablo. — 1. Pablo lives Canada. coe 2, He lives ___ Toronto. *. Beles Take Sree, 4. He lives ___ 5541 Lake Street ____ Toronto, Canada. Write about Dr. Lee. Be De Lee liveson 6. He lives in : DeHK.Lee 242 First Street 7. He lives at Mami Frida Write about yourself. 8. Llive (name of country) 9, Llive (name of city) 10. I live (name of street) 11. I live (treet address) 134 CHAPTERSabove beside ‘in back of around between ‘in the back of a far (acaay) from in front of behind in ‘in the front of below in the middle of on ‘inside on top of near outside next to under (@) The book is beside the cup. (b) The book is next to the cup. (©) The book is near the cup. PQ (d) The book is between two cups. OQ3O (© The book is far away from the cup. oS (f) The cup is on the book. (g) The cup is on top of the book. Se (h) The cup is under the book. SS ( The cup is above the book. Qo SS @) The hand is around the cup. CS (&) The man is in back of the bus. © The man is behind the bus. (m) The man is in the back of the bus. (a) The man is in front of the bus. In (W), (1), and (n): the man is outside the bus. SE}, O (p) The man is in the middle of the bus. In (m), (0), and (p): the man is inside the bus. Talking About the Present 135CO EXERCISE 20. Sentence practice. Directions: Describe the pictures by completing the sentences with prepositional expressions of place. There may be more than one possible completion. L BQ ‘The apple is ___on, on top of the plate. 2. = fhe epi ig eee he a 3, oO Yael ie ete the plate, = OL teste ete F O 8 The apple isn’t near the glass. It ig eas the glass. (ei) Z to gasses. ay CO bh G the glass. 9. The dog isn’t inside the car. The dog is a ear 136 CHAPTER 510. The dog isin ___________ off the car. ad © © —— lL. ert Thedogisin == ofthe car, b 12. = Fete wy © {E)_)_ The dog isin —_____ ofthe car. 13. at © O The dogisin ____.....__ of the car. Cl EXERCISE 21. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Choose a small object (a pen, pencil, coin, etc.) Give and follow directions. You can look at your book before you speak. When you speak, look at your partner, Partner A: Give your partner directions. Your book is open. Partner B: Follow the directions. Your book is closed. Example: (a small object such as a coin) PARTNER A (book open): Put it on top of the desk. PARTNER B (book closed): (Partner B puts the coin on top of the desk.) . Put it far away from me. . Put it under your book. . Put it below your knee . Put it in the middle of your grammar book. 1. Put it on your head. 5 2. Put it above your head. 6 3. Put it between your fingers. 7 4, Put it near me. 8 Switch roles. Partner A: Close your book Partner B: Open your book. Your turn to give directions. 9. Pur it inside your grammar book. 13. Put it behind me. 10. Put it next to your grammar book. 14, Put it in back of your back. 11. Purit on top of your grammar book. 15. Put it in the back of your grammar book. 12. Putit in front of me 16. Put your hand around it. Talking About the Present 137CO EXERCISE 22. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a parmer. Ask and answer questions about the picture. Practice using Is there /Are there, Where, and How many. Use the vocabulary in the list to help you. bikes cars ‘flowers 4 picnic bench a bird chickens @ guitar a picnic table a boat clouds hills rabbits boots dogs a knife a river a bridge a fish motorcycles a train butverfies a fishing pole people trees Example: PARTNER A: Are there any dogs in the picture? PARTNER B: No, there aren’t any dogs in the picture. PARTNER A: Your turn to ask. ZT NE IER ES ese er eeeee uf eee CO EXERCISE 23. Listening. Directions: Listen to the sentences about the picture in Exercise 22. Circle the correct answers. Example: The bike is in the water. yes 1. yes no 6. yes no 11. yes no 2. yes no 7. yes no 12. yes. no 3. yes no 8 yes no 13. yes. no 4. yes no 9. yes no 14. yes no 5. yes no 10. yes. no 15. yes. no 138 CHAPTERSC EXERCISE 24. Review: Chapters 4 and 5. Directions: ‘Talk about the picture below. Use the vocabulary in the list to help you answer the questions. burn a bowl a boul of salad a candle acup a cup of coffee a fork a glass a glass of water a knife eat dinner have a steak for dinner hold a knife and a fork a vase of flowers ‘meat a piece of meat a plate @ restaurant @ saucer @ spoon a steak a table a waiter Part 1. Work in pairs or as a class. Answer the questions. (Alternate questions if working in pairs.) 1. What is Mary doing? 2, What do you see on the table? 3, What is Mary holding in her right hand? in her left hand? 4, What is in the bowl? 5. What is on the plate? PART it, Complete the sentences. 11. Mary is sitting a table. 12. There is a candle _______ the table. 13. There is coffee ______ the cup. 14. Mary holding a knife her right hand. 15. She’s a restaurant. 16. She at home. 17. She eating breakfast. ere 10. What is in the cup? What is burning? Is Mary eating breakfast? Is Mary at home? Where is she? ‘What is she cutting? Talking About the Present 139Cl EXERCISE 25. Review: Chapters 4 and 5. Directions: Talk about the picture below. Use the vocabulary in the list to help you answer the questions. read a book the circulation desk study at the library a librarian take notes a shelf (singular) shelves (plural)* Parr 1. Work in pairs or as a class. Answer the questions. (Alternate questions if working in pairs.) 1. What is John doing? 4. Is John reading a newspaper? 2. What do you see in the picture? 5. Where is the librarian standing? 3. Is John at home? Where is he? 6. Is John right-handed or left-handed? PART 11, Complete the sentences. 7, John is studying ___ the library. 8. He is sitting _______ a table. 9. He is sitting a chair. 10. His legs are the table. 11. There are books _____ the shelves. 12, John is writing ___a piece of paper. 13, He’s taking notes a piece of paper. 14. He ____ reading a newspaper. 15. The librarian standing the circulation desk. 16. Another student is sitting John. "See Chart 6-5, p. 173, for information about nouns with irregular plural forms, 140. CHAPTER 5Co EXERCISE 26. Review: Chapters 4 and 5. Directions: ‘Talk about the picture. Use the vocabulary in the list to help you answer the questions. the date abank first name | given name sign a check cash middle initial sign her name acheck last name | family name / surname torite a check* name and address part 1. Work in pairs or as a class. Answer the questions. (Alternate questions if working in pairs.) 1. What is Mary doing? 7. What is in the upper-left corner of 2. What is Mary’s address? the check? 3. What is Mary’s full name? 8, What is in the lower-left corner of 4, What is Mary’s middle initial? the check? 5. What is Mary’s last name? 9. What is the name of the bank? 6. How much money does Mary want? —fifly and Fin —— zeae Mansy 3. Jona for 02) 20094 436 200 PART 11. Complete the sentences. 10. Mary is writinga 11. She is signing _m_ name. 12. The name ___________ the bank is First National Bank. 13, Mary lives _______ 3471 Tree Street. 14. Mary lives _____ Chicago, Illinois. 15. Mary’s name and address are ____ the upper-left corner ____ the check. Check (American English) is spelled cheque in British and Canadian English. ‘The pronunciation of check and cheque is the same, Talking About the Present 141(Cl EXERCISE 27. Review: Chapters 4 and 5. Directions answer the questions. cash a check stand in line a bank teller @ counter aline ‘a man (singular) men (plural)* people (plural)* 4 woman (singular) women (plural)* : Talk about the picture below. Use the vocabulary in the list to help you arr 1. Work in pairs or as a class. Answer the questions. (Alternate questions if working in pairs.) What is Mary doing? Ts Mary at a store? Where is she? . What do you see in the picture? . Who is standing behind Mary, a man or a woman? 5. Who is standing at the end of the line, a man or a woman? ere PART Il, Complete the sentences. 6. How many men are there in the picture? 7. How many women are there in the picture? 8. How many people are there in the picture? 9. How many people are standing in line? 10. Mary is a bank. 11. Four people standing in line, 12. Mary is standing the counter. 13. The bank teller is standing the counter. 14. A woman standing Mary. 15. Mary Sending ere the end the line. 16. Aman standing the end the line. 17. A businessman. standing in the dress and the young man with the beard. the woman *See Chart 6-5, p. 173, for information about nouns with ieregular plural forms. 142 CHAPTERS5-9 NEED AND WANT + A NOUN OR AN INFINITIVE VERB + NOUN Need is stronger than want. Need gives the idea (a) We need food. that something is very important. (b) 1 want @ sandwich. Need and want are followed by a noun or by an infinitive. vee EV An infinitive = to + the simple form of a verb.* (© We need to eat. @ I want to eat a sandwich. ‘*The simple form of a verb = a verb without ~5 ed, or ~ing. Examples ofthe simple form of a verb: come, help, answer, write. Examples of infinitive: 20 come, 10 help, 10 answer, t0 trie. CO EXERCISE 28. Sentence practice. Directions: Add to where necessary. 1. I want some water. (no change) to 2. Lwant , drink some water. 3. Linda wants go to the bookstore. 4, Linda wants a new dictionary. 5. Ineed make a telephone call. 6. Ineed a telephone. 7. Do you want go to the movie with us? 8. Do you need a new notebook? CO EXERCISE 29. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Your teacher will ask you questions using need and want. Think about your day tomorrow. Close your book for this activity. Example: ‘TEACHER: What do you need to do tomorrow morning? STUDENT A: I need to go to school at 8:00. TEACHER: (to Student B) What do you need to do? STUDENT B: I need to eat breakfast. TEACHER: (10 Student G) What does (Student B) need to do? STUDENT C: He/She needs to eat breakfast. Talking About the Present 143.‘What do you... 1. need to do tomorrow morning? 2. want to do tomorrow morning? 3. need to do in the afternoon tomorrow? 4, want to do in the afternoon? 5. want to do in the evening? 6. need to do tomorrow evening? Cl EXERCISE 30. Sentence practice. Directions: Use the words in the list or your own words to complete the sentences. Use an infinitive (to + verb) in each sentence. Some words can be used more than once. buy 0 pay walk call listen to play — wash cash marry take watch do 1, Anna is sleepy. She wants __togo____ to bed. 2. Twant downtown today because I need a new coat. 3. Mike wants ___ TV. There’s a good program on Channel 5. 4, Do you want ___ soccer with us at the park this afternoon? 5. need Jennifer on the phone. 6. Iwant ____ to the bank because I need a check, 7. James doesn’t want his homework tonight. 8. My clothes are dirty. Ineed ______ them. 9, John loves Mary. He wants ____her. 10. Helen needs ____ an English course. 11. Where do you want ______ for lunch? 12. Do you want ____ some music on the radio? 144 CHAPTERS.13. Its a nice day, I don’t want the bus home today. I want home instead. 14. David’s desk is full of overdue bills. He needs his bills. Cl EXERCISE 31. Listening. eo Directions: Listen to the conversations and complete the sentences. Example: ‘You will hear: Do you want to go downtown this afternoon? You will write: Do you want to. go __ downtown this afternoon? You will hear: Yes, I do. I need to buy a winter coat. You will write: Yes, I do. [need to buy a winter coat. 1 for dinner tonight? Restaurant, Chet me ic he rear Around five, My plane leaves at seven. Jean to the baseball game. Why not? Ne eee ee eeacccsccs: See on P PPP DP UP I'm getting tired. a break for a few minutes. Okay. Let’s take a break, We can finish the work later. to class on Friday. Why not? It’s a holiday. Por a ee Peter to his apartment. Why? (A Because eee ee eee be clothes before he goes to the party. @ Talking About the Present 1457. A: Where Montreal. ‘May I see your dictionary? Of course. Here it is. : Thanks. 9. A: B: Sure. Thanks. for your vacation? Niagara Falls, Quebec, and a word. with us to the park? some exercise. WOULD LIKE (@) [I'm thirsty. I want a glass of water. (b) I'm thirsty. I would like a glass of water. (a) and (b) have the same meaning, but would ike is usually more polite than want. I would like is a nice way of saying I want, (© I would like You would like She would like He would like We would like They would like a glass of water. Notice in (c): There is no final -s on would. There is no final ~s on like. (@ contractions Td = I would you'd = you would she'd = she would he'd = he would we'd = we would they'd = they would Would is often contracted with pronouns in both speaking and writing. In speaking, would is usually contracted with nouns too. WRITTEN: ‘Tom would like to come. SPOKEN: “Tom’d like to come.” WOULD LIKE + INFINITIVE (©) I would like toeat —_ a sandwich. Notice in (e): would like can be followed by an infinitive. woutp + SUBJECT + LIKE () Would you like some tea? In a question, would comes before the subject. (® Yes, I would. (I would like some tea.) Would is used alone in short answers to questions with would like. It is not contracted in short answers. 146 CHAPTER 5Cl EXERCISE 32, Sentence practice and listening activity. Directions: Make sentences. PART 1. Change the sentences by using would like. 1. Tony wants a cup of coffee. + ___Tony would like on Tony’d like a cup of coffee. 2. He wants some sugar in his coffee. + He would like oR He’d like some sugar in his coffee. 3. Ahmed and Anita want some coffee too. eee some collec too, 4. They want some sugar in their coffee too. > some sugar in their coffee too, 5. A: Do you want a cup of coffee? B: Yes, Ido. Thank you. A | cap clicoftees Beg Thank you 6. I want to thank you for your kindness and hospitality. > you for your kindness and hospitality. 7. My friends want to thank you too. you too. 8. A: Does Robert want to ride with us? B: Yes, he does. > AD with us? B: Yes, Gy PART H. Listen to the sentences for contractions with would. Practice repeating them. Talking About the Present 147Ci EXERCISE 33. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Your teacher will ask you questions. Close your book for this activity. . Who's hungry right now? (... ), are you hungry? What would you like? . Who's thirsty? (... ), are you thirsty? What would you like? . Who's sleepy? What would you like to do? . What would you like to do this weekend? . What would you like to do after class today? . What would you like to have for dinner tonight? . What countries would you like to visit? . What cities would you like to visit in (the United States, Canada, etc.)? . What languages would you like to learn? 10. You listened to your classmates. What would they like to do? Do you remember what they said? 11. Pretend that you are a host at a party at your home and your classmates are your guests. Ask them what they would like to eat or drink. 12. Think of something fun to do tonight or this weekend. Using ould you like, invite a classmate to join you. err auneune 5-11 WOULD LIKI (a) I would like to go to the zoo. | In (a): I would like 0 go to the 200 means I want t0 go to the zoo. (b) Like to go to the 200. In (b): I like 10 g0 10 the 200 means I enjoy the zoo. Would like indicates that 1 want to do something now or in the future. Like indicates that I always, usually, or often enjoy something. CO EXERCISE 34. Listening. Directions: Listen to the sentences and circle the verbs you hear. Some sentences have contractions. Example: 1 some tea. like 1. like “dike 6. likes “d like 2. like ‘d like 7. like “dike 3. like “d like 8. like “d like 4. likes ‘d like 9. like “dike 5. like “d like 10. like “d like 148 CHAPTERSCO EXERCISE 35. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Discuss possible completions for the sentences. Use your own words. 1. Tneed to every day. ————————— ee ike tgs eee every day: youll ike ty ody ii cdot ike ty ee yer day 6. Idon’t want to today, Dosyoulikc ty > 8 Would vou keg OT needy cay 10, ____ would you like to _____ this evening? CO EXERCISE 36. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work in pairs. Ask and answer questions. Look at your partner when you speak. Example: PARTNER A: Do you like apples? PARTNER B: Yes, I do. OR No, I don’t. PARTNER A: Would you like an apple right now? PARTNER B: Yes, I would. oR Yes, thank you. oR No, but thank you for asking. PARTNER A: Your turn now. Partner A Partner B 1. Do you like coffee ? 1. Do you like chocolate? Would you like a cup of coffee? ‘Would you like some chocolate right 2. Do you like to go to movies? now? ‘Would you like to go to a movie 2. Do you like to go shopping? with me later today? ‘Would you like to go shopping with 3. What do you like to do on weekends? me later today? What would you like to do this 3. What do you like to do in your free weekend? time? 4. What do you need to do this What would you like to do in your evening? free time tomorrow? What would you like to do this 4. Do you like to travel? evening? ‘What countries would you like to visit? Talking About the Present 149CO EXERCISE 37. Review: Chapters 4 and 5. Directions: Talk about the picture below. Use the vocabulary in the list to help you answer the questions. cook a kitchen bread cook dinner a listla grocery list butter make dinner a pepper shaker coffee taste (food) @ pot an egg a refrigerator pepper a salt shaker salt @ stove PaRT 1, Work in pairs or as a class. Answer the questions. (Alternate questions if working in pairs.) 1. What is John doing? 6. Where is the refrigerator? 2. What do you see in the picture? 7. What is on the refrigerator? 3. Where is John? 8. Is the food on the stove hot or cold? 4. Is John tasting his dinner? 9. Is the food in the refrigerator hot or 5. Is John a good cook? cold? Parr 1. Complete the sentences, 10. John is making dinner. He’s _____ the kitchen. 11. There is a pot __ the stove, 12. The stove is _____ the refrigerator. 13, There is a grocery list______ the refrigerator door. 14, John needs ___ to the grocery store. 15. A salt shaker and a pepper shaker are ______ the stove. 16. There is hot food top the stove. 17. There is cold food ___ the refrigerator. 150 CHAPTERSCO EXERCISE 38. Review: Chapters 4 and 5. Directions: Talk about the picture below. Use the vocabulary in the list to help you answer the questions. sing a cat a living room sit on a sofa a dog arug sleep a fish a singer swim a fishbowl a sofa watch TVitelevision a TV setia television set parr 1, Work in pairs or as a class. Answer the questions. (Alternate questions if working in pairs.) 1, What are John and Mary doing? 8. Is the cat walking? What is the 2. What do you see in the picture? cat doing? 3. Are John and Mary in the kitchen? 9. What is the dog doing? ‘Where are they? 10. What is on top of the TV set? 4, Where is the lamp? 11. Is the fish watching TV? 5. Where is the rug? 12. What is on the TV screen? 6. Where is the dog? What are John and Mary watching? 7. Where is the cat? rarr 1. Complete the sentences. 13. John and Mary watching TV. They like watch TV. 14, Chey ating a sofa. 15. They sleeping. 16. There is a rug the floor. 17. A dog sleeping 18. A cat sleeping the sofa. Talking About the Present. 151Cl EXERCISE 39. Review: Chapters 4 and 5. Directions: Talk about the picture below. Use the vocabulary in the list to help you answer the questions. draw a picture an arrow smile a calendar talk on the phone a heart talk t0 (someone) a phonela telephone talk to each other a picture a picture of a mountain «a piece of paper a telephone book a wall PART I. Work in pairs or as a class. Answer the questions. (Alternate questions if working in pairs.) 1, What are John and Mary doing? 2. What do you see in the picture? 3. Is John happy? Is Mary happy? Are John and Mary smiling? 7. What is Mary drawing? 8. What is on Mary’s table? 9. What is on the wall next to the refrigerator? 4. Are they sad? 10. Where is the clock? 5. Who is standing? Who is sitting? 11. What time is it? 6. Is John in his bedroom? 12. What is on the wall above the Where is John? table? PART 11. Complete the sentences. 13. John and Mary _____ talking the phone 14, John talking Mary. Mary talking ____ John. They _____talkingto ____ other. 15. John is _______ the kitchen. He’s standing the refrigerator. 16. There is a calendar the wall next to the refrigerator. 17. Mary atable. She’s sitting a picture. 18) Mary likesto to John on the phone. 19, There is a telephone book the table. 20. There is picture fnigunfein oeeees 152. CHAPTERSCi EXERCISE 40. Review: Chapters 4 and 5. Directions: Talk about the picture below. Use the vocabulary in the list to help you answer the questions. sleep a bed dream a dream dream about (someonelsomething) a head a pillow Parr 1, Work in pairs or as a class. Answer the questions. (Alternate questions if working in pairs.) 1, What is Mary doing? 7. Is John standing or lying down? 2. What is John doing? 8, Is Mary dreaming? 3, What are Mary and John doing? 9. Are Mary and John dreaming 4, What do you see in the picture? about each other? 5. Is Mary in her bedroom? 10. Are John and Mary in love? 6. Is John in class? Where is he? Parr 11, Complete the sentences. 11. John and Mary ___ sleeping. They are ___ bed. 12, John _____ dreaming ______ Mary. Mary dreaming John. They ______ dreaming ____ each other. 13. Mary’s head is __ a pillow. 14. John and Mary ____ in the living room. 15) Chey eee sleep They aaah 16. John and Mary love each other. They are ____love. 17. They would like ______ get married someday. Talking About the Present. 153CO EXERCISE 41. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a parmer. Bring to class one or two pictures of your country (or any interesting picture). Ask your partner to describe the picture(s). CO EXERCISE 42. Paragraph practice. Directions: Choose one of the pictures your classmates brought to class. Describe the picture in a paragraph. CO EXERCISE 43. Chapter review. Directions: Circle the correct completions. 1. Jack lives China. in B. at 2. Inced A. buy a new notebook. B. to buy 3. a cup of tea?” “Yes, thank you.” A. Would you like B. Do you like 4. There ‘twenty-two desks in this room, A. be B. is 5. Pilots sit an airplane. A. in front of B. in the front of 6. Live 6601 Fourth Avenue. A. in B. on 7. The students A. don’t want do their homework. B. aren’t wanting a TV in Jane’s bedroom? A. Are there B. There © EXERCISE 44. Chapter review: error analysis. Directions: Correct the errors. 1. Do you want go downtown with me? 2. There’s many problems in big cities today. 154 CHAPTER 5 on . buying Are you like are . front of at . don’t want to . Is there3. I'd like see a movie tonight. 4, We are needing to find a new apartment soon. 5. Mr. Rice woulds likes to have a cup of tea. 6. How many students there are in your class? 7. Yoko and Ivan are study grammar right now. They want learn English. 8, am like to leave now. How about you? 9. Please put the chair in middle the room. 10. The teacher needs to checking our homework now. Cl EXERCISE 45. Review: Chapters 4 and 5. Directions: Complete the sentences with your own words. Use your own paper. 1. Ineed ___ because 2. want ___ because _. 3. Twould like __ 4, Would you like ___? Do you like ___? There is _. ‘There are __. I'm listening to . but I also hear ___. I'm looking at ___, but I also see __. Tm thinking about ___. 11. I think that __. 12. In my opinion, 13. How many are there __? 14, Is there ? 15. Are there 2 Talking About the Present 155Cl EXERCISE 46. Review: Chapters 1 + 5. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use the words in parentheses. Use the simple present or the present progressive. Use an infinitive where necessary. ifise the baby = Bobby = the daughter = Ellen the son = Paul the mother = Mrs, Smith the father = Mr. Smith the cat = Puss the bird = ‘Tweetie the mouse = Mickey ‘The Smiths are at home. It is evening. Paul (sit) ——______ on the sofa. He (read) _________ a newspaper. Ellen (sit) tthe desk. She (study) While she is studying, she (listen to) —_________ music on her radio, Paul (hear) —______ the music, but he (listen to, no) it right now. He (read) the weather report in the newspaper, 3 Ellen (study) _________ her chemistry text. She (like) a chemistry. She (think) —___—__ that chemistry is easy. 7 She (think abour) ____________________ chemical formulas. She (understand) —_________ the formulas. 7 Mars, Smith is in the kitchen. She (cook) _____—_______ dinner. She (make) __________ a sauce for the pasta. Steam (rise) % 156 CHAPTER 5from the pot on the stove. Mrs. Smith (like, not) ———__,——— cook, but she (know) —______ that her family has to eat good food. While she (make) __________ dinner, Mrs, Smith (think about) 7% a vacation on the beach. Sometimes Mrs. Smith (get) —_______ tired of cooking all the time, but she (Jove) her family very much and (want) ________ to (take) @ B care of their health. 24 Mr. Smith (stand) ________near the front door. He (take of) —________ his coat. Under his coat, he (wear) ~ a suit. Mr. Smith is happy to be home. He (think about) = dinner. After dinner, he (want) (watch) —_______ television. He (need) (Go) —__, to bed early tonight because he has a busy a day at work tomorrow. In the corner of the living room, a mouse (eat) ________ a piece 33 of cheese. The mouse (think) ____—___ that the cheese (taste) id. 35 ee Puss (see, not) ________ the mouse. She (smell, not) 36 the mouse. Puss (sleep) a 38 She (dream about) a mouse. 2 Bobby is in the middle of the living room. He (play) - a with a toy train. He (see, nor) ______________ the mouse because he a (look at) —__________ his toy train. The bird, Tweetie, (sing) . Bobby (listen to, not) 3 a4 the bird. He is busy with his train. Talking About the Presont 157CHAPTER § Nouns and Pronouns CO EXERCISE 1. Let's talk: small groups. Directions: Work in small groups. Name things that belong to each category. Make lists Compare your lists with other groups’ lists. All of the words you use in this exercise are called nouns. Name kinds of fruit. (apple) Name things you drink. (coffee) Name parts of the body. (head) Name kinds of animals. (horse) Name languages.* (English) Name school subjects. (history) ero EeNe ‘Name cities in the United States and Canada.* Name clothing you see in this room. (shirt) (New York, Montreal, etc.) SUBJECTS AND OBJECTS NOUN ANOUN is used as the subject of a sentence. (@) [Birds | fv. ANOUN is used as the object of a verb* | subject verb In (@): Birds is a NOUN. It is used as the subject of the sentence. NOUN NouN In (b): pen is a NOUN. Ithas the article @ in () Lohn_| is holding | a pen. front of it; a pen is used as the object of the subject verb object verb is holding. | NOUN NOUN A NOUN is also used as the object of a © [Birds | fy the sky. preposition. subject verb prep. object of prep. In (©): in is a preposition (prep.). The noun sky (with the article the in front) is the NOUN NOUN NOUN OBJECT of the preposition in. @ [ohn _| is holding | a pen his hand. | | Some common prepositions: about, across, at, subject verb object prep. object of prep. | bettocen, by, for, from, in, of, on, to, with, *Some verbs are followed by an object. These verbs are called transitive verbs (at. in a dictionary). Some verbs are not followed by an object. These verbs are called intransitive verbs (ou. in a dictionary). * The names of cities and languages begin with capital letters.CO EXERCISE 2. Noun practice. Directions: Check (7) the words that are nouns. ay eee eat dog beautiful have eyes English 7. ___ think 8. ____ mathematics 9. ___ flowers 10. ___ juice 11. ___ Paris 12, wonderful Ci EXERCISE 3. Sentence practice. Directions: Describe the grammatical structure of the sentences as shown in items 1 and 2. Then identify each noun, Is the noun used as, + the subject of the sentence? + the object of the verb? + the object of a preposition? 1. Marie studies chemistry. L Marie subject studies verb 1 chemistry | (none) __|___ (none) __| object of verb preposition object of prep. > Marie = a noun, subject of the sentence chemistry 4 noun, object of the verb “studies” 2. The children are playing in the park. |The children subject are playing _| verb (none) | in |__the park __| “object of verb preposition object of prep. > children = a noun, subject of the sentence park = a noun, object of the preposition “in” 3. Children like candy. subject verb object of verb preposition object of prep. 4. The teacher is erasing the board with her hand. subject verb object of verb reposition | object of prep. Nouns and Pronouns 1595. Mike lives in Africa. L | l l | subject ver) object of ver> preposition object of prep. 6. The sun is shining, l | L l L subject verb object of verb preposition, object of prep. 7. Robert is reading a book about butterflies. L l i | i subject verb object of verb preposition __object of prep. 8. Tom and Ann live with their parents. l | | subject verb object of verb preposition object of prep. 9. Monkeys eat fruit and insects. L i it | l subject verb object of verb preposition object of prep. 10. Mary and Bob help Sue with her homework. L | l | l subject verb object of verb preposition object of prep. 11. Ships sail across the ocean. l ! L i i subject verb) object of verb preposition object of prep. 12, Water contains hydrogen and oxygen. Ll l I | | subject verb object of verb preposition object of prep. 160. CHAPTER 6DJEC |OUN (@) I don’t like cold weather. adj. + noun (©) Alex is a happy child. adj. + noun (©) The hungry boy has afresh apple. adj. + noun adj. + noun ‘An adjective (adj.) describes a noun. In grammar, we say that adjectives “modify” nouns. The word “modify” means “change a little.” Adjectives give a little different meaning : cold weather, hot weather, nice weather, bad Adjectives come in front of nouns. (@) The weather is cold. noun + be + adj. Reminder: An adjective can also follow be; the adjective describes the subject of the sentence. (See Chart 1-6, p. 12.) COMMON ADJECTIVES beautiful - ugly 00d ~ bad angry big - litle happy - sad bright big - small large - small busy boring ~ interesting ong - short delicious cheap - expensive noisy ~ quiet exciting clean - dirty old - new famous cold - hot old - young favorite dangerous - safe oor = rich ‘free dry ~ wet sour ~ sweet fresh easy ~ hard strong - weak healthy easy - difficult honest hungry important intelligent kind lazy nervous ripe serious wonderful O EXERCISE 4. Sentence practice. Directions: Find the adjectives and nouns. 1. Jim has an expensive bicycle. “> Jim = a noun; expensive = an adjective; bicycle = a noun 2. My sister has a beautiful house. 3. We often eat at an Italian restaurant. 4. Maria sings her favorite songs in the shower. 5. Olga likes American hamburgers. 6. You like sour apples, but I like sweet fruit. 7. Political leaders make important decisions. 8. Heavy traffic creates noisy streets. Nouns and Pronouns 1619. Poverty causes serious problems in the world. 10. Young people have interesting ideas about modern music. Cl EXERCISE 5. Let's talk: small groups. Directions: Work in small groups. Take turns adding adjectives to the sentences. Use any adjectives that make sense. Think of at least three possible adjectives to complete each sentence. 1. I don’t like hot _/ wet / rainy / bad / et weather. eo yeas ode 5 Tieloice eee eople ee peoele take mie angry, 5 Polluciain tafe) 0 aes eee problem in thc modern world. 6. Thadefen 0s experience yesterday. donc like cines, GU had) afen ner leet ait (I EXERCISE 6. Sentence practice. Directions: Find each noun. Is the noun used as + the subject of the sentence? + the object of the verb? + the object of a preposition? 1. Bob and his wife like coffee with their breakfast. » Bob = a noun, subject of the sentence wife = a noun, subject of the sentence coffee = a noun, object of the verb “like” breakfast = a noun, object of the preposition “with” 2. Jack doesn’t have a radio in his car. 3. Monkeys and apes have thumbs. 4. Does Janet work in a large office? 5. Scientists don’t agree on the origin of the earth. a chimpanzee 162 CHAPTER 66. Egypt has hot summers and mild winters. 7. Many Vietnamese farmers live in small villages near their fields. 8. Large cities face many serious problems. 9. These problems include poverty, pollution, and crime. 10. An hour consists of 60 minutes. Does a day consist of 1440 minutes? CO EXERCISE 7, Let's talk: small groups. Directions: Work in groups. When you are done, you will have a list of adjectives for different countries. Parr 1. Complete each sentence with the name of a country and the appropriate adjective. 1. Food from Ching ig nese food, 2, Pood fom Meco i food: 6 Food eo i food. a: Pood fiend eee food. 5. Food from es 6. Food from EE hood 7. Food from — ig fo, 8. Rood from ig food. Parr 11, What is the favorite ethnic food in your group? Give an example of this kind of food. Example: Favorite ethnic food? Group a: Italian Example: An example of Italian food? GROUP A: spaghetti Favorite ethnic food in our group: ‘An example of this kind of food: PART It, Find out the most popular ethnic food in other groups too. Part 1: Working as a class, make a list of adjectives of nationality. Nouns and Pronouns 1636-3 SUBJECT PRONOUNS AND OBJECT PRONOUNS SUBJECT PRONOUNS opject pronouns | suBecr — omecT (@ speak English. (b) Bob knows me. . = (©) You speak English. (@) Bob knows you. a ee (e) She speaks English. (f) Bob knows her. i fee (g) He speaks English. (a) Bob knows him. #-—# (@ _Testarts at 8:00. @_ Bob knows i. (kK) We speak English. (Bob talks to us. os (m) You speak English. (a) Bob talks to you. ite ae (©) They speak English. (p) Bob talks to them. Ce ge me (q) I know Tony. He is a friendly person. A pronoun has the same meaning as a ae noun. In (q): he has the same meaning as Tony. In (t): him has the same meaning (Q) Tlike Tony. I know im well. as Tony. In grammar, we say that a is cn pronoun “refers to” a noun. The pronouns. ‘he and him refer to the noun Tony. (S) Ihave a red book. It is on my desk. a Sometimes a pronoun refers to a “noun phrase.” In (s): # refers to the whole phrase a red book. CO EXERCISE 8. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use pronouns (I, me, he, him, etc.). 1, John loves Mary. He loves her very much. 2. Mary loves John. loves very much. 3. Mary and John love their daughter, Anna. love very much. 4, Mary and John love their son, Tom, ____ love ___ very much. 5. Tom loves his little sister, Anna. ______ loves ________ very much. 6. Mary loves her children, ______ loves ____ very much. 7. John loves his children. ______ loves ____ very much. 8. Mary and John loveTom and Anna, ____ love ____ very much. 164 CHAPTERSC_EXERCISE 9. Sentence practice. Cl EXERCISE 10. Let's tall Direction Complete the sentences. Use pronouns (I, me, he, him, etc.). 1, Rita has a book. ___She __ bought ___it __ last week. 2. L know the new students, but Tony doesn’t know yet. 3. Lwrote a letter, but I can’t send because I don’t have a stamp. 4, Tom is in Canada. _____is studying at a university. 5. Bill lives in my dorm. I eat breakfast with _____ every morning. 6. Ann is my neighbor. [talk to ____ every day, ______ and have interesting conversations. 7. Thave two pictures on my bedroom wall. [like —___. _ are beautiful. 8. Ann and I have a dinner invitation. Mr. and Mrs. Brown want to come to dinner at their house. 9. Judy has anew car. ____ is. a Toyota. 10. My husband and I have a new car. _____ got ____ last month. ind someone who . Directions: Interview your classmates. Find someone who can answer yes to a question. Then ask the follow-up question using the appropriate object pronoun. Example: SPEAKER A: Do you send e-mails? SPEAKER B: No, I don’t. SPEAKER A: (Ask another student.) Do you send e-mails? SPEAKER C: Yes, I do. SPEAKER A: When do you send them? SPEAKER C: I send them in the evenings, 1. Do you do your homework? 5. Do you watch TV? When do you... ? When do you. . .? 2. Do you visit friends? 6. Do you buy groceries? ‘When do you... ? When do you... ? 3. Do you read newspapers or magazines? 7. Do you wear boots? When do you... .? When do you .. .? 4. Do you talk to (name of female classmate)? 8. Do you use a computer? When do you. . .? When do you ...? Nouns and Pronouns 165Cl EXERCISE 11. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use pronouns. i ‘A: Do you know Kate and Jim? B: Yes, | _ do. I live near them _. . A: Is the chemical formula for water H;0? B: No, —___ isn’t. ___ is H,0. . A: Would Judy and you like to come to the movie with us? B: Yes, ___ would. Judy and ___ would enjoy going to the movie with ___. A: Do Mr. and Mrs. Kelly live in the city? Bio; eee dont. live in the suburbs. I visited last month, . A: Do you know how to spell “Mississippi”? B: Sure! I can spell _____. ______is easy to spell. A: Is Paul Cook in your class? B: Yes, ____is. I sit next to (EXERCISE 12. Listening practice. Directions: Listen to the sentences. Note that the “h” in her and him is often dropped in spoken English. The “th” in them can also be dropped. Discuss the pronunciation changes. oUrene Sara knows Joe. She knows him very well. ‘Where does Shelley live? Do you have her address? ‘There’s Sam. Let’s go talk to him. . There’s Bill and Julie. Let’s go talk to them. . The teacher is speaking with Lisa because she doesn’t have her homework. . Ineed to see our airline tickets. Do you have them? 166 CHAPTER 6O EXERCISE 13. Listening. Gq. Directions: Listen to each conversation and complete the sentences. Example: You will hear: How is Mr. Adams doing? You will write: How ___is__ Mr. Adams doing? You will hear: Great! I see him every week at the office. ‘You will write: Great! I see ___him_____ every week at the office. 1, A: Yoko and ___ downtown this afternoon. Do you wanttocome B: I don’t think so, but thanks anyway. Chris and to the library. study for our test. 2. A: Hi, Ann. How do you like your new apartment? B: very nice, A: Do you have a roommate? B: Yes. Maria Hall is my roommate. Do you —__? Miami. No, dow’) EE Do you gc along > B: Yes, ______ living together. You must sometime. Maybe ______ can come over for dinner soon. Ahan ee ae 3. A: Do George and Mike come over to your house often? A TA B: Yes, . Linvite to my house often. We like to play cards. ‘A: Who usually wins your card games? B: Mike. _______ a reallly good. card player. We can’t beat Nouns and Pronouns 1676-4 NOUNS: SINGULAR AND PLURAL SINGULAR PLURAL (a) one pen two pens ‘one apple three apples To make the plural form of most nouns, add -s. one cup four cups one elephant ‘five elephants (b) baby babies End of noun: consonant + ~y city cities Plural form: change y to i, add es. © boy boys End ofnoun: — vowel + -y key keys Plural form: add -s. @) wife wives End ofnoun: — fe or -f thief thieves Plural form: change f to o, add -es. © dish dishes End of noun: sh, -ch, -s8, - match matches Plural form: add -es. class classes Pronunciation: /az/ box boxes © tomato tomatoes End of noun: consonant + -0 potato potatoes Plural form: add es. 200 z008 End of noun: — vowel + -0 radio radios Plural form: add -s. Cl EXERCISE 14. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use the plural form of the words in the lists. Use each word only once. LIST A. 1. Mr. and Mrs. Parker have one daughter and two sons. They have one girl and two ___boys 2. The students in my class come from many 3. Women give birth to 168 CHAPTER 6. My money and my I know the names of many Canada. . I like to go to . People carry their food on We always use our ride horses. 9. Good evening, 10. LIST B. knife life wife leaf thief lL. 12. 13. 14. 15. It is fall. The ‘Sue and Ann are married. They have husbands. ‘They are ‘We all have some problems in our Police officers catch Please put the on the table. are in my pocket. in the United States and because I like to meet and talk to people. in a cafeteria. when we write compositions. and gentlemen. are falling from the trees. , forks, and spoons Nouns and Pronouns 169LIST C. bush glass sandwich tomato class match sex 200 dish potato tax 16. Bob drinks eight ____ of water every day. 17. There are two male and female. 18. Please put the _____ and the silverware on the table. 19. All citizens pay money to the government every year. They pay their 20. I can see trees and outside the window. 21. I want to light the candles. I need some 22. When I make a salad, I use lettuce and 23, Sometimes Sue has a hamburger and French-fried for dinner. 24, We often eat for lunch. 25. Mehmet is a student. He likes his == 26. Some animals live all of their lives in. Cl EXERCISE 15. Pronunciation practice. Gq Directions: Listen to the pronunciation of final -s/-es. Practice saying the words. Group 4. Final -s is pronounced /z/ after voiced sounds.* 1. taxicabs 7. years 2. beds 8. lives 3. dogs 9. trees 4. balls 10. cities 5. rooms 11. boys 6. coins 12. days * For more information on voiced sounds, see Chart 3-8, p. 66. 170. CHAPTER 6Group B, Final -s is pronounced /s/ after voiceless sounds.* 13. books 16. groups 14. desks 17. cats 15. cups 18. students Grovr ¢. Final -s/-es is pronounced /az/. + after “s” sounds: + after “z” sounds: after “sh” sounds: after “ch” sounds: after “ge/dge” sounds: CO EXERCISE 16. Listening. Gq Directions: Listen to each word. 1. toy 2. table tables 3. face faces 4, hat hats 5. office offices 6. box boxes 7. package packages 8. chair chairs 9. edge edges 10. top tops 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32, 33. classes glasses horses places sentences sizes exercises noises dishes bushes matches sandwiches pages oranges bridges . Circle the noun you hear. * For more information on voiceless sounds, see Chart 3-8, p. 66. Nouns and Pronouns 171© EXERCISE 17. Listening. GQ Directions: Listen to each sentence. Circle the noun you hear. 1. desk 6. exercise exercises 2. place places 7. piece pieces 3. sandwich sandwiches 8. rose roses 4, sentence sentences 9. bush bushes 5. apple apples 10. college colleges, Cl EXERCISE 18. Pronunciation practice. Directions: Find the plural noun(s) in each sentence. Pronounce the noun(s). Then read the sentences aloud. 1. The students are carrying books and backpacks. 2. Department stores sell many sizes of clothes. 3. The weather is terrible. It’s raining cats and dogs.* 4. The teachers have their offices in this building. 5. Engineers build bridges. 6. At the zoo you can see tigers, monkeys, birds, elephants, bears, and snakes. 7. People have two ears, two eyes, two arms, two hands, two legs, and two feet. 8, Square tables and rectangular tables have four edges. 9. My dictionary has 350 pages. 10. 1 like apples, bananas, strawberries, and peaches. 11. My apartment has cockroaches in the kitchen. * The idiom “raining cats and dogs” means “raining very hard.” 172 CHAPTER 66-5 NOUNS: IRREGULAR PLURAL FORMS sinutar | PLURAL EXAMPLES (@ child children Mr. Smith has one child. Mr. Cook has two children. (©) foot fect Thave a right foot and a left foot. I have two feet. © man a Tsee a man on the street. I see two men on the street. ae : My cat sees a mouse. Cats like to catch mice. an ‘My tooth hurts, My teeth are white. ©) tooth oe ‘There’s one tooman in our class. There are ten women in () woman women your class. (@ sheep sheep Annie drew a picture of one sheep. Tommy drew a picture of two sheep. ‘one sheep two sheep (hy fish fish Bob has an aquarium, He has one ish. Sue has an aquarium. She has seven fish. (h) (none)* people ‘There are fifteen people in this room. (Notice: People does not have a final -s.) *People is always plural. It has no singular form. CO EXERCISE 19. Game. Directions: Work in groups or individually. The object of the game on p. 174 is to fill in each list with nouns. If possible, write one noun that begins with each letter of the alphabet. The nouns must belong to the category of the list. When you finish your lists, count the number of nouns you have. That is your score. Who has the highest score? Nouns and Pronouns 173List 1 ‘Things in nature List 2 ‘Things you eat and drink List 3 Animals and insects List 4 ‘Things for sale at Gname of a local store) air bushes earth fish grass mlolalm|ofolal> ice leaves O;Z/ElrjAla ocean plants rain stars trees water NI<[*]4]<[CGlalo|zjo Score: 13 Score: Score: Score: 174 (CHAPTER 6Cl EXERCISE 20. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Your teacher will say a noun. You say the plural form with fwo. Close your books for this activity. Example: ‘TEACHER: one child STUDENTS: two children 1. one child 13. one sentence 2. one woman 14. one man 3. one tooth 15. one orange 4. one foot 16. one foot 5. one man 17. one knife 6. one mouse 18. one sex 7. one fish 19. one git! 8. one page 20. one exercise 9. one place 21. one tooth 10. one banana 22. one woman 11. one child 23. one boy and 12. one desk one woman Co EXERCISE 21. Review. Directions: Fill in the grammatical structure of the sentences. Item 1 has been completed for you. 1. Mr. Cook is living in a hotel. LM Cook | _isliving | (none) _| in | ahotel__| subject verb object preposition object of prep. 2. Anita carries her books in her backpack. subject verb object preposition object of prep. 3. Snow falls. subject ver object reposition object of prep. 4. Monkeys sleep in trees. Ll L | i L J subject verb object reposition object of prep. Nouns and Pronouns 175,5. The teacher is writing words on the chalkboard. l l I l | subject verb ‘object reposition object of prep. 6. Llike apples. subject verb object preposition object of prep. CO EXERCISE 22. Review. Directions: A. complete sentence has a subject and a verb. An incomplete sentence is a group of words that does not have a subject and a verb. If the words are a complete sentence, change the first letter to a capital letter (a big letter) and add final punctuation (a period or a question mark). If the words are an incomplete sentence, write “Inc.” to mean “Incomplete.” 1. monkeys like bananas > Myfonkeys like bananas. 2. in my garden > Inc. 3. do you like sour apples > Do you like sour apples? 4. this class ends at two o'clock 5. teaches English 6. my mother works 7. in an office 8. my mother works in an office 9. does your brother have a job 10. does not work 11. rain falls 12. my sister lives in an apartment 176 CHAPTER 613. has a roommate 14. the apartment has two bedrooms 15. a small kitchen and a big living room 16. on the third floor C EXERCISE 23. Review. Directions: Circle the correct completions. 1. My sister and I live together. Our parents often call on the telephone. us B. them Cc. we D. they 2. Tom has a broken leg. I visit every day. A. he B. him C. them D. it 3, Sue and I are good friends. spend a lot of time together. A. They B. You Cc. We D. She 4. Our children enjoy the zoo. We often take to the zoo. A. it B. they C. them D. him 5. Mary drives an old car. She takes good care of 2 A. her B. them Cc. it D. him 6. Jack and don’t know Mr. Wu. AI B. me C. us D. them 7. Ms. Gray is a lawyer in Chicago. Do you know 2 A. them B. it C. him D. her 8. Ahmed lives near Yoko and AT B. me C. him D. her 9. My sister and a friend are visiting me. are visiting here for two days. A. She B. They Cc. We D. Them 10. Do have the correct time? A. you B. them C. him D. her Nouns and Pronouns 177CD EXERCISE 24. Chapter review: error analysis. Directions: Correct the errors. 1. Omar a car has. -* Omar has a car 2. Our teacher gives tests difficult. 3. Alex helps Mike and I. 4, Babys cry. 5. Mike and Tom in an apartment live. 6. There are seven woman in this class. 7. There are nineteen peoples in my class. 8. Olga and Ivan has three childrens. 9. There is twenty classroom in this building. 10. Mr. Jones is our teacher. I like her very much, 178 CHAPTER 6CHAPTER fs Count and Noncount Nouns Cl EXERCISE 1. Preview: noun practice. Directions: Describe the pictures. Add -s to the ends of the words if necessary. Otherwise, write an “x.” Picture Description A 1. one ring__x : oO 2. two ring_s A ; 3. three ring_s A ; 4. some jewelry__x__ = B @| 5. two letter. 6. one postcard 7. some mail 79Picture Description 8. one sofa 9. two table__ | | 3 LEAL TD < 10. some chair. 11. some furniture. 12. a lot of car. 13. a lot of traffic . a lot of money alot of coin 180 CHAPTER 77-1 NOUNS: COUNT AND NONCOUNT SINGULAR PLURAL ‘COUNT a book books ‘A COUNT NOUN NOUN one book two books ‘SINGULAR: ‘PLURAL: ook a+ noun noun + -s @ lot of books one + noun NONCOUNT | mail (no plural form) ‘A NONCOUNT NOUN NOUN! I gmail it SINGULAR: ‘PLURAL: a lot of mail Do not use a. A noncount noun does Do not use one. | | not have a plural form. ‘COMMON NONCOUNT NOUNS advice mail bread pepper furniture ‘money cheese rice help music coffee salt homework traffic food soup information vocabulary fruit sugar jewelry weather ‘meat tea luck work milk water C0 EXERCISE 2. Noun practice. Directions: Look at the italicized words. Underline the noun. Is it count or noncount? 1. He sits on a chair. noncount 2. He sits on furniture. count 3. She has a coin, count —_noncount 4. She has some money. count —_noncount 5. The street is full of sraffic count —_noncount 6. There are a lot of cars in the street. count —_noncount 7. [know a fact about bees. count —_noncount 8. Ihave some information about bees. count —_noncount 9. The teacher gives us homework. count —_noncount 10. We have an assignment. count —_noncount 11. Tike music. count —_ noncount 12, Would you like some coffee? count —_noncount 13. Our school has a library. count —_noncount Count and Noncount Nouns 18114. We are learning new vocabulary every day. count —_noncount 15. Ineed some advice. count —_noncount 16. Tom has a good job. 17. He likes his work. 18. Maria wears a lot of bracelets. count —_noncount count —_noncount noncount O EXERCISE 3. Let's talk: small groups. Directions: Work in small groups. List the noncount nouns. Then find the count nouns that are close in meaning. Use a/an with the count nouns. advice furnivure ‘money assignment homework music bracelet information song cloud Jewelry suggestion coin job weather desk Y letter work fact ¥ mail NONCOUNT counT a 2. 3. 4. . i 6. _ 1 8. 9. 10. 182 CHAPTER 7CO EXERCISE 4. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Most nouns are count nouns. Complete the sentences by naming things you see in the classroom. 1, Doccia..... 2. Iseea.. 3. Iseea.. ne... 4, Isee two.... 5. Isee five .... 6. Isee some... 7. Isee a lot of . 8, see many .. (@) A dog is an animal. A and an are used in front of singular count nouns. Tn (a): dog and animal are singular count nouns. (b) I work in an office. (©) Mr. Lee is an old man. Use an in front of words that begin with the vowels a, e, 4, and o: an apartment, an elephant, an idea, an ocean. In (©): Notice that an is used because the adjective (old) begins with a vowel and comes in front of a singular count noun (man). (@) Thave an uncle. ‘COMPARE © He works at a university. Use an if a word that begins with “u” has a vowel sound: an uncle, an ugly picture. Use a if a word that begins with “x” has a /yu/ sound: a university, a usual event. @® I need an hour to finish my work. ‘COMPARE (@) Llive in @ house. He lives in @ hotel. | In most words that begin with “R,” the “h” is In some words that begin with “h,” the “h” is not pronounced. Instead, the word begins with a vowel sound and an is used: an hour, an honor, pronounced. Use a if the “h” is pronounced. CO EXERCISE 5. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use a or an. 1. Bob is eating ______ apple. 2. Tom is eating banana. 3. Alice works in office. 4. [have idea. 5, [have ____ good idea. Count and Noncount Nouns 1836. Sue is taking ____ class. 7. Sue is taking ____ easy class. 8, Cuba is ____ island near the United States. 9, ____ hour has sixty minutes, 10. ____ healthy person gets regular exercise. 11, ______ horse has a long nose. 12. Maria is ____ honest worker. 13, Mark needs ___ math tutor. 14, __ university is educational institution, 15. Ann has _____ unusual job. CO EXERCISE 6. Listening. Gq Directions: Listen to each sentence. Circle the word you hear, la 6a an 2a 7a an 38 an 8a an 4a an %a an 5a mn 10.a 9 an 184 CHAPTER?(@) Ihave @ pen. AIAn is used in front of singular count nouns. In (@): The word pen is a singular count noun. (b) Ihave some pens. Some is used in front of plural count nouns. In (b): The word pens is a plural count noun. (©) Ihave some rice. Some is used in front of noncount nouns.* In (c): The word rice is a noncount noun. ‘Reminder: Noncount nouns do not have a plural form. Noncount nouns are grammatically singular, (EXERCISE 7. Noun practice. Directions: Look at the noun and circle the correct word (a, an, or some). Then decide if the noun is singular count, plural count, or noncount. sing. pl. count count | noncount la an letters v 2a an mail v 3. an some letter v 4.a an some table 5.a an some tables. 6a an some furniture 7.a an some car 8a an some automobiles 9.a an some buses 10,2 an some traffic ll.a an some _ advice 12a an some egg CO EXERCISE 8. Sentence practice. Directions: Use alan or some with the count nouns in these sentences. Are the nouns singular or plural? 1, Bobhas __@___book on his desk. > book = a singular count noun 2. Bob has ___some ____ books on his desk. -> books = a plural count noun ‘Count and Noncount Nouns 185.3. Isee __ desk in this room. 4, Isee ____ desks in this room. 5. 'm hungry. I would like ____ apple. 6. The children are hungry. They would like ______ apples. 7. We are doing ___ exercise in class. 8, We are doing ____ exercises in class. CI EXERCISE 9. Sentence practice. Directions: Use a, an, or some with the nouns in these sentences. Are they singular count nouns or noncount nouns? 1. Ineed ___some _ money. > money = a noncount noun 2, [need ___@ dollar, > dollar = a singular count noun 3. Alice has mail in her mailbox. 4. Alice has _____ letter in her mailbox. 5. I'm hungry. I would like ______ fruit. 6. Twould like ____ apple. abanana 7. Jane is hungry. She would like ______ food. 8. She would like sandwich. 9. Pd like to have _____ soup with my sandwich. 10. I'm thirsty, Pd like _____ water. C EXERCISE 10. Let's talk: small groups. Directions: Work in small groups. Complete the lists with nouns. You may use adjectives with the nouns. Share some of your answers with the class. 1, Things you can see in an apartment. an some (plural noun) come Gingularnoun) 186 CHAPTER 72. Things you can see in a classroom. a an some (plural noun) some (singular noun) 3. Things you can see outdoors. an comme: (plunll noun) come Gngular noun) CO EXERCISE 11. Sentence practice. Directions: Use alan or some with the nouns in these sentences. 1. Sonya is wearing ___some __ silver jewelry. She’s wearing necklace and ___some _ earrings. 2. I'm busy. I have homework to do. 3. Jane is very busy. She has work to do. 4. Janehas ______ job, She is ____ teacher. 5. We have _________ table, ___ sofa, and ___ chairs in our living room. 6, We have _____ furniture in our living room. 7. Susan has a CD player. She is listening to ___ music, 8. I'm hungry. I would like _____ orange. 9. The children are hungry. They would like oranges. They would like fruits 10. Ineed ____ information about the bus schedule. Count and Noncount Nouns 18711. I'm confused. Ineed ______ advice. 12. I’m looking out the window. I see cars, ____ bus, and trucks on the street. I see sees trallicy Cl EXERCISE 12. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Partner A: Your book is open to this page. Use a, an, or some with the given word. Partner B: Your book is open to p. 515. Help Partner A with the correct response if necessary. Example: desk PARTNER A: a desk PARTNER B: Right. Example: desks PARTNER A: a desks PARTNER B: Again? PARTNER A: some desks PARTNER B: Right. 1. apple 6. flower 11. rice 2. apples 7. man 12. advice 3. child 8. old man 13, hour 4. children 9. men 14. horse 5. music 10. island 15. food ‘Switch roles. Partner B: Your book is open to this page. Use a, an, or some with the given word. Partner A: Your book is open to p. 515. Help Partner B with the correct response if necessary. 16. animal 21. homework 26, university 17. animals 22. orange 27. uncle 18. chair 23. bananas 28. people 19. chairs 24, banana 29. house 20. furniture 25. fruit 30. bread 188 CHAPIER7Co EXERCISE 13. Sentence practice. Directions: Use the word in italics to complete the sentence. Add -s to a count noun (or give the irregular plural form). Do not add -s to a noncount noun. 1. 2. 3. 4, 10. wu. 12. 13, 4. 15. money desk man music . flower . information jewelry 5. child homework advice suggestion help sandwich animal banana Ineed some ___money Isee some ___desks __ in this room. Some ___men ___ are working in the street. I want to listen to some Andy wants to buy some ___ for his girlfriend. Ineed some Fred wants to buy some Some _____ are playing in the park. I can’t go to the movie because I have some ___ to do. Could you please give me some Thaye some. ec Ineed some ___ with my homework. We're hungry. We want to make some Isee some ______in the picture. The monkeys are hungry. They would like some Count and Noncount Nouns 18916. 17. 18. 19, fruit I'm hungry. I would like some —_______. weather We’xe having some hot right now. picture Thave some ____________of my family in my wallet. rice, bean Lusually have some ________ and for dinner. CO EXERCISE 14. Sentence practice. Directions: Change the italicized noun to its plural form if possible, changing a to some. Make other changes in the sentence as necessary. 1. a 10. 11. 12, 13. 14. 15. 16. ‘There is a chair in this room. PLURAL FORM > There are some chairs in this room. ‘There is some furniture in this room. PLURAL FORM ~> (none) . Thave a coin in my pocket. Ihave some money in my wallet. ‘There’s a lot of maffic on Main Street. . There’s a car on Main Street. . Our teacher assigns a lor of homework. like rock music. Hong Kong has a lot of hot svcather. I need some information and some advice from you. There’s a dictionary on the shelf. T hope you do well on your exam. Good luck! Here is a flower from my garden. Be careful! There’s some water on the floor. Ineed an apple for the fruit salad. The soup needs a potato and some salt. 190 CHAPTER 77-4 MEASUREMENTS WITH NONCOUNT NOU Units of measure are used with noncount nouns to express a specific quantity. For example: a glass of, a cup of, a piece of In (a): some water = an unspecific quantity. In (b): a glass of water = a specific quantity. (@) Td like some water. (©) I'd like a glass of water. (©) Td like a cup of coffee. (A) Td like @ piece of fruit. COMMON EXPRESSIONS OF MEASURE @ bag of rice @ bunch of bananas a jar of pickles @ bar of soap a can of corn* a loaf of bread a bottle of olive oil a carton of milk a piece of cheese a bowl of cereal 4 glass of water 4 sheet of paper a box of candy a head of lettuce a tube of toothpaste box bunch “In British English: @ tin of com. Cl EXERCISE 15. Noun practice. Directions: Complete the phrases. You are hungry and thirsty. What would you like? Use a piece of, a cup of, a glass of, a bow! of. SS 4, coffee Oe oa caslael een ese naranaaamanadenas nee ——— a meat 8. wine 9. fruit 10. rice Count and Noncount Nouns 191C1 EXERCISE 16. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work in pairs. Look at the list of food and drink. Check (7) what you eat and drink every day. Add your own words to the list. Then tell your partner the usual quantity you have every day. Use a piece of, two pieces of, a cup of, three cups of, a glass of, a bowl of, ot one, two, a, some, ctc., in your answers. Share a few of your partner’s answers with the class, Example: A egg banana coffee fruit ice cream orange juice PARTNER A: I have one egg every day. T usually eat two pieces of fruit. like a bowl of ice cream at night. T drink a glass of orange juice every morning. List of food and drinks. —— eas oS —— soup ___ ice cream irae __ water ___ bread chicken banana __ cheese apples tea (EXERCISE 17. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with nouns. 1, I'm going to the store. I need to buy a carton of _orange juice / milk / etc. 2. Lalso need a tube of ___________ and two bars of 192. CHAPTER 73. Ineed to find a can of _____ and a jar of 4. Ineed to get a loaf of _____and a box of 5. I would like ahead of ____ if it looks fresh. 6. Finally, I would like a couple of bottles of ______ and a jar of Cl EXERCISE 18. Review. Directions: Make a list of everything in the picture by completing the sentence I see ++++ Try to use numbers (¢.g., three spoons) or other units of measure (e.g., a box of candy). Use a for singular count nouns (e.g., a fly). Example: | see three spoons, a box of candy, a fly, etc. Cl EXERCISE 19. Review: pairwork. Directions: Work in pairs. Pretend that tomorrow you are moving into a new apartment together. What do you need? Ask each other questions. In writing, list the things you need and indicate quantity (two, some, a lot of, a little, etc.). List twenty to thirty things. Be sure to write down the quantity. You are completing this sentence: We need... Example: We need . . PARTNER A: a sofa and two beds. PARTNER B: a can opener. PARTNER A: some spaghetti. PARTNER B: a little fruit. PARTNER A: some bookcases Etc. Count and Noncount Nouns 193Cl EXERCISE 20. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Partner A: Your book is open to this page. Complete the sentences by using a, an, or some with the nouns. Partner B: Your book is open to p. 515. Help Partner A with the correct responses if necessary. 1. Pm hungry, Pd like... 4, Pm cold. Ineed ... a. food. a. coat. b. apple. b. hat. c. sandwich, c. warm clothes. d. bow! of soup. d. heat. 2. Pm thirsty. T'd like... 5. Pm tired. Ineed... a. glass of milk. a. sleep. b. water. b. break. c. cup of tea. c. relaxing vacation. 3. 'msick. Ineed... a. medicine. b. ambulance. Switch roles. Partner B: Your book is open to this page. Complete the sentences by using @, an, or some with the nouns. Partner A: Your book is open to p. 515. Help Partner B with the correct responses if necessary. 6. P'm hungry. Td like... 9. I'm cold. Ineed... a, snack, a, boots. b. fruit. b. blanket. c. orange. c. hot bath. 4. piece of chicken. d. gloves. 7. Pm thirsty. Td like... 10. I'm tired. Ineed . . a. juice. a, strong coffee. b. bottle of water. b. break, c. glass of ice tea. . vacation. d. nap. 8, Pm sick. Ineed... a. doctor. b. help. 194 CHAPTER 7USING MANY, MUCH, A FEW, A LITTLE (a) Idon’t get many letters. ‘many is used with PLURAL COUNT nouns. (b) Idon’t get much mail. much is used with NONCOUNT nouns. (© Ann gets a few letters. @ few is used with PLURAL COUNT nouns. (@) Tom gets @ Little mail. 4 little is used with NONCOUNT nouns. CO EXERCISE 21. Sentence practice. Directions: Change a lot of to many or much in these sentences. 1. Tom has a lot of problems. > Tom has many problems. 2. [don’t have a lot of money. -* I don’t have much money. 3. Lwant to visit a lot of cities in the United States and Canada. 4, Idon’t put a lot of sugar in my coffee. 5. Lhave a lot of questions to ask you. 6. Sue and John have a small apartment. They don’t have a lot of furniture. 7. You can see a lot of people at the zoo on Sunday. 8. Dick doesn’t get a lot of mail because he doesn’t write a lot of letters. 9. Chicago has a lot of skyscrapers. Montreal has a lot of tall buildings too. 10. Mary is lazy. She doesn’t do a lot of work. 11. I don’t drink a lot of coffee. 12. Jeff is a friendly person. He has a lot of friends. 13. Do you usually buy a lot of fruit at the market? 14. Does Andy drink a lot of coffee? 15. Do you write a lot of letters? CO EXERCISE 22. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the questions with many or much. 1, How ___much __ money do you have in your wallet? 2. How ___many _ roommates do you have? ‘Count and Noncount Nouns 1953. How __________ languages do you speak? 4. How homework does your teacher usually assign? 5. How tea do you drink in a day? 6. How sugar do you put in your tea? 7. How ____ sentences are there in this exercise? 8. How water do you need to cook rice? CO EXERCISE 23. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Partner A: Your book is open to this page. Make questions with how many or how much and are there or is there. Partner B: Help Partner A if necessary. Example: students in this room PARTNER A: How many students is there in this room? PARTNER B: Please try again. PARTNER A: How many students are there in this room? PARTNER B: Right. Example: coffee in that pot PARTNER A: How much coffee is there in that pot? PARTNER B: Right. 1. restaurants in (name of this city) 2. desks in this room 3. furniture in this room 4, letters in your mailbox today 5. mail in your mailbox today Switch roles. Partner B: Your book is open to this page. Make questions with how many or how much and are there or is there. Partner A: Help Partner B if necessary. 6. chicken in your refrigerator 7. bridges in (name of this city) 8. traffic on the street right now 9. cars in the street outside the window 10. people in this room 196 CHAPTER 7CO EXERCISE 24. Sentence practice. Directions: Change some to a few or a little. Use a few with count nouns. Use a little with noncount nouns. (See Chart 7-5, p. 195.) 1. Ineed some paper. > I'need a little paper. 2. Lusually add some salt to my food. 3. Thave some questions to ask you. 4. Bob needs some help. He has some problems, He needs some advice. 5. Ineed to buy some clothes. 6. Ihave some homework to do tonight. 7. Lusually get some mail every day. 8. L usually get some letters every day. 9, When I’m hungry in the evening, I usually eat some cheese. 10. We usually do some oral exercises in class every day. CO EXERCISE 25. Let's talk: pairwork, Directions: Work with a partner. Take turns asking and answering questions. Use the words from your list. Remember, you can look at your book before you speak. When you speak, look at your partner. Partner A: How much/many . . . would you like? Partner B: I'd like a little/a few, please. Thanks. Example: chicken PARTNER A: How much chicken would you like? PARTNER B: I'd like a little, please. Thanks. PARTNER A: Your turn now, Example: pencil PARTNER B: How many pencils would you like? PARTNER A: T'd like a few, please, PARTNER B: Your turn now. Partner A, Partner B 1, pen 1. salt 2. tea 2. banana 3. rice 3. soup 4. apple 4. coffee 5. money 5. assignment 6. help 6. cheese 7. wy 7. book Count and Noncount Nouns 1971 EXERCISE 26. Sentence review. Directions: Complete the sentences with these words. If necessary, use the plural form. bush ‘lass centimeter homework page thief dish inch paper way edge information piece valley fish knife foot leaf 1. I want to light a candle. I need some ___matches 2. fall from the trees in autumn. 3. There are two _________: male and female. 4, There are some __. forks, and spoons on the table. 5. I want to take the bus downtown, but I don’t know the bus schedule. I need some about the bus schedule. 6. I want to write a letter. I have a pen, but I need some 7. Plates and bowls are called 8. Married ____ are called wives. 9. There are a lot of trees and in the park. 10. Bob is studying. He has a lot of —___ todo. 11. My dictionary has 437 12. This puzzle has 200 - 13. A piece of paper has four 14. Mountains are high, and are low. 15. When the temperature is around 35°C (77°F), ’'m comfortable, But I don’t like very hot . 16, _____ steal things: money, jewelry, cars, etc. 7 are small, red, sweet, and delicious. 198 CHAPTER18. People carry their food on 19. Sweaters in a store often have four large, and extra large. at a cafeteria. : small, medium, 20. In some countries, people use cups for their tea. In other countries, they usually use 21. Toshiro has five 22. There are 100 23. There are 12 24, There are 3 for their tea. in his aquarium. in a meter. ere ina foot.* ina yard.* 5 @) A ‘Where's David? B: He's in the kitchen. (b) A: Ihave two pieces of fruit for us, an apple and a banana. Which do you want? B: T'd like the apple, thank you. (© A: It’s a nice summer day today. The sky is blue. The sun is hot. B: Yes, I really like summer, A speaker uses the when the speaker and the listener have the same thing or person in mind. The shows that a noun is specific. In (a): Both A and B have the same kitchen in mind. In (b): When B says “the apple,” both A and B have the same apple in mind. In (©): Both A and B are thinking of the same sky (there is only one sky for them to think of) and the same sun (there is only one sun for them to think of). (@) Mike has a pen and a pencil. The pen is blue. The pencil is yellow. (©) Mike has some pens and pencils. The pens are blue. The pencils are yellow. (f) Mike has some rice and some cheese. The rice is white. The cheese is yellow. The is used with + singular count nouns, as in (d). + plural count nouns, as in (e). + noncount nouns, as in (f). In other words, the is used with each of the three kinds of nouns. Notice in the examples: the speaker is using the for the second mention of a noun. When the speaker mentions a noun for a second time, both the speaker and listener are now thinking about the same thing. First mention: I have a pen. Second mention: The pen is blue. “Linch 2.54 centimeters. 1 foot = 30.48 centimeters. 1 yard = 0.91 meters. Count and Noncount Nouns 199Cl EXERCISE 27. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with the or alan. 1. Ihave ___@_____ notebook and ____ grammar book. notebook is brown, _____ grammar book is red. 2. Right now Pablo is sitting in class. He’s sitting between ___ woman and man, woman is Graciela. ______ man is Mustafa. 3. Susan is wearing _ ring and ____ necklace. ring is on her left hand 4. Tony and Sara are waiting for their plane to depart. Tony is reading magazine. Sara is reading __ newspaper. When Sara finishes newspaper and Tony finishes magazine, they will trade. 5. In the picture below, there are four figures: ___ circle, triangle, ____ square, and ___ rectangle. circle is next to _______ triangle. ____ square is between _____ triangle and ______ rectangle. circle triangle square-—rectangle 6. Linda and Anne live in apartment in ____ old building. They like ____ apartment because it is big. _______ building is very old, It was built more than one hundred years ago. 7. I gave my friend _____ card and _____ flower for her birthday. card wished her “Happy Birthday.” She liked both card and ___ flower. 8. We stayed at ________ hotel in New York. ______ hotel was expensive. 200 CHAPTER 7Cl EXERCISE 28. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Read the sentences aloud and complete them with the or alan. Then change roles. When you have finished speaking, write the answers. A: Look at the picture below. What do you see? Be see Cheat deg indian, 7 z 3 a plant. A: Where is chair? 3 B: chair is under ___ window. 6 7 A: Where is ____ plant? 3 B: plant is beside ____ chair. ° 10 A: Do you see any people? B: Yes. Ise ___ man and __ woman, ___ mani iv 2 3 standing. ____ woman is sitting down. ia A: Do you see any animals? B: Yes, Isee ___ dog, ____ cat, and bird in 5 76 7 cage. 8 A: What is ___ dog doing? 8 B: It’s sleeping. A: How about ___ cat? A = @ B: cat is watching NE 2 22 Count and Noncount Nouns 2011 EXERCISE 29. Review. Directions: Complete the sentences with the or a/an. 1. A: I need to go shopping. I need to buy coat. B: Pll go with you. I need to get umbrella. A: Okay. Great! When should we go? 2. A: Hil Come in! B: Hil weather is terrible today! It’s cold and wet outside. A: Well, it’s warm in here. B: What should I do with my coat and umbrella? A: You can put ____ coat in that closet. T'll take umbrella and put it in kitchen where it can dry. 3. My cousin Jane has ____ good job. She works in office. She uses computer. 4. A: How much longer do you need to use computer? B: Why? A: Ineed to use it too. B: Just five more minutes, then you can have it. 5. A: Ineed stamp for this letter, Do you have one? B: Yes. Here. A: Thanks, 6. A: Would you like egg for breakfast? eee B: No thanks, T'll just have lass of juice and some toast. 202 CHAPTER 77. A: Do you see my pen? I can’t find it. B: There it is. It’s on floor. A: Oh. I'see it. Thanks. 8. A: Be sure to look at moon tonight. B: Why? A: _____ moon is full now, and it’s beautiful. 9. A: Can I call you tonight? B: No. I don’t have _____ telephone in my apartment yet. I just moved in yesterday. 10. A: Could you answer ___ telephone? ‘Thanks. B: Hello? (@) © Apples are good for you. No article (symbolized by @) is used to make (b) © Students use @ pens and @ pencils. | generalizations with © Like to listen to @ music. + plural count nouns, as in (a) and (b), and @ O Rice is good for you. + noncount nouns, as in (c) and (d). (©) Tom and Ann ate some fruit. Compare: In (a), the word apples is general. It refers to The apples were very good, but the | all apples, any apples. No article (0) is used. bananas were too ripe. In (©), the word apples is specific, so the is used in front of it. It refers to the specific apples that Tom and Ann ate, () We went to a concert last night. COMPARE: In (c), music is general. In (f), the music is, The music was very good. specific. (© EXERCISE 30. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with the or @ (no article). 1, __@___ sugar is sweet. 2. Could you please pass me the _ sugar? 3. Oranges are orange, and bananas are yellow. ‘Count and Noncount Nouns 2034. There was some fruit on the table. I didn’t eat ______ bananas because they were soft and brown. 5. Everybody needs _____ food to live. 6. We ate at a good restaurant last night. food was excellent. i salt tastes salty, and pepper tastes hot. 8. Could you please pass me salt? Thanks. And could I have pepper too? 9. coffee is brown. 10. Steven made some coffee and some tea. coffee was very good. Ididn’t taste tea. 11, ____ pages in this book are full of grammar exercises. 12, ____ books consist of pages. 13. There was some food on the table, The children ate fruit, but they didn’t want vegetables. atomato broccoli 14. Llike fruit. I also like ____ vegetables. CO EXERCISE 31. Listening. Directions: Listen to each sentence. Decide if the given noun has a general or a specific use. . vegetables specific 2, cats general specific 3. teacher general specific 4. bananas general specific 5. cars general specific 6. keys general specific 7. computers general specific 8. ducks general specific 204 CHAPTER 7CO EXERCISE 32. Listening: article review. GQ Directions: Listen to the sentences and write the words you hear. Use a, an, or the. 1. A: Do you have pen? B: There’s one on counter in kitchen. 2. A: Where are keys to car? B: I’m not sure, but I have set, You can use mine. 3. A: Shh, I hear noise. B: Irs just bird outside, probably woodpecker. Don’t worry. 4, A: John Jones teaches at university. B: Iknow. He's English professor. ‘A: He’s also the head of ____ department. : Hurry! We're late, : No, it isn’t. It’s six! Look at : Oh my. I need A B: No, we’re not. It’s five o’clock, and we have A: B: hour. clock. new battery in my watch. staTeMENT | (a) Alice has some money. ‘Use some in affirmative statements. necative | (b) Alice doesn’t have any money. | Use any in negative statements. question | (©) Does Alice have any money? | Use either some or any in a question. (@) Does Alice have some money? (©) I don’t have any money. (noncount noun) (f) I don’t have any matches. (plural count noun) Any is used with noncount nouns and plural count nouns. Count and Noncount Nouns 205Cl EXERCISE 33. Sentence practice. Directions: Use some or any to complete the sentences. 1, Sue has __some __ money. 2. Idon’t have ___any __ money. 3. Do you have _some/any _ money? 4. Do you need ___ help? 5. No, thank you. I don’t need _____ help. 6, Ken needs _____heelp. 7. Anita usually doesn’t get _____ mal. 8, We don’t have _____ fruit in the apartment. We don’t have apples, ______ bananas, or _____ oranges. 9. The house is empty. There aren’t ____ people in the house. 10. Ineed ______ paper. Do you have ___ paper? 11. Heidi can’t write a letter because she doesn’t have _____ paper. 12. Steve is getting along fine. He doesn’t have ______ problems. 13. Ineed to go to the grocery store. I need to buy _____ food. Do you need to buy __ groceries? 14. I'm not busy tonight. I don’t have ____ homework to do. 15. Idon’t have ____ money in my purse. 16. There are ___ beautiful flowers in my garden this year. Cl EXERCISE 34. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Ask a classmate a question about what he or she sees in this room. Use any in the question. Examples: desks, monkeys SPEAKER A: (Speaker B), do you see any desks in this room? SPEAKER B: Yes, I do. I see some desks / a lot of desks / twenty desks. SPEAKER B: (Speaker G), do you see any monkeys in this room? SPEAKER C: No, I don’t. I don’t see any monkeys. Etc 206 CHAPTER 71. books 8. paper 15. pillows 2. flowers 9. backpacks 16. red sweaters 3. dictionaries 10. children 17. dogs or cats 4. birds 11. hats 18. bookshelves 5, furniture 12. signs on the wall 19. women. 6. food 13. bicycles 20. light bulbs 7. curtains 14. erasers CO EXERCISE 35. Sentence practice. Directions: Use any or a. Use any with noncount nouns and plural count nouns. Use @ with singular count nouns. 1, Idon’t have __any _ money. 2. Idon’t have ___a@____ pen. 3. I don’t have ___any __ brothers or sisters. 4. We don’t need to buy ____ new furniture. 5. Mr. and Mrs. Kelly don’t have _____ children. 6. Lcan’t make ____ coffe. There isn’t coffee in the house. 7. Ann doesn’t want _____cup of coffee. 8. I don’t like this room because there aren’t windows. 9, Amanda is very unhappy because she doesn’t have _____ friends. 10. Idon’t need _____ help. I can finish my homework by myself. 11. Idon’t have _____ comfortable chair in my dormitory room. 12. I'm getting along fine. I don’t have _____ problems. 13. Joe doesn’t have ____ car, so he has to take the bus to school, 14, Tdon’t have __ homework to do tonight. 15. Idon’t need _____ new clothes.* 16. Idon’t need ___ new suit. "*Cloches is always plural. The word clorhes does not have a singular form, Count and Noncount Nouns 207C EXERCISE 36. Chapter review: error analysis. Directions: Correct the errors. some 1, Ineed -an- advice from you 2. I don’t like hot weathers. 3. Lusually have a egg for breakfast 4, Sun rises every morning. 5. The students in this class do a lot of homeworks every day. 6. How many language do you know? 7. 1 don’t have many money. 8. John and Susan don’t have some children, 9. A pictures are beautiful. You're a good photographer. 10. There isn’t a traffic early in the morning. 11. I can’t find any bow! for my soup. Co EXERCISE 37. Review: pairwork. Directions: Work in pairs. Ask and answer questions about the things and people in the picture on p. 209. Example: PARTNER A: How many boys are there in the picture? PARTNER B: There are three boys in the picture. PARTNER A: Are there any flowers? PARTNER B: No, there aren’t any flowers in the picture. PARTNER A: Are you sure? PARTNER B: Well, hmmm. I don’t see any flowers. PARTNER A: Oh? Etc 208 CHAPTER 7Fi Sa in tt t)CO EXERCISE 38. Sentence practice. Directions: Make the nouns plural where necessary. cities 1. Toronto and Bangkok are big -city- 2. [need some information. (no change) 3. Horse are large animals. 4, Tike to listen to music when I study, 5. [have two small child. 6. [like to tell them story. 7. There are sixty minute in an hour. 8. Children like to play with toy. 9. My bookcase has three shelf. 10. ‘There are five woman and seven man in this class. 11. Taiwan and Cuba are island, 12. I drink eight glass of water every day. 13. Tomato are red when they are ripe. 14. Before dinner, I put dish, spoon, fork, knife, and napkin on the table. 15. T have many friend. I don’t have many enemy. C1 EXERCISE 39. Let's talk: review. Directions: Imagine that a new shopping center is coming to your neighborhood. A drugstore and a grocery store are already in place. Decide what other stores you want to add. Your teacher will help you with vocabulary you don’t know. Part 1. Work alone. Choose any six businesses from the list and write their names in any of the six available spaces on Blueprint #1 on p. 211. 210 CHAPTER 7¥ a bank Y a grocery store a post office a bookstore an ice-cream shop a shoe store 4 camera shop an Internet café a sports equipment store Y a drugstore a laundromat a vegetarian food store a drycleaner’s 4 movie theater @ video rental store an exercise gym a music store a fast-food restaurant a pet supply store BLUEPRINT #1 (your business locations) BACK a drugstore 7a bank i 2 JE a grocery store i. 7 5. a FRONT Parr 11. Work with a partner, but do not look at each other’s blueprints. Partner A: Ask your partner about the location of his/her new businesses. Write your partner’s answers on your copy of Blueprint #2. Partner B: Ask your partner about the location of his/her new businesses. Write your partner’s answers on your copy of Blueprint #2. ‘When you are finished, compare your answers. Does your Blueprint #1 match your partner’s Blueprint #2? Question and answer pattern. PARTNER A: Is there a/an ? PARTNER B: Yes, there is. / No, there isn’t. PARTNER A: Where is the ? PARTNER B: It’s next to / beside / in back of / in front of the Count and Noncount Nouns 211Example: PARTNER A: Is there an exercise gym? PARTNER B: No, there isn’t. PARTNER A: Is there a bank? PARTNER B: Yes, there is. PARTNER A: Where is the bank? PARTNER B: It’s in front of the drugstore. BLUEPRINT #2 (your partner's business locations) BACK a drugstore —L.a bank 1 2. ae : agrocery store [4 So 5. i FRONT 212 CHAPTERCHAPTER § Expressing Past Time, Part 1 PRESENT TIME PAST TIME (@) Lam in class today. (b) I was in class yesterday. (©) Alice is at the library today. (A) Alice was at the library yesterday. (©) My friends ave at home today. | (f) My friends were at home yesterday. SIMPLE PAST TENSE OF BE I Singular Plural she Twas we were fe (ee you were (one person) you were (more than one person) | jt she was they were he was we feewas om | + they Cl EXERCISE 1. Sentence practice. Directions: Change the sentences to past time. 1. Bob is in class today. > He sas in class yesterday 100. I'm in class today. > I was in class yesterday too, Mary is at the library today. ‘We're in class today. You're busy today. I'm happy today. ‘The classroom is hot today. Ann is in her office today. pen aye ep ‘Tom is in his office today. 10. Ann and Tom are in their offices today.C EXERCISE 2. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Talk about today and yesterday. Close your book for this activity. ’'m in class. ’'m in class today. I was in class yesterday too. 1, We're in class. 6. (...) is absent. 2. I’m in class. 7. Ym tired. 3. (...) is in class. 8. (...) and (...) are (in the first row). 4. (...) and (...) are in class. 9. The door is open/closed. 5. (...) is here. 10. It’s hovcold. EGATIVE (a) I was not in class yesterday. NEGATIVE CONTRACTIONS (b) I wasn’t in class yesterday. ‘was + not = wasn’t ‘were + not = weren’t (©) They were not at home last night. | I (@) They weren’t at home last night. | she , C0 EXERCISE 3. Sentence practice. Directions: Study the time expressions. Then complete the sentences. Use wasn’t or weren’t, Use a past time expression. PRESENT PAST today > yesterday this morning > —_~yesterday morning this afternoon > yesterday afternoon tonight > last night this eocek > last week 1. Ken is here today, but ___he wasn’t here yesterday. 2. Pm at home tonight, but ___L wasn’t at home last night, 214 CHAPTER 83. Olga is busy today, but 4, Tom is at the library tonight, but 5. Alex and Rita are at work this afternoon, but 6. You're here today, but 7. Dr. Ruckman is in her office this morning, but 8. It’s cold this week, but Cl EXERCISE 4. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Think about your first day in this class. Check (7) the words that describe how you felt. Then answer your teacher's questions. Example: happy TEACHER: Were you happy the first day of class? SPEAKER A: Yes, I was happy. SPEAKER B: No, I wasn’t happy. TEACHER: (to Speaker C) Tell me about (Speaker A) and (Speaker B). SPEAKER C: (Speaker A) was happy. (Speaker B) wasn’t happy. 1, __ excited 4, ___ relaxed (not nervous) 2, ___. scared/afraid oe quiet 3, ___ nervous 6, —_ talkative CO EXERCISE 5. Listening. Gq Directions: Listen to the sentences. Circle the verbs you hear. . was 6. were weren’t 1 2. was wasn’t 7. was wasn’t 3. was wasn’t 8. was wasn’t 4. was = wasn’t 9. were weren't 5. were weren’t 10. were weren't Cl EXERCISE 6. Let's talk: find someone who .... Directions: Interview your classmates about their days in elementary school. Find people who can answer yes to your questions. Write down their names. Speaker A: Make a complete question with the given words. Use the past tense. Ask (Speaker B) the question. Speaker B: Answer the question, Expressing Past Time, Part! 215Example: you \ shy SPEAKER A: Were you shy? SPEAKER B: No, I wasn’t. SPEAKER A: (to Speaker Q) Were you shy? SPEAKER C: Yes, I was. First name First name 1, you \ shy 7. you \ noisy 2. you \ outgoing 8. you \ athletic (not shy) 3. you \ talkative 9. you \ active 4, you \ happy 10. you \ well- behaved 5. you \ hardworking 11. you \ a serious student 6. you \ quiet 12, you \ artistic YES/NO QUESTIONS SHORT ANSWER + (LONG ANSWER) (@) Were you _ in class yesterday? > Yes, Iwas. (be) + (subject) + No, I wasn’t. (b) Was Carlos athome last night? => ‘Yes, he was. (be) + (Subject) No, he wasn’t. (was in class yesterday.) (wasn’t in class yesterday.) (He was at home last night.) (He wasn’t at home last night.) INFORMATION QUESTIONS SHORT ANSWER + (LONG ANSWER) Where + (be) + (subject) Where + (be) + (subject) (©) Where were you yesterday? > In class. (@) Where was Jennifer last night? > At home. (Iwas in class yesterday.) (She was at home last night.) 216 CHAPTER 8CO EXERCISE 7. Question practice. Directions: Make questions and give short answers. 1. (you \ at home \ last night) A: Were you at home last night? B: No, ___lwasn’t, _ 2. (Mr. Yamamoto \ absent from class \ yesterday) A: B: Yes, 3. (Oscar and Anya \ at home \ last night) A B: Yes, 4. (you \ nervous \ the first day of class) A B: No, 5. (Ahmed \ at the library \ last night) A: B: Yes, 6. (Mr. Shin \ in class \ yesterday) A: B: No, 2 ice ee B: : At home. Expressing Past Time, Part 1 2177. (vou and your family \ in Canada \ last year) A: B: No, A: Where B: In Ireland. 8. (you \ be \ at the library \ right now) A: B: No, ————— B: In class. CO EXERCISE 8. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Ask and answer questions. If your partner answers yes, the exercise item is finished. If your partner answers no, ask a where-question. Example: in class \ now PARTNER A (book open): (Partner B), are you in class now? PARTNER B (book closed): Yes, Lam. Example: at the library \ last night PARTNER A (book open): (Partner B), were you at the library last night? PARTNER B (book closed): No, I wasn’t. PARTNER A (book open): Where were you? PARTNER B (book closed): I was (at home \ in my room \ at a party, ete.). 1. at home \ now 5. in (a place in this city) \ now 2. at home \ yesterday morning 6. in (this city) \ last year 3. at home \ last night 7. (your teacher) \ in class \ yesterday bes al tet ac 8. (110 classmates) \ here \ yesterday Switch roles. Partner A: Close your book. Partner B: Open your book. Your turn now. 9. in (this country) \ two weeks ago 10. in (this country) \ two years ago 11. in (a city) \now 12. at (a park in this city) \ yesterday afternoon 218 CHAPTER 813, at (@ famous place in this city) \ this morning* 14. at (a popular place for students) \ last night 15. at home \ this morning 16, (two students) \ (this building) \ yesterday afternoon Ci EXERCISE 9. Question practice. Directions: Make questions and give short answers. 1. (you \ in class \ yesterday) A: Were you in class yesterday? Bi Ne UWosee ee v . (Anita \ in class \ today) A: Is Anita in class today? B: No, she ‘She’s absent. 3. (you \ tired \ last night) A: et eT went tobe cary, 4. (vow \ hungry \ right now) A: B: No, » but I’m thirsty. 5. (the weather \ hot in New York City \ last summer) A: Beng eee ey ho 6. (the weather \ cold in Alaska \ in the winter) A: TS Neg es very cold: “Iryou are asking this question in the morning, use a present verb, If i is now afternoon or evening, use a past verb, Expressing Past Time, Part} 2197. (Yoko and Mohammed \ here \ yesterday afternoon) 10. lL. A: ee (the students \ in this class \ intelligent) A: B: Of course |. (Mr. Tok \ absent \ today) A They are very intelligent! B: Yes, A: Where B: (Tony and Benito \ at the party \ last night) A: B: No, A: Where B: (Amy \ out of town \ last week) A: B: Yes, A Wiese 220 CHAPTER 812. (Mr. and Mrs. Rice \ in town \ this week) A: BeNG, Theyre out of town A: Oh? Where B: 8-4 THE SIMPLE PAST TENSE: USING -ED SIMPLE PRESENT | (2) I walk — to school every day. | verb + ~ed = the simple past tense SIMPLE PAST (b) I walked to school yesterday. | I SIMPLE PRESENT | (c) Ann walks to school every day. | 2° SIMPLE PAST @ Ann wathed to school yesterday. |W | pes CO EXERCISE 10. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences orally in the simple past. Then write the answers. 1, Every day I walk. Yesterday I y . Every day I work. Yesterday I 3. Every day Omar shaves. Yesterday Omar 4, Every night Paula watches TV. Last night she TV. 5. Every day Mrs. Wu cooks. Last night she 6. Every day people smile. Yesterday they 7. Every week it rains. Last week it 8. Every day we ask questions. Yesterday we ___________ questions. 9, Every day I talk on the phone. YesterdayI ________ on the phone. 10. Every day Tomo listens to music. Yesterday he _____ to music. Expressing Past Time, Part 1 221CO EXERCISE 11. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use the words in the list. Use the simple present or the simple past. ask erase smile walk cook Vrain stay watch dream shave wait work 1, It often rains in the morning. It rained yesterday. 2.1 to school every morning. I to school yesterday morning. 3. Sue often questions. She a question in class yesterday. 4.1 a movie on television last night. I usually TV in the evening because I want to improve my English. 5. Mike his own dinner yesterday evening. He his own dinner every evening. 6. Lusually ___ home at night because I have to study. T home last night. 7. Lhave a job at the library. I at the library every evening. i there yesterday evening. 8. When I am asleep, I often about my family last night.* 9. Linda usually for the bus at a bus stop in front of her apartment building. She ________ for the bus there yesterday morning. 10. The teacher ____ some words from the board a couple of minutes ago. He used his hand instead of an eraser. "The past of dream can be dreamed or dreamt 222 CHAPTERS11, Our teacher is a warm, friendly person, She often when she is talking to us. 12. Rick doesn’t have a beard anymore. He ____ it five days ago. Now he ____ every morning. Cl EXERCISE 12. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Check (V7) all the activities you did yesterday. Tell your partner. Begin with Yesterday I... . Share a few of your partner's answers with the class. 1, ___ ask the teacher a question 8, __ watch TV 2, ___ cook dinner 9, ___. work at my desk 3, ____ wash some clothes 10. ____ wait for a bus 4, ____ listen to music on the radio 11. ____ smile at several people 5. ____ use a computer 12. ___ talk on a cell phone 6. ___ stay home in the evening 13, ___. dream in English 7. walk in a park 14. ___. dream in my language Cl EXERCISE 13. Pronunciation practice. Directions: Pronounce the words in each group. Group 4: Final -ed is pronounced /t/ if the verb ends in a voiceless sound.* 1. walked 3. laughed 5. missed 7. stretched 2. washed 4, helped 6. sniffed 8. watched Group B: Final -ed is pronounced /d/ if the verb ends in a voiced sound. 1. closed 3. rubbed 5. filled 7. loved 9. stirred 2. waited 4. turned 6. seemed 8. stayed 10. hugged Group c: Final -ed is pronounced /ad/ if the verb ends in the letter “d” or “t.” 1. rent 2. need 3. visit 4. add *Sce Chart 3-8, p. 66, for information about voiceless and voiced sounds, Expressing Pas! Time, Part 1 223Cl EXERCISE 14. Listening. Gq Directions: Listen to each sentence and circle the verb you hear. 1. play plays 2. play plays played 3. watch watches watched 4. enjoy enjoys enjoyed 5. watch watches watched 6. ask asks asked 7. answer answers answered 8. listen listens listened 9. like likes liked 10. work works worked Cl EXERCISE 15. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Answer the questions your teacher asks you. Practice pronouncing -ed. Close your book for this activity. Example: walk to the front of the room TEACHER: (Speaker A), walk to the front of the room. SPEAKER A: (walks to the front of the room) TEACHER: (to Speaker B) What did (Speaker A) do? SPEAKER B: She/He walked to the front of the room. TEACHER: (to Speaker A) What did you do? SPEAKER A: I walked to the front of the room. 1. smile 11. wash your hands (pantomime) 2. laugh 12. touch the floor 3. cough 13. point at the door 4. sneeze 14, fold a piece of paper 5. shave (pantomime) 15. count your fingers 6. erase the board 16. push (something in the room) 7. sign your name 17. pull (something in the room) 8, open the door 18. yawn 9. close the door 19. pick up your pen 10. ask a question 20. add two and two on the board 224 CHAPTERSPAST TIME V YESTERDAY Last 400 (@) Bob was here . (b) Sue was here . (©) Tom was here. . ‘yesterday. last night. five minutes ago. esterday morning, last eck Coie Yesterday afternoon. month. eas yesterday evening. last year pa a —— six months ago. aa @ (one) year ago. last winter. last Monday. last Tuesday. last Wednesday. ete. NoTICE In (a): yesterday is used with morning, afternoon, and evening. In (b): last is used with night, with long periods of time (week, month, year), with seasons (spring, summer, etc.), and with days of the week. In ©: ago means “in the past.” It follows specific lengths of time (¢.g., two minutes + ago, five years + ago). Oo EXERCISE 16. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use yesterday or last. 1. [dreamed about you ___last night. 2. Lwas downtown morning. 3. Two students were absent ___ Friday. 4. Ann wasn’t at home —____ night. 5. Ann wasn’t at home _________ evening. 6. Carmen was out of town week. 7. I visited my aunt and uncle ____ fall. 8. Roberto walked home ____ afternoon. 9. My sister arrived in Miami ____ Sunday. 10. We watched TV night. Expressing Past Time, Part 1 22511. Ali played with his children evening. 12. Yoko arrived in Los Angeles summer. 13. I visited my relatives in San Francisco —_______.._____ month. 14. My wife and I moved into a new house ___ year. 15. Mrs. Porter washed the kitchen floor ___ morning. Cl EXERCISE 17. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with your own words. Use ago. 1. I'm in class now, but I was at home ____ten minutes ago / two hours ago / etc. 2. I'm in class today, but I was absent from class 3. Pm in this country now, but I was in my country 4, Twas in (name of a city) 5. was in elementary school 6. Larrived in this city 7. There is a nice park in this city. I was at the park 8. We finished Exercise 16 9. Lwas home in bed 10. It rained in this city Co EXERCISE 18. Listening. Co Directions: Listen to the sentences and answer the questions. PART 1, Write today’s date. Today’s date is : Listen to the sentences and write the dates. 1 : a 226 CHAPTERSPart u. Write the correct time. Right now, the time is Listen to the sentences and write the times you hear. 8 9. E 10. ‘RBS (GROUP 1) Some verbs do not hav re ~ed forms. Their past forms are irregular. PRESENT PAST come - came do - did eat ate get - got ‘go ~ went have -had put ~ put ‘see-saw sit-sat sleep - slept stand - stood write — wrote (a) come to class every day. (b) I came to class yesterday. (© I do my homework every day. (d) I did my homework yesterday. (©) Ann eats breakfast every morning. © Ann ate breakfast yesterday morning. Cl EXERCISE 19. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Practice using irregular verbs. Close your book for this activity. Example: come-came ‘TEACHER: co! me-came. I come to class every day. I came to class yesterday. What did I do yesterday? STUDENTS: (repeat) come-came. You came to class yesterday. 1. do-did We do exercises in class every day. We did exercises yesterday. What did we do 2. eat-ate yesterday? Teat lunch at 12:00 every day. Yesterday I ate lunch at 12:00, What did I do at 12:00 yesterday? 3. get-got yesterday? I get up early every day. I got up early yesterday. What did I do Did you get up early yesterday? What time did you get up? Expressing Past Time, Part 1 2274. go-went I go downtown every day. I went downtown yesterday. What did I do yesterday? Did you go downtown? Where did you go? 5. have-had 1 have breakfast every morning. I had breakfast yesterday morning, What did I do yesterday morning? I had toast and fruit for breakfast. What did you have? 6. put-put | like hats. I put on a hat every day. What did I do yesterday? 7. see-saw 1 see my best friend every day. Yesterday I saw my best friend. What did I do yesterday? Did you see your best friend? Who did you see? 8. sit-sat I usually sit at my desk in the mornings. I sat at my desk yesterday morning. What did I do yesterday morning? 9. sleep-slept Sometimes I sleep for a long time at night. I slept for 10 hours last night. What did I do last night? Did you sleep for 10 hours last night? How long did you sleep last night? 10. stand-stood 1 stand at the bus stop every day. I stood at the bus stop yesterday. What did I do yesterday? 11. write-wrote 1 usually write in my journal every day. Yesterday I wrote in my journal. What did I do yesterday? Did you write in your journal? What did you write about? Cl EXERCISE 20. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Take turns changing the sentences from the present to the past. Example: (have class every day, PARTNER A: I have class every day. I had class yesterday. Your turn now. Example: Roberto gets mail from home every week. PARTNER B: Roberto gets mail from home every week. Roberto got mail from home last week. Your turn now. Partner A Partner B 1, Rita gets some mail every day. 2. They go downtown every day. 3. The students stand in line at the cafeteria every day. 4. Isee my friends every day. 5. Hamid sits in the front row every day. 6. Isleep for eight hours every night. We have lunch every day. I write e-mails to my parents every week. Wai-Leng comes to class late every day. I do my homework every day. T eat breakfast every morning. Roberto puts his books in his briefcase every day. 228 CHAPTER 8OO EXERCISE 21. Verb review. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use the words in parentheses. Use the simple present, the present progressive, or the simple past. Pay attention to spelling. 1. Le) __got______ up at eight o’clock yesterday morning. 2. Mary (talk) ________________ to John on the phone last night. 3. Mary (talk) ______________ to John on the phone right now. 4. Mary (talk) ________ to John on the phone every day. 5. Jim and I (ear) _________________ lunch at the cafeteria two hours ago. 6. We (eat) __ lunch at the cafeteria every day. 7.1 (go) _______ to bed early last night. 8. My roommate (study) ______________ Spanish last year. 9. Sue (write) ______________ an e-mail to her parents yesterday. 10. Sue (write) ___ an e-mail to her parents every week. 11. Sue is in her room right now. She (sit) ________ at her desk. 12, Maria (do) ___ her homework last night. 13. Yesterday I (see) _________ Fumiko at the library. 14. I (have) a dream last night. I (dream) about my friends. I (sleep) for eight hours. 15. A strange thing (happen) _____________ to me yesterday. I couldn’t remember my own telephone number. 16. My wife (come) _____________ home around five every day. 17. Yesterday she (come) home at 5:15. 18. Our teacher (stand) ____in the middle of the room right now. 19. Our teacher (stand) in the front of the room yesterday. Expressing Past Time, Part 1 22920. 21. 22. Tom (put) _______ the butter in the refrigerator yesterday. a He (pur) ____________ the milk in the refrigerator every day. Pablo usually (sit) __________ iin the back of the room, but yesterday he (sit) __________iin the front row. Today he (be) absent. He (be) absent two days ago too. 1 EXERCISE 22. Listening. GQ. Directions: Listen to the beginning of each sentence. Circle the correct completion(s). There may be more than one correct answer. Example: He did... . absent i 2) 3. 4 5: 6. a chair some rice some numbers on the floor aman together . late yesterday car an answer pretty a book . a good grade last month anew truck . a watch next to my parents at the bus stop O EXERCISE 23. Let's talk: small groups. Directions: Work in small groups. Use numbers to put the sentences in correct story order. Then finish the story. Share it with the class. 2 He looked up at the stars. He put the postcard down and went to sleep. ‘The bear stood next to his tent. ‘The next morning, John sat up and rubbed his eyes. One night, John went camping. ‘They were beautiful. He wrote a postcard to his girlfriend, ‘The bear had his postcard. He saw a bear. 230 CHAPTERS8-7 THE SIMPLE PAS’ SUBJECT + DID + Nor + MAINVERB L @I did not walk school yesterday. | you (b) You did not walk to school yesterday. | she © Tom did not eat _—_lunch yesterday. he f+ did not + main verb* (@) They did come to class yesterday. ve INCORRECT: I did not walked to school yesterday. they ‘WNCORRROT: Tien did et ate Lene yesterday. Notice: The simple form of the main verb is used with did not. (©) Ididn’t wath to school yesterday. NEGATIVE CONTRACTION (f) Tom didn’t eat lunch yesterday. did + not = didn’t “EXCEPTION: did is NoT used when the main verb is be. See Charts 8-2, p. 214, and 8-3, p. 216, ‘CORRECT: Joe mas’ here yesterday. INCORRECT: Joe dich’ be here yesterday. OC EXERCISE 24. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use not. 1, I don’t go to the park every day. I went to the park last week, but I didn't go there yesterday. 2. We don’t have rain every day. We had rain two days ago, but we rain yesterday. 3. Linda doesn’t sit in the front row every day. She sat there yesterday, but she there two days ago. 4. Mrs, Romano and her son don’t talk on the phone every day. They talked to each other last weekend, but they ___________ on the phone last night. Cl EXERCISE 25. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Take turns using I don’t «+ yesterday. Example: walk to school PARTNER A: I don’t walk to school every day. I didn’t walk to school yesterday. Your turn now. Example: listen to the radio PARTNER B: I don’t listen to the radio every day. I didn’t listen to the radio yesterday. ‘Your turn now. every day and I didn’t Expressing Past Time, Part 1 231Partner A Partner B 1. eat breakfast 1. go to the library 2. watch TV 2. visit my friends 3. go shopping 3. see (name of a person) 4, read a newspaper 4. do my homework 5. study 5. get on the Internet CO EXERCISE 26. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Practice present and past negatives. Close your books for this activity. Speaker A: Use I don’t and I didn’t. Use an appropriate past time expression with didn’t, Speaker B: Report what Speaker A said. Use She/He doesn’t and then She/He didn’t with an appropriate past time expression. Example: walk to school every morning TEACHER: walk to school every morning SPEAKER A: I don’t walk to school every morning. I didn’t walk to school yesterday morning. TEACHER: (to Speaker B) Tell me about (Speaker A). SPEAKER B: She/He doesn’t walk to school every morning. She/He didn’t walk to school yesterday morning. 1, eat breakfast every morning 6. dream in English every night 2. watch TV every night 7. visit my aunt and uncle every year 3. talk to (someone) every day 8. write to my parents every week 4. play soccer every afternoon 9. read the newspaper every morning 5. study grammar every evening 10. pay all of my bills every month 1 EXERCISE 27. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use the words in parentheses. Use simple present, simple past, or present progressive. 1, Jasmin (come, not) didn't come to the meeting yesterday. She (stay) _______ in her office. 2. I (go) ___ to. a movie last night, but I (enjoy, not) it. It (be, not) ___________ very good. 232 CHAPTERS3. Sue (read) _________ a magazine right now. She (watch, not) TV. She (like, not) to watch TV during the day. 4. Toshi is a busy student. Sometimes he (eat, not) lunch because he (have, not) ____________ enough time between classes. Yesterday he (have, not) ____________ time for lunch. He (get) ________ hungry during his afternoon class. Cl EXERCISE 28. Let's talk: small groups. Directions: Work in groups of six to eight students, Tell your group things you didn’t do yesterday. Repeat the information from the other students in your group. Example: SPEAKER A: I didn’t go to the zo yesterday. SPEAKER B: (Speaker A) didn’t go to the zoo yesterday. I didn’t have lunch in Beijing yesterday. SPEAKER C: (Speaker A) didn’t go to the zoo yesterday. (Speaker B) didn’t have lunch in Beijing yesterday. I didn’t swim in the Pacific Ocean yesterday, Etc. Suggestions: g0 (someplace) drive to (a place) walk to (a place) fly to (a place) have (a meal) study (a subject) eat (something) buy (something) swim (in a place) sleep in (a place) sing (in the shower) wear (something) visit (a person) see (someone) talk to (a person) wake up (at a time) use (something) Expressing Past Time, Part 1 2338-8 THE SIMPLE PAST: YES: O QUESTIONS DID + SUBJECT + MAIN VERB SHORT ANSWER + (LONG ANSWER) (@) Did (b) Did Mary walk to school? + Yes, she did. _ (She walked to school.) No, she didn’t. (She didn’t walk to school.) Yes, I did. (T-came to class.) No,I didn’t, (I didn’t come to class.) you come 10 class? CO EXERCISE 29. Question practice. Directions: Make questions. Give short answers. A A: Did you walk downtown yesterday? B: Yes, | did. (I walked downtown yesterday.) A: Did it rain last week? : —_No, it didn’t. __ (It didn’t rain last week.) (Late lunch at the cafeteria.) (Mr. Kwan didn’t go out of town last week.) (Ihad a cup of tea this morning.) (Benito and I went to a party last night.) (Olga studied English in high school.) (Yoko and Ali didn’t do their homework last night.) Be ee ee ee (I saw Gina at dinner last night.) 234 CHAPTER 810. A: B: ___________ (I didn’t dream in English last night.) (EXERCISE 30. Listening. Gq Directions: Listen to the questions and write the words you hear. Example: You will hear: Did you eat breakfast this morning? ‘You will write: ___Did you ___ eat breakfast this morning? do well on thelr 2, ____________ finish the assignment? eee 4 answer your question? ee ceed more belpe 6, ______understand the homework? 7, —________ explain the project? 8 ________ complete the project? oer do well 10, ee eee the clase Co EXERCISE 31. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Ask questions about her/his activities this morning. Example: walk to school PARTNER A (book open): Did you walk to school this morning? PARTNER B (book closed): Yes, I did. OR No, I didn’t. get up at seven eat breakfast study English walk to class talk to (name of a person) see (name of a person) ay een Expressing Past lime, Part 1 235Switch roles. Partner A: Close your book. Partner B: Open your book. Your turn to talk now. 7. make your bed 8. go shopping 9. have a cup of tea 10. watch TV 11. listen to the radio 12. read a newspaper CO EXERCISE 32. Let's talk: find someone who .... Directions: Interview your classmates. Find people who can answer yes to your questions. Write down their names. Speaker A: Make a complete question with the given verb. Use the past tense. Ask (Speaker B) the question. Speaker B: Answer the question. Give both a short answer and a long answer, Example: eat ice cream \ yesterday? SPEAKER A: Did you eat ice cream yesterday? SPEAKER B: No, I didn’t. SPEAKER A: (Ask another student.) Did you eat ice cream yesterday? SPEAKER C: Yes, I did. I ate ice cream yesterday. First name 1. eat rice \ yesterday 2. do homework \ last night 3. get an e-mail \ yesterday 4. go shopping \ yesterday 5. sleep well \ last night 6. a. have coffee for breakfast \ this morning b. put sugar in your coffee \ this morning 7. see a good movie \ last week 8. write in English \ today 9. sit on the floor \ yesterday 10. stand in line for something \ last week 236 CHAPTERSCl EXERCISE 33. Listening. Directions: Listen to the reductions in spoken English. In spoken questions, did and the pronoun that follows are often reduced. Part 1. Listen to the examples. 1. Did you (“dih-juh”) read the paper this morning? 2. A: Tom called. B: Did he (“dih-de”) leave a message? 3. A: Sara called. B: Did she (“dih-she”) leave a message? 4. Did it (“dih-dit”) rain yesterday? 5. A: The children are watching TV. B: Did they (“dih-they”) finish their homework? 6. I can’t find my notebook. Did I (“dih-di”) leave it on your desk? Part 1, Listen to the sentences. You will hear reduced speech did + pronoun. Write the non-reduced forms. Examples: ‘You will hear: “Dih-dit” rain yesterday? You will write it rain yesterday? ‘You will hear: “Dih-juh” come to class yesterday? You will write: ___Did you _ come to class yesterday? 1 finish the homework assignment? 2 take a Jong time? 3 hear my question? 4, ________ hear my question? speak loud enough? 6, _____ understand the information? 7, _______ understand the information? 8 want more help? 9. explain it okay? 10, ___ do a good job? Expressing Past Time, Part 1 2378-9 IRREGULAR VERBS (GROUP 2) bring ~ brought drive ~ drove run = ran buy = bought read - read* teach ~ taught catch ~ caught vide - rode think - thought drink — drank *The past form of read ie pronounced the same as the color red. CO EXERCISE 34. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Practice using irregular verbs. Close your book for this activity. Example: teach-taught TEACHER: teach-taught. I teach class every day. I taught class yesterday. What did I do yesterday? STUDENTS: (repeat) teach-taught. You taught class. 1. 10. bring-brought bring my book to class every day. I brought my book to class yesterday. What did I do yesterday? . buy-bought I buy books at the bookstore. I bought a book yesterday. What did I do yesterday? . catch-caught I catch the bus every day. I caught the bus yesterday. What did Ido yesterday? Sometimes I catch a cold. Yesterday I caught a bad cold. What did I do yesterday? . think—thought 1 often think about my family. I thought about my family yesterday. What did I do yesterday? . REVIEW: What did I bring to class yesterday? What did you bring yesterday? ‘What did I buy yesterday? What did you buy yesterday? Did you teach class yesterday? Who did? Did I walk to class yesterday, or did I catch the bus? What did I think about yesterday? What did you think about yesterday? |. run-ran Sometimes I’m late for class, so I run. Yesterday I was late, so I ran. ‘What did I do yesterday? . read-read | like to read books. I read every day. Yesterday I read a book. ‘What did I do yesterday? What did you read yesterday? . drink-drank [usually drink a cup of coffee in the morning. I drank a cup of coffee this morning. What did I do this morning? Did you drink a cup of coffee this morning? What do you usually drink in the morning? Do you drink the same thing every morning? |. drive-drove I usually drive my car to school. I drove my car to school this morning. What did I do this morning? Who has a car? Did you drive to school this morning? ride-rode Sometimes I ride the bus to school. I rode the bus yesterday morning. What did I do yesterday morning? Who rode the bus to schoo! this morning? 238 CHAPTERS1. REVIEW: _ I was late for class yesterday morning, so what did I do? What did I read yesterday? What did you read yesterday? Did you read a newspaper this morning? What did I drink this morning? What did you drink this morning? I have a car. Did I drive to school this morning? Did you? Did you ride the bus? Co EXERCISE 35. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use the words in parentheses. 1. A: Why are you out of breath? B: I (rum) ______ to class because I was late. . A: I (ride) the bus to school yesterday. How did you get to school? Bi ldo) ay .cari . A: Did you decide to change schools? B: I (think) ___________ about it, but then I decided to stay here. A: (vou, go) ____________ shopping yesterday? B: Yes. I (buy) _____ a new pair of shoes. . A: (vou, study) last night? B: No, I didn’t. I was tired. I (read) __________ a magazine and then (go) ________ to bed early. A: Do you like milk? B: No. I (drink) _____ milk when I (be) a child, but I don’t like milk now. . A: Did you leave your dictionary at home? B: No. I (bring) ______ it to class with me. . Yesterday Yoko (teach) ____________us how to say “thank you” in Japanese. Kim (teach) ________us how to say “I love you” in Korean. Expressing Past Time, Part 1 2399. A: Did you enjoy your fishing trip? B: Ihad a wonderful time! I (catch) __________ a lot of fish. CO EXERCISE 36. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Take turns asking and answering questions about the past. Partner A: Make a complete question with the given verb. Use the simple past. Ask your partner the question. Partner B: Answer the question. Give both a short answer and a long answer. Example: drink PARTNER A: Did you drink a cup of coffee this morning? PARTNER B: Yes, I did. I drank a cup of coffee this morning. OR No, I didn’t. I didn’t drink a cup of coffee this morning. PARTNER A: Your turn now. Partner A\ Partner B 1. eat 1. sleep 2. buy 2. go 3. get up 3. talk to 4. have 4. walk 5. go 5. watch 6. study 6. listen to 7. drink 7. see 8, read 8. think about 9. drive 9. rain 240 CHAPTEROo _EXERCISE 37. Listening. Gq Directions: Listen to the beginning of each sentence. Circle the correct completion(s). There may be more than one correct answer. Example: He drank.... bread 1. last week a fish happy 2. very fast a house to the store 3. books the children the newspaper 4. a story yesterday a horse 5. good some food a doctor 6. people into town, home C1 EXERCISE 38. Writing practice. Directions: Use the expressions in the list below to write sentences about yourself. When did you do these things in the past? Use the simple past tense and past time expressions (yesterday, two days ago, last week, etc.) in all of your sentences. Example: go downtown with (someone) Response: I went downtown with Marco two days ago. 1. arrive in (this city) 2. eat at a restaurant 3. buy (something) 4, have a cold 5. be in elementary school 6. drink a cup of tea 7. talk to (someone) on the phone 8. study arithmetic 9, read a newspaper 10. play (soccer, a pinball machine, etc.) 11. see (Someone or something) 12, think about (someone or something) 13. be born 8-10 IRREGULA! ERBS (GROUP 3) sing - sang Speak - spoke take - took wake up - woke up Expressing Past Time, Part 1 247Cl EXERCISE 39. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Practice using irregular verbs. Close your book for this activity. Example: break-broke ‘TEACHER: break-broke. Sometimes a person breaks an arm or a leg. I broke my arm five years ago. What happened five years ago? STUDENTS: (repeat) break-broke. You broke your arm. TEACHER: (to Student A) Did you ever break a bone? STUDENT A: Yes. I broke my leg ten years ago. 1, fly-flew Sometimes I fly home in an airplane. 1 flew home in an airplane last month. What did I do last month? When did you fly to this city? 2. hear-heard hear birds singing every morning. I heard birds singing yesterday. What did I hear yesterday? What did you hear when you woke up this morning? 3. pay-paid I pay the rent every month. I paid the rent last month. What did I do last month? Did you pay your rent last month? 4. send-sent 1 send my mother a gift every year on her birthday. I sent my mother a gift last year on her birthday. What did I do last year? When did you send a gift to someone? 5. leave-left 1 leave for school at 8:00 every morning. I left for school yesterday at 8:00 A.M. What did I do at 8:00 A.M. yesterday? What time did you leave for class this morning? 6. meet-met I meet new people every week. Yesterday I met (. . .)’s friend. ‘What did I do yesterday? Do you know (...)? When did you meet hinw/her? 7. take-took I take my younger brother to the movies every month. I took my younger brother to the movies last month. What did I do last month? Who has a younger brother or sister? Where and when did you take him/her someplace? 8. wake-woke I usually wake up at six. This morning I woke up at six-thirty. What time did I wake up this morning? What time did you wake up this morning? 9. speak-spoke 1 speak to many students every day. Before class today, I spoke to (...). Who did I speak to? Who did you speak to before class today? 10. ring-rang The phone in our apartment rings a lot. This morning it rang at six-thirty and woke me up. What happened at six-thirty this morning? Who had a telephone call this morning? What time did the phone ring? 11. sing-sang _1 sing in the shower every morning. I sang in the shower yesterday. What did I do yesterday? Do you ever sing? When was the last time? 12. break-broke Sometimes I break things. This morning I dropped a giass on the floor, and it broke. What happened this morning? When did you break something? 242 CHAPTER 8(C EXERCISE 40. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use the correct form of the verbs in the list. break leave —sring ~—sspeak fly meet send take hear pay sing wake 1, A: What happened to your finger? B:I______ it in a soccer game. 2. A: Who did you talk to at the director’s office? B: I____ to the secretary. 3. A: When did Jessica leave for Europe? B: She _____ for Europe five days ago. 4. A: Did you write Ted a letter? B: No, but] ___ him a postcard. 5. A: Do you know Meg Adams? B: Yes. [__ her a couple of weeks ago. 6. A: Why did you call the police? B: BecauseI________a burglar! 7. A: Where did you go yesterday? B: [_____ the children to the zoo. 8. A: What time did you get up this morning? B: 6:15. A: Why did you get up so early? B: The telephone 9. A: Did you enjoy the party? B: Yes, I had a good time. We ____ songs and danced. It was fun. Expressing Past Time, Part | 24310. A: You look sleepy. B: Tam, I____ up before dawn this morning and couldn’t get back to sleep. 11. A: A bird into our apartment yesterday through an open window. B: Really? What did you do? A: I caught it and took it outside, 12. A: Did you give the painter a check? B: No. I_____ him in cash. O EXERCISE 41. Listening. Gq Directions: Listen to the story. Then read each sentence and circle the best answer. 1, The man was at the doctor’s office. yes no 2. He took some medicine. yes no 3. He was in bed for a short time. yes no 4, The man spoke to the nurse. yes no 5. He is feeling okay now. yes no 8-11 IRREGULAR VERBS (GROUP 4) Cl EXERCISE 42. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Practice using irregular verbs. Close your book for this activity. Example: begin-began TEACHER: begin-began. Our class begins at (9:00) every day. Class began at (9:00 this morning). When did class begin (this morning)? STUDENTS: (repeat) begin-began. Class began (this morning) at (9:00). 244 CHAPTER 81. lose-lost Sometimes I lose things. Yesterday I lost my keys. What did I lose yesterday? 2. find-found Sometimes I lose things. And then I find them, Yesterday I lost my keys, but then I found them in my jacket pocket. What did I do yesterday? 3. teamtore If we make a mistake when we write a check, we tear the check up. Yesterday I made a mistake when I wrote a check, so I tore it up and wrote a new check. What did I do yesterday? 4. sell-sold People sell things that they don’t need anymore. (...) has anew bicycle, so he/she sold his/her old bicycle. What did (. . .) do? 5. hang-hung 1 like to hang pictures on my walls, This morning I hung a new picture in my bedroom. What did I do this morning? 6, tell-told The kindergarten teacher likes to tell stories to her students. Yesterday she told a story about a little red train. What did the teacher do yesterday? 7. wear-wore I wear a sweater to class every evening. Last night I wore a jacket as well. What did I wear last night? 8. steal-stole Thieves steal money and other valuables. Last month a thief stole my aunt’s pearl necklace. What did a thief do last month? 9. say-said People usually say “hello” when they answer a phone. When (...) answered his/her phone this morning, he/she said “hello.” What did (. . . ) do this morning? CO EXERCISE 43. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with the given words. begin say wear find sell well hang steal. ~—ewear lose 1. A: Did you go to the park yesterday? B: No. We stayed home because it _______ to rain, >» Oh, that’s too bad. Susie is in trouble. Why? She ______ a lie. Her mom and dad are upset. ee ee I'm sure she’s sorry. Expressing Past Time, Part 1 245May I please have your homework? I don’t have it. J___ it, What? os FS I can’t find it anywhere. = = Where’s my coat? B: I ________ it up in the closet for you. 5. A: Where did you get that pretty shell? BI it on the beach. 6. A: Do you still have your bicycle? B: No. I_____ iit because I needed some extra money. 7. A: It’s hot in here. B: Excuse me? What did you say? e Dre hovin hero Why did you take the bus to work this morning? Why didn’t you drive? Because somebody ____ my car last night. : Did you call the police? A: B: A B: Of course I did, Did you wear your blue jeans to the job interview? so I had to write a new check. SSS we B: Of course not! [___ a suit. & 10. A: I wrote the wrong amount on the check, NG = B: What did you do with the first check? itinto pieces. | Ce) | 246 CHAPTER 8Cl EXERCISE 44. Listening. Gq Directions: Listen to the story. Then read each sentence and circle the best answer. . The woman lost her mother’s ring. . Someone stole the ring. 4 2. 3. Her dog found the ring in the garden. 4, Her mother wore the ring for a while. 5 . The woman was happy at the end of the story. Cl EXERCISE 45. Chapter review. yes yes yes yes yes no no no no no Directions: You went to a birthday party last night. A friend is asking you questions about it. Complete the sentences with did, was, or were. 1, _____ you go with a friend? 2, ______ your friends at the party? 3. ___ the party fun? 4, _______ many people there? 5. _________ you have a good time? 6, _____ you eat a piece of birthday cake? 7, ______ everyone sing “Happy Birthday”? 8. ____ there a birthday cake? 9, —_____ you hungry? 10, _____ you take a present? (C EXERCISE 46. Chapter review. Directions: Complete the sentences with was, were, or did. 1.1 ___did__ not go to work yesterday. I was from the office. 2. Tom ____ not in his office yesterday. He sick, so I stayed home not go to work, Expressing Past Time, Part 1 247Mr. Chan in his office yesterday? Yes. you see him about your problem? oe Pp Yes. He answered all my questions. He ____ very helpful. you at the meeting yesterday? ‘What meeting? you forget about the meeting? T guess so, What meeting? : The meeting with the president of the company about health insurance. Oh. Now I remember. No, I not there. you? : Yes. I can tell you all about it. BPe ee Pe Thanks. Where ____ you yesterday? r at the zoo. you enjoy it? PP FP Yes, but the weather very hot. I tried to stay out of the sun. Most of the animals ____ in their houses or in the shade. The sun too hot for them too. They ___not want to be outside. Cl EXERCISE 47. Chapter review. Directions: Make questions and give short answers. 1. A: Do you live in an apartment? B; __Yes ldo. ___ (I live in an apartment.) 2. A: Do you have a roommate? B: ___No, | don’t, ___ (I don’t have a roommate.) 248 CHAPTERSB: (I don’t want a roommate.) (Lhad a roommate last year.) It didn’t work out. 5. a B: He was difficult to live with.) ‘A: What did he do? B: He never picked up his dirty clothes. He never washed his dirty dishes. He was always late with his share of the rent. 6A: (Lasked him to keep the apartment clean.) He always agreed, but he never did it. TA: eee gled when be lett) 1 like living alone. CO EXERCISE 48. Class activity. Directions: Walk around the room. Ask your classmates questions about the present and the past. Change classmates with every topic. Example: walk to school SPEAKER A: Do you walk to school every day? SPEAKER B: Yes, I do. oR No, I don’t. SPEAKER A: Did you walk to schoo! this morning? SPEAKER B: Yes, I did. I walked with a friend. oR No, I didn’t. 1. go downtown 9. wear (an article of clothing) 2, dream in color 10. laugh out loud at least two times 3. talk to (someone) on the phone 11. speak (@ language) 4. come to grammar class on time 12. go to (a place in this city) 5. sing in the shower 13, read at least one book 6. eat at least two pieces of fresh fruit 14. go swimming 7. think about your family 15. go shopping 8. cook your own dinner Expressing Past Time, Part 1 249CO EXERCISE 49. Let's talk: game. Directions: Your teacher will say the simple form of a verb, Your team will give the past tense. Close your book for this activity. TEACHER: ‘TEACHER: TEAM B: ‘TEACHER: Co EXERCISE 50. Chapter review: error analysis. Directions: 1. 250° cHaPT Seen ayeyne fly bring read . tell . stand teach drink wear buy speak : Team : come (all together) came ‘Thar’s one point. ‘Team B: eat (all together) ate ‘That's one point. 11. pay 12. hear 13. catch 14, find 15. sleep 16, think 17. ride 18. break 19. say 20. get Correct the errors. 21 22. 23, 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. Someone stealed my bicycle two day ago. leave have pay meet sit take ring write sing wake up . Did you went to the party yesterday weekend? . [hear a really interesting story yesterday. ‘The teacher not ready for class yesterday. . Did came Joe to work last week? Yesterday night I staied home and working on my science project. . Several students wasn’t on time for the final exam yesterday. . Your fax came before ten minutes. Did you got it? ERB9. Did you all your friends to your graduation party invite? 10. I sleeped too late this morning and was missed the bus. 11. The market no have any bananas yesterday. I get there too late. 12. Was you nervous about your test the last week? 13. I didn’t saw you at the party. Did you be there? Cl EXERCISE 51. Review. Directions: Think about the years your grandparents grew up in. What kinds of things did they do? What kinds of things didn’t they do? Write sentences. Work with a partner or in small groups. Example: My grandparents didn’t use computers. ‘My grandfather walked to work. Expressing Past Time, Part 1 251CHAPTER 9 Expressing Past Time, Part 2 9-1 THE SIMPLE PAST: USING WHERE, WHEN, WHAT TIME, AND WHY QUESTION SHORT ANSWER @ Did you go downtown? > Yes, I did. / No, I didn’t. (b) Where did you go? > Downtown. © Were you downtown? Yes, Iwas. / No, I wasn’t. @ Where were you? > Downtown. © Did you run because you were late? > Yes, I did. / No, I didn’t. (©) Why did you run? ~> Because I was late. ® Did Ann come at six? > Yes, she did. / No, she didn’t. ao : oe Ann come? > At six. COMPARE () What time did Ann come? > At six. What time usually asks for 2 + Seven o'clock. specific time on a clock. + Around 9:30. () When did Ann come? + At six. ‘The answer to coher can be + Friday. various expressions of time. > June 15th. — Last week. + Three days ago. (C EXERCISE 1. Question practice. Directions: Make questions. Use where, when, what time, or why. 1, A: Where did you go yesterday? == B: To the zoo. (I went to the zoo yesterday.) 2. As B: Last month. (Mr. Chu arrived in Canada last month.) 2523. A: B: At 7:05. (My plane arrived at 7:05.) 4. A: B: Because I was tired. (I stayed home last night because I was tired.) 5. A: B: Because I stayed up the night before. (I was tired because I stayed up the night before.) 6. A: B: To Greece. (Sara went to Greece for her vacation.) 7A: B: Around midnight. (I finished my homework around midnight.) 8. A: B: Five weeks ago. (I came to this city five weeks ago.) 9. B: Because Tony made a funny face. (I laughed because Tony made a funny face.) B: Upstairs. (Kate is upstairs.) B: In ten minutes. (The movie starts in ten minutes.) 12, Because she wanted to surprise Joe. (Tina was behind the door because she wanted to surprise Joe.) : Because he wants big muscles. (Jim lifts weights because he wants big muscles.) Expressing Past Time, Part 2 253CO EXERCISE 2. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Make questions. Use question words. Close your book for this activity. Example: ‘TEACHER: I got up at 7:30. STUDENT: When/What time did you get up? 1. Iwent to the 200. 2. Lwent to the zoo yesterday. 3. Lwent to the zoo yesterday because I wanted to see the animals, 4. (....) went to the park. 5. (...) went to the park yesterday. 6. (...) went to the park yesterday because the weather was nice. 7. (...) was at the park yesterday. 8. Lam in class. 9. Tcame to class (ten minutes) ago. 10. I was late because traffic was heavy. 11. (...) was at home last night 12. He/She finished his/her homework around midnight. 13. (....) went to bed at 7:30 last night. 14. He/She went to bed early because he/she was tired. 15. (....) was at the airport yesterday. 16, He/She went to the airport because a friend came to visit. 17. The plane arrived at 4:30. 18. (...) and (...) went to (name of a restaurant) last night. 19. They went to a restaurant because it was (.. .)’s birthday. 20. They got home around ten-thirty. Cl EXERCISE 3. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Ask and answer questions using the simple past. Partner A: Make up any question that includes the given verb. Use the simple past. Ask your partner the question. Your book is open. Partner B: Answer the question. Give a short answer and a long answer. Your book is closed. Example: speak PARTNER A (book open): Did you speak to Mr. Lee yesterday? PARTNER B (book closed): Yes, I did. I spoke to him yesterday. OR No, I didn’t. I didn’t speak to him yesterday. Example: finish PARTNER A (book open): What time did you finish your homework last night? PARTNER B (book closed): Around nine o’clock. I finished my homework around nine o'clock. (254 CHAPTER?1. drink 2. cat Switch roles. 3. study 4. take Partner A: Close your book. Partner B: Open your book. Your turn now. 9. see 10. sleep 11. work 12. have CO EXERCISE 4. Listening. Co Directions: Look at the information on the datebook pages. Write answers to the questions you hear. 6. talk 13. buy 14. send 7. wake up 8. come 15. watch 16. read Tom's Day Susan’s Day Bill's Day Nancy's Day ‘Mon. April 4 Mon. ‘April 4 ‘Mon. April 4 ‘Mon. April 4 7.00 as 12.00 Now 1000 4 1007 Shad mea City Col We Cork with teacher’ ness meting dextol cheakup Got norkaut Example: ‘You will hear: Where did Nancy go? You will write: ___ (To the) gym __. i eS 10. it : 12, ‘ Expressing Past Time, Part 2 255Ci EXERCISE 5. Question practice. Directions: Complete the questions. A: I didn’t go to class yesterday. B: Why didn’t ___you go to class ? A: Because I was sick. . A: I didn’t finish my homework. » ey ‘A: Because I didn’t have enough time. |. A: I didn’t eat breakfast this morning. ———————— A: Because I wasn’t hungry. A: I didn’t clean my apartment last week. B: Why didn’t 20 A: Because I was too tired. . A: I didn’t answer the phone all day. B: Why didn’t A: Because I wanted to finish my work. Cl EXERCISE 6. Question practice: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. ‘Take turns completing the conversations with questions that begin with why, when, what time, and where. it PARTNER A: Where do you want to go for your vacation? PARTNER B: Hawaii. . PARTNER B: PARTNER A: Ten o'clock. |. PARTNER A? PARTNER B: Because I was tired. |. PARTNER B: PARTNER A: South America. 256 CHAPTER5. PARTNER A: PARTNER B: Last week. 6. PARTNER B: PARTNER A: Because I forgot. 7. PARTNER A? PARTNER B: Downtown. 8. PARTNER B: PARTNER A: Several months ago. 9. PARTNER A: PARTNER B: At a Chinese restaurant. What is used in a question when you want to find out about a thing. Who is used when you want to find out about a person. (See Chart 9-3, p. 260, for questions with who.) (QUESTION + HELPING + SUBJECT + MAIN ‘worD) VERB, ‘VERB ANSWER @ Did Carol buy a car? > Yes, she did. (She bought a car.) (b) What did Carol buy? > Acar. (She bought a car.) © Is Fred holding a book? > Yes, he is. (He’s holding a book.) (a) What is Fred holding? > A book. (He's holding a book.) oy ° | (e) Carol bought a car. In (e): a car is the object of the verb. Ov sv (€) What did Carol buy? In (f): What is the object of the verb. CO EXERCISE 7. Question practice. Directions: Make questions. 7 Did a new tape recorder? Yes, I did. (I bought a new tape recorder.) 2. A: What did you buy? : A new tape recorder. (I bought a new tape recorder.) Expressing Past Time, Part 2. 257B: Yes, she is. (Mary is carrying a suitcase.) A suitcase. (Mary is carrying a suitcase.) Yes,Ido, (I see an airplane.) 6. An airplane. (I see an airplane.) 7. : Some soup. (Bob ate some soup for lunch.) 8. A: : Yes, he did. (Bob ate some soup for lunch.) 9. : A sandwich. (Bob usually eats a sandwich for lunch.) 10. No, he doesn’t, (Bob doesn’t like salads.) ee No, I'm not. (I’m not afraid of snakes.) Are you? 12. Ar B: The map on the wall. (The teacher is pointing to the map on the wall.) OC EXERCISE 8. Question practice: pairwork. Directions: Work in pairs. Ask a classmate a question. Use what and either a past or a present verb, Remember, you can look at your book. When you speak, look at your partner. Example: eat PARTNER A: What did you eat for breakfast this morning? / What do you usually eat for dinner? / Ete. PARTNER B: (free response) PARTNER A: Your turn now. 258 CHAPTERSPartner A Partner B yey re eat wear look at study think about be interested in be afraid of dream about have 5. need to buy Beye CO EXERCISE 9. Question practice. Directions: Ask your teacher for the meaning of the given words. Begin your question with What. Example: century STUDENT: What does “century” mean? oR What is the meaning of “century”? ‘TEACHER: Se Sp muggy awful quiet century murder CO EXERCISE 10. Listening. Gq Directions: Listen to the questions. Write the words you hear. Example: ‘You will hear: 1 2. “Century” means “100 years.” 6. grocery store 7. empty 8. ill 9. attic 10. simple Where did they go? You will write: Where did they go? il 12. 13, 14. 15. invitation enjoy forest pretty difficult old-fashioned arrive? leave? live? want? a nT study? go? end? Expressing Pas! Time, Part 2 259QUESTION ANSWER What is used to ask questions about things. (a) What did they see? * A boat. (They saw a boat.) | Who is used to ask questions about (b) Who did they see? » Jim. (They saw Jim.) people. (©) Who did they see? > fim. (They sao Jim.) (©) and (d) have the same meaning. (a) Whom did they see? > Jim. (They saw Jim.) Whom is used in formal English as the object of a verb or a preposition. In (©): Who, not whom, is usually used in everyday English. In (d): Whom is used in very formal English. Whom is rarely used in everyday spoken English. ° ° In (©): Who(m) is the object of the (©) Who(m) did they see? > Jim. (They saw Jim.) verb, Usual question word order : : (question tword + helping verb + subject (f) Who came? > Mary. (Mary came.) 4 mais cert) io weed. In (f), (g), and (h): Who is the : Sa subject of the question. Usual (@) Who lives there? + Ed. (Bd lives there.) (question word ondes is NGY ased, s s When who is the subject of a (h) Who saw Jim? + Ann, (Ann saw Jim.) question, do NoT use does, do, or did, Do Nor change the verb in any INcoRRECT: Who did come? way: the verb form in the question is the same as the verb form in the answer. CO EXERCISE 11. Question practice. Directions: Make questions for the given answers. Example: The teacher saw John. The teacher talked to John. The teacher helped John. ee Who sow fog The teacher. » ___Who talked to john ___? The teacher. + = Whohelpedjohn =f The teacher, + Who did the teacher see 2 John. ~ ___Who did the teacher talk to ___? John. = Who did the teacher help ? John. 260 CHAPTERS1. John called Yuko. John visited Yuko. John studied with Yuko. ? John. ? John. ? John. ? Yuko. ? Yuko. ? Yuko. 2. Mary carried the baby. Mary helped the baby. Mary sang to the baby. ? The baby. ? The baby. ? The baby. ? Mary. ? Mary. ? Mary. 3. Ron talked to the children. Ron watched the children. Ron played with the children. > Ron. ? The children. > Ron. ? The children. ? Ron. ? The children. Cl EXERCISE 12. Question practice. Directions: Make questions. 1. A: B: Mary. (I saw Mary at the party.) Expressing Past Time, Part 2. 26110. ul. 12, Mary. (Mary came to the party.) John. (John lives in that house.) John. (Janet called John.) ‘My aunt and uncle. (I visited my aunt and uncle.) My cousin. (My cousin visited me.) Ken. (I talked to Ken.) Bob. (Bob helped Ann.) Ann. (Bob helped Ann.) ‘Yes, he did. (Bob helped Ann.) Se Pe Be Pe Pr Pe Pe Be Be Be Bob and Ann. (I’m thinking about Bob and Ann.) ed No, I’m not. (I’m not confused.) Ci EXERCISE 13. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner and make questions. Then change roles and make new questions. When you have finished speaking, write answers. ily 2. A B: Yesterday. B: A: My brother. 262 CHAPTER?3. Ar B: A new pair of sandals. 4. B: A: At 7:30. Mi B: Restaurant. 6. B: A: Tomorrow afternoon. TA: B: In an apartment. 8. B: A: My roommate. 9. AD B: Because I wanted to. 10. B: A: Ann. 1. A: B: A bird, 12. B: A: The zoo. CO EXERCISE 14. Listening. Gq Directions: Listen to each question and circle the best answer. Example: Why was John late? Yesterday. At the park. CBecause he slept too long, . Next month. . Tomorrow morning. . In a minute. ‘To the store. . On the bus. . An apartment downtown. It’s down the street. OPN Because I didn’t have time. Ina small town. Because it was late. Some help. At 10:00. Because her car didn’t start. Next week. ‘Two hours ago. My friends. ‘Ten minutes ago. At midnight. John and Sarah Iam. Mary did. Because we like the city. At the theater. Tt was fun. Expressing Past Time, Part 2 2639-4 TRREGU ROUP 5) cost ~ cost hit — hit shut ~ shut cut ~ cut Juurt = hurt spend ~ spent forget - forgot lend ~ lent understand - understood give - gave make - made ‘Nore: Imegular verb groups I to 4 can be found in Charts 8-6, p. 227, 8-9, p. 238, 8-10, p. 241, and 8-11, p. 244. CO EXERCISE 15. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Practice using irregular verbs. Close your book for this activity. Example: teach-taught TEACHER: teach-taught. I teach class every day. I taught class yesterday. What did I do yesterday? STUDENTS: (repeat) teach-taught. You taught class. 1. cost-cost I bought a hat yesterday. I paid owenty dollars for it. It cost twenty dollars. What did I buy yesterday? How much did it cost? 2. cutmcut (...) cuts vegetables when he/she makes a salad. Two nights ago, while he/she was making a salad, he/she cut his/her finger with the knife. What happened two nights ago? 3. forget-forgot Sometimes I forget my wallet. Last night, I forgot it at a restaurant. What did I do last night? 4. give-gave People give gifts when someone has a birthday. Last week, (...) had a birthday. I gave him/her (something). What did I do? 5. hit-hit (....) lives in an apartment. The neighbors are very noisy. When they make too much noise, (.. .) hits the wall with his/her hand. Last night he/she couldn’t get to sleep because of the noise, so he/she hit the wall with his/her hand. What did (.. .) do last night? What does he/she usually do when the neighbors make too much noise? 6. hurt-hurt When I have a headache, my head hurts. Yesterday I had a headache. ‘My head hurt. How did my head feel yesterday? How does your head feel when you have a headache? 7. lend-lent 1 lend money to my friends if they need it. Yesterday I lent (an amount of money) to (....). What did I do? 8. make-made 1 make good chocolate cake. Last week I made a cake for (...)’s birthday. What did I do last week? 9. shut-shut I shut the garage door every night at 10:00 P.M. I shut it early last night. What did I do last night? 10. spend-spent I usually spend Saturdays with my parents. Last Saturday, I spent the day with my friends instead. What did I do last Saturday? 11. understand-understood 1 always understand (.. .) when he/she speaks. ‘He/She just said something, and I understood it. What just happened? 264 CHAPTER 9(CO EXERCISE 16. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use the words in parentheses. 1, A: How much (a new car, cost) B: It (cost) ______a lot! New cars are expensive. 2. A: Did you get a ticket for the rock concert? B: Yes, and it was really expensive! It (cost) _________ fifty dollars. 3. A: Where’s your history book? B: I (give) _______ it to Robert. 4. A: Thad a car accident yesterday morning. B: What happened? A: I (hit) _____a telephone pole. 5. A: May I have your homework, please? B: I’m sorry, but I don’t have it. I (forger) it. is Nou (foe) se ET 6. A: Did you eat breakfast? B: Yeah. I (make) _______ some scrambled eggs and toast for myself. T. Jack (put) ______ on his clothes every morning. 8. Jack (put) __________ on his clothes this morning after he got up. 9. A: Did you enjoy going into the city to see a show? B: Yes, but I (spend) ________ a lot of money. I can’t afford to do that very often. 10. A: May I see your dictionary? B: I don’t have it. I (lend) —__ it to George. Expressing Past Time, Part 2. 26511. Az Is that knife sharp? B: It’s very sharp. It (cut) ____ anything easily. 12. A: Why are you wearing a bag over your head? B: I went to a barber this morning. He (cw) _____ my hair too short. A: Let me see. Oh, it looks fine. Cl EXERCISE 17. Listening. Oo Directions: Listen to the beginning of each sentence. Circle the correct completion(s). There may be more than one correct answer. Example: John made Gamiturs) in the morning 1. the answer the conversation the teacher 2. money to her house some furniture 3. your hair some paper between 4. tomorrow a tree an animal 5, remember his appointment the question blow ~ blew grow — grew swim - swam draw ~ drew keep - kept throw ~ threw Fall - fell know - knew ‘win - won feel - felt Cl EXERCISE 18. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Practice using irregular verbs. Close your book for this activity. Example: fall-fell TEACHER: fall-fell. Rain falls. Leaves fall. Sometimes people fall. Yesterday I fell down. I hurt my knee. How did I hurt my knee yesterday? STUDENTS: (repeat) fall-fell. You fell (down). 1. blow-blew The sun shines. Rain falls. Wind blows. Last week we had a storm. It rained hard, and the wind blew hard. Tell me about the storm last week. 266 CHAPTER 92. draw-drew I draw once a week in art class. Last week I drew a portrait of myself. What did I do in art class last week? 3. fall-fell Sometimes I fall down. Yesterday I fell down. I felt bad when I fell down. What happened to me yesterday? 4. feel-felt You can feel an object. You can also feel an emotion or sensation. Sometimes I feel sleepy in class. I felt tired all day yesterday. How did I feel yesterday? How did you feel yesterday? 5. grow-grew Trees grow. Flowers grow. Vegetables grow. Usually I grow vegetables in my garden, but last year I grew only flowers, What did I grow in my garden last year? 6. keep-kept Now I keep my money in (name of a local bank). Last year I kept my money in (name of another local bank). Where did I keep my money last year? 7. know-knew (....) knows a lot about English grammar. On the grammar test last week, she/he knew all the answers. What did (...) know last week? 8. swim-swam I swim in (name of a lake, sea, ocean, or local swimming pool) every summer. I swam in (name of a lake, sea, ocean, or local swimming pool) last summer. ‘What did I do last summer? 9. throw-threw 1 can hand you this (piece of chalk), or I can throw it to you. I just threw this (piece of chalk) to (...). What did I just do? 10. win-won You can win a game or lose a game. Last weekend (name of a local sports tam) won a game/match against (name of another team). How did (name of the local sports team) do last weekend? Did they win or lose? Cl EXERCISE 19. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use the past form of the verbs in the list. blow = grow swim draw keep throw fall know = win feel 1. A: Did you enjoy your tennis game with Jackie? B: Yes, but I lost. Jackie 2. A: How did you break your leg? B: I _______ down on the ice on the sidewalk. 3. A: Did you give the box of candy to your girlfriend? B: No, I didn’t. I___ it and ate it myself, Expressing Past Time, Part 2 267‘Thar’s a nice picture. B: Tagree. Anna it. She’s a good artist. 5. A: Did you have a garden when you lived at home? B: Yes. I vegetables and flowers. 6. A: I burned my finger. B: Did you put ice on it? A: No. I on it. 7. A: Did you finish the test? B: No. I all of the answers, but I ran out of time. 8. A: Did you have fun at the beach? B: Lots of fun. We sunbathed and in the ocean. 9. A: What's the matter? You sound like you have a frog in your throat. B: I think I’m catching a cold. | _____ okay yesterday, but I don’t 10. A: feel very good today. How did you break the window, Tommy? B: Well, 1 ______a balll to Annie, but I missed Annie and hit the window instead. Ci EXERCISE 20. Listening. Directions: Listen to the beginning of each sentence. Circle the correct completion(s). There may be more than one correct answer. Example: Tim knew .... a ball 1. tomorrow on acar in the park 2, the game a prize lost 3. onthe paper a picture with some chalk 4. happy inthe morning _ excited 5. a ball not a pillow 268 CHAPTERSbecome - became build - built bend ~ bent feed ~ fed bite - bit ‘fight - fought Cl EXERCISE 21. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Practice using irregular verbs. Close your book for this activity. Example: hold-held ‘TEACHER: hold-held. I often hold my book open when I teach. Yesterday I held my book open when we practiced grammar. What did I do with my book? STUDENTS: (repeat) hold-held. You held your book open. 1. become-became When strangers meet, they can become friends. I met (. . (a length of time) ago. We became friends. What happened between ( ) ) and me? 2. bend-bent When I drop something, I bend over to pick it up. I just dropped my pen, and then I bent over to pick it up. What did I do? 3. bite-bit Sometimes dogs bite people. Yesterday my friend’s dog bit my hand while we were playing. What happened to my hand? 4. build-built have some friends who know how to build houses. They built their ‘own house next to the river. What did my friends do? 5, feed-fed Ihave a (dog, cat, parrot, etc.). Ihave to feed it every day. Yesterday fed it once in the morning and once in the evening. What did I do yesterday? 6. fight-fought People fight in wars. People fight diseases. They fight for freedom and equality. My country fought a war against (name of another country) in (a time period). What happened in (that time period)? 7. hide-hid Vhave a coin in my hand. Close your eyes while I hide it. Okay, open your eyes. I hid the coin. Where’s the coin? Why don’t you know? 8. hold-held When it rains, I hold my umbrella. Yesterday it rained. I held my umbrella. What did I do yesterday? 9. shake-shook People sometimes shake their finger or their head. Sometimes they shake when they’re cold. Right now I’m shaking my (finger/head). What did I just do? Expressing Past Time, Part 2 269CO EXERCISE 22. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use the past form of the verbs in the list. become build hide bend feed hold bite Sight shake 1, When my dog got out of the lake, it ___shook ___ itself. Dogs always do that when they're wet. 21 my husband’s birthday present in the closet yesterday. I didn’t want him to find it 3. Nancy and’Tom saved money. They didn’t buy a bookcase for their new apartment. They one. 4, The baby is sleeping peacefully. She’s not hungry. Her mother her before she put her in bed. 5. David is a Canadian citizen. Maria was born in Puerto Rico, but when she married David, she _________ a Canadian citizen too. 6. Doug is a new father. He felt very happy when he his baby in his arms for the first time. 7. Many countries in the world —__ in World War II. 8. A: Ow! B: What's the matter? A oy tongue, 9. We saw a strong man at the circus. He an iron bar with his bare hands. 270 CHAPTER 9CO EXERCISE 23. Listening. Directions: Listen to the beginning of each sentence. Circle the correct completion(s). There may be more than one correct answer. Example: Ubent.... a building the road 1. the dog happy her baby 2. next week usually a new house 3. a stick my hand sad 4. in the bedroom —_ behind a tree their money 5. some chalk the classroom —_some papers. Cl EXERCISE 24. Class activity. Directions: Answer the questions the teacher asks you. Use a short response and a long response. Close your book for this activity. Example ‘TEACHER: Did you write a letter yesterday? STUDENT: Yes, I did. I wrote a letter yesterday. 1, Did you fly to (this city)? 2. Did you drink a cup of tea this morning? 3. Did you come to class yesterday? 4. Did you go downtown yesterday? 5. Did you eat breakfast this morning? 6. Did you lend some money to (... )? 7. Did you lose your pen yesterday? Did you find it? 8. Did you give your dictionary to (.. . )? 9. Did you throw your eraser to (...)? (...), did you catch it? 10. Did someone steal your wallet? Did you get it back? 11. Did you wake up at seven this morning? 12. Did you get up at seven this morning? 13. Did the wind blow yesterday? 14. Did you shut the door? 15. Did class begin at (.. .)? 16. Did you say hello to (...)? Did you tell (...) to sit down? ( 18. Did you hear my last question? 19. Did you teach your daughter/son to count to ten? 20. Did you bring your books to class today? 21. Did you forget your books? 22. Did you see (.. .) yesterday? a )s did you sit down? Expressing Past Time, Part2 27123. 24, 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34, 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. Did you meet (.. .)’s wife? Did you leave your sunglasses at the restaurant? Did you read the newspaper this morning? Did you go shopping yesterday? Did you drive your car to school today? Did you ride a horse to school today? Did a barber cut your hair? Did you run to class this morning? Did your pen cost (an amount of money)? Did you understand my question? Did you come to class yesterday? Did you make a mistake? Did you take the bus to school today? Did you write a letter yesterday? Did you send it? Did the telephone ring? Did you break your arm? Did you shake your head? Did you draw a picture? Did you bend your elbow? Did you win a million dollars? Did you feel good yesterday? Did you feed the birds at the park? Did you bite your finger? Did you hurt your finger? Did you hold (.. .)’s hand? Did you build a bookcase? Did you stand at the bus stop? Did you sing in the shower this morning? Did you grow up in (name of a country)? Did you become an adult? Did (name of a sports team) win yesterday? Did you fall down yesterday? Did you think about me yesterday? Did you fight yesterday? Which pen do you want? Did you choose this one? Did you hide your money under your mattress? Did your car hit a telephone pole yesterday? Did you put your books under your desk? 272 CHAPTER?sv A clause is a group of words that has a (a) J ate breakfast. = a main clause subject and a verb. sv E (ese fase ae A main clause is a complete sentence. Example (a) is a complete sentence sv Example (b) is an incomplete sentence. It (©) Late breakfast] Lbefore I went to class.| must be connected to a main clause, as in ‘main clause time clause © and @. sv 4 (@) [Before I went 10 class,| [Late breakfast. A time clause can begin with before or time clause main clause after: before + S +V = atime clause after + S$ +V = atime clause (e) [We took a walk) Lafter we finished our work.) A time clause can follow a main clause, as ‘main clause time clause in (©) and (e). A time clause can come in © oo on front of a main clause, as in (d) and (f).* ‘There is no difference in meaning between time clause main clause (© and (4) ot (e) and (f). (g) We took a walk Lafter the movie. Before and after don’t always introduce a prep. phrase time clause. They are also used as Geto : prepositions followed by a noun object, as in (g) and (h). See Charts 1-7, p. 18, and 6-1, p. 158, for information about prepositional phrases. prep. phrase “Nore: When a time clause comes before the main clause, a comma is used between the two clauses. A comma is not used when the time clause comes after the main clause. OC EXERCISE 25. Sentence practice. Directions: Find the main clauses and the time clauses. 1. Before I ate the banana, I peeled it. > main clause = I peeled it > time clause = before I ate the banana 2. We arrived at the airport before the plane landed. 3. I went to a movie after I finished my homework. 4, After the children got home from school, they watched TV. 5. Before I moved to this city, I lived at home with my parents, Expressing Past Time, Part2 273.CO EXERCISE 26. Sentence practice. Directions: Add a capital letter and period to the complete sentences. Write “Inc.” to mean “Incomplete” if the group of words is a time clause and not a complete sentence. 1, we went home > Wye went home. 2. after we left my uncle’s house -» Inc. 3. we went home after we left my uncle’s house > Wee went home after we left my uncle’s houses 4. before we ate our picnic lunch 5. we went to the zoo 6. we went to the zoo before we ate our picnic lunch 7. the children played games after they did their work 8. the children played games 9. after they did their work 10. the lions killed a zebra 11. after the lions killed a zebra 12. they ate it 13. after the lions killed a zebra, they ate it Cl EXERCISE 27. Let's talk: small groups. Directions: Work in small groups. Combine the two ideas into one sentence by using before and after to introduce time clauses. Make four sentences for each item. Example: 1 put on my coat. I went outside. SPEAKER A: Before I went outside, I put on my coat. SPEAKER B: I put on my coat before I went outside, SPEAKER C: After I put on my coat, I went outside. SPEAKER D: I went outside after I put on my coat. 274 CHAPTERS1. She ate breakfast. She went to work. 2. He did his homework. He went to bed. 3. We bought tickets. 8 CASABLANCA 80000000000 Expressing Past Time, Part 2 275,C EXERCISE 28. Sentence practice. Directions: Use the given words to write sentences of your own. Use the simple past. Example: after 1 > Lwent to college after I graduated from high school. » After I finished dinner, I watched TV. Etc. 1. before I came here 2. after I got home last night 3. Iwent before I 4, after we 5. before they 6. Mr. after he 9-8 WHEN INTIME CLAU (a) When the rain stopped, we took a walk. OR When can introduce a time clause. We took a walk when the rain stopped. ‘when +S +V = atime clause In (a): When the rain stopped is a time clause. (b) When Tom was a child, he lived with his aunt. or | In (b): Notice that the noun (Tom) comes ‘Tom lived with his aunt when he was a child, before the pronoun (he). ‘COMPARE, When is also used to introduce (©) When did the rain stop? = a question questions.* A question is a complete (@) when the rain stopped = a time clause sentence, as in (c). A time clause is not a complete sentence, as in (d). *See Charts 3-12, p. 80, and 9-1, p. 252, for information about using when in questions C EXERCISE 29. Sentence practice. Directions: Make sentences by combining the ideas in Column A with those in Column B. Then change the position of the time clause. Example: When the phone rang, > When the phone rang, I answered it.* > Tanswered the phone when it rang. * Nore: Ifa sentence with a then-clause talks about two actions, the action in the when-clause happens frst. (See Chart 9-12, p. 284.) In the sentence When the phone rang, I answered it: first the phone rang, and then I answered it, Not logically possible: When I answered the phone, it rang. 276 CHAPTER?Column A Column B . When the phone rang, when I dropped it. When I was in Japan, I closed my umbrella. . Maria bought some new shoes when he was in high school. . I took a lot of photographs YD. T answered it. . Jim was a soccer player when she went shopping yesterday. . When the rain stopped, I stayed in a hotel in Tokyo. . The antique vase broke when I was in Hawaii. Noysuene pomp Om mt Co EXERCISE 30. Sentence practice. Directions: Add a capital letter and a question mark to complete the sentences. Write “Inc.” to mean “Incomplete” if the group of words is a time clause and not a question. 1, when did Jim arrive > Wedhen did Jim arrive? 2. when Jim arrived > Inc. . when you were a child . when were you in Iran yan ye when did the movie end when the movie ended xno when Mr, Wang arrived at the airport . when Khalid and Bakir went to a restaurant on First Street yesterday 2 @ when I was a high school student 10. when does the museum open CO EXERCISE 31. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with your own words. Don’t change the order of the given words. 1. When did 2. When I 3.1 when 4, When were 5. When the 6. The when Expressing Past Time, Port 2. 2779-9 THE PRESENT PR PROGRESSIVE PRESENT PROGRESSIVE (in progress right now) (@) It’s 10:00 now. Boris #s sitting in class. OGRESSIVE AND THE PAST ‘The present progressive describes an activity in progress right now, at the moment of speaking. See Chart 4-1, p. 92. In @): Right now it is 10:00. Boris began to sit before 10:00. Sitting is in progress at 10:00. PAST PROGRESSIVE (in progress yesterday) (b) It was 10:00. Boris was sitting in class. ‘The past progressive describes an activity in progress at a particular time in the past. In (b): Boris began to sit in class before 10:00 yesterday. At 10:00 yesterday, sitting in class was in progress. PRESENT PROGRESSIVE FORM: 4M, IS, ARE + -ING (© Is 10:00. 1 am sitting in class. Boris in class. We in class. ‘The forms of the present progressive and the past progressive consist of be + -ing. The present progressive uses the present forms of be: am, is, and are + -ing. PAST PROGRESSIVE FORM: WAS, WERE + -ING (@) Ttwas 10:00. Boris We was sitting in class. were sitting in class. ‘The past progressive uses the past forms of be: was and were + -ing. 10:00 RIGHT NOW Boris is sitting in class right now at ten o'clock. ‘ ae 10:00 YESTERDAY Boris was sitting in class yesterday at ten o'clock. 278 CHAPTERSC1 EXERCISE 32. Sentence practice. Directions: Use the words in parentheses to complete the sentences. Discuss the meaning of the phrase “in progress.” 1. Paul started to eat dinner at 7:00. At 7:05, Mary came. Paul (ear) when Mary (come) ___ at 7:05. 2. Bobby was at home yesterday evening. His favorite program was on television last night. It started at 8:00. It ended at 9:00. At 8:30, his friend Kristin called, When Kristin (call) _______ at 8:30, Bobby (watch) . Rosa played her guitar for an hour yesterday morning. She started to play her guitar at 9:30. She stopped at 10:30, Mike arrived at her apartment at 10:00. At 10:00, Rosa (play) ____________her guitar. Expressing Past Time, Part 2 279Co EXERCISE 33. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Look at the picture. Use the past progressive to describe the activities that were in progress. Mr. and Mrs. Gold invited some friends to their house for the weekend. A thief stole Mrs. Gold’s jewelry at midnight on Saturday. What were the guests doing at midnight? » MR. BLUE MRS. BLUE MR. BROWN MR. WHITE a MR. BLACK MB, GREEN. oo oo 2 ° le oO MISS GRAY 280 CHAPTER9-10 USING WHILE WITH THE PAST PROGRESSI (a) The phone rang while I was sleeping. OR while + subject + verb = a time clause While I was sleeping is a time clause. (b) While I was sleeping, the phone rang.* A while-clause describes an activity that was in progress at the time another activity happened. The verb in a while-clause is often past progressive (e.g., was sleeping). *NoTE: When a time clause comes before the main clause, a comma is used between the two clauses. A comma is not used ‘when the time clause comes after the main clause, CO EXERCISE 34. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Combine the sentences. Use while. 1. Iwas studying last night. Rita called. > While I was studying last night, Rita called. » Rita called while I was studying last night. 2. Someone knocked on my apartment door. I was eating breakfast yesterday morning. 3. Lwas cooking dinner yesterday evening. I burned my hand. 4, Yoko raised her hand. ‘The teacher was talking. 5, A tree fell on my car. I was driving home yesterday. 6. I was studying last night. ‘A mouse suddenly appeared on my desk. Expressing Past Time, Part 2. 2819-11 WHILE VS. WHE} PAST TIME C (a) The mouse appeared while Iwas studying. on | The verb in a while-clause is often past (b) While I was studying, the mouse appeared. progressive, as in (a) and (b). (© When the mouse appeared, I was studying, on | The verb in a when-clause is often simple (@) I was studying when the mouse appeared. ast, as in (c) and (4). 0 EXERCISE 35. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use the past progressive in the ehile-clauses. Use the simple past in the when-clauses. 1, While I (wash) __was washing dishes last night, I (get) __got __ a phone call from my best friend. 2, When my best friend (call) _____ last night, I (wash) —______ dishes. 3. My friend Jessica (come) while I (cat) dinner last night. 4. I (eat) dinner when my friend Jessica (come) last night. 5. My friend Ricardo (come) ________ while I (watch) a rented movie on my VCR last night. I (invite) him to join me. 6. I (watch) a rented movie on my VCR last night when my friend Ricardo (come) 7. Jason (wear) a suit and tie when I (see) him yesterday. 282 CHAPTER?8. While I (watch) ___ TV last night and (relax) after a long day, my new puppy (take) my wallet from my bedside table. CO EXERCISE 36. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Perform and describe actions using while-clauses or when-clauses. Close your book for this activity. Student A: Perform the action your teacher gives you. Then use the present progressive to describe what you are doing. Continue to perform the action. Student B: Perform your action, then stop. Student A: After Student B stops, you stop too. Example: A: Brase the board. B: Open the door. (Student A), please erase the board. What are you doing? STUDENT A: I’m erasing the board right now. TEACHER: (Student B), would you please open the door? STUDENT B: (opens the door) ‘TEACHER: Thank you. You may both sit down. (Student C), will you please describe the two actions we saw? STUDENT c: While (Student A) was erasing the board, (Student B) opened the door. oR (Student A) was erasing the board when (Student B) opened the door. ‘TEACH Write on the board. Drop a book on the floor. ‘Walk around the room. Say hello to (Student A). Look out the window. Take (Student A)’s grammar book. Draw a picture on the board. Ask (Student A) a question. ot = PP er epee Expressing Past Time, Part 2 2832 SIMPLE PAS’ PROGRESSIV (@) Jane called me yesterday. (b) I talked to Jane for an hour last night. (©) We went to Jack’s house last Friday. (d) What time did you get up this morning? The simple past describes activities or situations that began and ended at a particular time in the past (¢.g., yesterday, last night). (©) Iwas studying when Jane called me yesterday. (f) While I was studying last night, Jane called. The past progressive describes an activity that was in progress (was happening) at the time another action happened. In (@) and (f): The studying was in progress when Jane called. (@ L opened my umbrella when it began to rain. If both the when-clause and the main clause ina sentence are simple past, it means that the action in the when-clause happened first, and the action in the main clause happened second. In Qg): First, it began to rains second, I opened my umbrella. COMPARE, (h) When the phone rang, I answered it. (When the phone rang, I was studying. In (h): First, the phone rang; second, I answered it. In (®: First, the studying was in progress; second, the phone rang. C0 EXERCISE 37. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use the simple past or the past progressive. 1. While my cousin and I (have) restaurant last night, we (see) dinner at the a friend of mine. I (introduce) her to my cousin. 2, When I (hear) to the door and (open) the door, I (see) him and (ask) 284 CHAPTERS. a knock at the door last night, I (walk) it, When I (open) my brother. I (greet) him to come in.3. My cousin and I (warch) _______ a movie on TV last night when my brother (come) ____. He (watch) the end of the movie with us. 4. While I (walk) to class yesterday morning, I (see) Abdullah. We (say) ________ hello and (walk) the rest of the way to school together. Cl EXERCISE 38. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use the simple past or the past progressive. 1. Mrs. Reed (turn) ____ on the radio in her car while she (drive) home yesterday. She (listen) to some music when she suddenly (hear) a siren. When she (look) _______ in her rear-view mirror, she (see) ___________ an ambulance behind her. She immediately (pull) _______ her car to the side of the road and (wait) for the ambulance to pass. Expressing Past Time, Part 2 2852. As : Nothing. : 1 (want, not) I (6) at my friends’ house last night. While we (cat) = dinner, their cat (jump) on the table. My friends (seem, not) to care, but I lost my appetite. What (you, say) 2 Why (vou, ask, not) your friends to get their cat off the table? = to be impolite. B: I think your friends were impolite to let their cat sit on the table during dinner. 1 EXERCISE 39. Sentence practice. Directions: Use the information in the timeline to make sentences with the simple past and past progressive. Use while, when, before, and after. Example: 1967: entered Lakeside School » In 1967, Bill Gates entered Lakeside School. + While he was studying at Lakeside, he began to work with computers. Bill Gates: a brief history 1955: 1967: was born entered Lakeside School 1967-1973: studied at Lakeside School 1968: 1970: 1973: 286 CHAPTER wrote his first computer program started his first software company graduated from Lakeside1973-1977: studied at Harvard University 1975: began to design programs for personal computers 1975: started Microsoft 1975-2000: worked as Chief Executive Officer for Microsoft 1977: left Harvard 1994: got married 1996: his first child was born Co EXERCISE 40. Listening. Go Directions: Listen to the story. Complete the sentences with the verbs you hear. I a strange experience yesterday. I my book on the bus when a man down next to me and eee eelg eas coy Mane I Se cee cccccccc ene money. I_____ very confused. I__ up and toward the door of the bus. While ______ for the door to open, the man to give me the money. When the door ___,I off the bus quickly. I still _____ why he to give me money. CO EXERCISE 41. Verb review. Directions: Choose the best completions. 1. I was watching TV. I heard a knock on the door. When I heard the knock on the door, I it. A. open © opened B. am opening D. was opening 2. “When, you talk to Jane?” “Yesterday.” A. do B. are ©. did D. were 3.1 TV when Gina called last night. We talked for an hour. A. watch C. was watching B. watched D. am watching Expressing Past Time, Part 2874. Mike is in his bedroom right now. He , So we need to be quiet. A. is sleeping C. slept B. sleeps D. was sleeping 5. Kate tell us the truth yesterday. She lied to us. A. don’t B. doesn’t C. didn’t D. wasn’t 6. I saw a fish while I in the ocean yesterday. A. swim, C. were swimming B. was swimming D. swimming 7. When I heard the phone ring, I it. A. answer C. answered B. am answering D. was answering 8.“ you go to concerts often?” “Yes. I go at least once a month.” A. Do B. Did C. Was D. Were 9. While I dinner last night, I burned my finger. A. cooking B. cook C. was cooking D. was cook 10. Where after work yesterday? A. you went B. youdid go C. did you went D. did you go © EXERCISE 42. Let's talk: interview. Directions: Interview someone you know about his/her activities yesterday morning, yesterday afternoon, and last night. Then use this information to write a paragraph. Use time expressions (first, next, then, at ...o’clock, later, after, before, when, etc.) to show the order of the activities. Co EXERCISE 43. Chapter review: error analysis. Directions: Correct the errors. 1. Did you went downtown yesterday? 2. Yesterday I speak to Ken before he leaves his office and goes home, 3. Theared a good joke last night. 4, When Pablo finished his work. 5. Lvisitted my relatives in New York City last month. 288 CHAPTERS6. Where you did go yesterday afternoon? 7. Ms. Wah was flew from Singapore to Tokyo last week. 8. When I see my friend yesterday, he didn’t spoke to me. 9. Why Mustafa didn’t came to class last week? 10. Where were you bought those shoes? I like them. 11. Mr. Adams teached our class last week. 12. I writed a letter last night. 13, Who you wrote a letter to? 14. Who did open the door? Jack openned it. Cl EXERCISE 44. Verb review. Directions: Complete the sentences with the words in parentheses. PART I. Yesterday Fish (be) in the river. He (see) _______ Bear on the bank of the river. Here is their conversation. BEAR: Good morning, Fish. FISH: Good morning, Bear. How (you, be) today? bear: I (do) _________ fine, thank you. And you? FisH: Fine, thanks. Expressing Past Time, Part 2. 289BEAR: FISH: BEAR: FISH: BEAR: FISH: Gow, would like) —__________to get out of the river and Gi). —____ with: me? (need) 7 someone to talk to. 1 (need, not) _____ 10 get out of the river for us to talk, We can talk just the way we are now. Hmmm. Wait! What (you, do) —_______? T() sin the river to join you. Stop! This (be) ______ my river! I (trust, no) 1 % you. What (you, want) 3 Bear: Nothing, Just a litle conversation. 1 (want) _____ to tell you about my problems. I (have) _____ a bad day yesterday. FisH: Oh? What happened? PART I. BEAR: While I was walking through the woods, I (see) a beehive. I (love) _______ honey. Sol (cmp) —_______. When 7 6 (reach) _____ inside the bechive to get some honey, a great big bee (come) ____ up behind me and stung* my ear. The sting (be) very painful. 2 “Stung isthe past form of the verb sting, which means “to cause sharp pain.” 290 CHAPTER?BEAR: FISH: BEAR: FISH: BEAR: I (believe, nor) ____________ you. Bees can’t hurt bears. I 2 (believe, not) your story about a great big bee. w All bees (be) _______ the same size, and they (be, nor) 2 big. w But it is true! Here. Come a little closer and look at my ear. I'll show you where the big bee stung it. Okay. Where (iz) ___? Where (the bee, sting) you? a Right here. See? Stop! What (ou, do) ________? Let go of me! Why 28 (Gti fick) men I (hold) __________ you because I’m going to eat you for dinner. Expressing Past Time, Part 2291FISH: Oh no! You (trick) ________ me! Your story about the great big at bee never (happen) — PART Ut, Bean: ‘That's right. I (get) ______ in the river because I (toant) ee a) on for dinner, And u 3 id! 1 (aich) ________ you for dinner. FisH: Watch out! Behind you! Oh no! Oh no! It’s a very, very big bee. It’s huge! Tt (look) —____ really angry! Bear: I (believe, nos) ______ you! visi; But it (be) _____ true! A great big bee (come) z toward you. It’s going to attack you and sting you! Bear: What? Where? I (see, nos) _______a bee! Oh no, Fish, you are getting away from me, Oh no! I (drop) _______ youl Come back! Come back! Se wy ee Me fist: Hal T (foo!) ______ you too Bear. Now you must find your dinner in another place. BEAR: Yes, you (trick) ____________ me too. We (teach) 292 CHAPTERS a each other a good lesson today: Don’t believe ae everything you hear.Fist: Thank you for teaching me that lesson. Now I will live a long and happy life. BAR: Yes, we (Iearn) _______a valuable lesson today, and that's good. But I (be) ______ still hungry. Hmmm. I (have) = a gold tooth in my mouth. (you, would like) to come closer and look at it? ro) Expressing Past Time, Part 2. 293CHAPTER ] () Expressing Future Time, Part 1 Co EXERCISE 1. Preview: let's talk. Directions: Answer your teacher’s questions. Give a short answer and a long answer. Close your book for this activity. Example: ‘TEACHER: Are you going to eat dinner at home tonight? STUDENT: Yes, Iam. I’m going to eat dinner at home tonight. OR No, I'm not. I’m not going to eat dinner at home tonight. Are you going to come to class tomorrow? Is (name of a student) going to be here tomorrow? Please ask her/him. Are (names of two students) going to be here tomorrow? Please ask them. ‘When are you going to go to bed tonight? . What time are you going to get up tomorrow morning? 6. Where is (name of a student) going to go tomorrow after class? Please ask her/him. veer USING BE GOI (@) 1 amgoing to go downtown tomorrow. Be going to expresses (talks about) (b) Sue is going to be —_ here tomorrow afternoon. _|__ the future. FORM: am (©) We are going to come to class tomorrow morning. eee (@) T’'m not going to go downtown tomorrow. NEGATIVE: be + not + going to (e) Ann isn’t going to study tonight. (f) “Are you going to come to class tomorrow?” QUESTION: be + subject + going to “No, I’m not. A form of be is used in the short (g) “Is Jim going to be at the meeting tomorrow?” answer to a yes/no question with be “Yes, he is.” going to, as in (f) and (g). (See (h) “What time are you going to eat dinner tonight?” Chart 2-2, p. 25, for information “A cound ak= about short answers with be.) "Inf = to + the simple form of a verb (to come, to go, to see, 10 study ee). 294Cl EXERCISE 2. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Which of the given activities are you going to do tomorrow? Which ones are you not going to do tomorrow? Partner A: Your book is open. Ask a question, Use Are you going to... tomorrow? Partner B: Your book is closed. Answer the question. Give both a short answer and along answer. Use I’m going to... tomorrow ox I’m not going to -+.fomorrow in the long answer. Example: go downtown PARTNER A (book open): Are you going to go downtown tomorrow? PARTNER B (book closed): Yes, 1am. I'm going to go downtown tomorrow. OR No, I'm not. I’m not going to go downtown tomorrow. 1. get up before eight o’clock 6. get a haircut 2. come to class 7. watch TV in the evening 3. stay home all day 8. do something interesting in the evening 4, eat lunch 9. go to bed early 5. get a ride with (someone) 10. go to bed late Seoitch roles. Partner A: Close your book. Partner B: Open your book. Your turn now. 11. get up early 16. eat dinner 12. get up late 17. eat dinner alone 13. walk to school 18. listen to music after dinner 14. study grammar 19. go shopping 15, get some exercise 20. do something interesting and unusual Cl EXERCISE 3. Let's talk: class interview. Directions: Walk around the room. Ask your classmates questions. Write down their names and their answers. Share some of their answers with the class, Example: tomorrow SPEAKER A: What are you going to do tomorrow? SPEAKER B: I’m going to go shopping / get a haircut / walk to school Question First name Answer 1, tomorrow 2. tomorrow morning Expressing Future Time, Part 1 295Question First name Answer 3. tomorrow afternoon 4, tomorrow night 5. at 7:00 tomorrow morning 6. at 9:00 tomorrow morning 7. _at noon tomorrow 8. at 5:00 tomorrow afternoon 9, around 6:30 tomorrow evening 10. after 8:00 tomorrow night CO EXERCISE 4. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use be going to and the given expressions (or your own words). call the manager J go to the bookstore call the police g0 to an Italian restaurant get something to eat lie dowon and rest for a while g0 to the beach look it up in my dictionary £0 10 bed major in psychology see a dentist stay in bed today take a long walk in the park take it to the post office take them to the laundromat 1, Ineed to buy a book. I am going to go to the bookstore. 2. It’s midnight now. I’m sleepy. I 3. Sue is hungry. She 4, My clothes are dirty. I 5. Ihave a toothache. I 6. P'm writing a composition. I don’t know how to spell a word. 1 7. George has to mail a package. He 8, It’s a nice day today. Mary and I 296 CHAPTER 109. Sue and I want to go swimming. We 10. Ihave a headache. I 11, It’s late at night. I hear a burglar! I 12. I want to be a psychologist. When I go to the university, [ —__ 13, I feel terrible. I think I’m getting the flu. I 14. Ivan and Natasha want to go out to eat. They 15. Rosa lives in an apartment. There’s a problem with the plumbing. She Cl EXERCISE 5. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Listen to the teacher describe common activities. Picture these activities in your mind. Use be going to to tell what you think your classmates are going to do. Close your book for this activity. Example: TEACHER: (...) is carrying his/her textbooks and notebooks. He/She is walking toward the library. What is (. . .) going to do? STUDENT: (....) is going to study at the library. 1. (.....) is standing next to the chalkboard. He/She is picking up a piece of chalk. What is (...) going to do? 2. (....) has some letters in his/her hand. He/She is walking toward the post office. What is (...) going to do? 3. (...) is holding a phone book. He/She is looking for (.. . )’s name. What is (...) going to do? Expressing Future Time, Part 1 2974. (...) put some water on the stove to boil. She got a cup and saucer and some tea out of the cupboard. What is (. . .) going to do? 5. (...) is putting on his/her coat. He/She is walking toward the door. What is (...) going to do? 6. (....) has a basket full of dirty clothes. He/She is walking toward a laundromat. What is (...) going to do? 7. (..-) bought some meat and vegetables at the store. He/She is holding a bag of rice. He/She just turned on the stove. What is (. . . ) going to do? 8. (...) and (....) are walking into (name of a local restaurant). It’s seven o'clock in the evening. What are (...) and (...) going to do? 9. (...) gave (...) a diamond engagement ring, What are (...) and (. going to do? 10. (...) and (...) have airplane tickets. They're putting clothes in their suitcases. Their clothes include swimming suits and sandals. What are (...)and(...) going to do? OO EXERCISE 6. Let's talk: interview. Directions: Walk around the room. Ask your classmates questions using be going to. Write down their names and their answers. Share some of their answers with the class. Example: when \ go downtown SPEAKER A: When are you going to go downtown? SPEAKER B; ‘Tomorrow afternoon. / In a couple of days. / Around noon. / Ete. Question First name Answer 1, where \ go after class today 2. what time \ get home tonight 3. when \ eat dinner 4. where \ eat dinner 5. what time \ go to bed tonight 6, what time \ get up tomorrow morning 7. where \ be tomorrow morning 8. when \ see your family again 9. where \ live next year 10. when \ take a trip and where \ go 298 CHAPTER 10CO EXERCISE 7. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Your teacher will ask you questions. Use be going to in your answers. Close your book for this activity. Example: You want to buy some tea. What are you going to do? What is (. ..) going to do and why? TEACHER: You want to buy some tea. What are you going to do? SPEAKER A: I’m going to go to the grocery store. TEACHER: (to Speaker B) What is (Speaker A) going to do and why? SPEAKER B: (Speaker A) is going to go to the grocery store because he/she wants to buy some tea. You have a toothache. What are you going to do? What is (. ...) going to do and why? . You need to mail a package. Where are you going to go? Where is (. . .) going to g0 and why? 3. Your clothes are dirty. 4, I’s midnight. You're sleepy. 5, It’s late at night, You hear a burglar. 6. You need to buy some groceries. 7 8. 9. y . You want to go swimming. You want to go fishing. . You want to buy a new coat. 10. You're hungry. 11. You have a headache. 12. Iv’s a nice day today. 13. You need to cash a check. 14, You want some (pizza) for dinner. 15, You're reading a book. You don’t know the meaning of a word. 10-2 USING THE PRESENT PROGRESSIV! TO EXPRESS FUTURE TIME (a) Sue és going to leave at 8:00 tomorrow. Sometimes the present progressive is used to (b) Sue is leaving at 8:00 tomorrow. express future time. (© We are going to drive to Toronto next week, | (@) and (b) mean the same thing. (@) We are driving to Toronto next week, | {© and (4) mean the same thing. ‘The present progressive is used for future meaning when the speaker is talking about plans that have already been made. COMMON VERBS come drive go meet spend stay do fy leave return start take Expressing Future Time, Port 1 299Cl EXERCISE 8. Sentence practice. Directions: Rewrite the sentences using the present progressive. 1, My mother and I are going to leave for our trip at 10:00 tomorrow. > My mother and I are leaving for our trip at 10:00 tomorrow. 2, We are going to fly to Athens. 3. We are going to spend a week there. 4. My brother is going to meet us there. 5. He is going to take the train. 6. We are going to go sightseeing together. 7. Lam going to come back by boat, and they are going to return by train. Cl EXERCISE 9. Listening. Gq Directions: Listen to each sentence. Decide if the meaning is present or future time. Circle the correct answer. future 5. present future 2. present future 6. present future 3. present future 7. present future 4. present future 8. present future Cl EXERCISE 10. Let's talk: interview. Directions: Walk around the room. Ask your classmates questions using the present progressive. Write down their names and their answers. Share some of their answers with the class. Example: what \ do \ tonight SPEAKER A: What are you doing tonight? SPEAKER B: I’m staying home and watching a DVD. Question. First name Answer 1. where \ go \ after school . what time \ have dinner 2 3. when \ go \ to bed tonight 4 . what time \ get up \ tomorrow 5. what \ do \ tomorrow 6. what \ do \ this weekend 300 CHAPTER 10CQ EXERCISE 11. Listening. Gq Directions: Listen to each sentence. Circle the verb you hear. LG going to rain) is raining rains 2. am going to leave am leaving eave 3. is going to start is starting starts 4. is going to come is coming comes 5. is going to call is calling calls 6. Are you going to study Are you studying ‘Do you study 7. are going to have are having have 8. aren’t going to go aren’t going don’t go 9. is going to ride is riding rides 10. is going to help is helping helps PAST TIME PAST FUTURE vast: It rained yesterday. FUTURE: It's going to rain tomorrow. yesterday tomorrow yesterday morning tomorrow morning Past: I was in class yesterday morning. “yesterday afternoon tomorrow afternoon FUTURE: T’m going to be in class tomorrow esterday evening tomorrow evening morning. last night tomorrow night last week next week Past: Mary went downtown last week. ast month next month FUTURE: Mary is going to go downtown next last year next year week. last weekend next weekend Past: Bob graduated from high school last last spring next spring spring. last summer next summer FUTURE: Ann is going 10 graduate from high last fall next fall school next spring. last winter next winter last Monday, etc. next Monday, etc. s+ minutes ago in... minutes (from now) Past: I finished my homework five +s hours ago in... hours (from now) minutes ago. ++ days ago in... days (from now) FUTURE: Pablo # going to finish his homework + soeeks ago in... weeks (from now) in five minutes. = months ago in... months (from now) dears ago in... years (from nox) Expressing Future Time, Part 1 307(1 EXERCISE 12. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use yesterday, last, tomorrow, or next. 1. I went swimming ____yesterday __ morning. 2. Ken is going to go to the beach ___ tomorrow _morning. 3. Pm going to takeatrip _______ week, 4. Maria went to Miami week for a short vacation. 5. We had a test in class afternoon. 6, ___ afternoon we're going to go on a picnic. 7. My sister is going to arrive Tuesday. 8. Mr. Koh bought a used car ____ Friday. 9. My brother is going to enter the university fall. 10. ___ spring I took a trip to San Francisco. 11. Mia is going to fly to London ____ month. 12. Rick lived in Tokyo _____ year, 13. I'm going to study at the library night. ee niet | arched 1. 15, _______ evening I’m going to go to a baseball game. 16. Mrs. Chang went to the opera__________ evening. 302 CHAPTER 10Cl EXERCISE 13. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use the given time expression with ago or in. i. 2. 10. ten minutes ten minutes an hour an hour 1200 more months . tao months - @ minute half an hour ‘one more week a year Class is going to end ____in ten minutes. ‘Ann’s class ended ____ten minutes ago. ‘The post office isn’t open. It closed Jack is going to call us I'm studying abroad now, but I’m going to be back home My wife and I took a trip to Morocco Keene I'm going to meet David at the coffee shop ‘The new highway is going to open Twas living in Korea CO EXERCISE 14. Sentence practice. Directions: 1. Beth and Tom are going to get married on September 14. > Beth and Tom are going to get married in five days. . They are going to leave for their honeymoon on Sept. 15. . Beth and Tom got engaged on June 9 Change the sentences using ago or in. Use the calendar to calculate length of time. “Today” is September 9. SEPTEMBER . They are going to return from their honeymoon on Sept. 23. . Beth and Tom met in 2002. . They began dating a year later. . Tom is going to quit his job September 30. Beth and Tom are going to open a restaurant together on December 9. Expressing Future Time, Part 1 303CO EXERCISE 15. Listening. Ge Directions: Listen to the beginning of each sentence. Circle the correct completion. five minutes ago one hour ago two weeks ago one year ago ten minutes ago a few minutes ago last spring last summer last weekend Sees eo ee yesterday evening CO EXERCISE 16. Let's tall : interview. in one hour in two weeks in one year in ten minutes in a few minutes next spring next summer next weekend tomorrow evening Directions: Walk around the room. Ask a different student each pair of questions, Write down their names and their answers. Share some of their answers with the class. Question First name Answer 1, where \ go \ yesterday where \ go\ tomorrow 2. who \ call \ last week who \ call \ next week 3. who \ call \ yesterday who \ call \ tomorrow 4. what \ watch on TV \ last week what \ watch on TV \ next week 5. where \ live \ five years ago where \ live \ in five years Cl EXERCISE 17. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use yesterday, last, tomorrow, next, in, o ago. 1. I went to the 200 ___last__ week. 2. Yolanda went to the zoo a week 3. Peter Nelson is going to go to the zoo 304 CHAPTER 10 Saturday.4. We're going to go to the zoo 5. My children went to the zoo 6. My cousin is going to go to the zoo 7. Kim Yang-Don graduated from Sogang University 8, We're going to have company for dinner two more days. 9. We had company for dinner three days 10. We're going to have dinner at our friends’ house oe 12, tm. 14, My little sister arrived here 15. She is going to leave 16. morning. afternoon, spring. night. two days. evening we're going to go to a concert. Friday I went to a party. ____ morning the students took a test. month. two weeks. year Yuko is going to be a freshman in college. 10-4 USING A COUPLE OF OR A FEW WITH AGO (PAST) AND IN (FUTURE) (a) Sam arrived here one (oR a) year ago. (b) Jack is going to be here in two minutes. (© Ttalked to Ann three days ago. Numbers are often used in time expressions with ago and in, (d) Isaw Carlos a couple of months ago. (© He's going to return to Mexico in @ couple of ‘months. (£) I gota letter from Gina a few weeks ago, (g) I'm going to see Gina in a few weeks. A couple of and a few are also commonly used. A couple of means “two.” A couple of ‘months ago = two months ago. A few means “a small number, not a large number.” A few weeks ago = three, four, or five weeks ago. (h) I began college last year. I’m going to graduate in two more years. My sister is almost finished with her education. She’s going to graduate in a few more months. Frequently, the word more is used in future time expressions that begin with in. Expressing Future Time, Port 1 305© EXERCISE 18. Let's talk: small groups. Directions: Work in small groups. Take turns completing the sentences. Use information from your own life. Use the words in italics with ago ot in. Use numbers (one, two, three, ten, sixteen, etc.) or the expressions a couple of ot a few. 1. days We studied Chapter 9 a couple of days ago/thi lays ago/etc. 2. days We're going to finish this chapter ____in a few more days /in three or four days / etc. 3. hours Late breakfast 4, hours ’'m going to eat lunch/dinner 5. minutes. We finished Exercise 17 6. minutes This class is going to end 7. years Twas born 8. years My parents got married 9. weeks ) I arrived in this city sand mo years ) I'm going to leave this city OC EXERCISE 19. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with your own words. Write about your life. For example, what did you do a few days ago? What are you going to do in a few days? Share some of your sentences with the class. 1. 2. PAS fF FY a few days ago. in a few days (from now). in a few more minutes. three hours ago. in four more hours. a couple of days ago. in a couple of months (from now). many years ago. in a couple of minutes (from now). 306 CHAPTER 10Cl EXERCISE 20. Listening. Directions: Listen to the sentences. Circle same if the sentence in the book has the same meaning. Circle different if the meaning is different. 1. Jean is going to leave in two days. different 2. Tom is going to leave in three weeks. same different 3. The doctor is going to call in one hour. same different 4, Tim graduated from high school two years ago. same different 5. We sold our house five years ago. same different 6. The mail came ten minutes ago. same different 7. The phone rang five minutes ago. same different 8. John is going to be here in forty minutes. same different USING TODAY, TONIGHT, AND THIS + MORNIN AFTERNOON, EVENING, WEEK, MONTH, YEAR Right now it's 10 A.M. We are in our English class. | today present | (a) We are studying English this morning. tonight this morning | These words Right now it's 10 A.M. Nancy lefthome at 9 A.M. | tis afternoon | can express to go downtown. She isn’t at home right now. this evening \ present, past, vast (0) Nancy went downtown this morning. this week or future this weekend | time. Right now it’s 10 A.M. Class ends at 11 A.M. this month After class today, I’m going to go to the post office. | #5 year Future | (©) I’m going to go to the post office this morning. ( EXERCISE 21. Sentence practice. Directions: Answer the questions with your own words. 1, What is something you did earlier this year? > 1 came to this city this year. 2. What is something you are doing this year? Te GU Sting eng iis thie year 3. What is something you are going to do this year? > 1 ___am going to visit my relatives in Cairo this year. Expressing Future Time, Part 1 3074. What is something you did earlier today? we today. 5. What is something you are doing today, right now? oI today. 6. What is something you are going to do later today? o1 today. 7. What is something you did earlier this morning / afternoon / evening? >I this 8. What is something you are going to do later this morning / afternoon / evening? > this : Cl EXERCISE 22. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with your own words. Discuss the different verb tenses that are possible. 1 today. 2. this morning. 3. this afternoon. 4. this evening. 5 tonight. 6. this week. 7 this month. 8. this year. OC EXERCISE 23. Let's talk: small groups. Directions: Work in small groups. ‘Take turns being Speaker A and asking your classmates questions about future activities. Speaker A: Begin your question with When are you going to...? Speaker B: Answer Speaker A’s question. Speaker A: Ask Speaker C a question that begins with When is (B) going to... ? Speaker C: Answer in a complete sentence, 308 CHAPTER 10Example: go downtown SPEAKER A: When are you going to go downtown? SPEAKER B: This weekend. Tomorrow morning. / In a couple of days. / Etc. SPEAKER A: When is (.. .) going to go downtown? SPEAKER C: He/She is going to go downtown this weekend. 1. have dinner 7. go to (name of a restaurant) for dinner 2. do your grammar homework 8. see your family again 3. go shopping 9. buy a car 4. go to (name of a class) 10. see (name of a new movie) 5. visit (name of a place in this city) 11. go to (name of an event) 6. call (name of a student) on the phone 12. take a vacation CO EXERCISE 24. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Ask questions using the given verbs or your own words. Example: tomorrow morning PARTNER A: Are you going to come to class tomorrow morning? PARTNER B: Yes, Iam. oR No, I'm not. Example: yesterday morning PARTNER A: Did you eat breakfast yesterday morning? PARTNER B: Yes, I did. oR No, I didn’t. Remember: You can use the given verbs or your own words. buy drive shop call eat sleep come get up visit do go wake up drink send wash Switch roles. 1. last night 10. last week 2. tomorrow night 11. this week 3. tonight 12. yesterday morning 4. tomorrow afternoon 13. tomorrow morning 5. yesterday afternoon 14. this morning 6. this afternoon 15. later today 7. last Friday 16. a couple of hours ago 8. next Friday 17. in a couple of hours (from now) 9. next week 18. this evening Expressing Fulure Time, Port | 309CO EXERCISE 25. Listening. Directions: Listen to each sentence, Decide if the meaning is past, present, or future time. Circle the correct answer. 1. past future 2. past present future 3. past present future 4. past present future 5. past, present future 6. past present future 7. past present future 8. past present future 9. past present future 10. past Present future Lops) IME: USING WILL ‘STATEMENT. (a) Mike will arrive at 10:00 tomorrow. | (a) and (b) have basically (b) Mike is going to arrive at 10:00 tomorrow. | the same meaning. (©) CORRECT: Mike will go there. ‘The simple form of a verb INCORRECT: Mike will goes there. follows will. In (c): goes INCORRECT: Mike wills go there. and wills go are NOT correct. (d) corREcT: Mike will arrive at 10:00. ‘There is never a final -s on INCORRECT: Mike will arrives at 10:00. will for future time. (©) CORRECT: Mike will go there. Will is not followed by an. INCORRECT: Mike will to go there. infinitive with to. CONTRACTIONS | (f) I will come. Filcome. Will is contracted to ‘You will come. You'll come. with subject pronouns.* She will come. She'll come. ‘These contractions are He will come. = He’ll come. common in both speaking It will come. fe’ come. and writing. ‘We will come. We'll come. They will come. = They'll come. NEGATIVE (g) Bob will not be here tomorrow. Negative contraction (h) Bob won't be here tomorrow. will + not = won't Wis ao often onacted with nouns in speaking (st notin wring, WRITTEN: Tom vill be here at ten. SPOKEN: “Tom” be her atten 310 CHAPTER 10CO EXERCISE 26. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Change the sentences by using will to express future time. 1, I’m going to arrive around six tomorrow. > Pl arrive around six tomorrote, 2, Ahmed isn’t going to come to our party. 3. He's going to be out of town next week. 4. Mrs. Rivera is going to be in class tomorrow. 5. She has a cold, but she isn’t going to stay home. 6, Jack and Olga are going to meet us at the movie theater. 7. They’re going to be there at 7:15. 8. Tina is going to stay home and watch TV tonight. 9. This is an important letter. I’m going to send it by express mail. 10. My parents are going to stay at a hotel in Honolulu. 11. Hurry up, or we're going to be late for the concert. 12. I’m not going to be at home this evening. 13. I’m going to wash the dishes and clean the kitchen after dinner. 14. Be careful with those scissors! You're going to hurt yourself! * When two verbs are connected by and, the helping verbs be going to and will are usually not repeated. For example: Tim going 10 lock the doors and -amegoing-te turn out the lights, Tl lock the doors and -ill warn out the lights. Expressing Future Time, Part 1 311CO EXERCISE 27. Listening. Gq) Directions: Listen to each sentence. Circle the word(s) you hear. 1.@acherD) teacher will 6. students’ll students will 2. teacher’ll teacher will 7. John’ll John will 3. We'll We will 8. doctor'll doctor will 4, We'll We will 9. nurse’ll nurse will 5. Pl Twill 10. You'll you will Cl EXERCISE 28. Listening. GQ Directions: Think of a place you would like to visit during your dream vacation. It can be a small town, a big city, a country, or a place far away from cities or towns. After you have this place in your mind, listen to the questions and write complete answers. Share a few of your answers with the class. 1. 2. ASKING QUESTIONS WITH WILL QUESTION ANSWER (question WORD) + WILL + suBjECT + MAIN VERB @) Will Tom come tomorrow? > Yes, he will.* No, he won't. (b) Will you be at home tonight? > Yes, J will.* No, I won't. (©) When will Ann arrive? > Next Saturday. (d) What time will the plane arrive? > Three-thirty. © Where will you be tonight? + At home. “yore: coil is not contracted with a pronoun in a short answer. See Chart 2-2, p. 25, for information about the use of contractions in short answers. 312 CHAPTER 10CO EXERCISE 29. Question practice. Directions: Make questions. A: B: Will you be at home tomorrow night? : Yes, Iwill, ______ (Tl be at home tomorrow night.) Will Ann be in class tomorrow? : No, she won't. ____ (Ann won’t be in class tomorrow). When will you see Mr. Pong? B: Tomorrow afternoon. (I'll see Mr. Pong tomorrow afternoon.) A B: Yes, ______________ (The plane will be on time.) A: B: Yes, ___________ (Dinner will be ready in a few minutes.) A B: Ina few minutes. (Dinner will be ready in a few minutes.) Next year. (I'll graduate next year.) B: At the community college. (Mary will go to school at the community college next year.) No, —_____ (Jane and Mark won’t be at the party.) Yes, ______________ (Mike will arrive in Chicago next week.) Expressing Future Time, Part 1. 313,LL. As B: In Chicago. (Mike will be in Chicago next week.) 12. A: B: No, _______ (won't be home early tonight.) 13. A B: Ina few minutes. (Dr. Smith will be back in a few minutes.) 14. A: B: Yes, _________ (I'll be ready to leave at 8:15.) O EXERCISE 30. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Par I. Imagine you are visiting Paris. Check (7) the fun things you will do on your trip. Paris activities: visit the Biffel Tower — tide the elevator to the top —— drink coffee in a French café buy a painting from a street artist —— ride a boat on the Seine River see the Mona Lisa at the Louvre museum —— speak French ——_ buy some clothes at a French shop —— eat dinner in an expensive French restaurant —— visit Notre Dame cathedral —— take a bus tour of Paris _——_ buy some French perfume 314 CHAPTER 10ParT 1. Take turns asking and answering questions about your activities. Example: visit the Eiffel Tower PARTNER A: Will you visit the Eiffel Tower? PARTNER B: Yes, I will. OR No, I won't. PARTNER a: Your turn now. Partner A, Partner B 1. visit the Eiffel Tower 1. ride the elevator to the top 2. drink coffee in a French café 2. buy a painting from a street artist 3. ride a boat on the Seine River _| 3. see the Mona Lisa at the Louvre museum 4. speak French 4. buy some clothes at a French shop 5. eat dinner in an expensive 5. visit Notre Dame cathedral French restaurant 6. take a bus tour of Paris 6. buy some French perfume Cl EXERCISE 31. Listening. Gq Directions: Read the story. Then listen to the questions and circle the correct answers. NOTE: Jane is a high school student. She is thinking about next year. New Year’s is in one week. She wants to change some of her habits. She is going to make some New Year’s resolutions, Jane is a good student. She studies a lot, but she likes to go to parties on weekends. She wants 10 attend a good university, so next year she will study on weekends too. She has a healthy lifestyle, but sometimes she forgets to exercise. She will exercise four times a week. Now, she only exercises two times a week. She doesn’t smoke, but she wants to lose a little weight. She will start a new diet next year. Jane loves her grandmother, but she doesn’t see hher very much. Jane misses her. Next year; she will visit her once a week. Jane is planning a lot of changes, and she thinks she will be happier. 1.@es, she will, No, she won't. 2. Yes, she will. No, she won't. 3. Yes, she will. ‘No, she won’t. 4, Yes, she will. No, she won't. 5. Yes, she will. No, she won't. 6. Yes, she will. No, she won't. 7. Yes, she will. No, she won't. 8. Yes, she will. No, she won't. Expressing Future Time, Part 1 315CO EXERCISE 32. Listening. Directions: Won’t and want sound similar. Listen carefully to the sentences and circle the verbs you hear. 1. won't 2. won't 3. won’t 4. won't 5. won't 6. won't 7. won't 8. won't want want want want ‘want want want VERB SUMMARY: PRESENT, PAST, AND FUTURE ‘tomorrow. tomorrow. ‘STATEMENT NEGATIVE QUESTION | se SIMPLE PRESENT | I eat lunch every day. I don’t eat breakfast. Do you eat breakfast? He eats lunch every She doesn’t eat Does she eat lunch? day. breakfast. PRESENT Lam eating an apple | V’m not eating a pear. | Am eating a banana? PROGRESSIVE right now. She is eating an apple. | She isn’t eating a pear. | Is he eating a banana? ‘They are eating ‘They aren't eating Are they eating apples. pears. bananas? SIMPLE PAST He ate lunch yesterday. | He didn’t eat breakfast. | Did you eat breakfast? BE GOING TO Tam going to eat I’m not going to eat | Am going to see you lunch at noon. breakfast tomorrow. tomorrow? She is going to cat She isn’t going to eat | Is she going to eat lunch at noon. breakfast tomorrow. lunch tomorrow? ‘They are going to eat | They aren’t going to | Are they going to eat lunch at noon. eat breakfast lunch tomorrow? tomorrow: wie, He will eat lunch He won’t eat breakfast. | Will he eat lunch tomorrow? 316 CHAPTER 10C0 EXERCISE 33. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with the verbs in parentheses. 1. Right now, Anita (sit) ___is sitting _____ at her desk. 2. She (do, nor) _______________ homework. She (write) an e-mail to her parents. 3, She (aris) gemmailtp her parents every week. 4, She (write, not) an e-mail every day. 5. Her parents (expect, not) to get an e-mail every day. 6. Last night Anita (write) ___________ an e-mail to her brother. Then she (start) ____________ to write an e-mail to her sister. 7. While Anita was writing an e-mail to her sister last night, her phone (ring) . Tt (be) her sister! 8. Anita (finish, not) the e-mail to her sister last night. After she (talk) __________ toher sister, she (go) to bed. 9. Tomorrow she (trite) an e-mail to her cousin in Brazil. 10. Anita (write, not) _______________ an e-mail to her parents tomorrow. 11. Gow, write) ___________ an e-mail to someone every day? 12. (you, write) ______________ an e-mail to someone yesterday? 13. (you, write) ______________an e-mail to someone tomorrow? Expressing Future Time, Part 1 317Cl EXERCISE 34. Listening. Gq Directions: Listen to the sentences. Write the verbs you hear. 1. Bill meat, eggs, or fish. 2, He a vegetarian, He meat from animals. He ______ it as a child either. ois wile Ben ee reat butshe vegetarian. 4. She the taste of meat. 5. They a new restaurant tomorrow. 6. John probably a dish with lots of vegetables. 7. Beth _____ vegetables for a main dish. She probably ____ for some type of fish. 8 themselves? 9 back to this restaurant? 10-9 VERB SUMMARY STATEMENT NEGATIVE, (QUESTION SIMPLE PRESENT | I am from Korea. Lam not from Jordan. | Am Lin the right room? He is from Egypt. She isn’t from China. | Is she from Greece? ‘They are from Venezuela, | They aren’t from Italy. | Are they from Kenya? SIMPLE PAST Ann was late yesterday. | She wasn’t on time. Was she in class? ‘They were late yesterday. | They weren’t on time. | Were they in class? BE GOING TO Lam going to be late. | I’m not going to be Am I going to be late? on time. She is going to be late. | She isn’t going to be | Is she going to be late? on time. ‘They are going to be | They aren't going to _| Are they going to be late. be on time. late tomorrow? wi He will be at home He won’t be at home Will he be at home tomorrow. tomorrow. tomorrow? 318 CHAPTER 10C EXERCISE 35. Sentence practice: review of be. Directions: Complete the sentences with the verbs in parentheses. 1. I (be) _______ in class right now. I (be, not) ________ here yesterday. I (be) ________ absent yesterday. (you, be) in class yesterday? (Carmen, be) _________________ here yesterday? 2. Carmen and I (be) _______ absent from class yesterday. We (be, not) here. 3. My friends (be) ____________ at Fatima’s apartment tomorrow evening. I (be) _____ there too. (you, be) ______ there? (Yuko, be) ____________ there? 4. Awhale (be, nor) _______ a fish. It (be) Dolphins (be, not) ____________ fish either. They (be) ____ mammals. Cl EXERCISE 36. Listening: review of be. Gq) Directions: Listen to the sentences. Write the words you hear. 1, A: _______ here tomorrow? Bi Yes, bur probably late, 2. A: Where _____ your visitors from? B: Ali______ from Kuwait, and Toshi and Hiro _____ from Japan. 3. A: _____ everyone in class yesterday? B: All the students ___ there, but the teacher ______ absent. A: sick? B: No, _______, but his daughter Expressing Future Time, Part] 3194. A: Let’s hurry! really late. late, T think your watch fast. A: My watch ____ fast. Maybe your watch ____ slow! B: Let’s not argue. there any sooner if we argue. CO EXERCISE 37. Review. Directions: Pretend you are going to start a self-improvement plan for this coming year. What are some things you are going to do/will do to improve yourself and your life this year? Make a list, then share some of your ideas with the class. Example: 1 will stop smoking. 1am going to get more exercise. Ete. Cl EXERCISE 38. Review: small groups. Directions: Work in small groups. What is going to happen in the lives of your classmates in the next 50 years? Make predictions about your classmates’ futures. Share some of your predictions with the class. Example: SPEAKER A: Heidi is going to become a famous research scientist. SPEAKER B: Ali will have a happy marriage and lots of children. SPEAKER C: Carlos will live in a quiet place and write poetry. Ete. Cl EXERCISE 39. Review: small groups. Directions: In the mail is a letter from your bank. In the envelope is a gift of a lot of money. (As a class, decide on the amount of money in the gift.) You can keep the money if you follow the directions in the letter. There are six different versions of the letter. Choose one (or more) of the letters and describe what you are going to do. ‘Then break into small groups and share your answers. LETTER #1: You have to spend the money on a wonderful vacation. What are you going to do? LETTER #2: You have to spend the money to help other people. What are you going to do? LETTER #3: You have to spend the money to improve your school or place of work. ‘What are you going to do? 320 CHAPTER 10LETTER #4: You have to spend the money on your family. What are you going to do? LETTER #5: You have to spend the money to make the world a better place. What are you going to do? LETTER #6: You have to spend the money to improve your country. What are you going to do? Cl EXERCISE 40. Review: Chapters 8 — 10. Directions: Correct the errors. 1 10. lL. 12, - Is Ivan will go to work tomorrow? ‘When you will call me? . Will Tom to meet us for dinner tomorrow? . We went to a movie yesterday night. . Did you found your keys? . What time you are going to come tomorrow? . My sister is going to meet me at the airport. My brother won't to be there. . Mr. Wong will sells his business and retires next year. . Do you will be in Venezuela next year? I’m going to return home in a couple of month. I saw Jim three day ago. A thief stoled my bicycle. (EXERCISE 41. Review: verb forms. Directions: Complete the sentences with the verbs in parentheses. Give short answers to questions where necessary. 1 A: (you, have) Do you have a bicycle? B: Yes, 1 do. I (ride) ride it to work every day. Expressing Fulure Time, Port 1 321@ oe eS @ ciety CU No, I . I (ride) my bicycle. Nibiere Goose sancd, ssually) ese In my room. (ou, go) to the library to study sometimes? No. I (ike, not) ____________ to study at the library. (ou, be) in class tomorrow? Yes, I . But I (be, not) _ in class the day after tomorrow. (ohales, breathe) a ‘Yes, they (Gohak, hae) ine Yes, it (a whale, be) a fish? No, it _ » It (be) —_______ 4 mammal. 322 CHAPTER 10A: (Yuko, call) you Hast night? B: Yes, she We (talk) for a few minutes. A: Ghe, tell) you about her brother, Tom? B; No,she She (eay,noi) anything about him. Why? A: Tom (be) —______ in an accident. B: That’s too bad. What happened? A: A dog (run) in front of his bicycle. He (want, not) to hit the dog. When he (try) 10 avoid the dog, his bike (run) into the path of a truck. The truck hitTom. It was an unfortunate accident. B: (he, be) _________in the hospital now? ‘A: No, he . He (be) at home. Expressing Future Time, Part | 323Cl EXERCISE 42. Let's talk: smalll groups. Directions: Work in groups of three. The name of the man in the pictures is Alex. ‘What is he doing? Why? Make up probable reasons. Each student in your group will give a different description of Alex’s activities. Follow the directions below. Later, share your group’s ideas about Alex’s activities with the rest of the class. SPEAKER A: Assume each picture shows things that Alex is doing right now and/or does every day. Use the pictures to describe some of Alex’s activities. Use present tenses. SPEAKER B: Assume the pictures show things that Alex is going to do tomorrow. Describe these activities. SPEAKER C: Assume the pictures show things that Alex did yesterday. Describe these activities. 324 CHAPTER 10CHAPTER | ] Expressing Future Time, Part 2 11-1 MAY/MIGHT (@) It may rain tomorrow. (b) Anita may be at home now, May + verb (simple form) expresses a possibility in the future, as in (a), or a present possibility, as in (b). (©) Te might rain tomorrow. @) Anita might be at home now. Might has the same meaning as may. (@) and (©) have the same meaning. (@) Tom will be at the meeting tomorrow. (f) Ms. Lee may/might be at the meeting ‘tomorrow. In (e): The speaker uses will because he feels sure about Tom’s presence at the meeting tomorrow. In (f):The speaker uses may/might to say, “I don’t know if Ms. Lee will be at the meeting, but it is possible.” () Ms. Lee mayimight not be at the meeting tomorrow. Negative form: may/might + not NOTE: (f) and (g) have essentially the same meaning: Ms. Lee may or may not be at the meeting. INCORRECT: Ms. Lee may will be at the meeting tomorrow. INCORRECT: Ms. Lee might will be at the meeting tomorro%. May and might are not used with will. (CO EXERCISE 1. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use will or won’t if you're sure. Use maylmight if you're not sure. 1b in class next Monday. ~ Iwill be in class next Monday. = You're sure. ~» I will not (won’t) be in class next Monday. = You're sure. ~> Imay/might be in class next Monday. OR + Imay/might not be in class next Monday. = It’s possible, but you're not sure. 325eat breakfast tomorrow morning. 31 in class tomorrow. 4.1 get an e-mail from a friend of mine tomorrow. 5.1_______ watch TV for a litte while after dinner tonight. 6, We nave a grammar test in class tomorrow. 71 eat dinner at a restaurant tonight. Dee be londy comorruy. 9. The sun ___ rise tomorrow morning. 10... choose a career in music after I finish school. 11. The population of the earth _____ continue to grow. 12. Cities _________ become more and more crowded. 13. Some people think we _______ communicate with beings from outer space soon. Cl EXERCISE 2. Let's write and talk. Directions: Write two paragraphs. Use the given words. Use your own paper. Paragraph 1: Write about your activities yesterday. Paragraph 2: Write about your activities romorrow. ‘Then show your paragraphs to a partner. Your partner will share some of your activities with the class. PARAGRAPH 1. I got up at yesterday morning. After that, . Around ____ o'clock, ~ Later ___. At o'clock, ____. Then alittle later. Then at o'clock 326 CHAPTER 1]PARAGRAPH 2. I'm going to get up at tomorrow morning. Then ____. After that, . Around o'clock, a Ae o'clock, a Neat a little later. Then at o’clock, CO EXERCISE 3. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Take turns completing the sentences about yourself and other people in the list. yourself (“I”) a friend your partner (“you”) the leader of your country a classmate a world leader your teacher a movie star a member of your family a famous athlete Partner A Partner B 1. In five years, will 1, _____ might not tomorrow. 2. Next year, may not 2, Next year, won't 3. ____ might tomorrow. | 3. In 20 years, ay 4. ____ might or might not___| 4. Next week, may or may not next week. 5. __ won't in 2020. a al ina few years. MAYBE (ONE WORD) vs. MAY Bi (@) “Will Abdullah be in class tomorrow?” “Idon’t know. Maybe. Maybe Abdullah will be in class tomorrow, and maybe he won't.” (b) | Maybe | | Abdullah | |_will be_| here. adverb subject verb ‘The adverb maybe (one word) means “possibly.” Maybe comes in front of a subject and verb. (© [Abdullah may be | here tomorrow. subject verb May be (two words) is used as the verb of a sentence. Expressing Future Time, Part 2 327C EXERCISE 4, Sentence practice. Directions: Find the sentences where maybe is used as an adverb and where may is used as part of the verb. ay eens Maybe it will rain tomorrow. > Maybe = an adverb Tt may rain tomorrow. + may rain = a verb; may is part of the verb We may go to the art museum tomorrow. Maybe Ann would like to go to the museum with us. She may like to go to art museums. It’s cold and cloudy today. It may be cold and cloudy tomorrow. Maybe the weather will be warm and sunny this weekend. Co EXERCISE 5. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with maybe or may be. 1. A:T may be a little late tonight. B: That's okay. I won't worry about you. . A: Will you be here by seven o’clock? B: It’s hard to say. Maybe Till be a little late. A: It cold tomorrow. B: That’s okay. Let’s go to the beach anyway. A: Will the plane be on time? B: I think so, but it a few minutes late. - A: Do you want to go to the park tomorrow? B: Sure. That sounds like fun. A: Let’s talk to Carlos too. he would like to go with us. A: Where’s Mr. Chu? B: Look in Room 506 down the hall. I think he there. A: No, he’s not there. I just looked in Room 506. B: he’s in Room 508. 328 CHAPTER 11C EXERCISE 6. Listening. Ge Directions: Listen to the sentences. Circle the use of may that you hear. Examples: ______ T’ll see you tomorrow. Maybe) May + verb ii you later today. maybe 1. maybe ‘may + verb 5. Maybe May + verb 2. maybe ‘may + verb 6. Maybe May + verb 3. maybe may + verb 7. maybe may + verb 4. maybe may + verb 8. Maybe May + verb Cl EXERCISE 7. Sentence practice. Directions: Rewrite the sentences. Use the words in parentheses. 1. Maybe I will study. a. (might) L might study. b. (may) I may study, 2. The teacher might give a test. a. (maybe) b. (may) 3. Maybe Janet will be home early. a (may) b. (might) 4. She might be late. a. (may) b. (maybe) 5. It may rain tomorrow. a. (maybe) b. (might) Expressing Future Time, Part 2 329Cl EXERCISE 8. Sentence practice. Directions: Answer the questions. Use maybe or may/might. i A: Is David going to come to the party? B: I don’t know. ___Maybe . A: What are you going to do tomorrow? B: I don’t know. I ___may/might ___ go swimming. . A: What are you going to do tomorrow? B: Idon’t have any plans. ____'ll go swimming. A: Where is Robert? B: I don’t know. He be at his office. . A: Where is Robert? B: Idon’t know. _____he’s at his office. A: Are Kate and Steve going to get married? B: ________. Who knows? A: Are you going to move to Portland or to Seattle? B: Idon’t know. I___ move to San Francisco. ‘A: Where are you planning to go on your vacation? we'll go to Mexico. We haven’t decided yet. ee goto Plone: . A: T'd like to have a pet. B: Oh? What kind of pet would you like to get? ‘A: Oh, I don’t know. I haven't decided yet. _____'llgeta canary. Or _____Pll'geta snake. I’m not sure. I getafiog, Ort get a turtle. B: What’s wrong with a cat or dog? 330 CHAPTER 11CO EXERCISE 9. Let's talk. Directions: Work in groups or as a class. The group leader or your teacher will ask you questions. Answer them by using I don’t know + maybe or may/might. If you work in groups, choose a new leader where indicated, Example: ‘TEACHER/LEADER: What are you going to do tonight? sTupENT: I don’t know. Maybe I'll watch TV. /I may watch TV. /I might watch TV. 1, What are you going to do tonight? 2. What are you going to do tomorrow? 3. What are you going to do after class today? 4, What are you going to do this weekend? 5. What are you going to do this evening? Choose a new leader. 6. Who is going to go shopping tomorrow? What are you going to buy? 7. Who is going to go out to eat tonight? Where are you going to go? 8. Who is going to get married? When? 9. Who is going to watch TV tonight? What are you going to watch? Choose a new leader. 10. Who is absent today? Where is he/she? 11. Is it going to rain tomorrow? What is the weather going to be like tomorrow? 12. Who is planning to go on a vacation? Where are you going to go? 13. Who wants to have a pet? What kind of pet are you going to get? CO EXERCISE 10. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Use the phrases below to tell your partner about your activities tomorrow. Use will/won’t, going to/not going to, maybe, may, and might. Example: go to a movie \ go shopping PARTNER A: I’m not going to go to a movie tomorrow. I might go shopping. PARTNER B: I might go to a movie. Maybe I'll go shopping. wake up early \ sleep in 2. eat a big breakfast \ eat a small breakfast 3. stay home \ go to school 4, get some exercise in the afternoon \ take a nap in the afternoon 5. do my homework in the evening \ watch TY in the evening 6. eat ice cream \ eat vegetables Expressing Future Time, Part 2. 3317. cook dinner \ eat out 8. clean my house (apartment, bedroom, car, kitchen) \ read a book 9. shop on the Internet \ shop at a store 10. visit a friend \ visit a chat room on the Internet Co EXERCISE 11. Listening. Gq Directions: Listen to each sentence. Circle the letter of the sentence that has the same meaning as the sentence you hear. 1.@) Maybe I will be absent. b. I'm going to be absent. 2. a. Our plans will change. b. Our plans might change. 3. a. It is going to rain. b. Maybe it will rain. 4. a. We may finish this grammar book soon. b. We will finish this grammar book soon. 5. a. Maybe John will get good news tomorrow: b. John is going to get good news tomorrow. 6. a. The class may start on time. b. The class is going to start on time. C0 EXERCISE 12. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Your teacher will ask you questions. Use the given information to make guesses. Include may/might and maybe in some of your guesses. Close your book for this activity, Example: TEACHER: (...) is absent today, Why? Do you have any possible explanations? STUDENT A: He/She may be sick. STUDENT B: He/She might be out of town today. STUDENT C: Maybe he/she is late today and will come soon. 1. What is (...) going to do after class today? 2. (...) said, “I have very exciting plans for this weekend.” What is he/she going to do this weekend? 332 CHAPTER 113. (...) has an airplane ticket in his pocket. I saw it. Do you know where he/she is going to go? 4. (...) said, “I don’t like it here in this city.” Why doesn’t (. . .) like it here? Do you have any idea? 5. (...) doesn’t like it here. What is he/she going to do? 6. (...) has something very special in his/her pocket, but he/she won’t show anyone what it is, What do you suppose is in his/her pocket? 7. Can you think of some good things that may happen to you this year? 8, What are some good things that might happen to (. . .) this year or next year? 9. Can you think of some bad things that might happen in the world this year or next? 10. What are some good things that may happen in the world this year? 11, What new inventions do you think we may have in the future to make our lives easier? Cl EXERCISE 13. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Check the boxes that describe your activities tomorrow. Show your answers to your partner. She/He will make sentences about you and share some of them with the class. Example: You may/might get up at 7:00. OR Maybe you'll get up at 7:00. You'll come to class. OR You're going to come to class. You won't sing in the shower. oR You're not going to sing in the shower. Activity Yes No Maybe eat lunch . go shopping ._ send some e-mails . talk on the phone . play soccer g $ . read an English language newspaper 8. look up information on the Internet 9. have dinner with friends 10. listen to the radio Expressing Future Time, Part 2. 33311-3 FUTURE TIME CLAUSE AND WHEN ‘ORE, AFTER, (@ Before Ann goes to cork tomorrows, she will eat breakfast. INCORRECT: Before Ann will go 10 work tomorrow, she will eat breakfast. INcoRRECT: Before Ann is going to go t0 work tomorrow, she will eat breakfast. In (a): Before Ann goes to work tomorrow is a future time clause.* A future time clause uses the SIMPLE PRESENT TENSE, not will or be going to. (b) I'm going to finish my homework after I eat dinner tonight. (© When I go to New York next week, I'm going to stay at the Hilton Hotel. In (b): after I eat dinner tonight = a future time clause. In (c): When I go to New York next eveek = a future time clause. Notice: A comma follows an adverb clause when it comes at the beginning of a sentence. **See Chart 9-7, p. 273, for more information about time clauses. Cl EXERCISE 14. Sentence practice. Directions: Underline the time clauses. 1. When we go to the park tomorrow, we're going to go to the zoo. . After I get home tonight, I’m going to make an overseas call to my parents. . Mr. Kim will finish his report before he leaves the office today. . Before I go to bed tonight, I’m going to write a letter to my brother. 2 3. 4. I'll get some fresh fruit when I go to the grocery store tomorrow. 5, 6. . I'm going to look for a job at a computer company after I graduate next year. C_EXERCISE 15. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with the words in parentheses. 1, Before I (go) __go __ to bed tonight, I (watch) ___am going to watch/will watch _ my favorite show on TV. 2. I (buy) shopping tomorrow. 3. After I (finish) a walk. 334 CHAPTER 11 a new coat when I (go) my homework this evening, I (take)4, When I (see) ___ Eduardo tomorrow, I (ask) v him to join us for dinner this weekend. . When I (go) to Australia next month, I (meet) my Aunt Emily for the first time. 6. Mrs. Polanski (change) _________ her clothes before she (work) in her garden this afternoon. (EXERCISE 16. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Your teacher will ask you questions. Give complete answers using time clauses. Close your book for this activity. Example: Who's going to go shopping later today? What are you going to do after you go shopping? ‘TEACHER: SPEAKER A? ‘TEACHER: SPEAKER A: ‘TEACHER: SPEAKER B: pe yew ‘Who's going to go shopping later today? (raises his/her hand) ‘What are you going to do after you go shopping? After I go shopping, I’m going to go home. oR I’m going to go home after I go shopping. (io Speaker B) What is (Speaker A) going to do after he/she goes shopping? After (Speaker A) goes shopping, he/she is going to go home. OR (Speaker A) is going to go home after he/she goes shopping. Who’s going to study tonight? What are you going to do after you study tonight? Who else is going to study tonight? What are you going to do before you study tonight? ‘Who's going to watch TV tonight? What are you going to do before you watch TV? . Who’s going to watch TV tonight? What are you going to do after you watch TV? . Who's going to go shopping tomorrow? What are you going to buy when you go shopping tomorrow? Expressing Future Time, Part 2 3356. (....), what are you going to do tonight? What are you going to do before you ...? What are you going to do after you . . . tonight? 7. (...)5 what are you going to do tomorrow? What are you going to do before you . tomorrow? What are you going to do after you . . . tomorrow? 8. Who’s going out of town soon? Where are you going? What are you going to do when you go to (name of place)? 9. Who’s going to eat dinner tonight? What are you going to do before you eat dinner? What are you going to do after you eat dinner? What are you going to have when you eat dinner? 10. (...), what time are you going to get home today? What are you going to do before you get home? What are you going to do when you get home? What are you going to do after you get home? (@) LIfit rains tomorrow,| |_we will stay home. An if-clause begins with ifand has a ‘ifclause ‘main clause subject and a verb. An if-clause can come before or after a main clause. tay if it vais row. ; (e) (We will stay home. it rains tomer Notice: A comma follows an if-clause oe eee when it comes at the beginning of a sentence. © [it rains tomorrow, we won't go on a picnic. ‘The SIMPLE PRESENT (not will or be going to) is used in an if-clause to (4) P'm going to buy a new car next year if I have eee yeas af express future time enough money. If I don’t have enough money next year for a new car, I'm going to buy a used car. (1 EXERCISE 17. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with the words in parentheses. 1. IfAli (be) ___is ___ im class tomorrow, I (ask) ___am going to/will ask__ him to join us for coffee after class. 2. If the weather (be) _____...__ nice tomorrow, I (go) to Central Park with my friends. 3. I (Stay, nor) ____CCC#Cmee tomorrow iif the weather (be) nice. 4, If (feel, not) well tomorrow, I (go, not) to work. 336 CHAPTER 115. Masako (stay) in bed tomorrow if she C3) 6. I (stay) ________ with my aunt and uncle if I (go) to Miami next week. 7. If my friends (be) ______ busy tomorrow, I (go) to a movie by myself. 8. If'we (continue) ____________to pollute the land and oceans with poisons and waste, future generations (suffer) Cl EXERCISE 18. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Ask and answer questions. Partner A: Ask a question that begins with What are you going to do... ? Your book is open. Partner B: Answer the question. Include the #f-clause in your answer. Your book is closed. Example: .. . if the weather is nice tomorrow? PARTNER A (book open): What are you going to do if the weather is nice tomorrow? PARTNER B (book closed): If the weather is nice tomorrow, I’m going to sit outside in the sun. oR I’m going to sit outside in the sun if the weather is nice tomorrow. 1... if the weather is cold tomorrow? 2. ... if the weather is hot tomorrow? 3. ... if you don’t understand a question that I ask you? 4... if class is canceled tomorrow? 5. ... if you don’t feel well tomorrow? 6. ... if you go to (name of a place in this city) tomorrow? Expressing Future Time, Part2 337Switch roles. Partner A: Close your book. Partner B: Open your book. Your turn now. 10. LL. 12 if it rains tonight? . if you're hungry after class today? - if you go to (name of a place in this city) tomorrow? - if you don’t study tonight? . if you lose your grammar book? . if someone steals your (name of a thing: bicycle, wallet, etc.)? CO EXERCISE 19. Listening. Gy Directions: Listen to the questions. Write your answers in complete sentences. 1. 2 3. 4, CO EXERCISE 20. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Step 1: Write your activities for next week in the blank datebook on the next page. If you don’t have many planned activities, make up some interesting ones. ‘Then, give your datebook to your partner. Step 2: In writing, describe your partner’s activities next week. ‘Try to include some time clauses beginning with when, after, and before. Ask your partner questions about the activities on his/her datebook to get more information. Example: STEP 1: (Ali) STEP 2: One partner interviews the other (Ali) about his calendar and then writes: snaig On Sunday, Ali is going to play tennis with 1 | omnia ith Tela Talal early in the morning. They're going to play on the tennis courts here at school. After -- : they play tennis, they're going to have 1 | Darah wi om breakfast. a In the afternoon, Ali is going to meet Ivan peccen Jom for lunch at Cozy’s Café. They're going to have cal ate a sandwich before they go to the soccer game at Memorial Stadium. When Ali gets home in the evening, he will 338 CHAPTER 11 =I study before he watches TV and goes to bed.PARTNER A’S DATEBOOK: Fill in the calendar with your activities for next week. Sunday Monday | Tuesday | Wednesday Thursday | Friday | Saturday pote CLAUSES AND IF-CLAUSE (a) FUTURE (b) HABITUAL PRESENT After Ann gets to work today, she is going to have/will have a cup of coffe. After Ann gets to work (every day), she always has a cup of coffee. EXPRESSING HABITUAL PRESENT WITH TIME | @ expresses a specific activity in the future. The SIMPLE PRESENT is used in the time clause. Be going to ot will is used in the main clause. (b) expresses habitual activities, so the SIMPLE PRESENT is used in both the time clause and the main clause. (© FuTURE (@) HABITUAL PRESENT If it rains tomorrow, | am going to/will wear my raincoat to school. If it rains, I wear my raincoat. (©) expresses a specific activity in the future, ‘The SIMPLE PRESENT is used in the if-clause. Be going to or will is used in the main clause. (A) expresses habitual activities, so the SIMPLE PRESENT is used in both the ifclause and the main clause. Expressing Future Time, Part 2 339CO EXERCISE 21. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with the words in parentheses. 1. 10. When I (go) ____ to Miami, I (stay, usually) with my aunt and uncle. ‘When I (go) ____ to Miami next week, I (stay) with my aunt and uncle. . Before I (go) to class today, I (have) cup of tea. . Before I (go) ____ to class, I (have, usually) a cup of tea. I’m often tired in the evening after a long day at work. If I (be) tired in the evening, I (stay, usually) ____________ home and (go) ________ to bed early. . TET (be) ______ tired this evening, I (stay) home and (go) ______ to bed early. . After I (get) ______ home in the evening, I (sit, usually) in my favorite chair and (read) ________ the newspaper. eee ee ee my favorite chair and (read) _________ the newspaper. . People (yawn, often) _________ and (stretch) when they (wake) ______up. Before the teacher (walk) into the room every day, there (be) a lot of noise in the classroom. 340 CHAPTER 1111, When I (go) _____ to Taiwan next month, I (stay) with my friend Mr. Chu. After I (leave) Tuiwan, | (go) to Hong Kong, 12. Ms. Wah (go) ____ to Hong Kong often. When she (be) there, she (like) _______ to take the ferry across the bay, but she (take) the subway under the bay if she (be) ______ ina hurry. Cl EXERCISE 22. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Your teacher will ask you questions. Answer them in complete sentences. Close your book for this activity. Example: ‘TEACHER: What do you do when you get up in the morning? SPEAKER A: When I get up in the morning, I eat breakfast. SPEAKER B: I listen to music when I get up in the morning. 1. What do you do when you get up in the morning? 2. What are you going to do when you get up tomorrow morning? 3. What do you usually do before you eat breakfast? 4. What are you going to do after class today? 5. What are you going to do when you get home? 6. What do you usually do after you get home? 7. What do you like to do if the weather is nice? 8. What are you going to do if the weather is nice tomorrow? Cl EXERCISE 23. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with your own words. 1. Before I go to bed tonight, _ 2) Before|leo tobed usually 8 3. Ym going to _________ tomorrow after I 4, WhenI goto ____, P'm going to 5. WhenTgoto_____—S satay 6. If the weather ______ tomorrow, I 7. Twill visit when I Expressing Future Time, Part 2 3418. Pll ifT 9. If the weather tomorrow, you going to 10. Are you going to before you 11. Do you before you 12. After I tonight, I © EXERCISE 24. Listening. Gq Directions: Listen to each sentence and circle the correct completion. 2. I get a good night’s sleep. . Ido my homework. . I go shopping. . Lexercise. . L call my parents. . I'm happy. eo Aawee |. I know a lot of grammar. I'm going to watch TV. Pil get a good night’s sleep. Pil do my homework. Pil go shopping. Pil exercise. Pil call my parents. Pil be happy. Tl know a lot of grammar. ING WHAT + A FORM OF DO PRESENT (@) What do you do every day? (b) What are you doing right now? (©) What do you do? I work every day. ['m studying English. L'm a teacher. PasT (a) What did you do yesterday? I went to school yesterday. FUTURE (© What are you going to do tomorrow? 2) What will we do if it rains tomorrow? I’m going to go downtown tomorrow. ‘We'll stay home if it rains tomorrow. In (a) and (b), What + a form of do is used to ask about activities, In (©): What do you do? means What kind of work do you do? oR 342 CHAPTER 11Cl EXERCISE 25. Question practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with the words in parentheses. 1. A: What (you, do) __doyoudo __ every Friday? B: I (come) ___come __ to class. 2. A: What (you, do) _____—__dast Friday? B: I (come) _______ to class. 3. A: What (ou,do) next Friday? Bil (Gm. ee fo lclass: : What (you, do) _________ yesterday evening? B: I (watch) 5. A: What (you, do) ___ every evening? B: I (watch) ____Tv. ‘What (you, do) _____________ tomorrow evening? Ba) ey 7. A: What (you, do) —______ right now? B: I (do) ________a grammar exercise. 8. A: What (Maria, do) every morning? B: She (go) ____ to work. OA: What (ihe tiudencg) reser ehe nowe) B: They (work) on this exercise. 10. A: What (they, do) in class tomorrow? B: They (take) atest, 11. A: What (Boris, do) —______ last night? B: He (go) ______ toa movie. Expressing Future Time, Part 2 34312. A: What (the teacher, do) beginning of class? B: She (put) class, and (say) every day at the her books on her desk, (/ook) __________ at the “Good morning.” CO EXERCISE 26. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a parmer. Ask your partner questions. Use What + a form of do with the given time expression. Example: yesterday PARTNER A (book open): What did you do yesterday? PARTNER B (book closed): I read a newspaper yesterday. 1. last night 5. 2. every day 6. 3. right now a 4. tomorrow Switch roles. Partner A: Close your book. Partner B: Open your book. 8. right now 12, 9. last Saturday 1B. 10. next Saturday 14, 11. this morning yesterday afternoon tomorrow morning every morning Your turn to ask questions. this afternoon tonight next week CO EXERCISE 27. Review: verb forms. Directions: Complete the sentences with the words in parentheses. Use any appropriate verb form. 1. A: I Gkip) B: Why? A: Why not? class tomorrow. B: That's not a very good reason. 2. A: How did you get here? B: I (take) 344 CHAPTER 11 aplane. I (fly) ______here from Bangkok.How do you usually get to class? B: I (walk, usually) ____________, but sometimes I (take) the bus. : Where’s my book! Someone (steal) it! B: Take it easy. Your book (be) ____ right here. a Bop ee ee. A: Oh. Where (you, meet) your wife? B: I (meet) ______ her at a party ten years ago. . A: What time (the movie, begin) ast night? B: 7:30. CAS tie bg), ese ates) B: No. We (make) ___it in time. Where’s your homework? I (lose) it, On? I (forget) —________it. on? I (give) _____ it to Roberto to give to you, but he (lose) it, A: Oh? B: Someone (seal) _____ it. A: Oh? B: Well, actually I (have, not) ________ enough time to finish it last night. A: Isee. Expressing Future Time, Part 2 3452 Pe eee 10. e 60) here during vacation next week? No. I (take) a trip to Miami. I (visit) my aunt and uncle. How long (you, be) —__ away? About five days. Why (ou, wear) a cast on your foot? I (break) my ankle, How? I (step) _____ in a hole while I was running in the park. (ou, see) ____ Randy yesterday? B: No, but I (speak) _______ to him on the phone. He (call) me yesterday evening. Is he okay? B: Yes. He still has a cold, but he’s feeling much better. 11. As That’s good. Is Carol here? B: No, she (be, not) . She (leave) _____ a few minutes PP DP 346 CHAPTER 11 ago. (she, be) _________________ back soon? I think so. Where (she, go) 2 She (go) to the drugstore.OC EXERCISE 28. Listening. Gq) Directions: Complete the conversations with the words you hear. 1. A: that? B: What? A: The man in the red shirt _____ the man in the blue shirt. B: sure? A: Ye, _________sthe whole thing. 2. A: _______late for the movie? B: No. The movie at 7:30, and to the theater at ei eae thar rigice?) B: What noise? A: Listen again. B: Now St 4. A: to the zoo this afternoon? to go, but I can’t because study. A: That's too bad. to the z00? A: Yes. The weather ___ perfect, and outside and Cl EXERCISE 29. Review. Directions: Circle the correct completions. 1. “Are you going to go to the baseball game tomorrow afternoon?” “I don’t know. I an A. will B. am going to C. maybe ©)might 2. “Are Jane and Eric going to be at the meeting?” “No, they're too busy. They be there.” A. don’t B. won't C. will D. may Expressing Future 1@,Part 2 3473. “Are you going to go to the market today?” “No. I went there Friday.” A. yesterday —_B. next C. last D. ago 4, “When are you going to go to the bank?” “Tl go there before I to the post office tomorrow morning.” A. will go B. go C. went D. am going 5. “Why is the teacher late today?” “I don’t know. he slept late.” A. Maybe B. Did C. May D. Was 6. “Do you like to go to New York City?” “Yes. When I’m in New York, I always 0.” A. found B. find C. will find D. finds new things to do and places to 7. “Is Ken going to talk to us this afternoon about our plans for tomorrow?” “No. He'll us this evening.” A. calls B. calling C. call D. called 8. « are you going to do after class today?” “I’m going to go home.” A. When B, Where C. What D. What time 9. “Where Ivonne live before she moved into her new apartment?” “She lived in a dormitory at the university.” A did B. does Cis D. was 10. “What time Olga and Boris going to arrive?” “Six” Ais B. do C. will D. are 1 EXERCISE 30. Chapter review: error analysis. Directions: Correct the errors. 1. If it will be cold tomorrow morning, my car won't start. 2, We maybe late for the concert tonight. 3, What time you are going to come tomorrow? 4, Fatima will call us tonight when she will arrive home safely. 5. Emily may will be at the party. 34B CHAPTER 116. When I'll sce you tomorrow, I'll return your book to you. 7. Imay to don’t be in class tomorrow. 8. Ahmed puts his books on his desk when he walked into his apartment. 9. Pll see my parents when I will return home for a visit next July. 10. What do you doing all day at work? C1 EXERCISE 31. Review. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use the words in parentheses. Use any appropriate verb form. PART 1. Peter and Rachel are brother and sister. Right now their parents (be) T abroad on a trip, so they (Stay) _____ with their grandmother, They (ike) —____ to stay with hen. She (make, always) ; wonderful food for them. And she (tell) ______ them stories every night before they (go) ——_ 0 bed Before Peter and Rachel (go) . 10 bed last night, they (ask) Grandma to tell them a story. She (agree) ________. The @ a children (put) ____—__ on their pajamas, (brush) ______ their teeth, 7 and (sit) with their grandmother in her big chair to listen to a story. 2 Expressing Future Time, Part 2. 349PART I. GRANDMA: That's good. Sit here beside me and get comfortable. CHILDREN: What (you, tell) us about tonight, 3 Grandma? GRANDMA: Before I (begin) _____ the story, I (give) a4 ry each of you a kiss on the forehead because I love you very much. CHILDREN: We (ove) you too, Grandma. 6 GRANDMA: Tonight I (tell) _______ you a story about Rabbit and 7 Eagle. Ready? CHILDREN: Yes! GRANDMA: Rabbit had light gray fur and a white tail. He lived with his family in a hole in a big, grassy field. Rabbit (be) —_____aftaid of many things, but i he (be) _____ especially afraid of Eagle. Eagle liked to eat rabbits for 7 dinner. One day while Rabbit was eating grass in the field, he (see) —______— Fagle in the sky above him. Rabbit (be) very 20 2 afraid and (run) _____ home to his hole as fast as he could. Rabbit (stay) in his hole day after day because he (be) B afraid to go outside. He (ger) very hungry, but 2 % still he (stay) _____ im his hole. Finally, he (find) —___ Es oF the courage to go outside because he (need) (eat) % Carefully and slowly, he (put) his little pink nose outside 3 the hole, He (smell, not) any dangerous animals. a And he (see, not) —___ Eagle anywhere, so he (hop) 2 out and (find) _______ some delicious new a 350 CHAPTER 11grass to eat. While he was eating the grass, he (see) a shadow on 5 the field and (look) __________up. It was Eagle! Rabbit said, “Please 36 don’t eat me, Eagle! Please don’t eat me!” , PART Ill, GRANDMA: On this sunny afternoon, Eagle was on her way home to her nest when she (hear) _______a faint sound below her. “What is that sound?” Eagle said a to herself. She looked around, but she (see, not) s anything. She (decide) to ignore the sound and go home. She a was tired and (want) ____ (rest) _______ inher nest. 0 a Then below her, Rabbit (say) _______again in a very loud voice, 7 “Please don’t eat me, Eagle! Please don’t eat me!” ‘This time Bagle (hear) ______ Rabbit clearly. Eagle (por) Rabbit in the field, (fly) down, and (pick) 4 ® —_____ Rabbit up in her talons. ra Expressing Future Time, Part 2.351“Thank you, Rabbit,” said Eagle. “I was hungry and (know, not) where I could find my dinner. It’s a good thing you a called to me.” ‘Then Bagle (car) ________ Rabbit for dinner. a PART IK, GRANDMA: There’s a lesson to learn from this story, children. If you (be) 0 afraid and expect bad things to happen, bad things will happen. The opposite is also true. Ifyou (expect) ______ good things to happen, good things will happen. (ou, understand) > a Now it’s time for bed. CHILDREN: Please tell us another story! GRANDMA: Not tonight. I'm tired. After I (have) —_____a warm drink, I (go) 7 to bed. All of us need (get) = a good night's sleep. Tomorrow (be) . a busy day. CHILDREN: What (we, do) —___ tomorrow? GRANDMA: After we (have) . breakfast, we (go) = to the zoo at Woodland Park. When we (be) 7 at the 200, we (see) ___lots of wonderful animals. Then in the afternoon we Gee) —_______ a play at the Children’s Theater. But before we (see) . the play, we (have) —_____ a pene unch in the park. CHILDREN: Wow! We (have) a a wonderful day tomorrow! GRANDMA: Now off to bed! Goodnight, Rachel and Peter. Sleep tight.* CHILDREN: Goodnight, Grandma. Thank you for the story! * Sleep tight means “Sleep well. Have a good night’s sleep.” 352 CHAPTER 11C1 EXERCISE 32. Let's talk: small groups. Directions: Work in small groups. Choose a leader. Answer your leader’s questions. Look at the story in Exercise 31, p. 349, if you need to. » What did Rabbit look like? . Where did he live? . Who was he afraid of . Why did he hide in his hole? . Why did he come out of his hole? . What did he do when he saw Eagle? . Did Eagle see Rabbit before Rabbit spoke in a loud voice? . What happened to Rabbit? . What's the moral of the story? PRNAARVRENe Expressing Future Time, Part 2. 353Modals, Part 1: Expressing Neri EXERCISE 1. Let's talk: class activity. Directi Example: ‘TEACHER: Can you sing? SPEAKER: Yes, I can sing. OR No, I can’t sing. 1 2 3. 4 5) 6. . Can you speak (a language)? Can you lift your desk? Can you touch the ceiling? (a) Thave some money. I ean buy a book. (©) Tom is strong. He can lift the heavy box. . Can you play (a musical instrument)? Can you count to five in (a language)? ‘Can you walk to the back of the room with your eyes closed? Who would like to try? (b) We have time and money. We can go to a movie. : Answer your teacher’s questions. Close your book for this activity. Can expresses ability and possibility. (@) correct: Yuko can speak English. (©) tNcorRECr: Yuko can to speak English. (£) NcorRECT: Yuko can speaks English. ‘The simple form of the main verb follows can. In (d): speak is the main verb. An infinitive with to does Nor follow can. In (©): to speak is incorrect. A main verb following can does not have a final -s. In (£): speaks is incorrect. (@) Alice can not come. Alice cannot come. Alice can’t come. NEGATIVE can + not = can not OR cannot CONTRACTION can + not = can’t 354OC EXERCISE 2. Sentence practice. Directior Examples: A bird \ sing > A bird can sing. A horse \ sing » A horse can’t sing. 1. A bird \ fly 2. A cow \ fly 3. A child \ drive a car 4, An adult \ drive a car 5. A newborn baby \ walk 6. A fish \ breathe air 7. A fish \ swim CO EXERCISE 3. Let's talk: class activity. : Make sentences from the given words. Use can or can’t. 8. A deaf person \ hear 9. A blind person \ see 10. An elephant \ swim 11, An elephant \ climb trees 12. A cat\ climb trees 13. A boat \ float on water 14. A rock \ float on water Directions: Make sentences about yourself. Use I can or I can’t. Example: speak Chinese Response: I can speak Chinese. or I can’t speak Chinese. whistle ride a bicycle touch my ear with my elbow play the piano* play the guitar lift a piano . drive a stick-shift car . fix a flat tire erayesene 9. 10. ll. 12. 13. 14, 15. 16. swim float on water ski do arithmetic make a paper airplane sew a button on a shirt wiggle my cars cat with chopsticks *In expressions with play, the is usually used with musical instruments: play she piano, play the guitar, play the violin, ee ‘Modals, Patt 1: Expressing Ability 355Cl EXERCISE 4. Game: small group activity. Directions: Work in small groups. Discuss each statement. Then circle yes or no. ‘When you are finished, check your answers with your teacher. The group with the most correct answers wins. 1, Some birds can’t fly. yes no 2. Elephants can jump. yes no 3. Tigers can’t swim. yes no 4. An octopus can change colors. yes no 5. Kangaroos can walk. yes no 6. A baby kangaroo lives in its mother’s pouch for a short time. yes no 7. Some fish can climb trees. yes no 8. Horses can’t sleep when they stand up. yes no 9. Turtles can’t live more than 100 years. yes no 10. Whales can hold their breath underwater. yes no 12-2 PRONUN (a) Rick can come to the meeting. Can is usually pronounced “kun” —/kan/. (b) Mike can’t come to the meeting, Can’t is usually pronounced with the same vowel sound as “ant”—/kenw/.* ‘Native speakers usually drop the /t/. “Sometimes native speakers also have trouble hearing the difference between cam and cant O EXERCISE 5. Listening. Oo Directions: Listen to each sentence. Circle the word you hear. 1 can’t 6. can can’t 2. can can’t 7. can can’t 3. can can’t 8. can, can’t 4, can can’t 9. can can’t 5. can can’t 10. can. can’t 356 CHAPTER 12CO EXERCISE 6. Listening. Directions: Read the want ad. Then listen to John talk about his job skills. Last, circle the answer to the question. Job opening at small, international hotel. Need person with the following: good typing and word-processing skills, excellent. knowledge of English, friendly manner on the phone. Also needs to help guests with their suitcases and be available weekends. Question: Is John a good person for this job? -yes_——snto (QUESTION + GAN + SUBJECT + MAIN VERB ANSWER ‘woRD) @ Can you speak Arabic? > Yes, can. + No, I can’t. (b) Can Rosa come _—to the party? > Yes, she can. + No, she can’t. (© Where can buy ahammer? > At a hardware store. (@) When can you help me? + Tomorrow afternoon. CO EXERCISE 7. Question practice. Directions: Make yes/no questions. Give short answers. 1. A: lean speak English? B: Yes, she can. (Jean can speak English.) 2. Ar Can you speak French? B: No, | can't. (J can’t speak French.) 3A: (Jim can’t play the piano.) Modals, Part 1: Expressing Ability 357(I can whistle.) 5. A: (J can go shopping with you this afternoon.) 6A (Carmen can’t ride a bicycle.) Th ee (Elephants can ei) 8. AD B: _____ (The students can finish this exercise quickly.) 9. A: B;_________ (The doctor can see you tomorrow.) 10. A: Be sees (Lean stand on mylheed:) B: (We can’t have pets in the dormitory.) CO EXERCISE 8. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Partner A: Ask a question. Use Can you... ? Partner B: Answer the question. Then ask How about you? and repeat the question. Example: speak Arabic PARTNER A: Can you speak Arabic? PARTNER B: Yes, I can. OR No, I can’t. How about you? Can you speak Arabic? PARTNER A: Yes, I can. oR No, I can’t. Your turn now. 358 CHAPTER 12Partner A Partner B ] 1. ride a bicycle 1. ride a horse 2. play the piano 2. play the guitar 3. sing 3. whistle 4. touch your knee with your nose 4. touch your ear with your elbow 5. drive a stick-shift car 5. fix a flat tire 6. spell Mississippi 6. spell the teacher’s last name 7. swim 7. float on water Cl EXERCISE 9. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Partner A: Ask a question. Use Where can I... ? Your book is open. Partner B: Answer the question. Your book is closed. Example: buy a notebook PARTNER A (book open): Where can I buy a notebook? PARTNER B (book closed): At the bookstore. / At (a local store). / Etc. . buy a camera get a dozen eggs . buy a fan . get a good dinner . go swimming . play tennis . catch a bus . find a vegetarian restaurant . buy a diamond ring CrIrauewne Switch roles. Partner A: Close your book. Partner B: Open your book. Your turn to ask questions. 10. buy a hammer 11. see a tiger 12. get a newspaper 13. buy a notebook 14. get a taxi 15. get a sandwich 16. cash a check 17. renta DVD 18. buy cold medicine ‘cold medicine Modals, Part 1: Expressing Ability 359CO EXERCISE 10. Listening. Gy Directions: Listen to the conversations. Write the words you hear. 1, A: Hello? B: speak to Mr. Jones, please? A: Pm sorry. to the phone right now. take a message? ______ return your call in about a half-hour. B: Yes. Please tell him Bob Anderson called. 2. A: me lift this box? B: It looks very heavy, ______ to help you, but I think we need a third person. A: No, I’m very strong. I think it together. Bo As the TY, tr it up? turn it up. I'm doing my homework. If I turn it up, I concentrate. A: _______ your homework in another room? B: Oh, all right. (@) Tecan swim. (a) and (b) have basically the same meaning. (b) I know how to swim. Know how to expresses ability. (© Can you cook? (©) and (d) have basically the same meaning. (@) Do you know how to cook? CO EXERCISE 11. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Partner A: Ask a question. Use know how to in your question. Your book is open. Partner B: Answer the question. Your book is closed. 360 CHAPTER 12Example: swim PARTNER A (book open): Do you know how to swim? PARTNER B (book closed): Yes, Ido. OR No, I don’t. 1. cook 5 2. dance 6 3. play the piano 7 4. get to the post office from here 8 Switch roles. Partner A: Close your book. fix a flat tire . drive a stick-shift car wiggle your nose sew Partner B: Open your book. Your turn to ask questions. 9. play the guitar 10. get to the airport from here 14. 11. use a digital camera 15. 12, use a screwdriver 16. — a a screwdriver 13, get to (a store) from here count to five in (a language) add, subtract, multiply, and divide find the square root of nine C EXERCISE 12. Let's talk: find someone who .... Directions: Walk around the room. Ask your classmates questions. Find someone who can answer yes to each question. Write down his/her name. Use Do you know how to. ? Share a few of their answers with the class. Ability First name 1. play a musical instrument play a sport 3. speak three or four languages 4. eat with chopsticks 5. take care of a snake 6. sew 7. fix a car 8. draw 9. swim . create movies on a computer Modals, Part 1: Expressing Ability 361Cl EXERCISE 13. Let's write: small groups. Directions: Work in small groups. Complete the sentences as a group. Use a separate sheet of paper. Share some of your completions with the class. Babies know how to... . Babies don’t know how to... Birds know how to... Birds don’t know how to... . Tknow how to... I don’t know how to (name of a classmate) knows how to Our teacher doesn’t know how to. . Do you know how to. ..? Pete ee Se USING COULD: PAST OF CAN (@) Lam in Hawaii, I can go to the beach every day. could = the past form of can (b) Iwas in Hawaii last month. I could go to the beach every day when I was there. (© Lean’t go to the movie today. I have to study. NEGATIVE () I fooutdn’t go could + not = couldn’t id not go (0 te movie last night. I had to study. (©) Could you speak English before you came here? QUESTION could + subject + main verb CO EXERCISE 14, Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Circle the answers that describe your childhood. ‘Then tell your partner what you could and couldn’t do when you were a child. ‘When I was a child, .... 1. I could stand on my head. yes 2. I could ride a bike with no hands. yes 3. I-could sing in another language. yes 4, I could tell time before the age of five. yes 5. I could do cartwheels. yes 6. I could read before the age of five. yes 7. Lcould hold my breath underwater for one minute. yes 8. I could (complete the sentence with your own words). yes 362. CHAPTER 12Cl EXERCISE 15. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences by using couldn't. Use the expressions in the list or your own words. call you 0 to the movie come to class light the candles ¥ do my homework listen 10 music get into my car wash his clothes g0 swimming watch TV eh couldn't do my homework last night because I was too tired. ao yesterday because I lost your telephone number. aa last night because my TV set is broken. 4. Tom because he didn’t have any matches. 5. The teacher was sick, yesterday because he 6.1 doesn’t work. last night because my radio 7. Ken laundry soap. because he didn’t have any 8. We yesterday because the water was too cold. o1 yesterday because I locked all the doors and left the keys inside. 10. Y__________ last night because I had to study. Cl EXERCISE 16. Sentence practice. Directions: Mr. Chang had a bad day yesterday. There are many things he wanted to do, but couldn't. Tell what he couldn’t do yesterday and give a reason, Use because. Example: cat breakfast \ get up late > Mr. Chang couldn’t eat breakfast because he got up late. Modals, Part 1: Expressing Abilly 363Example: go downtown during the day \ have to work ~ Mr, Chang couldn’t go downtown during the day because he had to work. eat lunch \ leave his wallet at home finish his report \ have to go to a meeting leave work at five \ have to finish his report play tennis after work \ it \ be raining eee 5. enjoy his dinner \ his wife \ be angry at him 6. watch his favorite TV program after dinner \ his TV set \ not work . read quietly \ his children \ be very noisy 8. go to bed early \ his neighbors \ come to visit Cl EXERCISE 17. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Your teacher will make a statement, Give some of the negative results for the situations. Use can’t or couldn’t. Close your book for this activity. Examples: ‘TEACHER: There’s no chalk in the classroom. STUDENT: We can’t write on the board. TEACHER: There was no chalk in the classroom yesterday. STUDENT: We couldn’t write on the board. 1. Thave only (a small amount of money) in my pocket / in my purse today. 2, Some people don’t know how to use a computer. 3. Your parents had rules for you when you were a child. 4. This school has rules for students. 5. All of you are adults. You are not children. 6. You didn’t know much English last year. 7. You don’t speak fluent English yet. 8. Millions of people in the world live in poverty. C EXERCISE 18. Review: error analysis. Directions: Correct the errors. 1. Could you to drive a car when you were thirteen years old? 2. If your brother goes to the graduation party, he can meets my sister. 3. I couldn’t opened the door because I didn’t have a key. 4. Please turn up the radio. I can’t to hear it. 364 CHAPTER 125. When Ernesto arrived at the airport last Tuesday, he can’t find the right gate. 6. Mr. Lo was born in Hong Kong, but now he lives in Canada, He cannot understand spoken English before he moved to Canada, but now he speak and understand English very well. present | (a) Lam able to touch my toes. @) and (b) have basically the (b) I can touch my toes. same meaning. FUTURE (©) 1 will be able to go shopping tomorrow. (©) and (d) have basically the (@) I can go shopping tomorrow. same meaning. (©) I wasn’t able to finish my homework last night. | (e) and (f) have basically the (£) I couldn't finish my homework last night. same meaning. Co EXERCISE 19. Sentence practice. Directions: On a separate sheet of paper, make sentences with the same meaning. Use be able to. 1. I can be here tomorrow at ten o'clock. > Tl Twill) be able to be here tomorrow at ten o’clock. 2. ‘Two students couldn’t finish the test. + Tivo students weren’t able to finish the test. . Mark is bilingual. He can speak two languages. . Sue can get her own apartment next year. . Animals can’t speak. . Can you touch your toes without bending your knees? . Jack couldn’t describe the thief. . Could you do the homework? Cer anew . I couldn’t sleep last night because my apartment was too hot. 10. My roommate can speak four languages. He’s multilingual. 11. I'm sorry that I couldn’t call you last night. Modals, Part 1: Expressing Ability 36512. Pm sorry, but I can’t come to your party next week. 13, Can we take vacations on the moon in the 22nd century? Cl EXERCISE 20. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with your own words. 1, Twasn’t able to ___ last night because 2e Well be|ableitg eee in the 22nd century. 3. I’m sorry, but I won’t be able to 4. Birds are able to 5. My friend is multilingual. She’s able to 6. I’m bilingual. I’m able to 7. The students weren’t able to e in class yesterday because (Ge Will you be able to sss seoe tomorrow? 9. wasn’t able to because 10. isn’t able to because - 1. won't be able to — because 366 CHAPTER 12Cl EXERCISE 21. Listening review: can / be able to / know how to. Directions: Listen to the conversations. Complete the sentences with the words you hear. 1A: to Jon last night? reach is gin nce today 2. A: bread? B: Yes, T___ bread. What about you? A: No. me? B: Sure, 3. A: the teacher? B: I her in the beginning, but now I most of her lectures. A: Istill er very well. 4. A: Professor Jones, when correct our tests? B: I began last night, bur] ______ finish. 1 again tonight. I hope hand them back to you tomorrow. 5. A: Hello? B: Hi. This is Jan Smith. I’m wondering if ________ get in to see Dr. Brown today or tomorrow. A: Well, she you tomorrow morning at 11:00, in then? B: Yes, _____. Please tell me where you are. I the way to your office. Modals, Part 1: Expressing Ability 36712-7 USING VERY AND TOO + (a) The box is very heavy, but Tom can liftit. | Very and too come in front of adjectives; heauy (b) The box is too heavy. Bob can’t lift it. and hot are adjectives. (©) The coffee is very hot, but I can drink it. Very and too do Nor have the same meaning. (@) The coffee is too hot. L can’t drink it. In (a): very heavy = It is difficult but possible for Tom to lift the box. In (b): 100 heavy = It is impossible for Bob to lift the box. (©) The coffee is too hot. In the speaker's mind, the use of foo implies a NEGATIVE RESULT: I can’t drink it. negative result. (f) The weather is too cold. NEGATIVE RESULT: We can’t go to the beach. CO EXERCISE 22. Class activity. Directions: Make sentences for each picture, Use very or too and can or can’t to describe the pictures. Example: suitcase \ heavy \ lift » The suitcase is very heavy, but Mark can lift it. ~The suitcase is too heavy. James can’t lift it. 368 CHAPTER 12. soup \ hot \ eat Modals, Part 1: Expressing Ability 3694, problem \ hard Ci EXERCISE 23. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use the expressions in the list or your own words, buy it life it do his homework reach the cookie jar eat it sleep | go swimming take a break 1. The soup is too hot. I can’t — 2. The diamond ring is too expensive. I can’t 3. The weather is too cold. We can’t 4, Lam too busy. Ican’t 5. Allis too tired. He can’t 6. Peggy is too short. She can’t 7. It’s too noisy in the dorm at night Loan't 8. The piano is too heavy. Ticen 370 CHAPTER 12CO EXERCISE 24. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use too. Use adjectives in the list or your own words. cold small expensive tall heavy tired noisy young 1. You can’t lift a car. A car is 2. Jimmy is ten. He can’t drive a car. He’s 3. Ican’t study in the dorm at night. It’s 4, Ldon’t want to go to the zoo. The weather is 5. Ann doesn’t want to play tennis this afternoon, She’s 6. Ican’t buy a new car. A new car is 7. John has gained weight. He can’t wear his old shirt. It’s 8. The basketball player can’t stand up straight in the subway. He’s CO EXERCISE 25. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use too or very. 1, The tea is very hot, but I can drink it. 2. The tea is ___too hot. I can’t drink it. 3. I can’t put my dictionary in my pocket. My dictionary is ___ big. Modals, Part 1: Expressing Ability 3774 5. An elephant is ____ big. A mouse is small. Ican’t buy a boat because it’s ______ expensive. 6. A sports car is _______ expensive, but Anita can buy one if she wants to. 1 8. 9. 10. rT 12. 13. 14, 15. 16. 17: 18. ‘We went to the Rocky Mountains for our vacation. The mountains are beautiful. I can’t eat this food because it’s _____ salty. Amanda doesn’t like her room in the dorm. She thinks it's _____ small. Tost your dictionary. I'm _______ sorry. I'll buy you a new one. A: Do you like your math course? B: Yes. It’s difficult, but I enjoy it. A: Do you like your math course? B: No. It's _____ difficult. I don’t like it because I can’t understand the math. A: It’s seven-thirty. Do you want to go to the movie? B: We can’t. I's ____ late. The movie started at seven. A: Did you enjoy your dinner last night? B: Yes. The food was ____ good! A: Are you going to buy that dress? B: No. Itdoesn’t fit. I's ___ big. A: Do you think Carol is smart? B: Yes, Ido. I think she’s _____ intelligent. A: My daughter wants to get married. B: What? But she can’t! She’s ______ young. ‘A: Can you read that sign across the street? B: No, I can’t, It's ______ far away. 372 CHAPTER 12‘Two (@) Thave two children. ‘Two, too, and to have the same pronunciation. In (a): two = a number. ‘T00 (b) Timmy is too young. He can’t read. In (b): t00 young = impossible to do (© Ann saw the movie. I saw the movie too. | because of his youth. In (©): 00 = also. ‘ro (@) Ttalked to Jim. In (@): to = a preposition, (©) want to watch television. In (©): €0 = part of an infinitive. Cl EXERCISE 26. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use #wo, too, or to. 1, Td like a cup of coffee, Bob would like a cup ___ too 2. Thad cups of coffee yesterday. 3. Lcan’t drink my coffee. It’s hot. The coffee is _____ hot for me drink. 4, talked Jim. Jane wants Bi 5. Lwalked school today. Alex walked school today 6. I'm going take the bus 7. Shh. I want listen 8. I can’t study. The music is 9. The weather is cold for us beach. 10. Thave apples. Ken wants apples school tomorrow. the news broadcast. loud. Modals, Part 1: Expressing Ability 373(@) Olga is at home. Ivan is at work. Yoko is at school (b) Sue is in bed. Tom is in class. Paul is in jailiprison. (©) Mr. Lee is én the hospital. In (6): in is used with bed, class, and jailiprison.* In (©): in is used with the hospital. Note: American English = in the hospital. British English = in hospital. (@) Almed is in the kitchen. (©) David is in Mexico City. In (@): in is used with rooms: in the kitchen, in the classroom in the hall, in my bedroom, etc. In ©): in is used with cities, states/provinces, countries, and continents: in Mexico City, in Florida, in Italy, in Asia, ete (f) A: Where's Ivan? B: He isn’t here. He's at the bank. ‘COMPARE. (® In Picture 2, Ivan is in the bank. He is not outside the bank. In (f): at is usually used with locations in a city: at the post office, at the bank, at the library, at the bookstore, at the park, at the theater, atthe restaurant, at the football stadium, etc. In (g): A speaker uses in with a building only when it is important to say that someone is inside, not outside, the building. Usually a speaker uses at with a building. in the bank = inside the bank building. @ ENTRANCE Ivan is atthe bank. Ivan isin (inside) the bank, “*Notice: In these common expressions of place, the is not used in front of home, seo, echoo, bd, class, jailprizon. 374 CHAPTER 12C1 EXERCISE 27. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with at or in. In some sentences, both prepositions are correct. 1. A: Is Jennifer here? B: No, she’s ___at _ the bookstore.* 2. A: Where’s Jack? B: He’s ___in___ his room. 3. When I was ____ work yesterday, I had an interesting telephone call. 4. Poor Anita. She’s _______ the hospital again for more surgery. 5. Mr. Gow wasn’t _____ class yesterday. He was ______ home. He wasn’t feeling well. 6. Last year at this time, Eric was Korea. This year he’s Spain. 7. A: Where’s Donna? B: She’s _____ NewYork. She’s attending a conference. 8. There’s a fire extinguisher ______ the hall. 9. The children are ________ home this morning. They aren’t school. 10. A: Where’s Olga? I was supposed to meet her here at five. B: She's ____ the library. She’s studying for a test. A: Oh. Maybe she forgot that she was supposed to meet me here. 11. A: Where's Robert? B: He’s ____ the computer room. 12. There are thirty-seven desks _______ our classroom. 13. We ate ________ a good restaurant last night. The food was delicious. *ALSO CORRECT: She's in the bookstore, but only if the speaker wants to say that she is inside, not outside, the bookstore. Usually # speaker uses at with a building 10 identify someone's location. See Chart 12-9, p. 374. Modals, Part 1: Expressing Ability 37514. A thief broke the window of a jewelry store and stole some valuable jewelry. The police caught him. Now he’s jail. He’s going to be prison for a long time. 15. Singapore is ____ Asia. 16. We had a good time _______ the zoo yesterday. 17. A: Where’s Fatima? She’s the supermarket. 18. A: Where can I get some fresh tomatoes? B the market on Waterfront Street. 19. A: Here’s your hotel key, Ms. Fox. You're _____ Room 609 B: Thank you. Where are the elevators? Is Mike up? : No, he’s bed. ‘A: Well, it's time to get up. I'm going to wake him up. Hey, Mike! You can’t sleep all day! Get up! C: Go away! CO EXERCISE 28. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Complete the sentence I was teacher gives you and the correct preposi «yesterday by using the words your ion, at or in. Close your book for this STUDENT: I was at work yesterday. 1. class 7. work 2. the library 8. Room 206 3. (a city) 9. ahotel 4, home 10. (a continent) 5. this room 11. (...)’s living room 6. the bookstore 12. (@ building) 376 CHAPTER 12CO EXERCISE 29. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Ask questions about place. Use at or in in your answers. Partner A: Begin the question with Where were you. Partner B: Use at or én in the answer. Then ask How about you? and repeat the question. Example: yesterday afternoon PARTNER A: Where were you yesterday afternoon? PARTNER B: I was in class. How about you? Where were you yesterday afternoon? PARTNER A: I was in class too, / I was at home. / Etc, Your turn now. Partner A Partner B at nine o'clock last night after class yesterday six weeks ago at two o’clock yesterday afternoon this morning at six o’clock five years ago Pepe Pepe ‘on your last vacation when you were ten years old Cl EXERCISE 30. Review: let's talk. Directions: Work in small groups. What can or can’t the following people/animals/ things do? Why or why not? Discuss the topics and report to the rest of the class. You can also use be able to or know how to in your sentences. Example: a tiger SPEAKER A: A tiger can kill a water buffalo because a tiger is very strong and powerful SPEAKER B: A tiger can sleep in the shade of a tree all day if it wants to. It doesn’t have a job, and it doesn’t go to school SPEAKER C: A tiger can’t speak (a human language). It’s an animal, SPEAKER D: A tiger can communicate with other tigers. Animals can talk to each other in their own languages. the students in this class young children a monkey (a classmate) international students who live in (¢his country) teenagers people who live in (this city) people who are illiterate 9. money 10. computers 11. our teacher 12. (the leader of this country or your country) Modals, Part 1: Expressing Ability 377CO EXERCISE 31. Chapter review: error analysis. Directions: Correct the errors. 1. We will can go to the museum tomorrow afternoon, 2 We can’t count all of the stars in the universe. There are to many. 3, Can you to stand on your head? 4. saw a beautiful vase at a store yesterday, but I couldn’t bought it. 5. The shirt is too small. I can wear it. 6. Sam know how to count to 1000 in English. 7. When I was on vacation, I can swim every day. 8. When we lived at Tokyo, we took the subway every day. 9. Honeybees not able to live in very cold climates. 10. Where we can go in the city for an inexpensive meal? 11. James can reads newspapers in five languages. 12. Sorry, I didn’t be able to get tickets for the concert. 13. I can’t finish my homework because I’m to tired. 378 CHAPTER 12CHAPTER ] 3 Modals, Part 2: Advice, Necessity, Requests, Suggestion (@) My clothes are dirty. I should wash them. (b) Tom is sleepy. He should go to bed. (©) You're sick. You should see a doctor. Should means “This is a good idea. This is good advice.” @T You She He } should go. te We They ‘Should is followed by the simple form of a verb. INCORRECT: He should goes. INCORRECT: He should to go. (©) You should not leave your grammar book at home. You need it in class. (f) You shouldn’t leave your grammar book at home. NEGATIVE: should not CONTRACTION: should + not = shouldn't C EXERCISE 1. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the conversations. Begin the sentences with You should. Use the expressions in the list or your own words. buy a new pair of shoes call the manager g0 to the bank £0 t0 the immigration office 1, A: Iwant to mail a package. 7 g0 10 the post office 0 to bed and take a nap see a dentist study harder iB: __You'should'Go'lo the post office, 3792. A: Pm sleepy. B: 3. A: Ineed to cash a check. B 4, A: [have a toothache. B: = 5. A: I'm getting poor grades in all of my classes at school. B 6. A: The toilet in my apartment doesn’t work B: 7. A: Ineed to get a new visa. B: 8. A: My shoes have holes in the bottom. B CO EXERCISE 2. Let's talk: small groups. Directions: Work in small groups. Make sentences with should and shouldn't. Share some of your answers with the class. 1, Sue has a headache from working at her computer too long. Sue. . a. see a doctor. b. take some headache medicine. c. lie down. d. go to the hospital emergency room. ¢. take a 15-minute break fom the computer. 2, John stayed late after school to help his teacher. He missed the last bus and needs a ride home. It takes two hours to walk to his home, and it is a 20-minute ride by car. John... call a taxi. hitchhike. ask his teacher for a ride. call a friend for a ride. walk. eaoge 380 CHAPTER 133. Mary's baby doesn’t want to take a nap. He is crying. Mary... a. hold him. b. rock him. c. let him cry until he falls asleep. d. feed him. e. let him play. 4. The teacher is giving a final exam. One student keeps looking at a paper under his exam paper. It has the answers on it. ‘The teacher . . . a. take the paper away and give the student another chance, b. give the student a failing grade for the test. c. give the student a failing grade for the class. d. send the student to see the director of the school. 5. Susan is 16 years old. A boy in her class wants her to go to dinner and a movie with him. This will be her first date. Her parents .. . a. let her go if her older brother goes too. b. make her wait until she is older. ©. go with her. d. let her go by herself. e. let her go to dinner only. Cl EXERCISE 3. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use should or shouldn't. 1, Students __should ___ come to class every day. 2, Students ___shouldn’t skip class. 3. We waste our money on things we don’t need, 4, It’s raining. You _______ take your umbrella when you leave. 5. Jimmy, you pull the cat’s tail! 6. People __________ be cruel to animals. 7. Your plane leaves at 8:00. You ______ get to the airport by 6:00. 8. Life is short, We _____________ waste it. 9. You smoke in a public place because the smoke bothers other people. Modols, Part 2: Advice, Necessiy, Requests, Suggestions 38110. ll. 12. is) 14, We cross a street at an intersection. We jaywalk. When you go to New York City, you ___ see a play on Broadway. You walk alone on city streets after dark. It’s dangerous. When you go to Bangkok, you visit the Floating Market. ‘When you go to a football game, you ______ throw things on the field. C1 EXERCISE 4, Let's talk: small groups. Directions: Work in small groups. For each situation, give advice by making a list of sentences using should and shouldn’t, Speaker A should request advice first, then Speaker B, etc, 1. SPEAKER A: English is not my native language. What advice can you give me about good ways to learn English? . SPEAKER B: I am a teenager. What advice can you give me about being a good person and living a happy life? . SPEAKER C: Tam a newcomer. What advice can you give me about going to this, school and living in this city? SPEAKER D: I have a job interview tomorrow. What advice can you give me about going to a job interview? 382 CHAPTER 13CO EXERCISE 5. Listening. Directions: Listen to each sentence and circle the verb you hear. After you check your answers, listen again. If you agree, circle yes. If you don’t, circle no. DO YOU AGREE? 1, should shouldn't yes no 2. should shouldn’t yes no 3. should shouldn’t yes no 4, should shouldn’t yes no 5. should shouldn’t yes no 6. should shouldn’t yes no 7. should shouldn’t yes no 8. should shouldn’t yes no Ci EXERCISE 6. Writing. Directions: Write a paragraph about your hometown on a separate piece of paper. Include answers to the tourist’s questions. I'ma tourist. I'm going to visit your hometown. Is your hometown a good place for a tourist to visit? Why? What should I do when I’m there? Where should I go? What should I see? What shouldn’t I do? Are there places I shouldn’t visit? Will I enjoy my visit? USING HAV (a) People need to eat food. (b) People have to eat food. (©) Jack needs to study for his test. (@) Jack has to study for his test. (a) and (b) have basically the same meaning. (©) and (d) have basically the same meaning. Have + infinitive has a special meaning: it expresses the same idea as need. (©) Lhad to study last night. PAST FORM: had + infinitive. © Do you have to leave now? (g) What time does Jim have to leave? (h) Why did they have to leave yesterday? QUESTION FORM: do, does, or did is used in questions with have to. @ [don’t have to study tonight. Gj) The concert was free. We didn’t have to buy tickers. NEGATIVE FORM: don’t, doesn’t, or didn’t is used with have to. Modals, Part 2: Advice, Necessity, Requests, Suggestions 383CO EXERCISE 7. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Answer the questions your teacher asks you. Close your book for this activity. 1, What do you want to do today? 2. What do you have to do today? 3. What do you want to do tomorrow? 4. What do you have to do tomorrow? 5. What does a student need to do or have to do? 6. Who has to go shopping? Why? 7. Who has to go to the post office? Why? 8. Who has to go to the bank? Why? 9. Where do you have to go today? Why? 10. Where do you want to go tomorrow? Why? 11. What did you have to do yesterday? Why? 12. Did you have responsibilities at home when you were a child? What did you have to do? 13. If you're driving a car and the traffic light turns red, what do you have to do? 14, What do you have to do before you cross a busy street? 15. Do you have to learn English? Why? 16. Who has a job? What are some of the things you have to do when you’re at work? 17. What kind of job did you have in the past? What did you have to do when you had that job? OC EXERCISE 8. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Make sentences using have to/has to and because. Example: go downtown \ buy some new shoes SPEAKER A: I have to go downtown because I have to buy some new shoes. TEACHER: (to Speaker B) Why does (Speaker A) have to go downtown? SPEAKER B: (Speaker A) has to go downtown because he/she has to buy some new shoes. - go to the drugstore \ buy some toothpaste go to the grocery store \ get some bread go shopping \ get a new coat go to the post office \ mail a package stay home tonight \ study grammar g0 to the hospital \ visit a friend g0 to the bank \ cash a check go downtown \ go to the immigration office 20 to the bookstore \ buy a notebook 80 to (name of a store in the city) \ buy (a particular thing at that store) Seerauseye 384 CHAPTER 13,Cl EXERCISE 9. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with the words in parentheses. Use a form of havelhas + infinitive. SPP Pe Jack can’t join us for dinner tonight. Why not? (he, work) ___He has to work, __ (he, work) ____Does he have to work ___ tomorrow night too? If he doesn’t, maybe we should postpone the dinner until then. A: Why (you, go) to the library later tonight? (L find) ______ some information for my research paper. It’s almost four-thirty. What time (Sue, leave) for the airport? Around five. (she, be) at the airport at six-fifteen. : Why did you go to the bookstore after class yesterday? CL, buy) ____ some colored pencils. Oh? Why (you, buy) ___________ colored pencils? I need them for some drawings I plan to do for my art class. (CZ, go) —_______ to the store. Why? Because (I, get) _______ some rice and fresh fruit. Kate didn’t come to the movie with us last night. Why? : Because (she, study) for a test. Modals, Part 2: Advice, Necessity, Requests, Suggestions 3857. A: What time (jou, be) —____ at the dentist’s office? B: Three. I have a three o’clock appointment. 8. A: (Tom, find) a new apartment? B: Yes, he does. His old apartment is too small. OA (Yoko cake, gg) esses nother oath course. Her English is very good. B: (you, take) another English course? A: Yes, Ido. I need to study more English. 10. A: Was Steve at home yesterday evening? B: No. (he, stay) late at the office. A: Why? B: (he, finish) a report for his boss. Cl EXERCISE 10. Listening. Directions: In spoken English, have to is often pronounced “hafta.” Has to is often pronounced “hasta.” Listen to each sentence and circle the correct verb. 1 has to 2. have to has to 3. have to has to 4. have to has to 5. have to has to 6. have to has to 7. have to has to 8. have to has to 9. have to has to 10. have to has to. 386 CHAPTER 13USING (i (@) People need food. People have to eat food. (b) People need food. People must eat food. (a) and (b) have the same meaning: ‘must eat = have to eat. or You She He } must work. It We They Must is followed by the simple form of a verb. INCORRECT: He must works. INCORRECT: He must to work. (@ You muse not be late for work if you want to keep your job. (©) You don’t have to go to the movie with us if you don’t want to. must not = Don’t do this! You don’t have a choice. don’t have to a choice. It’s not necessary; you have ‘Compare the following examples. Notice the difference between must and should. must SOMETHING IS VERY IMPORTANT. SOMETHING IS NEGESSARY. YOU DO NOT HAVE A CHOICE, (£) I muse study tonight. I’m going to take a very important test tomorrow. (h) You must take an English course. You cannot graduate without it. G) Johnny, this is your mother speaking. You ‘must eat your vegetables. You can’t leave the table until you eat your vegetables. SHOULD SOMETHING IS A GOOD IDEA, BUT YOU HAVE A CHOICE. (g) should study tonight. I have some homework to do, but I'm tired. I'll study tomorrow morning. I’m going to go to bed now. (@) You should take an English course. It will help you. () Johnny, you should eat your vegetables. ‘They're good for you. You'll grow up to be strong and healthy. Modals, Part 2: Advice, Necessity, Requests, Suggestions 387CO EXERCISE 11. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use must and expressions in the list. There are more expressions than you will need. close the door behind you pay an income tax g0 t0 medical school read English newspapers and magazines have a driver's license speak English outside of class every day have a library card stop have a passport study harder listen to English on the radio and TV talk to myself in English make new friends who speak English take one tablet every six hours 1. According to the law,* a driver ____must have a driver's license. 2. Ifa traffic light is red, a car 3. If you want to check a book out of the library, you 4, Nancy has a job in Chicago. She earns a good salary. According to the law, she 5. failed the last two tests in my biology class. According to my professor, I 6. Lwant to improve my English. According to my teacher, I 7. Lwant to travel abroad. According to the law, I @) ityou want to Uecome adocton, you ee ee ee ener 9. Jimmy! It’s cold outside. When you come inside, you 10. John’s doctor gave him a prescription. According to the directions on the bottle, John * According to the law = the law says. 388 CHAPTER 13,Cl EXERCISE 12. Sentence practice. Directions: Answer the questions. 1, When must you have a passport? 2. If you live in an apartment, what is one thing you must do and one thing you must not do? 3. Name one thing a driver must do and one thing a driver must not do. 4, If you are on an airplane, what is one thing you must do and one thing you must not do? 5. Name something you must have a ticket for. Name something you don’t have to have a ticket for. 0 EXERCISE 13. Sentence practice. Directions: Circle the correct completions. 1. If you want to keep your job, you be late for work. must not B. don’t have to C. doesn’t have to 2. My office is close enough to my apartment for me to walk to work. I take a bus. I take a bus only in bad weather. A. must not B. don’t have to C. doesn’t have to 3. Some schools require schoolchildren to wear uniforms to school, but my children’s school doesn’t require uniforms. My children wear uniforms to school. A. must not B. don’t have to C. doesn’t have to 4. Jimmy, it is very important to be careful with matches. You ______ play with matches. A. must not B. don’t have to C. doesn’t have to 5. Jack is twenty-four, but he still lives with his parents. That saves him a lot of, money. For example, he ______pay rent or buy his own food. A. must not B. don’t have to C. doesn’t have to 6. The water in that river is badly polluted. You drink it. A. mustnot BB. don’thave to... doesn’t have to 7. If you have a credit card, you pay for something in cash. You can charge it. A. must not B. don’t have to C. doesn’t have to 8. When an airplane is taking off, you have to be in your seat with your seat belt on. You _____ stand up and walk around when an airplane is taking off. A. must not B. don’t have to C. doesn’t have to Modals, Part 2: Advice, Necessity, Requests, Suggestions. 389.C EXERCISE 14. Let's talk: small groups. Directions: Work in small groups. Make sentences about your English class. Use should / have to | don’t have to with the given phrases. Share a few of your answers with the class. Example: Students .. . study. Response: Students have to study. Students .. 1. come to class. sit quietly. . take attendance. . bring pencil and paper to class. 2 3 4. 5. listen carefully. 6. speak English in class. 7. stand up when the teacher enters the room. 8. knock on the door before entering the room. 9. raise their hands when they want to talk. 10. do their homework. 11. memorize vocabulary. 12. bring an English—English dictionary to class. 13, write homework answers in their books. CO EXERCISE 15. Listening. Directions: Listen to each pair of sentences. One sentence uses should, and the other uses must. Decide which sentence you agree with. Write @ or 6 in the blank. Discuss your answers as a class. Example: You will hear: a. People must obey traffic laws. b. People should obey traffic laws. You will write: __@ 1 4. —— 2: 5. 8. 3. 6. 9. 390 CHAPTER 13,(a) May I borrow your pen? (b) Could I borrow your pen? (©) Can I borrow your pen? your pen. I am asking politely to borrow your pen. (@) May I please borrow your pen? (©) Could I please borrow your pen? (£) Can I please borrow your pen? Please is often used in polite questions. “TYPICAL RESPONSES (@ Yes, of course. (h) Of course. @ Certainly. G)_ Sure. (informal)* (&) No problem. (informal)* “TYPICAL CONVERSATION A: May I please borrow your pen? B: Yes, of course. Here it is. A: Thank you. ! Thanks, “Informal English is typically used between friends and family members. © EXERCISE 16. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Look at the pictures. Make conversations. Use May I, Can I, or Could I and typical responses. Modals, Part 2: Advice, Necessity, Requests, Suggestions 391CO EXERCISE 17. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Ask and answer polite questions using May I, Can 1, or Could I. Example: Your partner has a pencil. You want to borrow it. PARTNER A: (.. .), may I (please) borrow your pencil? PARTNER B: Certainly. Here it is. PARTNER A: Thank you. Your turn now. Partner A Partner B 1. You partner has a dictionary. You want to borrow it. . Your partner has a pen. You want to use it for a minute. 2, Your partner has an eraser. You want to use it for a minute. . Your partner has a pencil sharpener. You want to borrow it. 3. Your partner has a book. You want to see it. . Your partner has a dictionary. You want to see it. 4. You are at your partner’s home, You want to use the phone. . You are at your partner’s home. You want a glass of water. 5. You are at a restaurant. Your partner is a waiter/waitress. You want to have a cup of coffee. . You are at a restaurant. Your partner is a waiter/waitress. You want to have the check. 392 CHAPTER 13,13-5 POLITE QUESTIONS: COULD YOU AND WOULD YOU (a) Could you (please) open the door? | (a) and (b) have the same meaning: I want you to (b) Would you (please) open the door? | open the door. I am asking you politely to open the door. TYPICAL RESPONSES ATYPICAL CONVERSATION (©) Yes, of course. A: Could you please open the door? (@) Certainly. B: I'd be glad to. © Fa be glad to. A: Thank you. (Thanks, (®) I'd be happy to. (a) Sure. (informal) (h) No problem. (informal) CO EXERCISE 18. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner to complete the conversations. Use Could you or Would you and give typical responses. Then write them down and discuss them with the rest of the class. 1. A: Excuse me, si B: — A: — 2. As B: Excuse me? I didn’t understand what you said. A: B: Modals, Part 2: Advice, Necessity, Requests, Suggestions 393CO EXERCISE 19. Let's talk: palrwork. Directions: Work with a partner, Make and answer requests. Use Could you or Would you. Example: You want your partner to open the window. PARTNER A: (...), could you (please) open the window? PARTNER B: Certainly. PARTNER A: Thank you. Your turn. . You want your partner to close the door. ‘You want your partner to turn on the light. . You want your partner to turn off the light. You want your partner to pass you the salt and pepper. . You want your partner to hand you that book. . You want your partner to translate a word for you. . You want your partner to tell you the time. . You want your partner to open the window. . You want your partner to hold your books for a minute. Sewmrousyne |. You want your partner to lend you (an amount of money). CO EXERCISE 20. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Ask and answer polite questions that might fit each situation. Share your conversations with the rest of the class. Example: A professor’s office: Partner A is a student. Partner B is the professor. PARTNER A: (knock, knock) May I come in? PARTNER B: Certainly. Come in. How are you today? PARTNER A: Fine, thanks. OR PARTNER A: Hello, Professor Alvarez. Could I talk to you for a few minutes? I have some questions about the last assignment. PARTNER B: Of course. Have a seat, PARTNER A: Thank you. 1. A restaurant: Partner A is a customer. Partner B is a waitress/waiter. 2, A classroom: Partner A is a teacher. Partner B is a student. 3. Akitchen: Partner A is a visitor. Partner B is at home. 4. A clothing store: Partner A is a customer. Partner B is a salesperson. 5. An apartment: Partner A and B are roommates. 6. Acar: Partner A is a passenger. Partner B is the driver. 7. An office: Partner A is a boss. Partner B is an employee. 8. A house: Partner B answers the phone. Partner A wants to talk to (someone). 394 CHAPTER 136 IMPERATIV (@) “Close the door, Jimmy. It’s cold outside.” In (a): Close the door is an imperative sentence. “Okay, Mom.” ‘The sentence means “Jimmy, I want you to close the door. I am telling you to close the door.” (b) Sit down. ‘An imperative sentence uses the simple form of (©) Be careful! a verb (close, sit, be, etc). (d) Don’t open the windors. (©) Don't be late. NEGATIVE, don’t + the simple form of a verb (£) oRDERS: Stop, thief (g) DIRECTIONS: Open your books to page 24. (h) apvice: Don’t worry. (REQUESTS: Please close the door. Imperative sentences give orders, directions, and advice. With the addition of please, as in (i), imperative sentences are used to make polite requests. CO EXERCISE 21. Sentence practice. Directions: Underline the imperative verbs in the conversations. 1. cINy: We're leaving. Wait for me! cINDy: Hurry up! We'll be late. BETH: BETH: ‘What's the matter? Thave the hiccups. TOM: Hold your breath. nop: Drink some water. JOB: Breathe into a paper bag. KEN: Eat a piece of bread. Okay. Okay. I’m ready. Let’s go. jim: It’s okay. The hiccups are gone. : We need to leave soon. I'm ready. Thave it. Okay. Don’t forget your house key. Modals, Part 2: Advice, Necessity, Requests, Suggestions 395.4. YUKO: ERIC: YUKO: 5. ANDY: MOM: ANDY: MOM: ANDY: MOM: ANDY: Mom: ANDY: How do I get to the post office from here? Walk two blocks to 16th Avenue. Then turn right on Forest Street. Go two more blocks to Market Street and turn left. The post office is halfway down the street on the right-hand side. Thanks. Bye, Mom. I’m going over to Billy’s house. Wait a minute. Did you clean up your room? PM do it later. No. Do it now, before you leave. Do I have to? Yes. What do I have to do? Hang up your clothes. Make your bed. Put your books back on the shelf. Empty the wastepaper basket. Okay? Okay. 0 EXERCISE 22. Sentence practice. Directions: Write an imperative sentence in each conversation balloon. 396 CHAPTER 13CO EXERCISE 23. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Listen to your teacher's questions. Make some typical imperative sentences for these situations. Close your book for this activity. Example: ‘TEACHER: Your friend (...) has a headache. What are some typical sentences for this situation? SPEAKER A: Take an aspirin. SPEAKER B: Lie down and close your eyes for a little while. SPEAKER C: Put a cold cloth across your forehead. SPEAKER D: Take a hot bath and relax. Ete. 1. You are the teacher of this class. You are assigning homework for tomorrow. ‘What are some typical imperative sentences for this situation? 2. Your friend (.. .) has the hiccups. What are some typical imperative sentences for this situation? 3. Your eight-year-old son/daughter is walking out the door to go to school. What are some typical imperative sentences for this situation? 4. (.. .) wants to improve his/her general health. Tell him/her what to do and what not to do. Modals, Part 2: Advice, Necessity, Requests, Suggestions 3975. (...) is going to cook rice for the first time this evening. ‘Tell him/her how to cook rice. 6. (...) is going to visit your country for the first time next month. Tell hinvher what to do and what to see as a tourist in your country. MODAL AUXILIARIES can An auxiliary is a helping verb. It comes in front of the could simple form of a main verb. The following helping verbs may are called “modal auxiliaries”: can, could, may, (@) Anita { might \ go to class. might, must, should, will, would. must should will is able to Expressions that are similar to modal auxiliaries are be (b) Anita 4 is going to { go to class. | able to, be going to, have to. has to CO EXERCISE 24. Review: verb forms. Directions: Add to where necessary. If fo is not necessary, write “X.” 1. My sister can __X___ play the guitar very well. 2. We have ___to _ pay our rent on the first of the month, 3. Could you please ______ open the window? Thanks. 4. I wasn’t able ____visit my friends yesterday because I was busy. 5. You shouldn't ____ drink twenty cups of coffee a day. 6. Will you ___be ar the meeting tomorrow? 7. Does everyone have _____ be at the meeting? 8. You must not _____ miss the meeting. It’s important. 9. Jennifer might not _____ be there tomorrow. 10. May I ____use your telephone? 11, We couldn't ____go to the concert last night because we didn’t have tickets. 398 CHAPTER 1312. Can you ____ play a musical instrument? 13. What time are you going _____ arrive? 14, It may ____ be too cold for us to go swimming tomorrow. 13-8 SUMMARY CHART! MODAL AUXILIARIES AND SIMILAR EXPRESSIONS AUXILIARY* (MEANING. EXAMPLE, (@) can ability Tcan sing. polite question Can you please help me? (b) could past ability T couldn't go to class yesterday. polite question Could you please help me? (© may . possibility It may rain tomorrow. polite question May Uhelp you? (@) might possibility It might rain tomorrow. (© must necessity ‘You must have a passport. (f) should advisability You should see a doctor. (g) will fature happening ‘My sister coill meet us at the airport. (h) would polite question Would you please open the door? (i) be able to ability I wasn’t able to attend the meeting. G) be going to future happening Tina és going 10 meet us at the airport. (1) have to/has to necessity T have to study tonight. () had to past necessity I had to study last night too. *See the following charts for more information: ean, Chart 12-1, p. 354, and Chart 12-3, p. 357; could, Chart 12-5, p. 3625 ‘may and might, Chare 11-1, p. 325; must, Chart 13-3, p. 387; should, Chart 13-1, p.379; will, Chart 10-6, p. 310, Chart 10-7, p. 312, and Chart 11-1, p. 325; would, Chart 13-5, p. 393; be able to, Chart 12-6, p. 365; be going to, Chart 10-1, p. 294; havethasthad ¢o, Chart 13-2, p. 383, Modals, Part 2: Advice, Necessity, Requests, Suggestions 399Co EXERCISE 25. Let's talk: small groups. Directions: Work in small groups. Each person in the group should give a different response. Share a few of your answers with the class. Example: Name something you had to do yesterday. SPEAKER A: I had to go to class. SPEAKER B: I had to go to the post office to buy some stamps. SPEAKER C: I had to study for a test. Name something you can do. Name something you couldn’t do yesterday. Name something you may do tomorrow, Name something you might do tomorrow. Name something you must do this week. Name something you have to do today. Name something you don’r have to do today. Name something you should do this evening. Name something you «ill do this evening. 10. Name something you are going to do this week. 11, Name something you «weren't able to do when you were a child. 12. Name something you had 10 do when you were a child, 13. You want to borrow something from a classmate. Ask a polite question with could, 14. You want a classmate to do something for you. Ask a polite question with would. 15. A classmate has something that you want. Ask a polite question with may. 16. Name something that may happen in the world in the next ten years. 17, Name something that (probably) «on’t happen in the world in the next ten years. 18. Name some things that this school should do or shouldn’t do to make the school a better place for students. eens syne Cl EXERCISE 26. Sentence practice. Directions: Circle the correct completions. 1, Tom ___ every day. @) shaves B. is shaving C. has to shaves 2. ___ go to class every day? A. Are you B. Doyouhave — C. Do you 3. Yoko ___ to be here tomorrow. A. will B, may C. is going 4. Jack ___ be in class yesterday. A. didn’t B. can’t C. couldn’t 400 CHAPTER 135. Fatima ___ to her sister on the phone yesterday. A. spoke B. can speak C. speaks 6. 1 __ my rent last month. A. might pay B. will pay C. paid 7. Shh. Ken ___ on the phone right now. A. talks B. can talk C. is talking 8. Lwant to go to a movie tonight, but I home and study. A. should stay BB, stayed C. stay 9, We ___ to the zoo tomorrow. A. will going B. might go C. will can go 10. T __ in class right now. A. sit B. am sitting C. sitting C1 EXERCISE 27. Listening. Directions: Listen to each sentence. Circle the letter of the sentence that is closest in meaning. 1. a, It will snow. (©) It may snow. c. It must snow, 2. a, He should work. b. He must work. c. He might work. 3. a. She can swim. b. She may swim. c. She will swim. 4. a, The teacher should correct papers. b. The teacher had to correct papers. c. The teacher wanted to correct papers 5. a. You may study for the test. b. You must study for the test. You should study for the test. 6. a, We should go to a movie. b. It’s possible we will go to a movie. c. We have to go to a movie. Modals, Part 2: Advice, Necessity, Requests, Suggestions 4017. a, We couldn’t help. b. We didn’t need to help. c. We weren’t able to help. 8. a, I didn’t want to go to school. I didn’t have to go to school. poe I wasn’t able to go to school. (@) Bob: What should we do tonight? Let's (do something) = I have a suggestion for you Ann: Let’s go to a movie. and me. (let’s = let us) Bob: Okay. In (a): Let’s go 10 a movie. = I think we should go 10 (b) Sue: I'm tired. a movie. Do you want to go to a movie? ‘Ted: I’m tired too. Let’s take a break. Sue: That's a good ideal CO EXERCISE 28. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the conversations with Jet’s. Use the words in the list or your own words. eat 0 to a seafood restaurant get a cup of coffee 0 to the zoo 0 dancing Weave at six-thirty g0 to Florida walk £0 10.4 movie 1. A: What time should we leave for the airport? B: Let's leave at six-thirty. A: Okay. 2. A: Where should we go for our vacation? B: A: That’s a good idea. 3. A: Where do you want to go for dinner tonight? B: 402 CHAPTER 134, A: The weather is beautiful today. B: Okay. Great! 5. A: I'm bored. B: I can’t. Ihave to study. 6. A: Should we take the bus downtown or walk downtown? B: It’s a nice day. 7. A: Dinner’s ready! The food’s on the table! B: Great! T'm starving! 8. A: Where should we go Saturday night? A: Wonderful idea! 9. A: We have an hour between classes. B: Okay, That sounds good. C1 EXERCISE 29. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Practice using let’s. Partner A: Read your sentence aloud. You can look at your book before you speak When you speak, look at your partner. Your book is open. Partner B: Use let’s in your response. Your book is closed. Partner A: Respond to Partner B’s suggestion. Example: Ws a beautiful day today. What should we do? PARTNER A (book open): I's a beautiful day today. What should we do? PARTNER B (book closed): Let’s go to Woodland Park Zoo. PARTNER A (book open): Great! What a good idea! Let’s go! 1, What time should we go out to dinner tonight? 2, When should we go to (name of a place)? 3. What should we do this evening? 4, Lwant to do something fun tomorrow. Switch roles. Partner A: Close your book. Partner B: Open your book. Your turn now. 5. What should we do tomorrow? It’s a holiday, and we don’t have to go to class. 6. I'm bored. Think of something we can do. Modals, Part 2: Advice, Necessity, Requests, Suggestions 4037. My plane leaves at six. What time should we leave for the airport? 8. It’s (name of a classmate)’s birthday tomorrow. Should we do something special for him/her? OC EXERCISE 30. Review: Chapters 12 and 13. Directions: Correct the errors. 1. Would you please to help me? 2. Iwill can go to the meeting tomorrow. 3. My brother wasn’t able calling me last night. 4. Ken should writes us a letter. 5. [have to went to the store yesterday. 6. Susie! You must not to play with matches! 7. May you please hand me that book? 8. Ann couldn’t answered my question. 9. Shelley can’t goes to the concert tomorrow. 10. Let’s going to a movie tonight. 11, Don’t to interrupt. It’s not polite. 12. Can you to stand on your head? 13. I saw a beautiful dress at a store yesterday, but I couldn’t bought it. 14. Closing the door please. Thank you. 15. May I please to borrow your dictionary? Thank you. 404 CHAPTER 13CHAPTER | 4 Nouns and Modifiers Cl EXERCISE 1. Noun and adjective practice. Directions: How are the given words usually used? Circle NOUN or AD} (adjective). ‘Then use each word in a sentence. 1. busy 2. computer AD] 3. tall NOUN aby 4, apartment NOUN AD] 5. Tom NOUN ADJ 6. hand NOUN ADJ 7. good NOUN ADJ NOUN + Dm very busy right now. > Computers are machines. 8. monkey NOUN ADJ 9. young NOUN ADJ 10. music NOUN ADJ 11. expensive NOUN ADJ 12. grammar NOUN ADJ ADJECTIVE + NOUN Adjectives can modify nouns, as in (a). See NOUN + NOUN (©) He works ata shoe store. INCORRECT: He works at a shoes store. (a) Ibought an expensive —_ book. Chart 6-2, p. 161, for a list of common adjectives. NOUN + NOUN ‘Nouns can modify other nouns. (b) [bought a grammar book. In (b): grammar is a noun that is used as an adjective to modify another noun (book). A noun that is used as an adjective is always in its singular form. In (c): the store sells shoes, but it is called a shoe (singular form) store. ADJECTIVE + NOUN + NOUN, (A) Thought an expensive grammar book. INCORRECT: I bought a grammar expensive book. Both an adjective and a noun can modify a noun; the adjective comes first, the noun second.Cl EXERCISE 2. Sentence practice. Directions: Underline the adjectives and identify the nouns they modify. ma 1, Idrank some hot tea. 2. My grandmother is a wise woman. 3. English is not my native language. FS ‘The busy waitress poured coffee into the empty cup. A young man carried the heavy suitcase for Fumiko, aw T sat in an uncomfortable chair at the restaurant, 7, There is international news on the front page of the newspaper. 8. My uncle is a wonderful man. Cl EXERCISE 3. Sentence practice. Directions: Underline the nouns used as adjectives and identify the nouns they modify. —/ 1, We sat at the kitchen table. 2. L bought some new CDs at the music store. 3. We met Jack at the train station. 4. Vegetable soup is nutritious. 5. The movie theater is next to the furniture store. 6. The waiter handed us a lunch menu. 7. The traffic light was red, so we stopped. 8. Ms. Bell gave me her business card. OC EXERCISE 4. Listening. Directions: Listen to the sentences. Decide if the given word is used as a noun or adjective. Circle your choice. 1. kitchen NOUN ADJ 6. car NOUN ADJ 2. kitchen NOUN = ADJ 7. car NOUN = ADJ 3. apartment NOUN ADJ 8. chicken NOUN ADJ 4. apartment = NOUN ADJ 9. chicken NOUN ADJ 5. music NOUN ADJ 10. grammar NOUN ADJ 406 CHAPTER 14CO EXERCISE 5. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use the information in the first part of the sentence. Use a noun that modifies another noun in the completion. 1. Vases that are used for flowers are called flower vases. 2. A cup that is used for coffee is called ___@ coffee cup. = 3. A story that appears in a newspaper is called 4, Rooms in hotels are called S: Aworkerin noice in clled 6. A tag that gives the price of something is called — 7. A room that contains computers is called 8, Seats on airplanes are called 9. A bench that is found in a park is called 10. Soup that is made of beans is called — Cl EXERCISE 6. Let's talk: small groups. Directions: Work in small groups. Which noun in the list can be used with all three of the nouns used as modifiers? For example, in the first sentence below, the completion can be a university education, a high school education, and a college education. class official soup education program store heys race tickets number room trip ‘university education. 1. Jane has a { high school college se} 2. We went toa { shoe clothing history 3. Ttook a} math science, Nouns and Modifiers 407(horse) 4. We watched a {car foot government 5. Ltalked toa { city school vegetable 6. Mom made some 4 bean chicken radio 7. He told me about a _} television computer; boat 8. We took a/an { bus airplane, car 9. I couldn’t find my { house door theater 10. We bought some } concert airplane, hospital 11, We visited Sue in her} hotel dormitory. telephone 12. What is your 4 apartment license plate} 408 CHAPTER 14CD EXERCISE 7. Sentence practice. Directions: Each item lists two nouns and one adjective. Write them in the correct order. i. homework long assignment . program good television road mountain dangerous . automobile bad accident |. article magazine interesting . delicious vegetable soup card funny birthday narrow seats airplane The teacher gave us a ___long homework assignment. I watched a —0 I E—E—E—E——— Janet was in a _ Tread an ——— Mrs. Green made some — My sister gave me a People don’t like to sit im — Nouns and Modifiers 409(@) a large red car INCORRECT: a red large car In (@): two adjectives (large and red) modify a noun (car). Adjectives follow a particular order. In (a): an adjective describing size (large) comes before color (red). (b) a beautiful young woman (©) a beautiful red car @) a beautiful Greek island The adjective beautiful expresses an opinion. Opinion adjectives usually come before all other adjectives. In (b): opinion precedes age. In (©): opinion precedes color. In (d): opinion precedes nationality. (©) opmion apyectives: ‘There are many opinion adjectives. The words in dangerous favorite important (©) are examples of common opinion adjectives. difficult good interesting dirty happy strong expensive honest —_twonderful USUAL WORD ORDER OF ADJECTIVES a) @) G) @ 6) (©) OPINION SIZE AGE COLOR NATIONALITY* MATERIAL, beautifil large young red Greek ‘metal delicious tall old blue Chinese lass kind Tittle ‘middle-aged black Mexican plastic (£) some delicious Mexican food (g) a small glass vase (h) a kind old Chinese man A noun is usually modified by only one or two adjectives, although sometimes there are three. Gi) RARE 4 beautiful small old brown Greek metal coin It is very rare to find a long list of adjectives in front of a noun. “Nore: Adjectives that describe nationality are capitalized: Korean, Venezuelan, Saudi Arabian, ete. © EXERCISE 8. Adjective practice. Directions: Put the italicized words in the correct order. 1. glass a tall glass vase tall 2. delicious some food Thai 3. red some tomatoes small 410 CHAPTER 144. old i ee big brown 5. narrow road dirt 6. young eS woman serious 7. long ——————— black beautiful 8. Chinese wan work of art famous old 9. leather ee bel brown thin 10. wonderful aan story old Native American Cl EXERCISE 9. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with words from the list. Asian cotton polite brick important soft Canadian leather unhappy coffee 1. Jack is wearing a white ___cotton ___ shirt. 2, Hong Kong is an important ____ city. 3. I’m wearing some comfortable old ____ shoes. 4. Tommy was a/an ____________ little boy when he broke his favorite toy. 5. Ann has a/an ___________ wool blanket on her bed. 6. Our dorm is a tallred _______ building. Nouns and Modifiers 41110. . My nephew has good manners. He is always a/an . The computer is aan ___ modern invention. a youns man, especially to his elders. . Jack always carries a large blue __ cup with him. Ice hockey is a popular __ sport. Cl EXERCISE 10. Sentence practice. Directions: Add adjectives or nouns used as adjectives to complete the sentences. Share some of your answers with the class. iy 2. 10. We had some hot ______ food. ‘My dog, Rover, is aan ______ old dog. We bought alloc cose blanket . Alice has ____ gold earrings. fp orm es obiorg ee har, Mr. Lee is a/an __ young man. . Jack lives in a large ___ rick house. fy Ubomett aibig puarcase | Sally picked fan red flower. Ali wore an old ______ shirt to the picnic. 412 CHAPTER 14CO EXERCISE 11. Sentence practice. Directions: Many, but not all, of the sentences contain mistakes in the word order of modifiers. Correct the mistakes. Make changes in the use of a and an as necessary. an old wood 1. Ms. Lane has -a-weed-old- desk in her office. 2, She put the flowers in a blue glass vase. (no change) 3. The Great Wall is a Chinese landmark famous. 4, Ken is a man young honest. 5. Iread a newspaper article interesting this morning. 6. Spiro gave me a wonderful small black Greek box as a birthday present. 7. Alice reached down and put her hand in the mountain cold stream. 8. Pizza is my favorite food Italian, 9. There was a beautiful flower arrangement on the kitchen table. 10. Jack usually wears brown old comfortable shoes leather. 11. Gnats are black tiny insects. 12. I used a box brown cardboard to mail a gift to my sister. 13. Tony has a noisy electric fan in his bedroom window. 14. James is a middle-aged handsome man with | Hott | Fag brown short hair. J NX ) 15. When Jane was on her a last business trip, she sf OS had a cheap rental car, QUA ea but she stayed in a room {tl Chas jes Ges g = z a r expensive hotel. Bll Z Nouns and Modifiers 413(0 EXERCISE 12. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Practice modifying nouns. Partner A: Say the words in each item. Don’t let your intonation drop because Student B is going to finish the phrase. Your book is open. Partner B: Complete Student A’s phrase with a noun. Your book is closed. Respond as quickly as you can with the first noun that comes to mind. Share a few of your answers with the class. Example: a dark... PARTNER A (book open): a dark PARTNER B (book closed): night (room, building, day, cloud, etc.) Example: some ripe... PARTNER A (book open): some ripe PARTNER B (book closed): soup PARTNER A (book open): Some ripe soup? I don’t think we use “ripe” with “soup.” PARTNER B (book closed): Okay. How about “some ripe fruit” or “some ripe bananas”? PARTNER A (book open): ‘That’s good. Some ripe fruit or some ripe bananas, 1. akitchen ... 11. a birthday... 2, a busy... 12, a computer . 3. a public. 13. ababy... 4. atrue... 14. a soft . 5. some expensive . . . 15. an easy 6. an interesting old .. 16. a government . .. 7. an airplane... 17. some hot... 8. a dangerous... 18. a flower... 9. a beautiful Korean . . . 19. a bright . 10. some delicious Mexican... 20, some small round . . . Switch roles. Partner A: Close your book. Partner B: Open your book. Your turn now, 21. a telephone .. 31. some great old... 22. a fast... 32. a television 23. some comfortable . . 33. avery deep . 24. a foreign . . 34. an office 25, a famous Italian . . . 35. a gray wool . 26. a bus... 36. an afternoon 27. ahistory .. 37. an empty... 28, a rubber bicycle... 38. a wonderful South American . . 29. a hospital ... 39. a bedroom 30. a movie... 40. a science... 414 CHAPTER 14CO EXERCISE 13. Listening. Directions: Listen to each sentence. Circle the best completion(s). There may be more than one answer. Example: We watched an interesting TV 1. card cake party 2. friend bus keys 3. jeans shoes flowers 4. test classroom eraser 5. room games desk 6. mail article story ONS OF QUANTITY: ALL OF, MOST OF, SOME OF, ALMOST ALL OF (@) Rita ate all of the food on her plate. All of, most of, and some of express quantities. (b) Mike ate most of his food. all of = 100% © Susie ate some of her food. a large part, but not all some of = a small or medium part (@) Matt ate almost all of his food. all of = 100% INcoRRECT: Matt ate almost of his food, | almost all of = 95%-99% Almost is used with all; all cannot be omitted. Nouns and Modifiers 415CO EXERCISE 14. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with (almost) all of, most of, or some of. 1246 8 All of these numbers are even, Be, 3), fc ee hres numbers areiodd: 3.1, 3,4, 67,9 these numbers are odd. a1, 3, 4,6, 7,8: these numbers are odd. bl 3457, 9 these numbers are odd. 6. the birds in Picture A are flying. the birds in Picture B are flying. 8 _____________ the birds in Picture C are flying. 9 the birds in Picture D are flying. & be | PICTURE 8 dy ws Dese ee, PICTURE C PICTURE O 416 CHAPTER 1410. _______ the students in this class have dark hair, 11, _______ the students in this class are using pens rather than pencils to do this exercise. 12, _______ the students in this class wear glasses. 13. ________ the students in this class can speak English. 14-4 EXPRESSIONS OF QUANTITY: SUBJECT-VERB PXCH IU Y () All of my work is finished. In (@): all of + singular noun + singular verb. (b) AUl of my friends are kind. Ia (allo pra noun + plural ve = i wrk is finished, | In (©): some of + singular noun + singular verb, & a ph ee vere coming vo my | 1” (@):some of + plural noun + plural verb. birthday party. When a subject includes an expression of quantity, the verb agrees with the noun that immediately follows of COMMON EXPRESSIONS OF QUANTITY all of a lot of most of almost all of half of some of Cl EXERCISE 15. Sentence practice. Directions: Choose the correct completions. 1. All of that money ___is__ mine. Tis Fare) 2. All of the windows __________ open. Gs arey 3. We saw one movie, Some of the movie _ interesting. Gas were) 4. We saw five movies. Some of the movies ____ interesting. (was 7 were) 5. A lot of those words ______ new to me. (sTarey 6. A lot of that vocabulary ____ new to me. (are) Nouns and Modifiers 4177. Half of the glasses empty, and half of the glasses ____ full. s7 are) Gs Tare) eo 8. Half of the glass _____ empty. (eT arey IT'S HALF EMPTY, Possimist 9, Almost all ofthe air in the city ______ polluted. 10. Almost all of the oceans in the world polluted. Gare) 11. Most of the students on time, (aurives 7 arrive) 12. Most of our mail, — in the morning. Cl EXERCISE 16. Listening. Directions: Listen to each sentence. Circle the percentage that means the same as the quantity you hear. Example: Half of the class was late. 100% 10% 1. 100% 80% 10% 2. 100% 30% 0% 3. 80% 50% 25% 4. 90% — 100% 10% 5. 10% 20% 10% 6. 25% 50% 85% 418 CHAPTER 14ONE OF + PLURAL NOUN (a) Sam is one of — my friends. incorrect: Sam is one of my friend. One of is followed by a specific plural noun, as in (a). Tt is INCORRECT to follow one of with a singular noun. ONE OF + PL. NOUN + SING. VERB (b) One of my friends — is here. INCORRECT: One of my friends are here. ‘When one of + a plural noun is the subject of a sentence, it is followed by a singular verb, as in (b): ONE OF + PLURAL NOUN + SINGULAR VERB. (©) None of the students was late. (a) None of the students were late. In (@): Not one of the students was late. none of = not one of ‘The verb following none of + a plural nown can be singular, as in (c), or plural, as in (d). Both are correct.* * In very formal English, a singular verb is used after none of + a plural noun: None ofthe students ‘was /aie. In everyday English, both singular and plural verbs are used. O EXERCISE 17. Sentence practice. Directions: Make sentences from the given words and phrases. 1. one of my \ teacher \ be \ (name of a teacher) One of my teachers is Ms. Lopez. 2. (name of a student) \ be \ one of my \ classmate 3. one of my \ book \ be \ red 4. one of my \ book \ have \ a green cover 5. (name of a place) \ be \ one of my favorite \ place \ in the world 6. one of the \ student \ in my class \ always come \ late 7. (name of a person) \ be \ one of my best \ friend Nouns and Modifiers 4198. one of my \ friend \ live \ in (name of a place) 9. (title of a TV program) \ be \ one of the best \ program \ on TV 10. (name of a person) \ be \ one of the most famous \ people* \ in the world 11. one of my biggest \ problem \ be \ my inability to understand spoken English 12. (name of a newspaper) \ be \ one of the \ leading newspaper \ in (name of a city) 13. none of the \ student \ in my class \ speak \ (name of a language) 14. none of the \ furniture \ in this room \ be \ soft and comfortable Ol EXERCISE 18. Let's talk. Directions: Work alone to complete the sentences with your own words. Then take turns sharing your sentences with a small group or with the class. 1, One of my favorite is 2, ___ is one of the most interesting ____ in the world. 3, One cite essen in ay is 4. is one of my best 5. One of 6. None of 1 plural noun even though it does not have a final -. 420 CHAPTER 14Cl EXERCISE 19. Sentence practice. Directions: Choose the correct verbs. 1, My grammar book ___is__ red. Ts Tare) 2. Some of my books ______ on my desk. 3. One of my books ____-_ blue and green. 4. My favorite colors ______red and yellow. 5. Sue's favorite color ______ green. 6. One of my favorite colors _____ red. 7, Some of the students in my class ____lap-top computers. Ghas have) 8. One of the students in Pablo’s class shag — 2 Mustache, 9. My best friends ___ in Brazil. (ives TTivey 10. One of my best friends ____ in Australia. (ives ive) 11. None of these letters _______ for you. 12. None of this mail _____ for you. Gs 7 are) Ci EXERCISE 20. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with is or are. 1, Some of the children’s toys ___are___ broken. 2. Most of my classmates always on time for class. 3. One of my classmates ______ always late. Nouns and Modifiers 4214. All of my friends ______ kind people. 5. One of my friends ___ Sam Brown. 6. Most of the rivers in the world polluted. 7. Some of the Pacific Ocean __ badly polluted. 8. Most of this page white. 9. Most of the pages in this book fall of grammar exercises. 10. One of the pages in this book ___ the title page. Cl EXERCISE 21. Listening. Gq Divections: Complete the sentences with the words you hear. L is hard. a oe Se mre here eo ee abet JA ec eit 8. ‘was scary. 0 EXERCISE 22. Listening review. Gy Directions: Look at the pictures as you listen to each sentence. Circle the correct answer. Example: None of the people are mad. —_yes Leyes no 3. yes no 5. yes no 7. yes no 2. yes no 4. yes no 6. yes no 8 yes no 422 CHAPTER 14C1 EXERCISE 23. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Your teacher will ask you questions. Answer them using complete sentences. Use any expression of quantity (all of, most of, some of, a lot of, one of, three of, etc.). Close your book for this activity. Examples: ‘TEACHER: STUDENT: How many of the people in this room are wearing shoes? All of the people in this room are wearing shoes. ‘TEACHER: STUDENT: How many of us are wearing blue jeans? Some of us are wearing blue jeans. How many people in this room have (short) hair? How many of the students in this class have red grammar books? How many of us are sitting down? How many of your classmates are from (name of a country)? How many of the people in this room can speak (English)? How many of the women in this room are wearing earrings? How many of the men? 7. What is one of your favorite TV programs? 8. How many of the people in this city are friendly? 8. 0 Sy Rene . Who is one of the most famous people in the world? . How many of the married women in your country work outside the home? (@ I didn’t say anything. (a) and (b) have the same meaning. Anything is used when the verb is negative. Nothing is used when the verb is affirmative. (b) I said nothing. INCORRECT: I didn’t say nothing. (© Bob didn’t see anyone at the park. (@) Bob saw no one at the park. INCORRECT: Bob didn’t see no one at the park. (© and () have the same meaning, Anyone is used when the verb is negative. No one is used when the verb is affirmative. Cl EXERCISE 24, Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use anything, nothing, anyone, or no one. 1, Jim doesn’t know 2. Jim knows 3. Jean didn’t tell about butterflies. about butterflies. about her problem. Nouns and Modifiers 4234. Jean told 5. There’s 6. There isn’t 7. Liz went to a shoe store, but she didn’t buy 8. Liz bought 9. Igot about her problem. in my pocket. It’s empty. in my pocket. at the shoe store. in the mail today. My mailbox was empty. 10. George sat quietly in the corner. He didn’t speak to 11. The office is closed from 12:00 to 1:00. the lunch hour. 12. I know 13. 14, Joan has a new apartment. She doesn’t know is there during about nuclear physics. was at home last night. Both my roommate and I were out. apartment building yet. 15. A: B: Do you know Towa? I know in her about Iowa? about Iowa. A: Ir’s an agricultural state that is located between the Mississippi and Missouri rivers. stareMENT | (a) Mary bought something at the store. | Ina statement, use something or (b) Jim talked to someone after class. someone. Necarive | (c) Mary didn’t buy anything at the store. | In a negative sentence, use anything (@) Jim didn’t talk to anyone after class. or antyone. question | (©) Did Mary buy something at the store? | In a question, use either Did Mary buy anything at the store? ) Did Jim talk to someone after class? Did Jim talk to anyone after class? something/someone or anythinglanyone, 424 CHAPTER 14Cl EXERCISE 25. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use something, someone, anything, or anyone.* 1. Ihave ___something __ in my pocket. 2. Do you have 3. Ken doesn’t have 4. Tbought 5. Rosa didn’t buy 6. Did you buy 7. My roommate is speaking to 8. Yuko didn’t tell 9. Ltalked to 10. Did you talk to 11. Kim gave me 12, Paul didn’t give me 13. Did Paul give you in your pocket? in his pocket. when I went shopping yesterday. when she went shopping. when you went shopping? on the phone. her secret. at the phone company about my bill. about your problem? for my birthday. for my birthday. for your birthday? 14, My brother is sitting at his desk. He’s writing an e-mail to 15. The hall is empty. I don’t see 16. A: Listen. Do you hear a noise? B: No, I don’t. I don’t hear 17. A: Did you talk to Jim on the phone last night? B: No. I didn’t talk to 18. A: Where’s your bicycle? ole * Someone and somebody have the same meaning. Anyone and anybody have the same meaning. Nouns and Modifiers 42519. A: Does have some change? I need to use the pay phone. B: Here. ‘A: Thanks, I'll pay you back later. 20. A: What did you do last weekend? B: I didn’t do . I stayed home. (a) Every student has a book. (a) and (b) have essentially the same meaning. (b) All of the students have books. In (a): every + singular noun + singular verb. INCORRECT: Boery of the students has a book. | Every is not immediately followed by of. INCORRECT: Every students have books. Every is immediately followed by a singular noun, NoT a plural noun. (©) Everyone has a book. (©) and (d) have the same meaning. (@) Everybody has a book. Everyone and everybody are followed by a singular verb. © Looked at everything in the museum. | In (¢): everything = each thing (f) Buerything is okey. In (f): Everything is followed by a singular verb. | CO EXERCISE 26. Sentence practice. Directions: Choose the correct completions. 1. All of the ___books ____ on this desk ___are ___ mine. Took / books) Gs/ are) 2s ery ee ahs dee mine (book / books) (is / are) Se All of chic eee here today (student / students) (is / are) 4, Evei here today. . ‘Gradent 7 students) (Tare) . 426 CHAPTER 14I vey ac my college! tests regularly. (eeacher / teachers) we) 6. Allofthe ____ at my college ___a lot of tests. (Geacher teachers) ives Taney 7. Every ______ in my country ___ bedtime stories. Ghild children) Gikes Tike) 8. Allofthe ____ in my country _____ that story. (Ghild T children) Y COUREY — owe Tao) . 9. All of the in this class studying English. Gerson T people) is Tare) 10. Everyone in this class ____ to learn English. (wants 7 want) uM. —____ all of the ______iin this class speak English well? ‘Does Do) (Gtudent / students) 12, _____ every ___in the world like to listen to music? Does Day (person 7 people) 13. ____ all ofthe ___in the world enjoy dancing? Does Doy (person T people) 14. _______ everybody in the world have enough to eat? ‘Woes Do) 15. Every __in Sweden ____a good transportation system. Y Gayl cies) Tha Thavey a @ 16. One of the ___________ in my class ____ from Iceland. (Gtudent students) GsTarey Co EXERCISE 27. Review: error analysis. Directions: Correct the errors. 1. I work hard every days. 2. live in an apartment with one of my friend. 3. We saw a pretty flowers garden in the park, 4. Almost of the students are in class today. Nouns and Modifiers 4275. Every people in my class are studying English. 6. All of the cities big in North America has traffic problems. 7. One of my cars are dark green. 8. Nadia drives a blue small car. 9. Istanbul is one of my favorite city in the world. 10. Every of students in the class have a grammar book. 11. The work will take a long time. We can’t finish every things today. 12. Everybody in the world want peace. 14-9 LINKING VERBS + ADJE BE + ADJECTIVE Adjectives can follow ée, as in (a). The adjective (@ The flowers were beautiful. describes the subject of the sentence. See Chart 1-6, p. 12. LINKING VERB + ADJECTIVE Adjectives can follow a few other verbs. These (b) The flowers looked beautiful. verbs are called “linking verbs.” The adjective (©) The flowers smelled ‘good. describes the subject of the sentence. @t feel ‘good. ‘Common linking verbs are look, smell, eel, taste, (e) Candy tastes sweet. and sound. (©) That book sounds —_ interesting. Cl EXERCISE 28. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner to practice using linking verbs, Take turns completing the sentences. Part 1. Describe how you feel today. Begin your sentence with I feel 1. good 7. lazy 2. fine 8. nervous 3. terrible 9. happy 4. terrific 10. calm 5. sleepy 11. sick 6. tired 12. old 428 CHAPTER 14parr 11. Name things that... 13. taste good 17. taste sour 14. taste terrible 18. smell good 15. taste delicious 19. smell bad 16. taste sweet 20. smell wonderful PART Ill, Name something in this room that looks . . . 21. clean 25. expensive 22. dirty 26. comfortable 23. new 27. messy 24. old 28. familiar Cl EXERCISE 29. Let's talk. Directions: Work in groups or as a class. Take turns showing and describing emotions. Speaker A: Choose one of the emotions listed below. Show that emotion through the expression on your face and through your actions. Don’t tell anyone which emotion you're trying to show. Speaker B: Describe how Speaker A looks. Use the linking verb Jook and an adjective. 1. angry 5. busy 2. sad/unhappy 6. comfortable 3. happy 7. surprised 4. tired/sleepy 8. nervous O EXERCISE 30. Sentence practice. Directions: Use any possible completions for these sentences. Use the words in the list or your own words. easy good / terrific | wonderful | great interesting hard | difficult terrible | avoful tired Isleepy 1. Rosa told me about a new book. I want to read it. It sounds —— interesting / good / terrific __. 2. Karen learned how to make paper flowers. She told me how to do it. It sounds 3. There’s a new play at the community theater. I read a review of it in the newspaper. I'd like to see it. It sounds Nouns and Modifiers 4294, Professor Wilson is going to lecture on the problems of overpopulation tomorrow evening. I think I'll go. It sounds 5. Chris explained how to fix a flat tire. I think I can do it. It sounds 6. Shelley didn’t finish her dinner because it didn’t taste 7. What's for dinner? Something smells —___ Ss Ummm! What is it? 8. Amy didn’t get any sleep last night because she studied all night for a test. Today she looks 9. Ymmmm! This dessert tastes______. Whats it? 10. A: What's the matter? Do you feel okay? B: No. I feel . think I'm getting a cold. 11. A: Do you like my new dress, darling? B: You look ___, honey. 12. A: Pyew!* Something smells ___! Do you smell it too? B: Isure do. It’s the garbage in the alley. Cl EXERCISE 31. Let's talk. Directions: Work in pairs or small groups. In a given time limit (e.g. fifteen seconds, thirty seconds, a minute), think of as many adjectives or nouns used as adjectives as you can that describe the given nouns. Make a list. Example: car Response: big, little, fast, slow, comfortable, small, large, old, new, used, noisy, quiet, foreign, electric, antique, police, etc. 1. weather 5. country 2. animal 6. person 3. food 7. river 4. movie 8. student * Pyew is sometimes said “p.u.” Both Pyew and px. mean that something smells very bad, 430° CHAPTER 14(@) Ann is is a careful driver. (adjective) (b) Ann drives carefully. (adverb) careful carefully | An adjective describes a noun. slow slowly In (@): careful describes driver. quick quickly easy easily An adverb describes the action of a verb. In (b): carefully describes drives. ‘Most adverbs are formed by adding -Ly to an adjective. (©) John is afast driver. | fast fast ‘The adjective form and the adverb form (adjective) hard hard are the same for fast, hard, early late. early early (@) John drives fast. late late (adverb) (e) Linda is a good writer. | good well Well is the adverb form of good.* (adjective) (f) Linda writes well. (adverb) * Wall can also be used as an adjective to mean “not sick” Paul tas sick last seek, bur now he’s wel, Cl EXERCISE 32. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with the adjective or adverb in italics. 1 2, + quiet, quietly quiet, quietly . clear, clearly . clear, clearly . careless, carelessly . careless, carelessly . easy, easily . easy, easily My hometown is small and ____quiet : Mr. Wilson whispered. He spoke ___quietly _. Anna pronounces every word We like to go boating in weather. Boris makes a lot of mistakes when he writes. He’s a writer. Boris writes ‘The teacher asked an ____ question. J answered the teacher’s question Nouns and Modifiers 4319. good, well David is kind, generous, and thoughtful. He is a person. 10. good, well Jake has poor eyesight. He can’t see without his glasses. Cl EXERCISE 33. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with the correct form (adjective or adverb) of the words in italics. 1. careful Do you drive 2 2. correct Carmen gave the _______ answer to the question. 3. correct She answered the question 4. fast Mike isa ____ reader. 5. quick ‘Mike reads 6. fast Mike reads 7. neat Barbara has ____ handwriting. It is easy to read what she writes. 8. neat Barbara writes 9. hard Istudy 10. hard The students tooka __ test. 11. honest Roberto answered the question 12. slow Karen and Fumiko walked through the park 13. quick We were in a hurry, so we ate lunch 432 CHAPTER 1414. careless 15. early 16. early 17. loud 18. slow, clear I made some composition. Last night we had dinner leave for the theater at 6:00. ‘We had an I speak mistakes in my last because we had to dinner last night. when I talk to my grandfather because he has trouble hearing. Kim speaks English Co EXERCISE 34. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with the correct form (adjective or adverb) of the words in italics. 1. good 2. fast 3. quick 4, fast 5. soft 6. hard 7. late 8. easy 9. quier 10. beautiful 11. good 12. good 13. fluent Did you sleep Anita isa She learns everything Ahmed walks too Please speak Itrained I paid my telephone bill Ron lifted the heavy box Olga entered the classroom late for class. The flowers look We had a Your science project looks Nadia speaks French and Jast night? learner. . Tcan’t keep up with him. . The children are asleep. yesterday. . He’s very strong. because she was time at the party last night. Nouns and Modifiers 433Co EXERCISE 35. Review. Directions: Choose the correct completions. 1, The teacher gave a test paper to every in the class. student B. students C. of student D. of students 2. Rosa is a woman, A. beautiful Mexican young C. Mexican beautiful young B. beautiful young Mexican D. young beautiful Mexican 3. the students in our class have dark hair. A. All most of C. Almost B. Almost of D. Almost all of 4. [had some soup for lunch, A. vegetable good C. vegetables good B. good vegetables D. good vegetable 5, Jack introduced me to one __. A. friends B. ofhis friend C. of his friends —_D. his friends, 6. The flowers A. looked beautiful C. beautiful look B. looked beautifully D. beautifully look 7 have jobs after school. A. A lot of students C. A lots of students B. A lot students D. A lot student 8. I didn’t talk to A. something —_B. anyone C. nothing D. no one Cl EXERCISE 36. Chapter review: error analysis. Directions: Correct the errors. . Everybody want to be happily. 2. One of the building on Main Street is the post office. 3. I didn’t see nobody at the mall. s 5. Lwalk in the park every days. 434° CHAPTER 14 . At the library, you need to do your work quiet.6. Mr. Jones teaches English very good. 7. The answer looks clearly. Thank you for explaining it. 8. Every grammar test have a lot of difficult questions. Cl EXERCISE 37. Review: small groups. Directions: Play this game in small groups. Think of a noun. Describe this noun to your group by giving clues, but don’t mention the noun. ‘The group will guess the noun you’re thinking of. Example: SPEAKER A: I'm thinking of a kind of plant. It’s small and colorful. It smells good. GROUP 1: A flower! SPEAKER B: I’m thinking of a person. She has short black hair. She's wearing a blue sweater and a black skirt today. GROUP 1: That's too easy! Yoko! SPEAKER C: I’m thinking of a very big cat. It’s a wild animal. GROUP 1: A lion! SPEAKER C: No. It’s orange and black. It lives in Asia. It has stripes. Group 1: A tiger! Cl EXERCISE 38. Review. Directions: Bring to class an object from your country. In a small group, describe your object and tell your classmates about it. What is it? How is it used? Why is it special? Answer questions from the group. When all of the groups finish discussing the objects, all of the objects should be placed in the center of the room. Speaker A: Choose one of the objects. Ask questions about it. Find out who it belongs to and what it is. (The owner of the object should Nor speak People from the owner’s group will give Student A the necessary information.) Speaker B: Choose another one of the objects and ask questions. Etc. After all of the objects have been discussed and placed in the middle of the room, choose five of them to write about. Write a short paragraph on each object. What is it? What does it look like? Whose is it? What’s it for? Why is it special? Why is it interesting to you? Etc. Nouns and Modifiers 435CHAPTER | 5 MOSSoNSI Mon) SINGULAR POSSESSIVE | ‘To show that a person possesses NOUN FORM something, add an apostrophe (’) (@) My friend has a car. friend friend’s | and -s toa singular noun. My friend’s car is blue. POSSESSIVE NOUN, SINGULAR: (b) The student has a book. student _student’s noun + apostrophe (’) + -s The student’s book is red. PLURAL POSSESSIVE | Add an apostrophe (’) at the end NOUN FORM of a plural noun (after the ~s). (© The students have books. students students’ | possessive NOUN, PLURAL: The students’ books are red. noun + -8 + apostrophe (’) (@) My friends have a car. friends friends’ My friends’ car is blue. OC EXERCISE 1. Punctuation practice. Directions: Add apostrophes to the possessive nouns. Jim's 1. Fims- last name is Smith. 2. Bobs cat likes to sleep on the sofa. 3. My teachers names are Ms. Rice and Mr. Molina. 4, My mothers first name is Marika, 5. My parents telephone number is 555-9876. 6. My Uncle George is my fathers brother.10. 12, 13. 14, 15. . Nicole is a girls name. . Erica and Heidi are girls names. . Do you like Toms shirt? ‘Do you know Anitas brother? Alexs friends visited him last night. ‘The teacher collected the students test papers at the end of the class. How long is an elephants trunk? A monkeys hand looks like a human hand. Monkeys hands have thumbs. Cl EXERCISE 2. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use your classmates’ names. 1 2 FS 8. hair is short and straight. grammar book is on her desk. last name is Edonivknoy, 2 address; eyes are brown. shirt is blue. briefcase is on the floor. Ineed to borrow dictionary. Possessives 437CO EXERCISE 3. Let's talk: small groups. Directions: Work in small groups. Take turns making sentences about things that belong to students in your group. Write down five of them. Example: SPEAKER A: Kim’s dictionary is on his desk. SPEAKER B: Anna’s purse is brown. SPEAKER C: Pablo’s shirt is green. Etc. CO EXERCISE 4. Listening. GQ Directions: Listen to each sentence and circle the word you hear. 1. Bob Bob's 2. Bob Bob's 3. teacher teacher's 4, teacher teacher's 5. friend friend’s 6. friend friend’s 7. manager manager’s 8. cousin cousin’s Ci EXERCISE §. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. 1. My husband’s brother is my brother-in-law. 2. My father’s ____ is my uncle. 3. My mother’s ____ is my grandmother. 4. My sister’s are my nieces and nephews. 5. My aunt’s is my mother. 6. My wife’s is my mother-in-law. 7. My brother’s is my sister-in-law. 8. My father’s __________ and _____ are my grandparents. 9. My niece is my brother’s 10. My nephew is my sister’s : 438 CHAPTER 15Cl EXERCISE 6. Sentence practice. Directions: Choose the correct completions. 1. The work hard. @) students —_-B. student's, students’ 2. My name is Honey. A. cats B. cat’s C. cats’ 3. My are traveling in Spain. A. cousins B. cousin’s C. cousins’ 4. My meeting them in two weeks, A. uncle B. uncle’s C. uncles? 5. Two of my live near me. A. friends B, friend’s C. friends’ 6. My names are Mark and Kevin. A. friend B. friend’s C. friends’ 7. My best name is Rob. A. friends B. friend’s C. friends’ 8. The three coats are in the closet. A. boys B, boy's C. boys’ 9. The his bike. A. boys: B. boy’s C. boys’ 10. We have three and one girl in my family. A. boys: B. boy’s C. boys’ POSSESSIVE: IRREGULAR PLURAL NOUNS (@ The children’s toys are on the floor. Irregular plural nouns (children, men, ccomen, people) have an irregular plural possessive form. The (b) That store sells men’s clothing. apostrophe (”) comes before the final -s. (©) That store sells women’s clothing. REGULAR PLURAL POSSESSIVE NOUN: the students’ books (d) [like to know about other people’s lives. | IRREGULAR PLURAL POSSESSIVE NOUN: the women’s books Possessives 439Cl EXERCISE 7. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with the possessive form of the nouns in italics. ‘These books belong to... 1. Mary They're ___Mary’s books. 2. my friend ‘They're books. 3. my friends They're books. 4. the child They're books. 5. the children They're books. 6. the woman ‘They're books. 7. the women ‘They're books. CO EXERCISE 8. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with the possessive form of the nouns in italics. 1 2. 3: 10. iL children girl girls . women . uncle . person ~ people . students . brother brothers wife 440 CHAPTER 15 ‘That store sells ___children’s _ books. Ria ane Rita and Sue are names. Rita and Sue are names. Roberto is living at his house. A biography is the story of a_____ life. Biographies are the stories of lives. lives are busy. Do you know my Do you know my Ron fixed his old sewing machine.12. dog My______________name is Fido. 13. dogs My __________ names are Fido and Rover. 14, men Are Jim and Tom ___ names? 15. man, woman Chris can be a __ nickname or a nickname, 16. children Our ___ school is near our house. Cl EXERCISE 9. Punctuation practice. Directions: Add apostrophes and final -s as necessary to make possessive nouns. Paul’s 1. Someone stole Pawt bicycle. 2. Do you know Yuko roommate? 3. Tcan’t remember all of my classmate names. 4. My roommate desk is always a mess. 5. What is your parent new address? 6. It’s important to respect other people opinions. 7. My husband sister is visiting us this week. 8. Excuse me. Where is the men room? Tina’s Boutique 9. That store sells children toys. { f , é AL 10. Ihave my father nose.* i ff f 11. Where is Rosa apartment? |e ‘eS 12, Does that store sell women clothes? * Thave my father's nase = My nose looks lke my favhers nose; I inherited the shape of my nose from my father Possessives 44115-3 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS: MINE, YOURS, HIS, HERS, OURS, THEIRS (@) This book belongs to me. | possessive | possessive | A possessive adjective is used in It is my book. apjecrive | PRONOUN | front of a noun: my book. It is mine. a (b) That book belongs to you. | 7 mine It is your book. your yours nis yours. bd hes (©) That book is mine. ae perdi A possessive pronoun is used iNcorrect: That is mine book. | their theirs cone ra @ noun following Cl EXERCISE 10. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use object pronouns, possessive adjectives, and possessive pronouns. 1, Town this book. 4. She owns this pen. ‘This book belongs to ____me____. __This pen belongs to This is ___my ___ book. This is pen. ‘This book is mine. This pen is 2. They own these books. 5. He owns that pen. These books belong to ‘That pen belongs to ‘These are books. ‘That is pen. ‘These books are ‘That pen is 3. You own that book. 6. We own those books. ‘That book belongs to Those books belong to ‘That is book. ‘Those are books. That book is ‘Those books are 442 CHAPTER 15CO EXERCISE 11. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use the correct possessive form of the words in italics. 1 Sue she she you . Sim he we a. This bookbag is mine . b. That bookbag is __Sue’s : cy My bookbag is red. d. Hers is green, a. Thesebooksare b. Those books are books are on the table. are on the desk, a. This raincoat is b. That raincoat is is light brown. SS is igat blue, a, This notebook is b. That one is ee name on it. a amen a, ____ apartment is on Pine Street. b. ___is on Main Street. ce apartment has three rooms. @ has four rooms. Possessives 44361 ei ip pen you b. That one is I a oer youd ison dekh Ge car is a Chevrolet. they b, ___is a Volkswagen. we ¢, __ gets 17 miles to the gallon. they 4. car gets 30 miles to the gallon. 8. Ann a. These books are Paul b. Those are ie ce con dei he d. are on ____ desk. CO EXERCISE 12. Sentence practice. Directions: Choose the correct completions. 1, Isthis __your ___ pen? Gaul / yours) 2, Please give this dictionary to Olga. It's = 3. A: Don’t forget hat, Here, B: No, that’s not hat. is areen. 4. A: Please take this wood carving as a gift from me. Here. I's B: Thank you. You're very thoughtful. 5, A: Isn’t that the Smiths’ car? That one over there. The blue one. B: No, that’s not —_ car is dark blue. (heir theirs) (Their Theirs) 444 CHAPTER 15Ar Abdul and I really like new apartment, It has lots of space. (our ours) How do you like ___? (your / yours) B: is small, but it’s comfortable. (Our / Ours) . A: Excuse me, Is this umbrella? Grour/ yours) B: I don’t have an umbrella. Ask Ken. Perhaps it’s im his) . A: When do _____ classes begin? (your yours) B: September second, How about ____? When do __ (your yours) (your yours) begin? —— —— begin August twenty-ninth. GT POR August ewenty-nin . A: Maria, spaghetti sauce is delicious! (your yours) B: Thank you, but it’s not as good as (your / yours) A: Oh, no. is much better! It tastes just as good as Anna’s. (Your Yours) B: Do you like Anna’s spaghetti sauce? I think __—_____ is too salty A: Maybe. _____ husband makes good spaghetti sauce too. (My Mine) rere — Mf Miielend eich. (His 7Hey —— B: Making spaghetti sauce is easy, but everyone’s sauce is just a little different. Possessives 44515-4 QUESTIONS WI WHOS. | @ Whose book is this? > Mine, Whose asks about possession. > It’s mine, Whose is often used with a noun | + Is my book. (eg. whose book), as in (a) and (b). (b) Whose books are these? + Rita's. * ‘They're Rita’s. + They’re Rita’s books. (© Whose is this? (The speaker is pointing to a book.) Whose can be used without a noun (@) Whose are these? (The speaker is pointing to some books.) | if the meaning is clear, as in (c) and (4). (© Who's your teacher? In (¢): Who's = who is. Whose and who’s have the same | pronunciation. Whose is this? There's no name ‘ont. Who's the artist? 0 EXERCISE 13. Sentence practice. Directions: Choose the correct completions. le Whose watch: (sees See Thise sy Gs 7are) Gis / these) 2) Whose clases eee eee (Tare) Ghat those) 3) Whose teddy bear (Gs 7 are) (this / these) Whee Gs 7 are) (that 7 those) St Whore shoes eee (is / are) (that / those) 6: Whosckeys ee ee oe a) (his these) 446 CHAPTER 15Cl EXERCISE 14. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Touch or point to something in the classroom that belongs to someone and ask a question with Whose. Example: SPEAKER A: (points to a book) Whose book is this? SPEAKER B: It’s mine. / Mine. / It’s my book. SPEAKER A: Your turn to ask. SPEAKER B: Whose book is that? SPEAKER A: It’s Po’s. / Po’s. / It’s Po’s book. Cl EXERCISE 15. Sentence practice. Circle the correct completions. Whose ____ your roommate this year? Whose pen is this? Whose ____ on the phone? Who's Whose = nae Who's Whose is that? Who's Whose —___ making so much noise? C EXERCISE 16. Listening. Gy Directions: Listen to each sentence. Circle Whose or Who's. ye ye a Whose Who's 6. Whose Who's Whose — Who's 7. Whose — Who’s Whose Who's 8. Whose Who's Whose — Who's 9. Whose Who's Whose — Who's 10. Whose Who's CO EXERCISE 17. Chapter review: error analysis. Directions: Correct the errors. 1. 2 Whose that woman? . What are those peoples names? . Mr. and Mrs. Swan like their’s apartment. . The two student's study together in the library every afternoon. . Who's book is this? Possessives 4476. Those shoes in the bag are their, not our. 7. My fathers’ sister has M.D. and Ph.D. degrees. 8. Did you meet your childrens teacher? 9. This is mine pillow and that one is your. CO EXERCISE 18. Let's talk: review of Chapters 14 and 15. Directions: Work in pairs or small groups. Read the facts about eight friends. Facts: + Jack, Jim, Jake, John, Jill, Julie, Joan, and Jan are all friends. + Two of them are secretly engaged. + They met five months ago. + They are going to get married next year. Who is engaged? Read the clues to find out. (Be careful! Some of the clues are only additional information. They will not help you find the answer.) Fill in the chart as you work through the clues to solve the puzzle. Engaged | Jack Jim Jake | John. Jill Julie | Joan Jan, pes no x Clues: 1. For Julie’s wedding next month, she is planning to wear her mother’s long, white wedding dress. Her mother wore it 30 years ago. + Julie's wedding is next month. The engaged couple is getting married next year, so i’s not Julie. 2. Joan’s husband is working in another city right now. They hope to see each other soon. . Jill and Jack love each other. They met at Jill’s sister’s wedding. . Jill’s sister got married a year ago. . Of all the friends, Jim is the only computer-science student. 6. Joan is a computer-science teacher. She began teaching two years ago. 7. Jan’s boyfriend is a medical student. 8. All of the friends think Julie is very funny. 9. John loves Jan, but she doesn’t love him. He’s a friend to her, not a boyfriend. yee 448 CHAPTER 15CHAPTER ] § “THE SAME (AS) SIMILAR (TO) DIFFERENT (FROM) A B c D E F A and B are the same. Cand D are similar. E and F are different. Aiis the same as B. Cis similar to D. Eis different from F. CO EXERCISE 1. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Which of the pictures are the same, similar, or different? 1. Are Pictures A and B the same? 2. Are Pictures A and C the same? 3. Are Pictures A and C similar? 4. Are Pictures A and C different? 5. Are Pictures C and D similar? 6. Are Pictures C and D different?CO EXERCISE 2. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use the same (as), similar (to), and different (from) in your completions. O IN A B c D E F G a is the same as EB 2. DiandE —“Gresimiar on crediferent 3.€ 4B D. Shand 6. Cand D ——————————— 8. Fand G 9. F G. EE Aeod but Cc Cl EXERCISE 3. Listening. GQ Divections: Listen to the comparisons of Pictures A through G in Exercise 2. Are these comparisons correct? Circle yes or no. Example: A and F are the same. no le yes no. 5. yes no 2. yes no 6. yes no 3. yes no 7. yes no 4. yes no. * Similar gives the idea that two things are the same in some ways (@.8, both D and E have four edges) but different in other ways (e.g, D isa rectangle and E is a square) 450 CHAPTER 16CO EXERCISE 4. Error analysis. Directions: Correct the errors. 1. A rectangle is similar a square. 2. Pablo and Rita come from same country. 3. Girls and boys are differents. Girls are different to boys. 4. My cousin is the same age with my brother. 5. Dogs are similar with wolves. 6. Jim and I started to speak at a same time. C1 EXERCISE 5. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Answer the questions. 1 2 6 7 1. Which of the figures are the same? 2. Is there at least one figure that is different from all the rest? 8 9 10 Just for fun: 3, How many triangles are there in figure 1? (answer: Seven.) 4, How many triangles are there in figure 2? 5, How many triangles are there in figure 6? Cl EXERCISE 6. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Your teacher will ask you questions. Practice using the same (as), similar (to), and different (from). Close your book for this activity. Example: Look at (.. .)’s clothes and (. . . )’s clothes. What is different about them? Response: Their shoes are different. (. . . ) is wearing running shoes, and (. . . ) is wearing sandals. Making Comparisons 4511. Look around the room. Name things that are the same. 2. Look around the room. Name things that are similar but not the same. 3. Find two pens that are the same length. Find two pieces of paper that are the same size. Find two notebooks that are different sizes. 4, Find two people in the class who are wearing (earrings). Are their (earrings) the same, similar, or different? 5. Who in the class has a (notebook, briefcase, backpack) that is similar to yours? Does anyone have a (notebook, briefcase, backpack) that is the same as yours? 6. Do any of the people in this room have the same hairstyle? Name two people who have similar hairstyles. 7. Whose shirt is the same color as yours today? Name some things in this room that are the same color. Name things that are similar colors. 8. Do any of the people in this room come from the same country? Who? Name two people who come from different countries. 9. Name an animal that is similar to a tiger. Name a bird that is similar to a duck. 10. Are Egypt and Italy on the same continent? Egypt and Algeria? Thailand and Korea? Mexico and Brazil? 16-2. COMPARISONS: USING LIKE AND ALIKE ‘You have a ballpoint pen with blue ink. Thave a ballpoint pen with blue ink. alike = similar Like and alike have the same meaning, but the sentence patterns are different. This + be + like + that. ‘This and that + be + alike. (@) Your pen is like my pen. (b) Your pen and my pen are alike. (©) Our pens are alike. C EXERCISE 7. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with like and alike. 1. You and I have similar books. In other words, your book is like mine. Our books are alike 2. Mr. Chang and I have similar coats. In other words, Mr. Chang’s coat is mine. Our coats are 3. Ken and Sue have similar cars. In other words, their cars are 4. You and I have similar hats. In other words, your hat is ______ mine, 452 CHAPTER 165. A town is 6. A foot and a hand are ways a city in some ways. in some ways, but different in other 7. A dormitory and an apartment building are 8. A motorcycle is CO EXERCISE 8, Let's talk: pairwork. Work with a partner. Take turns making sentences with like. Check off Directions: in many ways. a bicycle in some ways. (¥) the things in Column B that compare with the items in Column A. Discuss the ways in which the two things you are comparing are similar. Example: a pencil, a bus Column A Column B 1. a pencil a glass 2. a bus a human hand Ya pen a lemon Ya taxi PARTNER A: A pencil is like a Your turn now. pen in some ways. They are both used for writing. PARTNER B: A bus is like a taxi. You can ride in both of them. Your turn now. Etc. Column A Column B 1. a bush a glass 2. acup a human hand 3. abill a lemon 4. honey a chair 5. amonkey’s hand | a mountain 6. an orange an ocean 7. an alley a street 8. asea sugar 9. asofa a bird 10. a sports jacket a suit coat 11. a butterfly atree Making Comparisons 453‘Mary is 25 years old. When we use adjectives (¢.g., old, important) to John is 20 years old. compare two people or two things, the adjectives | have special forms, (@) Mary is older than John. In (a): We add -er to an adjective, on (b) Health is more important than money. | In (b):We use more in front of an adjective, The use of -er or more is called the COMPARATIVE incoRRECT: Mary is more old than John. FORM. INCORRECT: Health is importanter than money. Notice in the examples: than follows the comparative form: older than, more important than. apjecrive | COMPARATIVE apjectives wita | big bigger Add -er to one-syllable adjectives. (ONE SYLLABLE, cheap cheaper old older Spelling note: If an adjective ends in one vowel and one consonant, double the | consonant: big-bigger, fat-fatter, hot-hotter, thin-thinner. apjecrives THar | funny funnier If an adjective ends in -y, change the -y END IN -¥ pretty prettier to -# and add -er. apjecrives wir | famous ‘more famous Use more in front of adjectives that “TWO OR MORE important | more important | have two or more syllables (except SYLLABLES. interesting | more interesting | adjectives that end in -y). IRREGULAR good better ‘The comparative forms of good, bad, ‘COMPARATIVE bad worse and far are irregular. FORMS far Jarther|further Cl EXERCISE 9. Comparative practice. Directions: Write the comparative form for these adjectives. 1. old colder than 2. small 3. big 4, important 5. easy 6. difficult 454 CHAPTER 167. long 8. heavy 9. expensive 10. sweet 11. hot 12, good 13. bad 14. far (C EXERCISE 10. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use the comparative form of the words in italics. 1. comfortable This chair is more comfortable than that chair. 2. deep ‘The Pacific Ocean is Mediterranean Sea. 3. important — Love is 4. lazy rm 5. tall ‘My brother is 6. heavy Iron is 7. difficult My physics course is my math course. 8. hot ‘Thailand is 9. thin A giraffe’s neck is 10. warm It's today 11. good Nadia’s English is 12. long The Nile River is “Formal written English: My brother i taller than I (am). Informal spoken English: My brother i aller than me, the money. my roommate. Tam.* wood. Korea, an elephant’s neck. yesterday. her husband’s. the Mississippi. Making Comparisons 45513. imelligent A dogis 14. short ‘My little finger is 15. bad ‘The weather yesterday was 16. far Your apartment is mine. 17. strong A horse is 18. curly Ken’s hair is 19. nervous ‘The groom was at the wedding the bride. CO EXERCISE 11. Let's talk: pairwork. a chicken. _—_____ my middle finger. it is today. from school a person. mine. Directions: Work with a partner. Use the adjective in parentheses to compare each pair of items. Use more or -er. Example: a mouse, an elephant (small) Response: A mouse is smaller than an elephant. Partner A Partner B 1. a bus, car (big) 2. my old shoes, my new shoes (comfortable) 3. your hair, my hair (dark) 4, my arm, your arm (long) 5. biology, chemistry (interesting) 6. I, my brother (thin) 456 CHAPTER 16 eye ay . Japanese grammar, English this book, that one (good) my hair, her hair (curly) her hair, his hair (straight) the weather here the weather in my hometown (bad) this chapter, Chapter 10 (easy) grammar (difficult)Cl EXERCISE 12. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Practice comparative forms. ParT I. Your teacher will put several different books in a central place. Compare one to another, using the given adjectives. Example: big Response: This book is bigger than that book/that one. 1. large 5. difficult 9. expensive 2. interesting 6. easy 10. cheap 3. small 7. good 11. thick 4. heavy 8. bad 12. important part ul. The given adjectives describe a man named Bob. A man named Jack does not have the same qualities. Draw pictures of Bob and Jack on the board. Compare Bob to Jack. Example: tall Response: Bob is taller than Jack. Bob is. . 1. tall 5. young 9. friendly* 2. strong 6. happy 10. responsible 3. lazy 7. kind 11. famous 4, intelligent 8. generous 12. busy CO EXERCISE 13. Listening. Gq Directions: Listen to each sentence. Circle the adjective you hear. Example: Sky Airlines is than World Airlines. cheap 1. cold colder 7. safe safer 2. cold colder 8. safe safer 3. cold colder 9. safe safer 4. happy happier 10. fresh fresher 5. happy happier 11. funny funnier 6. happy happier 12. funny funnier * The comparative of frindfy has two possible forms: jrienlier than or more friendly than. Making Comparisons 457Cl EXERCISE 14. Sentence practice. 458 Directions: Complete the sentences. Use the comparative form of the words in the list (or your own words). big easy important bright expensive intelligent cheap fast large cold high warm comfortable hot sweet 1. An elephant is ___bigger than an a mouse. 2. Alemon is sour. An orange is_____________alemon. 3. The weather today is it was yesterday. 4. Sometimes Mrs. Gay’s feet hurt when she wears high heels. Bedroom slippers are Ra, ________ shoes with high heels. eX 5. I can afford a radio, but not a TV set. A radio is aTV set. 6. An airplane moves quickly. An airplane is an automobile. 7. A person can think logically, A person is an animal. 8. Hills are low. Mountains are ___ hills. 9. The sun gives off a lot of light. The sun is the moon. 10. A motorcycle costs a lot of money. A motorcycle is a bicycle. 11. Arithmetic isn’t difficult. Arithmetic is _________ algebra. 12. Good health is money. CHAPTER 16CO EXERCISE 15. Let's talk. Directions: Work in pairs, in groups, or as a class. Make comparisons. Example: Respons an elephant to a mouse An elephant is bigger than a mouse / more intelligent than a mouse. Etc. an orange to a lemon . a lake to an ocean good health to money . a radio to a TV set . a person to an animal . the sun to the moon . a mountain to a hill . arithmetic to algebra 10. bedroom slippers to high heels 11. a horse to a person 12. your little finger to your ring finger 13. love to money 14. your hair to (...)’s hair 15. food in (your country) to food in (another country) 16. the weather today to the weather yesterday 1 2. 3. 4, 5. an airplane to an automobile 6. i 8. 9. Cl EXERCISE 16. Let's talk: small groups. Directions: Work in small groups. Take turns making sentences using -er/more with the given adjectives, Share a few of your sentences with the class. Example: large Response: Canada is larger than Mexico. / My feet are larger than yours. / Etc. 1. tall 11. small 2. important 12. intelligent 3. cold 13. big 4. curly 14. heavy 5. expensive 15. cheap 6. long 16. sweet 7. easy 17. high 8. comfortable 18. interesting 9. old 19. good 10. strong 20. bad ‘Making Comparisons 459CO EXERCISE 17. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Write a sentence using -er/more with an adjective from the list in Exercise 16. Tear the sentence into pieces, with only one word or phrase on each piece. Give the pieces to a classmate, who will reassemble your sentence. Repeat this exercise several times, using a different adjective for each new sentence you write. EXERCISE 18. Let's talk: pairwork. Directions: Work in pairs. Make comparisons. Partner A: Ask your partner a question. Your book is open. Partner B: Answer in a complete sentence. Your book is closed. Example: Name something that is sweeter than an apple PARTNER A: What's sweeter than an apple? / Can you name something that is sweeter than an apple? / Name something that is sweeter than an apple. PARTNER B: Candy is sweeter than an apple. 1, Name a country that is larger than Mexico. ‘Name a planet that is closer to or farther away from the sun than the earth. Name someone in the class who is younger than (I am, you are). Name an animal that is more dangerous than a wild dog. 2. Bs. 4. 5. Name a bird that is larger than a chicken. 6, Name something that is more expensive than (an object in this room) 7, Name a sport that is more popular internationally than baseball. 8. Name someone who is more famous than (name of a famous person). Switch roles. Partner A: Close your book. Partner B: Open your book. Your turn now. 9. Name someone who is taller than you. 10. Name something that is more interesting than (name of a field of study). 11. Name an ocean that is smaller than the Pacific Ocean. 12. Name a place that is farther away from here than (name of a place). 13. Name an animal that is stronger than a horse. 14, Name a game that is, in your opinion, more exciting than (name of a sport). 15. Name a place that is colder than this city. 16. Name a place that is more beautiful than this city. 460 CHAPTER 1616-4 THE SUPERLAT YE: USING -EST AND MOST (@) Comparative ‘The comparative (-er/more) compares two My thumb is shorter than my index finger. | things or people. (b) SUPERLATIVE ‘The superlative (-est/most) compares three or ‘My hand has five fingers. My thumb is the | more things or people. shortest (finget) of all. Apjecrive | COMPARATIVE SUPERLATIVE ADJECTIVES WITH old older (than) the oldest (of all) ONE SYLLABLE big bigger (than) the biggest (of all) ADJECTIVES THAT pretty prettier (than) the prettiest (of all) END IN-Y easy easier (than) the easiest (of all) ADJECTIVES WITH, expensive | more expensive (than) | the most expensive (of all) TWO OR MORE important | more important (than) | the most important (of all) SYLLABLES IRREGULAR good better (than) the best (of all) FORMS bad worse (than) the worst (of all) far fartherifurther (than) | the farthestifurthest (of all) (1 EXERCISE 19. Comparative and superlative practice. Directions: Write the comparative and superlative forms of the given adjectives. COMPARATIVE 1. long longer (than) the longest (of all) 2. small 3. heavy 4. comfortable 5. hard 6. difficult 7 hot* SUPERLATIVE ‘Spelling note: If an adjective ends in one vowel and one consonant, double the consonant to form the superlative: big biggest, fat-fsust,hot-howest, thin-thinnest Making Comparisons 4618. easy 9. cheap 10. interesting 11. pretty 12. strong 13. good 14. bad 15. far COMPARATIVE Cl EXERCISE 20. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use the superlative form of the adjectives in italics. 1. large 2. long 3. interesting 4. high 5. tall 7. short 9. beautiful 462 CHAPTER 16 SUPERLATIVE The largest city in Canada is Toronto. ‘The Nile is river in the world. T’m taking four classes. My history class is of all. Mt. McKinley in Alaska is North America. The Sears Tower is Lake Superior is February is Pluto is In my opinion, Seattle is city in the United States. mountain in building in Chicago. lake in North America. month of the year. planet from the sun.10. bad 11. good 12. comfortable 13. fast 14. good 15. large 16. small 17. expensive 18. easy 19. important 20. famous In my opinion, Harry’s Steak House is restaurant in the city. In my opinion, the Doghouse Cafe has food in the city. Ken is sitting in chair in the room. The way to travel is by airplane. When you feel depressed, laughter is medicine. Asia is continent in the world. Australia is ___ continent in the world. Sally ordered food on the menu for dinner last night. ‘Taking a taxi is way to get to the airport. I think good health is thing in life. ‘The Gateway Arch is landmark in St. Louis, Missouri. Making Comparisons 463CO EXERCISE 21. Listening. Directions: Look at the people in the picture and listen to each sentence. Circle the correct answer. Example: Pam is the youngest. Pam Tim (24 years old) (60 years old) (15 years old) le yes no 5. yes no 8. yes no 2. yes no 6. yes no 9. yes no 3. yes no 7. yes no 10. yes no 4. yes no Cl EXERCISE 22. Sentence practice. Directions: Work in small groups or as a class. Make comparisons about each group of pictures. A. COMPARE THE SIZES OF THE THREE BALLS. 0 @ 1. The golf ball is ___smaller than ____ the baseball. 2. The soccer ball is ___/arger than the baseball. 3. The soccer ball is ___the largest of all. 464 CHAPTER 16B. COMPARE THE AGES OF THE CHILDREN. Tommy Helen (B years old) (6 years old) (8 years old) Rong eee eee Pele 5. Helen is ‘Tommy. 6. Tommy is Helen and Ann. Aon otal, C. COMPARE THE HEIGHTS OF THE THREE WOMEN. 8. is the tallest a ie che ehortest, 10. is taller than but shorter than. Making Comparisons 465D. COMPARE THE STRENGTHS OF THE THREE MEN. E. COMPARE THE PRICES OF THE THREE VEHICLES. 466 CHAPTER 16F. COMPARE THE GRADES OF THE TEST PAPERS. 19. 20. 21. 22, G. COMPARE HOW INTERESTING (TO YOU) THE THREE BOOKS LOOK. 23, 24. 25, 26. C EXERCISE 23. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences. Use the correct form (comparative or superlative) of the adjectives in italics. 1. long ‘The Yangtze River is __________ the Mississippi River. 2. long ‘The Nile is _________ river in the world. 3. large he Garibbeah Seats the Mediterranean Sea. Making Comparisons 4674, large 5. high 6. high 7. big . small 9. large 10. big 11. large 12. good 13. good 14. comfortable 15. easy 16. bad The Caribbean Sea is sea in the world. Mt Everest is ____ mountain in the world. ‘Mt. Everest ig ____ Mt. McKinley. Mas LLCO Europe is South America. Asia is _____________ continent in the world, Canada is __________ the United States in area. Indonesia is __________ Japan in population. Fruit is for your health ____ candy. The student cafeteria has __________ roast beef sandwiches in the city. Thave a pair of boots, a pair of sandals, and a pair of running shoes. Theleandale are ce ee ie boots, but the running shoes are of all. This exercise is the next one. This is one of exercises in the book. There are over 800 million people in the world who don’t get enough to eat, With few exceptions, poverty and hunger are in rural areas than in cities and towns. C1 EXERCISE 24. Listening. Directions: Listen to the sentences about shopping in a clothing store. Write the words you hear. fl. Tihe| bivweichrees ig 0 theaed one: 2. Well, I think the red one is 3. Is it too 468 CHAPTER 16 , or does it look OK?4. Irs ________ of alll the ones you tried on. 5. I’m not going to buy the brown shoes. They’re too 6. How do you like this hat? It’s ________ size they have. We No, this at ig thet one, 8. Ineed a belt, but one that is __________________ my old one. 9. Is this belt ______ enough? 10. It’s perfect. And it’s _____ of alll of them. 16-5 USING ONE OF + SUPERLATIVE + PLURAL NOUN @) The Amazon is one of the longest rivers ‘The superlative often follows one of. in the world. Notice the pattern: (b) A Rolls Royce is one of the most expensive one of + superlative + plural noun cars in the world. See Chart 14-5, p. 419, for more information (© Alice is one of the most intelligent people about one of. in our class. Cl EXERCISE 25. Sentence practice. Directions: Use the given phrases to make sentences. Use one of + superlative + plural noun. 1, a high mountain in the world > Mt. McKinley is one of the highest mountains in the world. 2. a pretty park in (this city) » Forest Parke is one of the prettiest parks in St. Louis. 3. a tall person in our class > Talal is one of the tallest people* in our class. 4. a big city in the world 5. a beautiful place in the world 6. a nice person in our class 7. a long river in the world ‘People is usually used instead of persons in the plural Making Comparisons 4698. a good restaurant in (this city) 9. a famous landmark in the world 10. an important event in the history of the world CO EXERCISE 26. Let's talk: class interview. Directions: Make questions using one of + superlative + plural noun. You are Speaker A. Ask two students each question. Write their first names and their answers. (Note: Try to change people with each question.) Share some of your answers with the class, Example: a big city in Canada SPEAKER A: What is one of the biggest cities in Canada? SPEAKER B: ‘Toronto is one of the biggest cities in Canada. SPEAKER C: Vancouver is one of the biggest cities in Canada. a big city in Asia 2. a large state in the United States 3. a beautiful city in the world 4. a tall person in our class 5. a good place to visit in the world 6. a famous person in the world 7. an important thing in life 8. a bad restaurant in (this city) 9. a famous landmark in (name of a country) 10. a tall building in (this city) 11. a dangerous sport in the world 12. a serious problem in the world 470 CHAPTER 16CO EXERCISE 27. Let's talk. Directions: Your teacher will ask you questions, or work in small groups and take turns asking each other these questions. . How many brothers and sisters do you have? Are you the oldest? Who is one of the most famous movie stars in the world? In your opinion, what is the most exciting sport? ‘What is one of the most interesting experiences in your life? In your opinion, what is the most beautiful place in the world? ‘What is one of the most important inventions in the modern world? ‘What is one of the worst experiences of your life? ‘What are the best things in life? What was the happiest day of your life—or one of the happiest days of your life? ‘Who are the most important people in your life today? Sewprngyeyner Cl EXERCISE 28. Let's talk: small groups. Directions: First, take this quiz by yourself. Circle the letters of the correct answers. If you don’t know an answer, guess. Second, form small groups to discuss the answers. You can figure out the correct answers by looking at the Table of Statistics on p. 474. PART 1. 1, What is the longest river in the world? A. the Yangtze B. the Amazon C. the Nile D. the Mississippi 2. Is the Amazon River longer than the Mississippi River? A. yes B. no 3. Is the Yangtze River longer than the Mississippi River? A. yes B. no 4, Which two rivers are almost the same length? A. the Nile and the Amazon B. the Amazon and the Yangwe C. the Nile and the Mississippi D. the Mississippi and the Amazon Making Comparisons 471PART It, 5. What is the largest sea in the world? A. the Mediterranean Sea B. the South China Sea C. the Caribbean Sea 6, Is the South China Sea the smallest of the three seas listed above? A. yes B. no PART Il. 7. What is the deepest ocean in the world? A. the Atlantic Ocean. B. the Indian Ocean C. the Pacific Ocean 8. Is the Indian Ocean larger than the Atlantic Ocean? A. yes B. no PART 1 9. Below is a list of the continents in the world. List them in order according to size, from the largest to the smallest. Africa Europe Antarctica North America Asia South America Australia ee (2) ——— (4) Antarctica _ —0——————————— ©) ) (the smallest) 472 CHAPTER 16PARTY. 10. Which of the following cities has the largest population in the world? A. New York City, U.S.A. C. Mexico City, Mexico B. Seoul, Korea D. Tokyo, Japan 11. Is the population of Sao Paulo, Brazil, larger than the population of New York City, U.S.A? A. yes B. no 12, Is the population of Sao Paulo, Brazil, larger than the population of Seoul, Korea? A. yes B. no 13. What is the largest city in North America? A. Mexico City B. New York City PART VI. 14. Which of the following countries has the largest area in the world? A. Canada C. the United States B. China D. Brazil 15. Which of the following two countries is larger in area? A. Canada B. Brazil 16. Which of the following countries has the largest population in the world? A. India C. the United States B. China D. Indonesia 17. Which of the following two countries has the larger population? A. India B. Indonesia 18. Which of the following two countries has the larger population? A. the United States B. Brazil 19. Which of the following two countries has the smaller population? A. Egypt B. Japan Making Comparisons 473PART 1. RIVER the Amazon River the Mississippi River the Nile River the Yangtze River PART I. SEA the Caribbean Sea the Mediterranean Sea the South China Sea PART Ill, OCEAN Atlantic Ocean Indian Ocean Pacific Ocean PART Ii. CONTINENT Africa Antarctica Asia Australia Europe North America South America PaRTY. crry Mexico City, Mexico New York, U.S.A. Sao Paulo, Brazil Seoul, Korea Tokyo, Japan PARTVI. COUNTRY Brazil Canada China Egypt India Indonesia Japan the United States TABLE OF STATISTICS LENGTH 4,000 miles 2,350 miles 4,160 miles 3,900 miles SIZE 970,000 square miles 969,000 square miles 895,000 square miles SIZE 31,820,000 square miles 29,000,000 square miles 64,000,000 square miles SIZE 12,000,000 square miles 7,000,000 square miles 17,129,000 square miles 3,000,000 square miles 3,837,000 square miles 9,355,000 square miles 6,886,000 square miles POPULATION* 28 million 21 million 25 million 22 million 30 million AREA 3,265,059 sq mi 3,612,187 sq mi 3,600,927 sq mi 384,000 sq mi 1,147,949 sq mi 767,777 sq mi 146,000 sq mi 3,539,224 sq mi AVERAGE DEPTH 12,100 feet 12,750 feet 13,000 feet POPULATION 175 million 32 million 1,275 million* 79 million 1 billion 205 million 125 million 286 million “Approximate population in the year 2004; 1,275 million is said as “one billion, two hundred seventy-five million.” 474 CHAPTER 16(a) John is rich, but Mary is poor. But gives the idea that “This is the opposite of that.” (b) The weather was cold, but we were A comma usually precedes but. warm inside our house. CO EXERCISE 29. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with adjectives. 1. An orange is sweet, but a lemon is ____Sour 2. The weather is hot today, but it was _________ yesterday. 3. These dishes are clean, but those dishes are 4. This suitcase is heavy, but that suitcase is 5. My hair is light, but my brother’sharis 2 6. These shoes are uncomfortable, but those shoes are 7. This street is narrow, but that street is iS: (This exercise in easy, but that excrome ip 9. This food is good, but that food is 10. A chicken is stupid, but a human being is T= Sooke iaivinible, bur clean ace ose sees eee 12; his answers right, but that answer iy 15: This towel is'dry, but that towel in 14. This cup is full, but that cup is 15. This sentence is confusing, but that sentence ig 16, My apartment is messy, but Bob’s apartment isalways al 17. A pillow is soft, but a rock is a J ig. ——————— y Making Comparisons 475CO EXERCISE 30. Listening. Gq Directions: Listen to each sentence and write an adjective with the opposite meaning, Example: You will hear: This exercise is easy, but that exercise is You will write: hard. Po ae 1 2, —__. a 4. 16-7 USING VERBS AFTER BUT AFFIRMATIVE VERB + but + NEGATIVE VERB Often the verb phrase following but is, (@) John is rich, but Mary isn’t shortened, as in the examples. (b) Balls are round, but boxes aren't. (© Twas in class, but Po wasn’t. (@) Sue studies hard, but Sam doesn’t. (©) We like movies, but they don’t. (f) Alex came, but Maria didn’t. (g) People can talk, but animals can’t. (h) Olga will be there, but Ivan won't. NEGATIVEVERB = + © but + AFFIRMATIVE VERB (Mary isn’t rich, but John is, (i) Boxes aren’t round, but balls are. (&) Po wasn’t in class, but Twas. () Sam doesn’t study, but Sue does, (m) They don’t like cats, but we do. (2) Maria didn’t come, but Alex did. (0) Animals can’t talk, but people can. (p) Ivan won’t be there, but Olga will. Cl EXERCISE 31. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete each sentence with an appropriate verb, affirmative or negative. 1. Sara is at home, but her husband ___ism’t__. 2. Hiroki isn’t at home, but his wife : 3. Beds are comfortable, but park benches 4. I wasn’t at home last night, but my roommate 476 CHAPTER 165. Kim was in class yesterday, but Anna and Linda 6. I don’t want to go to the movie, but my friends 7. Ahmed can speak French, but I 8. Amanda will be at the meeting, but Helen 9. This shirt is clean, but that one 10. These shoes aren’t comfortable, but those shoes 11. Mike doesn’t write clearly, but'Ted 12. Late breakfast this morning, but my roommate 13. Carol has a car; but Jerry 14. Jerry doesn’t have a car, but Carol 15. Ron was at the party, but his wife 16. Ron went to the party, but his wife 17. Boris can’t speak Spanish, but his wife _ 18. I won’t be at home tonight, but Sue 19. Ken will be in class tomorrow, but Chris, 20. Amy won’t be here tomorrow, but Alice 21. The hotel wasn’t expensive, but the plane tickets Cl EXERCISE 32. Listening. GQ Directions: Complete each sentence with an appropriate verb, affirmative or negative. Example: You will hear: The children wanted to play, but the teacher You will write: didn’t _. 1. 6. 2. L a 3. 8. 4. 9. 10. : Making Comparisons 477Cl EXERCISE 33. Let's talk: class activity. Directions: Your teacher will ask you questions. Answer them using but. Close your book for this activity. Example: Who in the class was at home last night? Who wasn’t at home last night? ‘TEACHER: Who was at home last night? SPEAKER A: I was. ‘TEACHER: Who wasn’t at home last night? SPEAKER B: I wasn’t at home last night ‘TEACHER: (10 Speaker G) Summarize, using but. SPEAKER C: (Speaker A) was at home last night, but (Speaker B) wasn’t. CO EXERCISE 34. Let's tall Who wears glasses? Who doesn’t wear glasses? . Who is married? Who isn’t married? . Who didn’t watch TV last night? Who watched TV last night? . Who will be in class tomorrow? Who won’t be in class tomorrow? ‘Who has a car? Who doesn’t have a car? . Who studied last night? Who didn’t study last night? . Who can play (a musical instrument)? Who can’t play (that musical instrument)? ‘Who is hungry right now? Who isn’t hungry right now? ‘Who lives in an apartment? Who lives in a house or in a dorm? ‘Who doesn’t drink coffee? Who drinks coffee? ‘Who won't be at home tonight? Who will be at home tonight? . Who was in class yesterday? Who wasn’t in class yesterday? . Who can’t speak (a language)? Who can speak (a language)? . Who didn’t stay home last night? Who stayed home last night? i, Who has (a mustache)? Who doesn’t have (a mustache)? airwork. Directions: Work with a partner. Picture A and Picture B are not the same. There are many differences between them. Can you find all of the differences? Take turns pointing out the differences. Example: SPEAKER A: The woman is sitting in Picture A, but she’s lying down in Picture B. Your turn now. SPEAKER B: There’s a small fish in Picture A, but a large fish in Picture B. Your turn now. Etc. 478 CHAPTER 16Picture A Picture B Tales of the old Cl EXERCISE 35. Writing practice. Directions: Write a paragraph about one or more of the given topics. The list is a reminder of comparison words you may want to use in your paragraph. WORDS USED IN COMPARISONS alike different (from) like the same (as) but -erlmore similar (to) Topics: 1, Write about this city. Compare it to your hometown. 2. Write about your present residence. Compare it to a past residence. 3. Write about two members of your family, Compare them. 4, Write about two animals, Compare them. 5. Write about two countries. Compare them. Making Comparisons 479‘SUPERLATIVE (f) Kim writes the best of all. (a) Kim speaks more fluently more fluently | the most fluently | Use more and than Ali (does). more slowly | the most slowly | most with adverbs (b) Anna speaks the most fluently | more quickly | the most quickly | that end in -ly.* of all. (© Mike worked harder harder the hardest Use -er and -est than Sam (did). faster the fastest with irregular (d) Sue worked the hardest of all, | earlier the earliest adverbs: hard, later the latest fast, early, late. (©) Rosa writes better than Ido. | better the best Better and best are forms of the adverb well, “Exception: early-earlir-the earliest. (J EXERCISE 36. Sentence practice. Directions: Complete the sentences with the correct form (comparative or superlative) of the adverbs in italics. 1. late Karen got home ___/ater than === slice (did). 2. quickly ‘finished my work 3. beautifully Gina sings 4. beautifully Ann sings 5. hard ‘My sister works I do). 6. hard ‘My brother works of all. 7. carefully My husband drives 8. early We arrived at the party 9. early ‘The Wilsons arrived at the party 10. well You can write I (can). 11. well Ken can write of all. 12. clearly Anita pronounces her words 480 CHAPTER 16 ‘Tom (did). Susan (does). of all. I (do). the Smiths (did). of all. Tina (does).13. fluently 14. fluenily Sue speaks Spanish I do). ‘Ted speaks Spanish of all. CO EXERCISE 37. Sentence practice. Directions: Use the correct form (adjective or adverb, comparative or superlative) of the words in italics. i 2. 10. ll. 12. 13. 14, 15. 16. careful beautiful neat neat |. neat neat . dear . good good good long late clear sharp artistic slow Karen drives jore carefully th her brother does. A tiger is a goat. Paul’s apartment is __ mine. Peter’s apartment is_______ ofall You write Ido. Aan ea This author explains her ideas that author. like rock music ____ classical music. ‘My husband can sing can. ‘My daughter can sing ___ ofall. Almost universally, wives work _________ hours than their husbands because women take primary responsibility for household chores and child-rearing. Robert usually goes to bed his roommate. Anna pronounces her words of all the students in the class. A razor is usually ________ a kitchen knife. My corig oo daugeer Teat my husband does. Making Comparisons 4810 EXERCISE 38. Listening: review. Gq Directions: Listen to each sentence. Write the words you hear. 1. I work Jim does. 2. Toshi finished his work ____ ofall. 3, Sue coudien ee ee Pred. ia Team ehudics ee otal, 5. A motorcycle is a bicycle 6. Ali speaks Yoko does. 7. A snail moves a crab does. 8. This suitcase is that one. 9. My glasses are my contact lenses. 10. Ican see with my glasses. CO EXERCISE 39. Review. Directions: Choose the correct completions. 1. A lion is ____a tiger. A. similar B. similar with C. similar from ©) similar to 2. Lions and tigers are A. thesame ——_B. similar C. similar to D. the same as 3. Good health is one of in a person’s life. A. best thing C. the best things B. the best thing D. best things 4. There were many chairs in the room. I sat in chair. A. the comfortablest C. most comfortable B. the most comfortable D. more comfortable 5. Jane’s story was Jack's story. A. funnier than C. more funnier than B. funny than D. more funny 6. My last name is my cousin’s. A. same B. same from —C. same as D. the same as 7. Live away from school than you do. A. far B. farther C. more far D. farthest 482 CHAPTER 168. Ali speaks than Hamid. A. more clearly C. more clear B. clearlier D. more clearer 9. Robert works hard every day, but his brother ___. A. is B. isn’t C. does D. doesn’t C EXERCISE 40. Chapter review: error analysis. Directions: Correct the errors. 1. Your pen is alike mine. 2. Kim’s coat is similar with mine. 3. Jack’s coat is same mine, 4, Soccer balls are different with basketballs. 5. Soccer is one of most popular sports in the world. 6. Green sea turtles live long more than elephants. 7. My grade on the test was worst from yours. You got a more better grade. 8. A monkey is intelligenter than a turtle. 9. Pedro speaks English more fluent than Ernesto, 10. Professor Brown teaches full-time, but her husband isn’t. 11, Robert and Maria aren’t same age. Robert is more young than Maria. 12, A blue whale is more large from an elephant. 13. The exploding human population is the most great threat to all forms of life on earth, 14, The Mongol Empire was the bigger land empire in the entire history of the world. Making Comparisons 483CO EXERCISE 41. Review. Directions: Work with a partner. Partner A: Ask Partner B questions. Your book is open. Partner B: Answer in complete sentences. Your book is closed. eI KVeenE 9%. 10. ‘What's the longest river in the world?* What's the biggest continent? What’s the second biggest continent? What country has the largest population? Is a square the same as a rectangle? Name a country that is farther south than Mexico. Name an animal that is similar to a horse Name a place that is noisier than a library. . Is a dormitory like an apartment building? How are they different? How are they similar? Is (...)’s grammar book different from yours? ‘What is one of the most famous landmarks in the world? Switch roles. Partner A: Close your book. Partner B: Open your book. Your turn now. 1. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. Is the population of Seoul, Korea, larger or smaller than the population of Sao Paulo, Brazil?* . Is the Atlantic Ocean deeper than the Indian Ocean? . What's the smallest continent in the world? . Name owo students in this class who speak the same native language. Do they come from the same country? . Look at (...) and (...). How are they different? . Is a lake like a river? How are they different? How are they similar? . Name an insect that is smaller than a bee. Name a city that is farther north than Rome, Italy. . What is the most popular sport in your country? ‘What is one of the most important inventions in the modern world? Why is it more important than (name of another invention). (EXERCISE 42. Let's write or talk. Directions: Write or talk about things and people in this room, Look at this thing and that thing, and then compare them. Look at this person and that person, and then compare them. “IF you need to, look at the Table of Statistics on p. 474, 484 CHAPTER 16Ci EXERCISE 43. Writing practice. Directions: Write a paragraph on one or more of the given topics. Topies: 1, Write about your family. Compare the members of your family. Include yourself in the comparisons. (Who is younger than you? Who is the youngest of all? Etc.) 2. Write about your childhood friends when you were ten years old. Compare them. Include yourself in the comparisons. (Who could run faster than you? Who could run the fastest of all? Etc.) 3, What are your three favorite places in the world? Why? Compare them. 4. What are the roles of health, money, and love in your life? Compare them. Making Comparisons 485SIMPLE. FORM be become begin ‘bend bite blow break build buy catch cost hang hear hide hit hold APPENDIX Irregular Verbs held SIMPLE. FORM know leave lend lose meet pay put ride see sell send shut sing sit sleep speak spend steal SIMPLE PAST kept knew left lent lost made met paid put read rode said saw sold sent shook shut sang sat slept spoke spent stood stole swam. took taught tore told thought threw understood woke up wore wrote 487Listening Script Chapter 1: USING BE EXERCISE 2, p. 2. Paulo is @ student from Brazil. Marie is a student from France. They're in the classroom. Today is an exciting day. It's the first day of school, but they aren't nervous. They're happy to be here. Mrs. Brown is the teacher. She isn’t in the classroom right now. She's late today. EXERCISE 8, p. 6. - Butterflies are insects. English is a country. Spring is a season. Canada is a city. Japan is @ language. Roses are flowers. Rabbits are machines, Russian and Arabic are languages. ‘Cows are animals. EXERCISE 13, p.9. 1, [like my teachers. They're very nice. 2. Lam at school. I'm in the lassroom. 3. Yuri is not here. He's late. 4. know you. You're a teacher. 5. [know Susan. I’m her friend. 6. Aliand Tare friends. We're in the same clas. 7. My sister has two children. They're young. 8. Los Angeles is a city. It’s very big. 9. Anna is from Russia. She’s very friendly. 10. Tike soccer. Te’ fan. EXERCISE 14, p. 9. SPEAKER A: Hello, My name is Mrs. Brown, I'm the new teacher. Hi, My name is Paulo, and this is Marie. ‘We're in your class Ir’s nice to meet you. ‘We're happy to meet you too. :: It’s time for class. Please take a se SPEAKER B: | EXERCISE 29, p. 22 1. Grammar’s easy. 2. ‘My name's John. 3. My books're on the table. 4, My brother's 21 years old. 5, The weather’s cold today. 6. The windows're open. 7. My money's in my wallet 8, Mr, Smith’s a teacher. 9. Mrs. Lee’s at home now. 10. The sun’s bright today. 11. Tom’s at home right now. 12. My roommates'te from Chicago. 13. My sister’s a student in high school. EXERCISE 30, p. 22. 1. The test’s easy. 2. My notebook is on the table. 3. My notebooks are on the table. 4, Sue’s a student. 5. ‘The weather is warm today. 6. The windows’re open. 7. My parents're from Cuba. 8, My cousins are from Cuba too. 9, My book’s on my desk. 10. ‘The teachers're in class. Chapter 2: USING BE AND HAVE EXERCISE 1, p. 24. 1, Are England and Canada cities? Is winter a season? Are bananas blue? Is the weather very cold today? ‘Are airplanes slow? Is a carrot a mact ‘Are diamonds free? Is the earth round? Are big cities quiet? 2EXERCISE 12, p. 32. » The boots have zippers. Anna has a raincoat. . Her raincoat has buttons, . Heer sweater has long sleeves. She has earrings on her ears. ‘The earrings have diamonds. - You have long pants. ‘We have warm coats. EXERCISE 22, p. 39. This is my grammar book That is your grammar book. ‘That's your wallet. ‘This’s her purse. . Is that your umbrella? . This’s not my umbrella Is this your ring? . Yes, that’s my ring. ‘This isn’t my homework. . That's their car Chapter 3: USING THE SIMPLE PRESEN’ EXERCISE 2, p. 55. Iwake up early every day. ‘My brother wakes up late, He gets up at 11:00. Igo to school at 8:00. ‘My mother does exercises every morning, ‘My litle sister watches TV in the morning. Take the bus to school. ‘My brother takes the bus to school. ‘My friends take the bus too. We talk about our day. * wake EXERCISE 8, p. 59. 1. Igo to work every morning. -> morning 2. Icelebrate my birthday every year. 3. Our son is two years old. 4. Tuse my computer every day. 5. Bob uses his computer five days a week. 6. Teat three times a day. 7. Anna listens to the radio every night. 8. Ivisit my uncle every month. EXERCISE 13, p. 62. |. Mrs. Miller teaches English on Saturdays. -> teaches ‘Mr. and Mrs. Smith teach English in the evenings. . Doug fixes cars. Hiis son fixes cars too. . Carlos and Chris watch DVDs on weekends. ‘Their daughter watches videos. [brush my hair every morning. - Jimmy seldom brushes his hair. ereoyeepe 490 USTENING scRIPT 9. The Johnsons wash their car every weekend, 10, Susan rarely washes her car. EXERCISE 18, p. 65. ‘Marco is a student. He has an unusual schedule, Alll of his classes are at night. His first class is at 6:00 P.M. ‘every day. He has a break from 7:30 to 8:00. Then he has classes from 8:00 to 10:00. He leaves school and goes home at 10:00. After he hhas dinner, he watches TV. Then he does his homework from midnight to 3:00 or 4:00 in the morning. ‘Marco has his own computer at home, When he finishes his homework, he usually goes on the Internet. He usually stays at his computer until the sun comes up. ‘Then he does a few exercises, has breakfast, and goes (0 bed. He sleeps all day. Marco thinks his schedule is, ‘great, but his friends think itis strange. Chapter 4: USING THE PRESENT PROGRESSIVE, EXERCISE 7, p. 96. ‘Tony is sitting in the cafeteria He is sitting alone, He is wearing a hat. He is eating lunch, He is reading his grammar book, He is looking at his computer. He is studying hard. He is smiling. He is listening to the radio. He is waving to his friends, i EXERCISE 21, p. 107. Twrite in my grammar book Tam writing in my grammar book Itis raining outside . I doesn’t rain . ‘My cell phone rings ‘My cell phone isn’t ringing . ‘My friends and I listen to music in the car... We're not listening to music... . EXERCISE 25, p. 110. 1. A: Does Tom have a black hat? Yes. Does he wear it every day? No. Is he wearing it right now? 1 don't know. Why do you care about Tom’s hat? 1 found a hat in my apartment. Someone left it there. I think that it belongs toTom. Do animals dream? don’t know, I suppose so. Animals aren't very different from human beings in lots of ways. PURER EE BP‘A; Look at my dog. She is sleeping. Her eyes are closed. At the same time, she is barking and ‘moving her head and her front legs. Tam sure that she is dreaming right now. T'm sure that animals dream, EXERCISE 26, p. 111. SPEAKER A: What are you doing? Are you working on. your English paper? SPEAKER 8: No, 'm not, I'm writing an e-mail to my sister SPEAKER A: Do you write to her often? SPEAKER B: Yes, but I don’t write a lot of e-mails to anyone else, SPEAKER A: Does she write to you often? SPEAKER B: Yes. I get an e-mail from her several times a week. How about you? Do you get a lot of e-mails? SPEAKER A: Yes. I like to send e-mails to friends all over the world. Chapter 5: TALKING ABOUT THE PRESENT EXERCISE 1, p. 121. 1. What time is i? ‘What month is i? ‘What day is it today? What year is it? What's the date today? EXERCISE 4, p. 124. 1. My birthday is in June. Iwas born on June 24. I have class every day at 1:00. Who am I? 2. Thave class at 7:00. I go to class in the morning. T ‘was born in 1986, Who am I? 3. Thave class in the morning. I was born in July. Iwas born in 1990, Who am I? 4. Twas born in 1989. My birthday is July 7. I go to class at night, Who am 2? EXERCISE 12, p. 130. 1. There’re ten students in the classroom. ‘There’s a new teacher today. ‘There’re two teachers outside. ‘There's a book on the floor. ‘There’s some information on the blackboard, ‘There’re several papers in the wastepaper basket. ‘There’re two coffee cups on the teacher's desk. ‘There's a lot of homework for tomorrow. EXERCISE 23, p. 138. 1. There are trees behind the train, 2. A bird is under the picnic table. 3. There are butterflies in the air. 4. There is a fishing pole on top of the table, ‘There is a knife on top of the table. ‘A boat is in the water. ‘The bridge is below the water. ‘There are clouds above the hills. ‘There are flowers beside the river. 10. There are flowers next to the river. 11, The guitar is under the table. 12. One bike is under the tree. 13. The fish is on the grass 14. The table is between the tree and the river. 15. The flowers are near the water. EXERCISE 31, p. 145. 1. A: Where do you want to go for dinner tonight? B: Rossini’s Restaurant 2. A: What time do you want to go to the airport? B: Around five. My plane leaves at seven. 3. A: Jean doesn’t want to go to the baseball game. B: Why now? A: Because she needs to study for a test. 4. A: I'm getting tired. I want to take a break for a few minutes, B: Okay. Let's take a break. We can finish the work later. 5. A: We don’t need to come to class on Friday. B: Why not? A: Iv’ a holiday, 6. Az Peter wants to go back to his apartment. B: Why? ‘A: Because he wants to change his clothes before he goes to the party. 7. A: Where do you want to go for your vacation? B: I want to visit Niagara Falls, Quebec, and ‘Montreal, 8. A: May Isce your dictionary? I need to look up aword. B: Ofcourse. Here itis. A: Thanks. 9. A: Do you want to go with us to the park? B: Sure. Thanks. I need to get some exercise EXERCISE 32, p. 147. 1. Tony'd like a cup of coffee. He'd like some sugar in his coffee. ‘Ahmed and Ania‘ like some coffee 100. ‘They'd like some sugar in their coffee too. A: Would you like a cup of coffee? (“Would you” can’t be contracted in short answers or questions.) B: Yes, I would. Thank you. 6. Pa like to thank you for your kindness and hospitality My friends like ro thank you too. 8. A: Would Robert lke to ride with us? B: Yes, he would. USTENING SCRIPT 491eo EXERCISE 34, p. 148. 1. Td like a hamburger for dinner. 2. We like to eat in fast-food restaurants. 3. Bob'd like to go to the gym now. 4, He likes to exercise after work. 5. ‘The teacher'd like to speak with you. 6. I think the teacher likes you. 7. We like to ride our bikes on weekends. 8, Bill and Sue like classical music. 9. ‘They'd like to go to a concert next week. 10. I think I'd like to go with them, Chapter 6: NOUNS AND PRONOUNS EXERCISE 12, p. 166. 1, Sara knows Joe. She knows him (“knows ‘i very well 2. Where does Shelley live? Do you have her (Chave-er”) address? 3. There’s Sam. Let’s go talk to him (“im”). 4. There's Bill and Julie. Let’s go talk to them em”), 5. The teacher is speaking with Lisa because she doesn’t have her (“have-er”) homework. 6, Ineed to see our airline tickets. Do you have them (have-em”)? EXERCISE 13, p. 167. 1. A: Yoko and I are (“I-er”) going downtown this afternoon. Do you want to (“wanna”) come with us? B: I don’t think so, but thanks anyway. Chris and 1 are going to the library. We need to study for our test. : Hi, Ann, How do you like your new apartment? Tes very nice. Do you have a roommate? Yes, Maria Hall is my roommate. Do you know her (“know-er”)? She's from Miami. : No, I don’t know her (“know-er”). Do you get along with her? Bz Yes, we enjoy living together. You must visit us sometime, Maybe you can come over for dinner ‘A: Thanks, I'd like that. Do George and Mike come over to your house often? B: Yes, they do, I invite them to my house often. We like to play cards. A: Who usually wins your card games? B: Mike. He’s a really good card player. We can’t beat him, Pree > 492. USTENING SCRIPT EXERCISE 15, p. 170. Grour 4. Final -sis pronounced /z/ after voiced sounds. 1. taxicabs. 5, rooms 9. trees 2. beds 6. coins 10. cities 3. dogs 7. years 11. boys 4. balls 8. lives 12. days Group B. Final -s is pronounced /s/ after voiceless sounds. 13, books 16. groups 14, desks 17. cats 15. cups 18. students Group c. Final -es is pronounced /az/ ‘+ after “s” sounds: 19. classes 20. glasses 21. horses 22. places 23. sentences + after “2” sounds: 24. sizes 25. exercises 26. noises + after “sh” sounds: 27. dishes 28. bushes, + after “ch” sounds: 29. matches 30. sandwiches + after “geldge” sounds: 31. pages, 32. oranges 33. bridges EXERCISE 16, p. 171. 1. toys 6. boxes 2. table 7. package 3. face 8. chairs 4. hats 9. edge 5. offices 10. tops EXERCISE 17, p. 172. 1. The desks in the classroom are new. like to visit new places. Donna wants a sandwich for lunch. ‘The teacher is correcting sentences with a red pen. ‘This apple is delicious. ‘The students are finishing a writing exercise in class, Ineed two pieces of paper. Roses are beautiful flowers. Your rose bush is beautiful. ‘The college has many scholarships for students. » desks Chapter 7: COUNT AND NONCOUNT NOUNS EXERCISE 6, p. 184. 1, Ilive in an apartment. -+ an 2. It's a small apartment, 3. My English class lasts an hour.4. It's an interesting class. 5. We have a new teacher. 6. My mother has an office downtown, 7. It’san insurance of 8, 9 0. |. My father is a nurse. He works at a hospital, 10. He has a difficult job. EXERCISE 31, p. 204. Vegetables have vitamins. Cats make nice pets. ‘The teacher is absent. love bananas. New cars are expensive. [need the keys to the car. Are the computers in your office working? Let's feed the ducks at the park. » general EXERCISE 32, p. 205. 1, A: Do you have a pen? : There’s one on the counter in the kitchen, Where are the keys to the car? : I'm not sure, but I have a set. You can use mine, Shh. Thear a noise. Its just a bird outside, probably a woodpecker. Don’t worry, John Jones teaches at the university T know. He’s an English professor. He’s also the head of the department, : Hurry! We're late. No, we're not. It’s five o'clock, and we have an hour. No, it isn’t. It’s six! Look at the clock. : Oh, my. need a new battery in my watch. 2. 3. PRRP Re PReRe Pe Chapter 8: EXPRESSING PAST TIME, PART 1 EXERCISE 5, p. 215. 1. [wasn’t at home last night. Iwas at the library, Our teacher was sick yesterday. He wasn’t at school. ‘Many students were absent. ‘They weren’t at school for several days, ‘There was a substitute teacher. She was very patient and kind. ‘My friends and I weren’t nervous on the first day of school. 10. We were very relaxed. EXERCISE 14, p. 224, 1. Mary played the piano for the class. 2. She plays very well 3. ‘The students watched an interesting movie. > played ‘They enjoyed ita lot. ‘They often watch movies together. ‘The class asked the teacher many questions. ‘The teacher answered their questions clearly ‘The students listened very carefully. ‘They like their class. ‘The class works very hard. EXERCISE 18, p. 226. PART 1. 1. What day was it two days ago? What day was it five days ago? ‘What day was it yesterday? ‘What month was it last month? What year was it ten years ago? What year was it last year? ‘What year was it one year ago? PART Ht 8. What time was it one hour ago? 9. What time was it five minutes ago? 10. What time was it one minute ago? EXERCISE 22, p. 230. L. Tate... 4, She had 2. We sat 5. Hegot.... 3. They came 6. Tstood EXERCISE 30, p. 235. 1. Did we do well on the test? Did you finish the assignment? Did it make sense? Did I answer your question? Did they need more help? Did he understand the homework? Did I explain the project? Did they complete the project? Did you do well? Did she pass the class? EXERCISE 33, p. 237. pare 1. 1. Did you (“did-juh”) read the paper this morning? 2. A: Tom called, B: Did he (“dih-de”) leave a message? 3. A: Sara called B: Did she (“dih-she”) leave a message? 4. _Dicl it (*dih-dit”) rain yesterday? 5. A: The children are watching TV. B: Did they (“di-they”) finish their homework? 6. Tcan’t find my notebook. Did I (“dih- presentWe are leaving early in the morning. Hurry. The bus is leaving. Shh. Class is beginning. We're going to a movie this afternoon, ‘My parents are coming over tonight. EXERCISE 11, p. 301. It’s going to (“gonna”) rain tomorrow, Tam leaving soon. Our class starts at nine. Anita is coming to the meeting tomorrow. ‘The doctor is going to call you. ‘Are you going to (“gonna”) study tonight? ‘We are having dinner at a restaurant tomorrow. ‘We aren’ going to the concert tonight. Alex rides his bicycle to work. Who is going to help me? EXERCISE 15, p. 304. 1, Bob is going to finish his work -> in five minutes, Mary is going to school... ‘Tom left ‘The Johnsons got married The store is going to (“gonna”) open . ‘The movie started. Janet is going to graduate . . We took a vacation . T’m going to (“gonna”) buy a car .. ‘There was a meeting at school . . ones 20, p. 307. Jean is going to leave in a couple of days. Ze ‘going to leave in a few weeks. 3. The doctor is going to (“gonna”) call in a few minutes, ‘Tim graduated from high school a couple of years ago. ‘We sold our house a couple of years ago. ‘The mail came a couple of minutes ago. ‘The phone rang a few minutes ago. EXERCISE 25, p. 310. ‘The class is working on a project today. > present ‘We are going to finish this weekend. ‘We talked about the project this morning. Icis going to (“gonna”) rain this week. It rained a lot this month, 1 am going to graduate from college this year. 1 am studying psychology this year. ‘The professor spoke for two hours this morning. She's going to (“gonna”) give us a test this week. We had a lot of homework today. John is going to (“gonna”) be here in a few minutes. EXERCISE 27, p. 312. 1 2, 3. 4, 5. 6 7 8 9, 0, ‘The teacher'll help you. ‘The teacher will help you. ‘We'll have a test tomorrow. ‘We will have a test tomorrow, Tl be back in five minutes. ‘The students'l be late, John will be here soon. ‘The doctor’ll see you now. ‘The nurse will give you some medicine. You'll feel better soon. » teacher’ EXERCISE 28, p. 312. 1 ‘Where will you go? . When will you go there? ‘Why will you go there? ‘Who will go with you? ‘What will you do there? EXERCISE 31, p. 315. Will Jane study more? Yes, she will. Will Jane go to more parties on weekends? Will Jane begin smoking? Will Jane exercise with her grandmother? Will Jane graduate from a university next year? Will Jane go on a diet? Will Jane exercise only two times a week? Will Jane spend more time with her grandmother? EXERCISE 32, p. 316. 1 We want to see you soon, > want - Lwon’t be late for class again, You won't believe the news! |. Lwant a new car Anew car won't be cheap, . My car won't start. ‘Mr. and Mrs. Thomas want to retire ‘They want to travel more. EXERCISE 34, p. 318. 1 2. 3 Bill doesn’t like meat, eggs, or fish, He is a vegetarian. He doesn't eat meat from animals. He didn’t eat it as a child, either. His wife Beth doesn’t eat meat, but she isn’t a vegetarian, |. She doesn’t enjoy the taste of meat. They are going to (“gonna”) try @ new restaurant, tomorrow. John will probably have a dish with lots of vegetables. Beth won't have vegetables for a main dish. She'll probably ask for some type of fish. Are they going to (“gonna”) enjoy themselves? ‘Will they go back to this restaurant? USTENING SCRIPT 495EXERCISE 36, p. 319. 1. A: Will you be here tomorrow? B: Yes, I will, but I'll probably be late A: Where are your visitors from? B: Aliis from Kuwait, and Toshi and Hiro are from Japan. ‘Was everyone in class yesterday? All the students were there, but the teacher was absent. ‘Was he sick? No, he wasn’t, but his daughter was. Let’s hurry. We're going to be really late. : We're not going to be late. I think your watch is fast, ‘My watch isn’t fast. Maybe your watch is slow! Let's not argue. We won't be there any sooner if. we argue, 2. pe Pepe Be Chapter 11: EXPRESSING FUTURE TIME, PART 2 EXERCISE 6, p. 329. 1, You may be late for class tomorrow. 2. Our teacher may give a lot of homework this weekend. ‘Maybe you'll get a package in the mail tomorrow. I may go to bed early tonight. ‘Maybe I'll go shopping tomorrow. ‘Maybe you will get married next year. ‘The weather may be sunny tomorrow. ‘Maybe it will rain tomorrow. ereyee EXERCISE 11, p. 332. 1. might be absent tomorrow. -> a. Maybe I will be absent. 2. There may be a change in our plans. ‘The weather report says i'l rain tomorrow. ‘We might finish this grammar book soon. John may get good news tomorrow. 5. The class'll start on time. EXERCISE 19, p. 338. 1. What are you going to do if the weather is nice after class tomorrow? 2. What are you going to do if your teacher cancels class tomorrow? 3. What are you going to do if your teacher talks 100 fast? 4, What are you going to do if you're sick tomorrow? EXERCISE 24, p. 342. 1. Before I go to bed every night, 2. IfI go to bed early tonight, 3. Afier I get to school every day, 4. If class finishes early today, » I watch TV, 496 USTENING SCRIPT 5. Before I eat breakfast every day, 6. After I finish breakfast today, 7. IFT get all the answers in this exercise correct, 8. When I finish this grammar book, EXERCISE 28, p. 347. 1. A: Did you see thar? B: Wha? A: The man in the red shirt hit the man in the blue shirt. B: Are you sure? A: Yes, I watched the whole thing 2. A: Were you late for the movie? B: No. The movie began at 7:30, and we got to the theater at 7:26. 3. A: Do you hear that noise? B: What noise? A: Listen again. B: Now [hear it. Is someone coming? 4. Az Do you want to (“wanna”) go to the z00 this afternoon? : Ted like to go, but I can’t because I need to study. ‘That's too bad. : Are you going to (“gonna”) go to the z00? Yes. The weather is perfect, and I want to (*wanna”) get outside and enjoy it Pee Chapter 12: MODALS, PART 1: EXPRESSING ABILITY EXERCISE 5, p. 356. 1. The students can understand their teacher. ‘The students can’t understand their teacher. Lcan’t hear you, ‘You can help me. ‘Tom can’t work today. ‘The doctor can’t see you today. Professor Clark can meet with you, can’t find my glasses. ‘The children can’c wait. We can stop now. i EXERCISE 6, p. 357. In my last job, I was an office assistant. I have good ‘computer skills. I can do word-processing, and I can type quickly. [like talking to people and can answer the phones with a friendly voice. I also like languages. I can speak French and Chinese. I also studied English. I can read it, but I can’t speak it well. T hurt my back a few years ago. I can't help guests with their suiteases. I can ‘work both Saturdays and Sundays. EXERCISE 10, p. 360. 1. A: (phone rings) Hello? B: Can I speak to Mr. Jones, please?A: I'm sorry. He can’t come to the phone right now. Can I take a message? He can return your call in about a half-hour. Yes. Please tell him Bob Anderson called. Can you help me lift this box? It looks very heavy. I-can try to help you, but I think we need a third person, No, I'm very strong. I think we can do it together. Ican’t hear the TV. Can you turn it up? Tean’t turn it up. I'm doing my homework. If 1 turn it up, I can’t concentrate. A: Can you do your homework in another room? B: Oh, all right. Bee Pee EXERCISE 21, p. 367. L Were you able to tak to John last night? couldn't reach him. I can try again later today. : Do you know how to make bread? Yes, Lean make bread. What about you? No. Can you teach me? Sure, Tecan, Are you able to understand the teacher? 1 couldn’t understand her in the beginning, but now Ian understand most of her lectures. : I still can’t understand her very well. : Professor Jones, when will you be able to correct our tests? began last night, but I wasn't able to finish, TL try again tonight. I hope I will be able to hand them back to you tomorrow. (phone rings) Helio? Hi, This is Jan Smith. I'm wondering ifI can get in to see Dr. Brown today or tomorrow. :- Well, she can see you tomorrow morning at 11:00. Can you come in then? Yes, can. Please tell me where you are. I don’t know the way to your office. BP EP eR ED PR o& bP PP Chapter 13: MODALS, PART 2: ADVICE, NECESSITY, REQUESTS, SUGGESTIONS EXERCISE 5, p. 383. 1 People should exercise to stay healthy. People should eat a lot of candy. People shouldn't steal money. People should keep some money in a bank. Students should study every day. Students shouldn’t study on weekends. English students should speak English in class English teachers shouldn't translate for their students EXERCISE 10, p. 386. 1. Thave to (“hafta”) leave early today. 2. > have to, ‘You have to (“hafta”) come with us, oyee ‘Where does your friend have to (“hafta”) go? She has to (“hasta”) go to the dentist again. ‘Why does she have to (“hafta”) go there so often? My teachers have to (“hafta”) correct alot of homework. Do they have to (“hafta”) give so much work? ‘My dog has to (“hasta”) go to the animal hospital. He has to (“hasta”) have surgery. ‘We have to (“hafta”) take good care of our pets. nes 15, p. 390. People must eat healthy foods. People should eat healthy foods. People must wear clothes outdoors. People should wear clothes outdoors. People should stop their cars for a police siren. People must stop their cars for a police siren. People must wear coats in coo! weather People should wear coats in cool weather. People should pay taxes to their government. People must pay taxes to their government. People must learn how ro use computers. People should learn how to use computers. People should wear seatbelts when they’re in acar. People must wear seatbelts when they're in a cat. People must be polite to one another. People should be polite to one another. People should keep their homes clean. People must keep their homes clean. were s EXERCISE 27, p. 401. It might snow tomorrow. ‘Tom has to work. Becky knows how to swim. ‘The teacher needed to correct papers. 1's a good idea to study for the test tomorrow. ‘We may go to a movie tonight. ‘We didn’t have to help. Tcouldn’t go to school yesterday. » b, Itmay snow. Chapter 14: NOUNS AND MODIFIERS EXERCISE 4, p. 406. ‘The phone is on the kitchen counter. ‘The phone is in the kitchen. I'm moving to a new apartment next month. ‘The apartment building has a swimming pool. How do you like your music class? ‘Where are the keys to the car? 'm always losing my car keys. Let’s have some chicken soup. ‘The soup is good, but where’s the chicken? This grammar book has a lot of information. USTENING SCRIPT 497i) EXERCISE 13, p. 415. ‘That was delicious birthday Here are the car. Ineed to buy some comfortable . ‘The teacher gave the class an easy. . ‘The lite boy is playing computer . . Td like to read the newspaper . EXERCISE 16, p. 418. 1, All of the coffee is gone. 2. Some of the coffee is gone. 3, Half of the coffee is gone. 4. Almost all of the coffee is gone, 5. Alot of the coffee is gone. 6. Most of the coffee is gone. EXERCISE 21, p. 422. ‘Some of the homework is hard. One of the books is missing. None of the children are here yet. All of the students were late, Half of the class is absent. A lot of the exercises were helpful. ‘Most of the movie was scary. 22 aVeeNe EXERCISE 22, p. 422. 1. Most of the people are happy. All of them are smiling. (One of them is mad. None of them are sleeping. ‘Only half of them have hats. ‘Some of them aren’t wearing hats. ‘Only one of them has sunglasses. Almost all of them look happy. Chapter 15: POSSESSIVES EXERCISE 4, p. 438. 1. Bob's parents live in Tokyo Bob has two brothers and one sister. ‘My teacher's apartment is near mine. My teacher is very funny. What is your friend saying? My ftiend’s dog ran away. “The store manager's name is Dan. My cousin studies engineering. EXERCISE 16, p. 447. 1. Who's that? Whose glasses are on the floor? Who's coming? Who's next? ‘Whose homework is this? 498 LISTENING SCRIPT Almost all of the food was vegetarian. Whose car is outside? Who's ready to begin? Whose turn is i? Whose work is ready? Who's going to help me? Chapter 16: MAKING COMPARISONS EXERCISE 3, p. 450. 1. Band D are the same, Ais similar to G. Cand G are different. 3, 4. 5. Fis the same as A, 6. 7. Aand C are similar. EXERCISE 13, p. 457. It’s getting cold outside. ‘The weather today is colder than yesterday. ‘The weather is getting colder outside, (Our teacher is happier this week than last week. Professor Jones is happy every day. ‘Are you happy today? Is a big car safer than a small car? I want to drive a safe car. Ineed to get a safer car. ‘The coffee is fresh and tastes delicious. 11. Maria told a very funny story in class yesterday. 12. Maria and Sami both told stories. Sami’s story was funnier than Maria’s story. Beenovpesr EXERCISE 21, p. 464. Tim is older than Bob. Pam looks happier than Tim. Bob is the tallest of all. Pam is younger than Bob. ‘Tim looks the most serious. Bob is shorter than Tim, Bob looks happier than Tim. ‘Tim is the youngest. Pam is shorter than Bob. Bob looks more serious than Pam. EXERCISE 24, p. 468. 1, The blue dress is more expensive than the red one, 2. Well, I think the red one is prettier. 3. Is it too short, or does it look OK? 4. It's the nicest of all the ones you tried on. 5, I'm not going to buy the brown shoes. They're too small, 6. How do you like this hat? It’s the biggest size they have 7, No, this hat is bigger than that one. 8. Ineed a belt, but one that is longer than my old one.9. 10. Is this belt long enough? It’s perfect. And it’s the cheapest of all of them, EXERCISE 30, p. 476. 1 2, Linda is tall, but her sister is... ‘My old apartment was small, but my new apartment First Street is noisy, but Second Street is ‘This picture is ugly, but that picture is Acar is fast, but a bike is 3. A kitten is weak, but a horse is... ‘This watch is expensive, but that watch is... . ‘Tom is hard-working, but his brother is... EXERCISE 32, p. 477. a 3. like strong coffee, but my friend . . . Ellen can speak Spanish, but her husband . ... ‘The children didn’t want to go to bed early, but their parents 10. ‘The children weren’t tired, but their parents Jack doesn’t want to go out to eat, but his friends . . ‘The doctor isn’t friendly, but the nurse... . Lwas at home yesterday, but my roommate . Pablo went to the party, but Steve ‘The grocery store will be open tomorrow, but the bank Twon’t be home tonight, but my husband EXERCISE 38, p. 482. 2. 3 4. 5. 6. 7. 8 9, 0. work faster than Jim does. . Toshi finished his work the fastest of all Sue studies harder than Fred, Jean studies the hardest ofall. A motorcycle is more dangerous than a bicycle Ali speaks more loudly than Yoko does. A snail moves more slowly than a crab does. This suitcase is heavier than that one, My glasses are clearer than my contact lenses. I can see more clearly with my glasses. USTENING SCRIPT 499